ML20092P239
| ML20092P239 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Site: | Davis Besse  |
| Issue date: | 06/29/1984 |
| From: | TOLEDO EDISON CO. |
| To: | |
| Shared Package | |
| ML20092P235 | List: |
| References | |
| RTR-NUREG-0737, RTR-NUREG-737, TASK-1.D.1, TASK-TM 415-1, 415-1-0, TAC-51154, NUDOCS 8407060088 | |
| Download: ML20092P239 (375) | |
Text
{{#Wiki_filter:d Summary Report DETAILED CONTROL ROOM DESIGN REVIEW FOR TFE DAVIS-BESSE NUCLEAR POWER PLANT Prepared For: Nuclear Regulatory Commission Prepared By: Toledo Edison Company
?
i l l 84070g8 PDR A 000 6 PDR s F
\
\
r 415-1/0 l TABLE OF CONTENTS Page l.0 INTRODUCTION 1-1 2.0 OVERVIEW 2-1 2.1 Background 2-1 2.2 Phase 1 - Program Planning 2-3 2.3 Review Procedures 2-3 2.4 Documentation and Document Control 2-7 2.5 Assessment and Disposit8cn of Human Engineering Discrepancies (HEDs) 2-9 3.0 OPERATING EXPERIENCE REVIEW 3-1 3.1 Operator Interviews 3-1 3.2 Documentation Review 3-7 4.0 CONTROL ROOM SURVEY 4-1 4.1 Workspace Survey 4-3 4.2 Anthropometric Survey 4-15 4.3 Illumination Survey 4-26 4.4 Ambient Noise Survey , 4-30 4.5 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Survey 4-37 4.6 Emergency Equipment Survey 4-40 4.7 Maintainability Survey 4-45 4.8 Communications Survey 4-50 4.9 Annunciatcr Survey 4-64 4.10 Controls Survey 4-80 4.11 Displays Survey 4-102 4.12 Labels and Location Aids Survey 4-120 4.13 Conventions Survey 4-136 4.14 Computer System Survey 4-141 11 j
415-1/0 . TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page 5.0 SYSTEM FUNCTION REVIEW, TASK ANALYSIS AND 5-1 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION 5.1 System Functions Review 5-1 5.2 Task Analysis and Task Verification and Validation 5-7 6.0 ASSESSMENT AND DISPOSITION OF HEDs 6-1 6.1 Assessment 6-1 6.2 HED Disposition 6-4 7.0 IMPLEMENTATION AND SCHEDULE OF CORRECTIVE ACTIONS 7-1 7.1 Short Term Corrective Actions 7-1 7.2 Special Studies 7-1 1 APPENDIX A - OPERATOR QUESTIONNAIRES A-1 APPENDIX B - VERFICATION AND VALIDATION
SUMMARY
TABLES B-1 APPENDIX C - HED
SUMMARY
TABLES C-1 ) i f i 9 111
415-1/0 LIST OF TABLES Table Page 3-1 OPERATOR AND SUPERVISOR BACKGROUND DATA 3-3 3-2
SUMMARY
OF DOCUMENTATION REVIEW 3-9 4-1 WORKSPACE SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs GENERATED 4-5 4-2 ANTHROPOMETRY SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs TNERATED 4-17 4-3 ILLUMINATION SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs TNERATED 4-28 4-4A SOUND SURVEY RECORD (dB (A)) 4-33 4-4B AMBIENT NOISE SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs GENERATED 4-35 4-5 HVAC NOISE SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs TNERATED 4-39 4-6 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs TNERATED 4-42 4-7 MAINTAINABILITY EQUIPMENT SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs 4-47 GENERATED 4-8 COMMUNICATIONS SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs TNERATED 4-52 4-9 ANNUNCIATOR SUR.VEY FINDINGS & HEDs GENERATED 4-66 4-10 CONTROLS SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs GENERATED 4-83 4-11 DISPLAYS SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs GENERATED 4-105 4-12 LABELS SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs GENERATED 4-123 4-13 CONVENTIONS SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs GENERATED 4-138 4-14 COMPUTER SURVEY FINDINGS & HEDs GENERATED 4-144 5-1 SYSTEMS FUNCTIONS REVIEW TABLE EVENT: SYMPTOMS 5-4 S-2 SYSTEMS REVIEW BASED ON SAFETY SEGUENCE DIAGRAMS 5-6 5-3 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION TASK LIST 5-17 l 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & 5-19 HEDs GENERATED i 7-1 LIST OF HEDs FOR WHICH SHORT TERM CORRECTIVE ACTIONS 7-3 HAVE BEEN IDENTIFIED l 7-2 SPECIAL STUDIES VERSUS HUMAN ENGINEERING DISCREPANCY 7-4 REPORT NUMBERS l l Iv
a 415-1/0 LIST GF FIGURES Page Figure 2-1 THE FOUR PHASES AND THE TASK FLOW RELATIONSHIP OF THE 2-2 CR REVIEW 2-2 INFORMATION MANAGEMENT PROCESS 2-8 2-3 HED PRIORITY 2-10 CONTROL ROOM NOISE SURVEY MICROPHONE LOCATIONS 4-32 4-1 5-1 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS LEADING TO THE SYSTEMS FUNCTION 5-2 REVIEW TABLES 5-2 TOLEDO EDISON COMPANY DAVIS-BESSE UNIT NO.1 TASK DATA 5-10 FORM 5-3 EXAMPLE SPATIAL OSD 5-12 5-4 TOLEDO EDISON COMPANY DAVIS-BESSE UNIT 11.0 SYMPTOMS - 5-14 TRAFFIC PATTERN d V
=
L
415-1/0
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This report has been prepared in response to NUREG-0737 item 1.D.1 and details
. the means by which a Detailed Control Room Design Review was conducted for the Davis-Besse Nuclear Power Station owned and operated by the Toledo Edison Company. The review was conducted using NUREGs-0700, -0737, Supplement 1, and -0801. The review was conducted during the period from May 1983 through June 1984.
4 4 1-1
v
/
415-1/0
.b 2.0 OVERVIEW
2.1 Background
The review was conducted in four phases, as follows: , Phase 1 - Project Plannina. o Preparation of a review planning document (Program Plan) which addressed ,
- Review methodologies Review documentation i
- Staffing, personnel qualifications, and project organization
- Assessment and prioritization of discrepancies
- Reporting (findings, assessment, and schedules).
4 Phase 2 - Contrni Room Review. This represents the period in which data collection, reduction, and analysis was conducted, resulting in Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports and draft reports. i Phase 3 - Asse'ssment and Disposition of HEDs. HEDs were assessed with regard to their potential for inducing operator error and the effects of such
- errors on plant safety. HEDs were dispositioned accordingly. Disposi-t- tions included enhancements, design changes, and more detailed studies-tu determine specific design solutions required.
I Phase 4 - Reportina. L Detailed Control Room Design Review results were !
- provided to the Nuclear Regulatory Commission.-
Figure 2-1 shows, in general, the phases and task flow for the Detailed Control I
. Room Design Review. A brief discussion of the activities conducted in~ phases 1-3 of the
- review follows this figure. The Detailed Control Room Design Review was conducted !
- using the NUREG-0700 guidelines. Planning, staffing, technical approach, and prioritiza- ,
[ tion were conducted in accordance with the guide!Ines as stated in NUREG-0700. l The present Detailed Control Room Design Review report closely follows the outline l recommended in Section 5.2 of NUREG-0700. Specifically, this final report discusses: i . E
~ o The Detailed Control Room Design Review phases o The technical activities
- review of operating experience
-- assembly of control room documentation 3
- conduct of control room surveys
- system / function / task analysis
-' verification of task performance capability ,
validation of control room functions '
' o . Method of assessment of discrepancies l
l 2-1
- ~ - . - . - . _ . - . - - _ , - - _ . - - _ . _ _ _ _ . , . _ _ _ . _ . . _ . - _ _
PHASEI PHASE Ill
< > < "$ y 4 PROJECT CR REVI 4 ASSESSMENT AND REP Tl G U PLANNING DESIGN SOLUTIONS 9f VERIFY FUN I NS ^K CIA
->- . OPE G EXPERIENCE
+ PERFOR-MANCE ANRYSIS DEVELOP CAPABILITY e ->- FINAL -
REPORT g V N > ANALYZE k DEVELOP ASSESS AND
+ PROGRAM A > DISCR E.
PANCIES
-->- SELECT ->. 4 PLAN CORRECTIVE D AGON Jk DEVELOP ASSEMBLE CONDUCT VALIDATE PRbGRAM CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL SCHEDULE
-), ROOM DOC JMEN.
_.p. ROOM -->- ROOM FUNCTIONS SURVEYS JL Y' FIGURE 2-1 t THE FOUR PHASES AND THE TASK FLOW RELATIONSHIP OF THE CR REVIEW
l L 415-1/0 l l o Method of identification and selection of enhancement and design solutions o Review results of Human Engineering Discrepancies, Human Engi-neering Discrepancy Assessment, and the selected enhancement and l design solutions will be organized into the following groups:
- ' survey findings (annunciator, communications, etc.)
- task analysis findings (panel /workspace) and verification of human factors engineering suitability and validation of functions findings (control room traffic, workload distribution, and man / machine functional allocations)
- o Improvements to be made
- enhancements / justification / extent of correction
- design alternative / justification / extent of correction o Scope and scheduling of additional human. engineering activities.
2.2 Phase 1 - Program Planning The initial phase in this review involved preparation of a Detailed Control Room
- Design Review (DCRDR) Program Plan.- The Program Plan was based on guidance contained in NUREGs-0700, -0801, and -0737 Supplement 1 (paragraph 5.2.a). The Program Plan addressed the following topics
, 1. Review plan Management and staffing 2.
- 3. Documentation and document control
- 4. Review procedures
- 5. Assessment and implementation
- 6. Reporting.
The organization and scheduling reflected.in the Program Plan were selected to coincide with other Toledo Edison ERC initiatives (e.g., RG1.97, EOP upgrade, SPDS implemen-tation, etc.). .Overall-integration and coordination of review activities was~ directed by Mr. Jacque Lingenfelter, Project Administrator. ~ The DCRDR Program Plan. was sub-mitted to the NRC for review and comment on 15 June 1983. Unless otherwise indicated, the review process as described in this summary report follows the approach presented in the Program Plan. 2.3 Review Procedures This section presents, in general terms,.the review procedures employed. Detailed.
~ ' descriptions of the procedures employed and results of each activity'are presented-in sections J.0 - 5.0.
2-3
415-1/0 2.3.1 Phase 2 - Control Room Review
.The Control Room Review phase was cubdivided into five subtasks as follows:
o Review of Operating Experience o Assemble Control Room Documentation , o Control Room Surveys o Review of System Functions and Tack Analysis o Verify Task Performance Capability and Validation of Control Room Functions. 2.3.1.1 Review' of Operating Experience - This task was composed of two subtasks:
- 1) conduct of operator interviews, and 2) review of plant operational experience through Licensee Event Reports, technical specification modifications, etc. This review task was conducted in accordance with the guidelines of NUREG-0700.
2.3.1.2 Assemble Control Room Documentation - In this task, a control room data base was established to support subsequent evaluation. A library was established with control room related documentation (technical specifications, drawings, etc.), control room components were photo-documented, and a full-scale three-dimensional mockup was constructed. The library and photo-documentation were centrally located to support the effort. In addition to the library and photographic documentation; a control room inventory of components was developed, identifying for each component, its location, system relationships, functions, and characteristics. 2.3.1.3 Conduct Control Room Surveys - Much of the detailed assessment of the I control room was conducted through checklist surveys. Surveys required the collection of data using preconstructed checklists and interview forms, and the taking of direct measurements of control room parameters such as noise levels, light levels, etc. The ! survey criteria are presented in the appropriate survey sections (4.1 - 4.14). For each survey, a draft report (summarizing Human Engineering Discrepancies) was prepared for subnquent inclusion into the present final report. The surveys conducted were: j o Workspace - checklist evaluation of various control room character-istics, such as layout and arrangement of CR furnishings, . CR accessibility, etc. o Anthropometrics - analysis of reach and visual access to control room components given physical configuration of boards, panels, layout, etc. The data were subsequently compared to checklist item requirements. o Illumination - measurements were taken under various conditions (e.g., normal and emergency lighting) and compared to individual NUREG-0700 items. 2-4
/
r 415-1/0 o Noise - direct measurements of noise levels were taken and com-pared to individual checklists items. o Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) - evaluation by direct measurement of HVAC parameters and comparison to NUREG-0700 criteria. o Emergency Equipment - data were collected by walk-throughs, use of emergency garments, and checklist application. o Maintainability - checklist and questionnaire data concerning operator-maintained components (trend recorders, bulbs, etc.). o Communications - checklist evaluation of communications systems; speech intelligibility analysis of communications modes. o Annunciators - checklist evaluation of annunciator systems; direct measurement of annunciator fonts, signal intensities, etc. o Controls - checklist evaluation of controls, o Displays - checklist evaluation of displays. o Labels and location aids - checklist evaluation of labels and location aids. o Design Conventions - evaluations by survey for the conventions listed below. The data were subsequently compared to NUREG-0700 guidelines.
- coding methods (color, shape, pattern, etc.)
- standardization of abbreviations and acronyms
- consistency of control use
- consistency of display movement or indication
-o Computers - checklist evaluation of computer systems.
2.3.1.4 Review of System Functions and Task Analysis (SFTA) - System functions and tasks were identified and evaluated in this task. A 4-step procedure was employed: o identification of systems and subsystems by review of plant documen-tation and NSSS operating guidelines, and discussions with plant operations staff o Identification of event sequences to undergo Task Analysis. These were identified using:
- NUREGs-0737, -0660, and -0700
- results of Operating Experience Review
- B&W Abnormal Transient Operating Guidelines (ATOGs) o Identification of system / subsystem functions through document review and operator interviews o Identification and analysis"of control room operational tasks.
l l 2-5
415-1/0 Task Analysis data served as an input to the verification of task performance capability and validation of control room functions (see paragraph 2.3.1.5). The results/ products of this task were: o Response Selection Diagrams o Task analysis of operating sequences o Task analysis of event sequences o Spatial-Operational Sequence Diagrams of task sequences o Traffic Pattern Diagrams, 2.3.1.5 Verification of Task Performance Capability and Validation of CR Functions (V&V)- This evaluation task involved three subtasks: 1) verification of instrument / control availability, 2) verification of human engineering suitability, and 3) validation of CR functions. The first, verification of availability, was conducted using the Task Analysis and Control Room Inventory. In general, tasks associated with control room functions were examined in terms of appropriate instrumentation in the control room (i.e., task equipment demands vs. actual equipment present in the control room). When specified information or control requirements were not met, HED reports were prepared, including a description of the problem and an estimate of the potential effect on operator performance. Estimations of nonprocedurally-bound operations (e.g., boration, etc.) were gene-rated via operator interviews conducted during the V&V process. Also task sequences required i i selected event sequences were estimated as to frequency of occurrence in the event seg tences. Comparing both frequency and requirements data to the inventory, identifieraion was made of: 1) the absence (in the control room) of task-required information or control,2) the estimated frequency with which the information or control is required, and 3) the conditions (events, procedures, etc.) under which the information or control is required. The second subtask, verification of human engineering suitability, involved using l Spatial-Operational Sequence Diagrams, Traffic Pattern Diagrams, identified functional j groups, and checklists to evaluate human engineering suitability in terms of sequence of component use, control / display proximity, and so forth. NUREG-0700 guidelines served as the principal source document for evaluation criteria. The final s'ubtask,. validation of CR functions, involved analysis of workload and distribution of workload for operators performing specific task and event sequences. Also
- overall control room traffic was analyzed. Where potential problems in operator j 2-6
i l 415-1/0 movement or workload were identified, walk-throughs were conducted at the Davis-Besse mockup. 2.4 Documentation and Document Control Three types of documentation were addressed: 1) reference documentation,
- 2) process and Human Engineering Discrepancy documentation, and 3) Detailed Control Room Design Review output findings and reports.
2.4.1 Reference Documentation A program library was established with reference documents to support the Detailed Control Room Design Review tasks. It contains: o Licensee Event Reports o Transient Assessment Reports o Final Safety Analysis Report o Technical specifications and system descriptions o Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams o Floor plans o Instrument lists o Panel drawings and photographs o Software descriptions o NSSS operating guidelines (ATO'Gs) o Upgraded emergency operating procedures o Samples of computer printouts o Various Nuclear Regulatory Commission and industry documents bearing on control room design (i.e., NUREGs-0700 and -0660, IEEE specifications and standards, human factors engineering texts, etc.). As required, this documentation was referenced to support specific tasks within the control room evaluations. 2.4.2 Process Documentation Data collection and reduction methods were documented for reporting purposes. The general flow of information management is presented in Figure 2-2. Task plans served as the basic process documentation. All data collected during the review were I maintained in individual task folders in the central project files at Essex. l l 2-7
i 415-1/0 DATA COLLECTION DATA COLLECTION *
- DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURE 1 PROCEDURE 2 PROCEDURE N I l l COLLECT DATA COLLECT DATA . . . . . . . . COLLECT DATA I I I IDENTIFY HEDs IDENTIFY HEDs * * * * * * *
- IDENTIFY HEDs l I I DOCUMENT DOCUMENT e e . . . . . . DOCUMENT I I I FILE (M AN UAL) FILE (M ANUAL1 , , , , , , , , FILE (M ANUAL)
I ASSESS AND PRIORITIZE HEDs l UPDATE FILES I IDENTIFY RESOLUTIONS l UPDATE FILES I DEVELOP SCHEDULESI RESOLUTIONS I REPORT I FIGURE 2 2 INFORMATION MANAGEMENT PROCESS 2-8
l 415-1/0 2.4.3 Guideline Human Engineering Discrepancy Documentation Data files for each Human Engineering Dicerepancy were generated. For each task requiring a report, file space was reserved for that report. The following information was recorded for each Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED): o NUREG-0700 guideline number o Human engineering discrepancy problem description o Human engineering discrepancy assessment o Human Engineering Discrepancy locations (components which are discrepant from the NUREG-0700 guidelines) o Action to be taken on the Human Engineering Discrepancy. Figure 2-3 presents the Human Engineering Discrepancy form used to document and report findings. 2.5 Phase 3 - Assessment and Disposition of I-EDs The final phase in the review process was the assessment and disposition of human engineering discrepancies. This activity was conducted in two parts. First, the HED was assessed for its potential to induce operator errors by considering the potential impact on human performance. Second, the effect of the error on plant safety was estimated by determining which systems and/or plant functions would be affected. Once this assessment was completed, the HED disposition was determined. Disposition included enhancements, design changes, and/or more detailed studies to determine specific design solutions. A detailed description of the HED assessment and disposition process is presented in Section 6.0 of this report. i I 9 l g. 2-9
Fl2URE 2 3 415-1/0 HED PRIORITY l l HUMAN ENGINEERING DISCREPANCY (HED) REPORT PLANT / UNIT ORIGINATOR: HED NO.: VALIDATED BY: DATE: a) HED TITLE: b) ITEMS INVOLVED: c) PROBLEM DESCRIPTION AND 0700 PARA. NUMBER: i d) DATA COLLECTION DESCRIPTION AND CODE NUMBER: e) SPECIF4C HUMAN ERROR (s): , l 2-10 l
. - . . _- . _ - . -- . .- _ = _ - --
- FIGURE 2 3 (cent'd) 415-1/0 HED PRIORITY I
- l 1 i 1 HED REPORT (CONTINUED) 1
- HED NO.
- !
PLANT / UNIT i i ! f) SUGGESTED BACKFIT: 1 t l l g) REVIEW AND DISPOSITION: i 4 1 i l t l A ( 6 e l 2-11
, , , . . . , _ , . - _ _ - _ . ~ , _ , . .._,, _ _ , _ _ . , _ _ , . . . . , _ , _ . _ _ . , , _ , - - _ . , _ , , . . _ , - _ . ~ . , _ _ . . , , , , , , _ _ . , , . , _ , . - , . . _ . , _ , + , . . _ , _ . , - , . . . , , _ , . . . . , . ,
FIGURE 2 3 (C::nt'd) 415-1/o HED PRIORITY I HED #
- 1. EXTENT OF DEVlATION NIA SOME COMPLETE FROM 0700 1 2 3 4 5 GUIDELINES LOW HIGH
- 2. ERROR ASSESSMENT 1 2 3 4 5
- 3. SAFETY FUNCTION YES NO
?
- 4. NON SAFETY RELATED, YES NO REQUIRED TO MITIGATE CONSEQUENCES OF AN ACCIDENT
- 5. CONSEQUENCES OF ERROR OCCURENCE A. UNSAFE YES NO OPERATION B. VIOLATION YES NO OF TECH.
SPECS. YES t 1.DEV =0? CATEGORY lli HED
- 37 NO s
j 2. ERROR NO j ASSESSMENT CATEGORY lli HED ' 2 TA TA YES NO TEC f YES NO if CH NO SPEC VIO- 3. SAFETY SPEC VIO* CATEGORY CATEGORY LATED OR UN, FUNCTION OR LATED OR UN' ll'C HED 11 C HED 1 SAFE OPERATION OBJECTIVE SAFE OPERATION
\I YES YES if if l
CATEGORY ll A CATEGORY ll 8 HED 2-12 HED l
415-1/0 e 3.0 OPERATING EXPERIENCE RI VIEW The operator experience review consisted of two tasks: 1) conduct of operator interviews, and 2) review of plant operating experience. The methodology and result of these tasks are described in the following sections. 3.1 Operator Interviews This section summarizes the results of operator interviews conducted at the Davis-Besse nuclear power plant during the period 20-24 June 1983. The interviews were conducted in accordance with NUREG-0700 as part of a Detailed Control Room Design Review (DCRDR) performed at Davis-Besse. The objective of the interviews was to solicit comments and observations from control room operating personnel concerning selected aspects of the design and operation of the Davis-Besse control room. The methodology and results of the interviews are described in the following sections. 3.1.1 Methodology Operator interviews are conducted as part of the operating experience review for a DCRDR to identify and record any human engineering discrepancies (HEDs) that have been encountered during the operation of the plant. NUREG-0700 recommends that a range of operations personnel be interviewed, including operations managers, shift supervisors, shif t technical E.dvisors, senior reactor operators, reactor operators, and auxiliary operators. The approach recommended by NUREG-0700 follows the general format oi the critical incident technique in which the respondent is asked to describe specific incidents that demonstrate positive or negative aspects of the design and/or operation of the ! control room. This approach allows the interviewer to focus on critical success, failure and near-miss situations encountered in actual plant operation. These situations are then analy.7ed, from a human engineering perspective, to determine any causal or contributing i factors related to the design and/or operation of the control room. In the present study, the operator interviews were part of an integrated DCRDR j process that employs four separate data collection techniques: observation, measure-ment, document review and operator interviews. Prior to initiation of the DCRDR, each guideline in Chapter 6 of NUREG-0700 was systematically reviewed to determine the most appropriate data collection technique (s). Those guidelines selected for inclusion in 3-1
415-1/0 the operator-interview were translated into the appropriate format and entered into the questionnaire. Questionnaires were administered to 13 operations personnel from three of the six shifts at Davis-Besse. Interviews were conducted on an individual basis to preclude consensual bias and to maximize the interaction between interviewer and respondent. The interviews were conducted in an area adjacent to the control room in order that the respondent could have ready access to the control room to facilitate recall and to point out specific components involved in critical incidents. Eight questionnaires were administered during the present study. These question-naires focused on the following areas: (1) Controls (2) Displays
~
(3) Verification of task performance (4) Labels and location aids (5) Annunciators (6) Ambient noise (7) Maintainability (8) Ambient illumination. Example questionnaires for each of these areas are contained in Appendix A. The results of the operator interviews are summarized in the following section. 3.1.2 Results 3.1.2.1 Operator Demography - A summary of the background information for the 12 operators / shift supervisors and one shift technical advisor is presented in Tabte 3-1. As indicated, the mean years of operational experience at Davis-Besse is 2.8 years. Four of the operators have experience from other plants and five were in the U.S. Navy Nuclear Program. 3.1.2.2 Interview Results - The responses to each of the questionnaires are pre-sented in Appendix A. Each response was determined to be either negative (indicated by a -), positive (indicated by a +), or nonapplicable (NA). Questions pertaining to color coding were included in the conventions survey rather than the operator interviews. Each negative response represents a potential problem area and was documented as a Potential Human Engineering Discrepancy (PHED) on HED forms (see Figure 2-3). These PHEDs underwent a review / verification process to determine the specific nature 3-2
Tabla 3-1 ll OPERATOR AND SUPERVISOR BACKGROUND DATA
, Davis- Other College USN Other Operator Besse Plant Number Nuclear Military Number Position Expr. Expr. of Yrs. Program Expr.
I 1 Shift Supervisor 6 yrs 0 - 2 6 yrs - 2 Senior Reactor Operator / 3 yrs 0 2 0 - Assist. Shift Supervisor 3 Shift Supervisor 6.5 yrs 0 0 0 ?2 yrs
- Army
- 4 Senior. Reactor Operator /
Assist. Shift Supervisor 2.2 yrs 0 0 6 yrs - j 5 Reactor Operator 5 months 5 yrs 2 0 - ' Y 6 Shift Technical Advisor 1.5 yrs 0 4*
* (Supervssor) O --
*BSME 7 Reactor Operator 4 months 3 yrs 2 0 --
8 Reactor ' Operator 6 yrs 2.5
- 2 0 --
- Fossil Plant 9 Senior Reactor Operator /
,' 3 yrs 0 2 0 -- Assist. Shift Supervisor - Reactor Operator 10 1.5 yrs 0 0 6 yrs --
!! Reactor Operator 6 months 0 0 6 yrs -- ;
i 12 Senior Reactor Operator / < ' 4 yrs 0 1 6 yrs i Assist. Shift Supervisor -- t l 13 Reactor Operator 2 yrs 5 yrs 0 0 -- C Y' t i Summary MEAN= MEAN= MEAN= MEAN= l i 2.83 yrs 1.19 yrs .76 yrs 2.30 yrs
i 3 415-1/0 t and extent of the problem before being considered an HED. Once this was determined, it was subjected to the formal HED review process as described in Section 6.0. The preliminary results of the interviews revealed 117 PHEDs out of a total of 202 questions: GUESTIONNAIRE # OF QUESTIONS # PHEDs
- 1. Controls 44 23
- 2. Displays 30 20
- 3. Verification of Task Performance 27 15
- 4. Labels and Location Aids 19 8
- 5. Annunciators 46 29
- 6. Ambient Noise 7 5
- 7. Maintainability 23 12
- 8. Illumination 6 5 202 117 Each of the above areas is discussed in the following paragraphs.
Controls Questionnaire / interviews
- a. Three controls were reported to be positioned too close to adjacent controls, resulting in potential for accidental activation of the adjacent controls.
- b. Three systems were reported to contain controls that require strict sequential activationi however, there are no interlocks or similar pre-cautions to prevent out-of-sequence operation.
- c. Ten controls on the control boards were reportedly not used by the operators.
- d. Two controls on the control boards were reported as being duplicated unnecessarily,
- e. Controls are not recognizable in terms of function and switch types are not consistent across the control boards,
- f. Three controls were reported as being controls that can be positioned between detented positions.
- g. ' Six controls were reported as being difficult to adjust to the necessary level of precision.
- h. Pushbuttons that control valves provide inadequate feedback concerning valve position and/or status. In some cases, the associated Indicator 3-4
415-1/0 lights go out while the valve is travelling or the light doesn't change until valve stops moving. This makes it difficult to determine if the valve is operating properly or has malfunctioned. Display Questionnaire / interviews
- a. Three sets of lights were reported to be too dim to be easily read under ambient conditions.
- b. Fifteen lights or sets of lights were reported as indicating system /
equipment status when the light la off.
- e. Three sets of indicator lights are reportedly used as alert, annunciator, or alarm signals.
- d. Fifteen meters were reported as having scales that do not span the expected range of operational parameters.
- e. Five meters were reported having scales that are too wide for maximum displayed values.
- f. All meters were reported as having pointers that do not go off tcale when the meter falls.
- g. Many meters were reported as having scales that are difficult to read because of poor contrast between pointer and background.
- h. All recorders were reported as being difficult to read without opening the recorder window.
- 1. Five recorders were reported as having a tendency to mechanically or electrically " hang up."
Verification of Task Performance Questionnaire / Interview
- a. Six instruments were reported as not being clearly labelled to indicate whether the displayed value is actual or demand status,
- b. Eight displays were reported as requiring some form of mental conver-sion in order to effectively use the information.
- c. Two sets of instruments which must be compared to other displays of the same parameter do not have compatible scales.
Labels and Location Aids Questionnaire / Interview
- a. Many instruments were reported as not being clearly labelled.
- b. Labels are not routinely cleaned as part of the maintenance procedure.
- c. Mimic lines on the electrical distribution panel are difficult to distin-guish quickly.
Annunciator System Questionnaire / interview
- a. Annunciator system does not contain a first out panel.
- b. Annunciator system auditory signals are not priority coded by pulse, frequency change or intensity. Also, different frequencies are not provided for dif ferent signals.
3-5 4
415-1/0
- c. Annunciator system does not contain separate auditory signals at each work station.
- d. Three alarms were reported to startle or irritate operators.
- e. An alarm cannot be acknowledged from more than one response control
, area.
- f. Some annunciator tiles are used for status and are always illuminated.
- g. Annunciator tiles that are on for extended periods during normal operations are not distinctively coded for positive recognition.
- h. Operators reported that they are not immediately aware if an annun-clator tile is out of service.
- 1. Five annunciator alarms were reported as nuisance alarms.
, J. Five alarms require operators to obtain additional information from a source outside of the control room area.
- k. Many annunciator tiles contain dual messages such as HIGH-LOW.
I. Multi-input alarms do not have a reflash capability that reflashes the l tile af ter en auditory alert even if the first alarm has not cleared.
- m. All multi-input alarms are not provided with an alarm printout.
- n. The alarm printer is repcrted to sometimes lose or skip information.
Ambient Noise Questionnelre/ interview l a. Operators reported that the amplitude of four auditory signals interfere with other signals or voice communications.
- b. Ram Tech Computer has an auditory signal the meaning of which is unclear.
- c. Two alarm signals were reported to have similar sounds, but different meanings.
- d. Three auditory signals were reported to be excessively loud, causing discomfort.
Maintainability Questionnaire / Interview
- a. Recorder supplies and fuses are not stored in the control room.
- b. Operators reported that there is not adequate storage space available In the control room,
- c. Bulbs and recorder paper are not clearly marked to Indicate type.
- d. Records are not kept on the status of expendables and spare parts.
- e. Annunciator tiles are not keyed to prevent Interchanging of annunciator i tiles..
- f. Operators reported that they have been shocked while replacing bulbs.
- g. Lamp test, dual bulbs, or dual filament bulbs are not provided for most indicator lights on the control boards.
3-6
415-1/0
- h. Legend light /pushbutton covers are not keyed to prevent interchanging of covers.
Illumination Guestionnaire/ Interview
- a. Operators reported that there are noticeable differences in the illumi-nation levels throughout the control room.
- b. Shadows were reported to interfere with reading recorders.
- c. Glare was reported to interfere with reading displays.
PHEDs were reviewed by senior project personr:el and evaluated during survey, task analysis, and V&V activities to determine the nature and extent of the deviations. In cases where PHEDs were judged to be invalio, they were deleted; however, the original PHED, including justification for its deletion, was maintained in the central project file. HEDs are summarized in Appendix C. 3.2 Documentation Review This section summarizes the results of the documentation review performed to identify conditions in the Davis-Besse Control Room that may cause human performance problems. This review consisted of three elements as follows:
- 1. Review of Davis-Besse Reactor Trip and/or Transient Assessment Reports with Potential HED Implications.
- 2. Review of Davis-Besse LERs Attributed to Personnel Error with Potential HED Implications
- 3. Review of Industry-Wide LERs Associated with Human Error with Potential Generic HED Implications.
The methodology and results of these reviews are described briefly in the following paragraphs. 3.2.1 Methodology The list of Davis-Besse Reactor Trip and Transient Assessment Reports was reviewed and those which involved potential HED implications were selected for further review. These reports were then evaluated to determine the events leading to the problem, the nature of the problem, and to identify potential HEDs associated with the problem. Simila.rly, the list of Davis-Besse LERs was reviewed and those attributed to personnel error with potential HED implications were selected for further review. These LERs were also evaluated to detemrine the events leading to the problems, the nature of the Problems, and to identify potential HEDs associated with the LER. 3-7
I 415-1/0 Beyond the limits of Davis-Besse specific documents, a computer assisted keyword search was made on the NSIC data base of all LERs for a listing of those LERs with possible HEDs of a generic nature that may also apply to Davis-Besse. These LERs were i also evaluated to determine the events leading to the problem, the nature of the problem and to identify potential HEDs asscociated with the LER. 3.2.2 Results Table 3-2 provides a summary of the documentation review results. Each Davis-Besse reactor Trip and/or transient assessment report, Davis-Besse LER or industry-wide-LER with potential HED implications is listed along w.th the associated potential HED. Each potential HED generated duriry this task was further examined during other portions j of the CRDR and was incorporated with an HED from the other tasks. These final HEDs i addressing the concerns raised during the documentation review are provided in the final column of Table 3-2. I i r -l i 3 + l' l 3-8
t TABLE 3-2 St994ARY OF DoctMENTATION REVIEW I I I I l l Reactor / Transient l Davis Besse l Industry Wide l I l Assessment Report I LER I LER l Potential HED Related HED(s) l , I l ll ll l Automatic operation of startup HED 9.Z-73, lo a l Reactor Trfp of y/z/71 l I feed valves and W P when they 96 HED 9.2-28 l 1 I should be in the manual mode l l l Reacto- Trip of 4/29/78 l -Manual control of WP speed HEDs 9.2-42 & I l -Control of WW valve oscillat- 9.2-49 ing from flow control to I level control I d l l l l -FW elements in manual were l I decreased too rapidly Y FW Transient of 11/16/80 I l l -Erroneous main feedwater signal l HED 9.2-18 l l
- l l l -Insufficient design to prevent { l i l l SG overfill l I I I l l Reactor Trip of 6/24/81 l l l -T-Sat /P-Sat meters provided l HED 9.2-34 I I l misleading information l I l l 1 -NNI-X power supply improperly i I l l labeld ll l l l l l-AnnunciatorError r
1 I l I 1 Reactor Trip of 10/22/81 l l -Spurious SFRCS Trip HEDs 9.2-18 & 1 l -TBV Logic 9.2-32
.l l Reactor Trip of 4/10/83 l -Operator training - high xenon Iwrease. training 1 I sang i I I l 1 '
I' l LER-r-32-77-6 l 1 -Insufficient adainistrative HED 4.1-7 I l l controls on DH valves I i I I I I l -SG overfill l SFRCS Redesign la i I ILER-NP-33-77-30l l 1- 1 process l I - LER-r-33-77-57 -Insufficiem. administrative HED 4.1-7 M controls or. DH valves f i l l q o i i
TABLE 3-2 SLBO WtY OF DOCISIENTATION REVIEW I I I I I I l i Davis Besse l Industry Wide l l Reactor / Transient Potential HED I Related IED(s) l 9- Assessment Report I LER I LER I I l l l I LER-IF-33-77-9Ei -Diesel generator oveigpeed trip l -Accidental actuation of l NED 4.1-1, 4.1-25 ' l l LER-IF-33-78-72 l l l l l critical controls I l I l 1 1 , l l -Accidental actuation of I HED 4.1-1, 4.1-25 I l l LER-IF-33-80-28 l l l critical controls l l I l l l Administrative l l LER 82-011 -Preventative maintenance l practices /nottfications controls l lSanonofre2 ll HED 4.1-1, 4.1-25 l l 1 LER 82-017 l -Inadvertent actuation of I I C:1 vert C1tffs 11 critical controls
.u l l l LER 82-100 l -Interlocks to prevent HED 4.1-7 4 l l l l San Onofre 2 inadvertent operation l o l I l
I LER 81-151 * -control of AFW from Aux. l l shutdown panel l i l l l l McGuire 1 I
! I l l 1 l l LER 82-002 l -Latchtype permit controls that l ll i l Sequoyah 2 do not have CR fndication l l 1 LER 83-050 l -Instrumentation on remote /
l alternate shutdoun out of ( l
. I service without indication in i l' t I I ,
l or knowledge of control room l l
- l l -l LER 82-040 -Accidental actuation of HED 4.1-1, 4.1-25 l
. l l Susquehanna 1 l critical controls !
LER 82-046 -Chart recorders, paper HED 1.7-7, 5.1-14 I I l replacement l l l l LaSalle 1 I l i I I l i i i i I i e Y' r t' O f i 1
TABLE 3-2 StpecutY OF DOCLBENTATION REVIEW l li i i l I
! Reactor / Transient Davis Besse l Industry Wide l Assessment Report .
LER I LER Potential HED 1 Related KD(s) I - I l l l
-Power failure indication on l 1 1 1 Palisades LER 82-049 ,
buses l l l l l 1 I l l l LER 81-021 1 -Communication lost between 1 NED 2.1-3 1 I D.C. Cook 1 l refueling crew in containment i
-.I 1' l and control room l 1
LER 80-018 -All controls necessary for I i l I i Robinson 2 important emergency actions l l l l l like isolation should have l l l control points in the CR l l < l i I H l l LER 82-064 1 -Thermostat settings 1 I I l l Duane Arnold l l . I u ! I l l ' l l b ' I I I, I l > l I I I . I I 1 I i 1 l i I I I I I I l 1 l l i i i ' 1 - i I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I i 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I I l l 1 1 I I I I I I I I , I I l l I 1 I g
'l" t
O
I l 1 415-1/0 t 4.0 CONTROL ROOM SURVEY 1 The methodology used to conduct the CR surveys at Davis-Besse incorporated a mix of. traditional procedures and methods tailored to the specific requirements of the plant.
'The four basic methods employed within each survey were measurements, observations, i interview / questionnaires, and documentation reviews. Within the summary tables, these ; methods are designated by M, O, I, and D, respectively. Within each of these methods, specific procedures were used to ensure a comprehensive data collection, data reduction,
! and analysis process. The procedures were organ; zed into a set of standardized task plans. 1 The survey process was structured into a number of separate tasks, each task involving a specific set of related control room design features. For example, environ-mental factors were organized into an illumination survey, noise survey, an HVAC survey, and a workspace survey. This structural approach, coupled with the standardized task i ! plans, allowed for maximum flexibility during data collection, data reduction, and f . analysis, and resulted in a standard, well-organized self-documenting process. , All task plans followed the general format oft
! 1) Introduction (including the objectives) ! 2) Review Team Selection and Responsibilities I
- 3) Criteria (from NUREG-0700, Section 6.0) ,
i 4) Procedures ' 4 ) 5) Equipment and Facility Requirements j 6) Inputs and Data Forms
- 7) Outputs and Results f
; 8) Figures and Tables
- 9) Procedure Exceptions
- 10) Appendices (as required).
I In addition to this general format, the control room survey task plans incorporated a i standardized set of appendices that ensured a consistent well-documented process for { data collection, analyses, audits, and follow-on backfitting procedures. The appendix structure employed west l Appendix A (Criteria) - This is a compendium of all 0700, Section 6.0 criterla in 0700 paragraph number order that is relevant to that task plan, it was used to summarize the final results. . f 4-1 r
i 415-1/0 t Appendix B (Data Forms) - This appendix is further divided into the following: B1 Measurements Data - Bl.1 Linear Measurements (scalar, force, torque, dimensional, , air volume, temperature, humidity) Bl.2 Sound Measurements (noise auditory signals, communi-response characteristics) Bl.3 cations Light systems Measurementsauditory (lliumination levels, luminance characteristics, contrast ratios) l B1.4 through Bl.n Others (as required) ; i I B2 Interviews and Questionnaires - i B2.1 Operations B2.2 Engineering B2.3 Instrumentation and Calibration B2.4 Management and Administration B2.5 through B2.n Others (as required) B3 Observation Checklists B4 Documentation Review Checklists B5 Analysis Aids for B1 - Measurements B5.1 Analysis Aids for 81.1 B5.2 Analysis Aids for Bl.2 B5.3 Analys!s Aids for Bl.3 > B5.4 through B5.n Analysis Aids for Bl.4 through Bl.n (as reqalred) B6 Analysis Aids for B2 -Interviews /Questionnstres B7 Analysis Aids for B3 - Observation Checklists . t B8 Analysis Alds for B4 - Documentation Review Checklists B9 Additional forms, as required. Prior to conducting the surveys, Appendices B2 (Interviews and Questionnaires) from the various task plans were assembled and used to conduct operator Interviews (see Section 3.1 of this report). The results of the interviews were used to direct the focus of the survey effort. Details of the methods and findings of the CR surveys are presented in the following sections. i 4-2 i
l 4 415-1/0
\
l 4.1 Workspace Survey This section documents the results of the workspace survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.1.1 Cbjectives The objectives of the workspace survey were tot
- a. Assess the degree to which the workspace layout in the control room conforms to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the workspace design that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.1.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of the workspace design in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The topics evaluated include o Furniture and equipment layout o Document organization and storage o Supervisor access o Nonessential personnel access o Procedure availability at consoles o Desk dimensions o Chair design o Unit integration and interference o Personal storage o Ambience and comfort. 4.1.3 Criteria The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, ares paragraphs 6.1.1.3a through g; 6.1.14a through e; 6.1.1.6a and b; 6.1.1.7; 6.1.2.61 6.1.2.7a through di 6.1.2.8a through g; 6.1.3.la and b; 6.1.5.6a and b; and 6.1.5.7a through c. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-1. . 4-3
415-1/0 4.1.4 Method 4.1.4.1 Data Collection
- a. Data collected during the operator interviews were reviewed to identify any potential problems with CR workspace.
- b. Data were collected through direct observation of the control room workspace using the checklist contained in the Workspace Task Plan. As necessary, operators on shift at the time of the survey were querried concerning the suitability of the control room workspace. Where data collected through direct observation were inconclusive, additional data were collected during the verification and validation process.
4.1.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the items involved, a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 para-graph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution,
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the workspace task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
4.1.5 Findings The findings of the workspace survey are presented in Table 4-1 "Workspace Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall,56 criteria were applied to the workspace design in the Davis-Besse control room. Of these, nine (16%) were not applicable,42 (75%) were in compliance, and five (9%) were not in compliance. A total of five HEDs were generated which document all of the flvo criteria which were not met. In general, those FEDS were related to viewing of controls and displays from the operators desk, storage of reference documents and procedures, the location of and communication with the shift supervisor's office. O l 4-4
415-1/0 TABLE 4-1 WORKSPACE SURVEY FINDINGS & FEDS GDERATED Page 1 of 10
-- // J/ /
6.1.1.3 FURNITURF APO EQUIPDENT LAYOtR
- a. VEWING - Desks and consoles placed O NO P.1.1 1 III Reassessed in in the primary operating area should V&V permit operators at those desks and consoles full view of all control and display panels (including annunciator panels)in the primary operating area (see Exhibit 6.1-2).
- b. COhedLNICATIONS - Desk and con- O YES sole placement should facilitate voice communications from operators seated at those work stations to any point in the primary operating area.
- c. OPERATOR ACCESS (1) Operator should be able to get to O YES any work station without having to overcome obstacles such as tripping hazards, poorly positioned filing cabinets or storage racks, maintenance equipment, etc.
(2) Operators should be able to post- O YES tion themselves conveniently for performing task actions at any work station. 3
- d. CIRCLLATION PATTERNS (1) The control room arrangement O YES should facilitate officient unob-structed movement and communi-
; cation. ,
(2) The control room arrangement O YES should minimize interforence between the members of the operational crew. 9 4-5
.'- e.m a __ __ m - m_.. _ _ . - .-+- - + - _A- - -- - .u .
t 415-1/0 TABLE 4-1 WORKSPACE SLRVEY FDONGS & FEDS EPERATED Page 2 of 10 L1.1.3 (Cont'af) e.. // J/ /
- e. OPERATOR MANEUVERNG O YES
; SPACE - Between the back (operator's poeltioni of desk / consoles and any surf ace or fixed object behind the operator, adequate space should be allowed for the operator to get into and out of a chair freely or to turn in the chair to view the equipment behind, ft) A minimum separation of 36 0 YES inches from the back of any desk to any oppoolnq surface le sug-gested as the minimum /see Exhibit 6.1 3). A greater separa-tion is preferable, f2) Lateral sonee for a seated O YES operator should be no less then 30 inches fece Exhibit 6.1-31 Greater latitude is preferable.
- f. EQUIP >ENT.TO-OPPOSNG St#tFAE 2 DISTANCE - Enough space should be o!! awed so that personnel can perform all raw! red tasks. The specir should accommodate kneeling one bending, simultaneous work by more than one operator, and simultaneous perform-ence of operational and maintenance teoks as may be required. Recom-mended minimum separatione are illue-trated in Exhibit 6.1 4.
(1) A minimum eeoerat!on of 50 0 YES Inches le recommended between a sinr;te row of equip.t.ont/penet and a wall or other oppoolnq eurface. ' (2) A minimum seperation of 50 N/A N/A inches le also recommended between two rows of facing equipment if both rows are worked by a single operator. I I l 4-6
~ ._ . - _ - . _ _ _
415-1/0 , I i TABLE 4-1 , WORKSPAN SLRVEY FPOINGS & FEDS EPERATED Page 3 of 10 6.1.1.3f. (Cont'd) _. // d/ / (3) A mlnlmum separation of 8 feet is N/A N/A recommended between opposing rows of equipment where more then one person must work almul-teneously on operational or main-tenance teoke and kneeling, bond-Ing. or use of test equipment may be necessary.
- g. OPEMNGS - Panels should be laid out N/A N/A and maintained, and equipment enclos-ures designed, so that there are no unouarded openinos through which unwanted objects een be introduced.
6.1.1.4 DOCUDENT ORGAMZATION APO STORAGE
- e. ACCESS 10tLilTY (1) All procedures and other docu. O YES ments that may be needed for ready reference should be kept in the control room.
(2) Reference doumente should be O NO P.1 2 !!! stored where they are easy to
- locate and extract for use. They ehould not be locked up, stored in places too low or too high for large and small personnel to accese easily,in cramped spaces, or where poor illuminetton eulets.
- b. LOCATION AIDS .
(1) Cleerly visible title labels should O YES be provided to identify specific documente. (2) Labels should diettnquish docu. O YES mente as much as poselble. 4-7
. 415-1/0 TABLE 4-1 WORKSPAT SURVEY FIMMNGS & FEDS KFERATED Page 4 of ID l
- s. / / J/ /
6.1.1.4b. (Cont'd) (3) Putting many volumes in one O NO P.1.1-3 III location creates a search problem, especially if titles are similar. One means of reducing search time would be to put operational documentation in one location and other documentation in a secondary location.
- c. CONVEMENCE OF USE (1) Documents should not be fixed in O YES racks; it should be possible to remove documents for use.
(2) Documents should be bound so O YEs that they can be opened fully and will remain open at the dastred place without holding.
- d. PROTECTION - Documents should be C YES protected from wear so that they do not become dog-eared, dirty, loose, torn, and difficult ta read.
- e. OEDICATED SETS OF N/A N/A PROCEDURES - Sets of procedures should be separately stored for each unit in a multlunit control room.
6.1.1.6 SUPERVISOR AC&SS
- a. ACCESS - The shift supervisor's offics O NO P.1.1 -4 III should be located so as to permit prompt physical access to the control room under ell conditions, including control room isolation. The preferred location is within the control room isolation boundary, with placement to permit good visual and voice contact with the primary operational area.
l l 4-8
415-1/0 t TABLE 4-1 WORKSPAE SURVEY FPORKL & KDa EFERATED Page 5 of 10 4 6.1.1.6 (Cont'd)
. / lJ/ /
- b. COMMUNICATIONS -Whea the shif t O NO P.1.1-5 111 supervisor's othee is not within the control room boundary, dedicated com-munications links between the primary operating area and the shift supervisor's offlee should be provided. (See Guide-line 6.2.1.7) 6.1.1.7 NONESSENTIAL PERSOPeEL 0 YES AC SS Provision should be made to !!mit the access and movement of nonessential but authorized personnel to prescribed areas within the con-trol room.
6.1.2.6 USE OF lROCEDURES APO OTH:R O YES REFERENCE MATERIALS AT CONSOLES Provision should be made so that the proced-ures manuals and other reference materials can be consulted easily while task sequences are performed at the conocles. Exhibit 6.?-15 shows the poor practice gf laying manuals down on the benchboard when no convenient place has been provided for them. Exhibit 4.1-16 shows a oood solution adopted by several plants: a ro!!!ng bookcase is pro-vided for storing and using procedures manuals. 6.1.2.7 DESK DIhENSIONS
- a. WORKING SPAE - Desks should N/A YES provide enough clear working space for all materials required for task perform-ance,
- b. CHAIR POSITIONS - The desk should O YES
- ellow for different chair poaltions as required, with adequate knee space.
l l 4-9
415-1/0 TABLE 4-1
- WORKSPACE SLRVEY FPOINGS & KDa EfCRATED Page 6 of 10 6.1.2.7 (Cont'd) s.. // l J / /
- c. OPERATOR COM~ ORT - The D YES relationships of working surface height and area, knee room, and chair height should allow operators to work com-fortably. Exhibit 6.1-17 Illustrates an uncomfortable situation created by desk height and chair desion,
- d. Di>ENSIONS - The following desk dimensions are recommended and shown in Exhibit 6.1-18:
(1) For seated work only,26 to 31 O YES inches aMye the floor (29 inches is a standard height). (2) For sit-stand desks,36 to 38 O N/A inches above the floor. (3) Work surface area depth: 16 0 YES inches minimum. (4) Work surface area width: 24 0 YES inches minimum if tasks involve reading and writing only; 30 inches minimum if other kinds of tasks are required. (5) Knee room height: A distance of O YES approximately 25 inches from the floor to the uncer-surface of the desk top should provide adequate clearance for 5th to 95th per-centile male and female adults at sit-down-only stations. , (6) Knee room depth: 18 inches mini- O YES mum. (7) Knee room width: 20 inches mini- O YES mum (greater width preferred 1 l l l l g. . 4-10
415-1/0 TABLE 4-1 WORKSPACE SURVEY FROINGS & IEDs EFERATED Page 7 of 10 6.1.2.8 CHAIRS s.- / / o/ .
/ /
- a. MOBILITY - Chairs should pivot .o O YES that operators can readily adjust post-tion. Mobile bases feasters) are recom-mended for chairs at sit-only stations.
- b. BACKRESTS - Chalts should support O YES at least the lower back curvature (lum-brosacral region). The recommended angle between the back and the seat is about 1000 for office tasks (such as keyboard tasks). A greater angle is preferred for reading and resting.
- c. ARMRESTS - Where personnel may 0 YES remain seated for relatively long periods, chairs with armrests are pre-ferred. Adjustable or retractable arm-rests may be necessary to allow the elbows to rest in a natural position and for compatibility with a particular desk / console.
- d. CUSHIONING - Seat and backrest O YES should be cushioned with at least 1 inch of compressible material, enough so that some resilience remains when the chair is occupied.
- e. SEAT AREA - The thighs and the O YES backs of the knees should not be com-pressed so as to cause fatigue and cir-culation problems. The seat should be at least 17 inches wide. Seat depth should be 15-17 inches (see Exhibit 6.1-19).
- f. SEAT ADJUSTABILITY - For chairs at O YES sit-down stations, seat height should generally be adjustable from 15 to 18 inches (Exhibit 6.1-19). For chairs at sit-stand stations, seat height should be adjustable from 26 to 32 inches (Exhibit 6.1-20).
4-11
i 415-1/0 TABLE 4-1 WORKSPA& SURVEY FROINGS & KDa CEERATED Page 8 of 10 s.. / / J/ / 6.1.2.8 (Cont'd)
- g. FOOTRESTS - An adjustable footrest N/A N/A or heel catch should be provided to support the feet at a level no more than 18 inches below the seat surface. If a footrest is part of the chair, a circular ,
design is recommended, diameter 18 inches. The footrest might be provided on the console base. 6.1.3.1 LNIT NTEGRATION AfOINTER-FERENCE
- a. EQUIPPENT ARRANGEENT - O YES Equipment should be arranged with movement and communication patterns in mind, so that unit operations do not interfere with each other,
- b. SENIOR OPERATOR STATION - N/A N/A Senior operators who supervise and assist operations of more than one unit need to be stationed so that they can communicate effectively with operators in each unit and have an unobstructed visual path 16 the control boards of each unit.
6.1.5.6 PERSONAL STORACE
- a. STORAT LOCATIONS - There should O YES be a suitable, out-of-the-way but secure place in which control room personnel may keep their coats and other personal belongings.
- b. STORAE SUITABILITY - If lockers N/A N/A are provided, they should be large enough to hold the items that can reasonably be expected to go into them.
6.1.5.7 AMBIENCE AfC COWORT l An effort should be made to create a pleasant and comfortable work setting in view of the long hours and confining aspects of the control room operator's job. de i 4-12
,, n
415-1/0 TABLE 4-1
- WORKSPACE SURVEY FROINCS & KDa TERATED Page 9 of 10 6.1.5.7 (Cont'd) s.. // J/ / -
- a. DECOR - Features to be considered include:
(1) Color coordination. O YES (2) Use of color and lighting to O YES create a cheerful atmosphere (without introducing glare and brightness to a degree that causes eye fatigue of an overly intense atmosphere). (3) Visual relief from arrays of O Yrg instrumentation. I (4) Comfortable seating. O YES (5) Carpeting to lessen the fatigue of O YES standing and walking.
- b. RESTROOM APO EATNG FACILITES (1) A restroom and kitchen or eating O YES area should be provided within (preferably) or near the control room isolation boundary.
(2) Since formal breaks are not O YES scheduled in most control rooms, it is important that personnel have access to these facilities without delay. It is preferable that they be used only by control room personnel. (3) Provision should be made for N/A N/A communication if facilities are out of voice contact, so that an operator taking a break can be contacted as necessary by person-nel in the control room. (See Guideline 6.2.1.7.) i l l l l l l 4-13 l
- , , n a--- n.-, , - - - - - ,-w - - --,e-, , , , -,y
. ~ . . _
415-1/0 TABLE 4-1 WORKSPA& SURVEY FROINGS & 6 GDERATED Page 19 of 10. s.. / / J/ / 6.1.5.7 (Cont'd)
- c. REST AREA /LOLNE - Consideration O YES should be given to providing a rest area (possibly in conjunction with the eating area) conducive to relaxation and revitalization, especially where shif ts are long.
~
4-14
r-
]
1 415-1/0 l 4.2 Anthropometric Survey This section documents the results of the anthropometrics survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in l accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.2.1 Objectives The objectives of the anthropometrics survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which all stand-up and sit-stand work stations in the control room conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the work stations that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.2.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of the work station design in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidellres as stated in NUREG-0700. The anthropometrics topics evaluated include: o Stand-up console dimensions o Sit-stand console dimensions o Vertical panels o Operator-display relationships. 4.2.3 Criteria The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, are: paragraphs 6.1.2.2a through g; 6.1.2.3a through h; 6.1.2.4a through c; 6.1.2.5a and b; and 6.7.2.3a through f. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-2. 4.2.4 Method 4.2.4.1 Data Collection
- a. Data collected during operator interviews were reviewed to identify any potential problem areas in the anthropometric characteristics of the control room.
b.' Data were collected using the checklists contained in the Anthropo-metrics Task Plan. l 4 4-15
~ 415-1/0 i
- c. Reach and visual envelopes recommended in NUREG-0700 were demar-cated on the control boards and visual observations were made of the relative locations of controls and displays. Controls and displays falling outside the recommended envelopes were noted and their engineering numbers recorded.
- d. Where it was necessary to consider the operational characteristics of the component (e.g., Guideline 6.1.2.5.a(1)), Davis-Besse operating pro-cedures were reviewed and/or operations personnel were consulted.
4.2.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the displays or controls involved, a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the anthropometrics task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
- d. Due to the fact that several anthropometric guidelines are related to the operational context of the component, a number of HEDs generated during this survey were referred to the verification and validation activity for clarification. These HEDs are annotated in the Remarks column of Table 4-2.
4.2.5 Findings The findings of the anthropometrics survey are presented in Table 4-2 "Anthro-pometry Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall,44 criteria were applied to the displays in the Davis-Besse control room. Of these,14 (31%) were not applicable, 23 (52%) were in compliance, and seven (15%) were not in compliance. A total of eight HEDs were generated which document all of the seven criteria which were not met. In general, those HEDs address controls and displays that are located too high or too low on the vertical panels and controls that are not located more than three inches away from the edge of the bench board. 4-16
415-1/0 l TABLE 4-2 ANTHtOPOhETRY St.RVEY FIPOINGS & HIk EFERATED Page 1 of 9 i s-- 6.1.2.2 STAPO-LP CONSOLE DlhENSIONS
/ / J/ /
I
- a. CONSOLE ECHT TO SEE OVER - M YES l When it is necessary for a standing operator to see over ti top, console height (with or without annunciator panels) should not exceed 58 inches.
- b. CONTROL WGHT - (Exhibits 6.1-5 and 6.1-6)
(1) The highest control on a stand-up M NO P.1.2.3 III Assessed for console should be within the critical controls highest reach of the 5th percen in V&V. tile female without stretching or using a stool, ladder, etc. (2) The lowest controls on a stand-up M NO P.l.2.2 III Assessed for console should be within the critical controls lowest reach of the 95th pereen in V&V. tile male without bending or stooping.
- c. BENCH 30ARD SLOPE - The bench- M YES board slope, in conjunction with its depth, should result in all controls being within the reach radius df the 5th per-centile female, as illustrated in Exhibit 6.1-6.
- d. CONTROL DISTANCE FROM TIE FRONT EDGE OF TIE CONSOLE (1) Controls should be set back a M NO P.1.2.1 III Assessed for minimum of 3 inches from the critical controls front edge to protect against in V&V.
accidental activation. (2) No control should bs more than 25 N YES inches from the front edge of the console. This accommodates the l maximum reach of the 5th per-
- centile female adult as illustrated in Exhibit 6.1-6.
l 17
i 415-1/0 TABLE 4-2 ANTFROPOhETRY SLRVEY FDOINGS & FEDS TIERATED Page 2 of 9 '
- s. / / J/ /
6.1.2.2 (Cnnt'd)
- e. DISPLAY POSITKNNG - (Exhibit 6.1-7)
(1) DISPLAY FEI@lT APO OREN-TATION (a) All displays, including annun- M YES clotor tiles, should be mounted so that they are within the upper limit of the visual field (750 above the horizontalline ' of sight) of the 5th percentile female. (b) In addition, all displays and M YES annunciators should be mounted so that the angle from the line of sight to the f ace plane is 450 or greater. The 5th percentile female determines the upper limit. The 95th percentile male determines the lower. limit. a (2) HORIZONTAL DISPLAN- M YES DENT - The oblique angle from the line of sight to a display located to either side of the working position from which the display must be read should be at least 450 This includes annun-clator tiles, which should be read-able from the acknowledge button. (See Exhibit 6.1-8.)
- f. LATERAL SPREAD OF CONTROLS M YES Assessed in APO DISPLAYS - The operator should Verification be able to perform task sequences at a and Validation given work station with minimum respositioning. The amount of operator movement required depends on the arrangement of controls and displays, not simply on the lateral dimensions of 4
the segments of the control board. The maximum lateral spread of controle and displays at a single-operator work
; station should not exceed 72 inches.
~
l l 0 l l 4-18
\
l
l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-2 - ANTI-ROPODETRY SURVEY FROINGS & IEDs GEPERATED Page 3 of 9 J s.. / ,/ / / , 6.1.2.2 (Cont'd)
- g. FOOT ROOM - Enough foot room is M YES needed to allow the operator to get close to the board without leaning. A clearance of 4 inches vertically and 4 inches horizontally is recommended.
6.1.2.3 SIT-DOWN CONSOLE Di>ENSIONS
- a. CONSOLE FCIGHT TO SEE OVER (1) If the seated operator must see N/A N/A over the console, the console height should be no more than approximately 27 inches above the seat to accommodate the 5th percentile adult female. Assum-inq seat height adjusted to 18 inches, maximum console height should therefore be 45 inches above the floor, f2) See-over console heights above 45 N/A N/A inches may be r,cceptable, for example, where the seated operator need only montlor (not readi status lights and annun-clators beyond the console, if they are at a suitable distance and height.
- b. CONTROL >EIGHT - All controls on a N/A N/A sit-down console should be within the reach radius of the 5th percentile female. Measurements should be made using seated shoulder height with the shoulder in line with the leading edge of the benchboard. This is illustrated in Exhibit 6.1-9.
- c. BENCFBOARD SLOPE - The bench- N/A N/A board slope, in conjunction with its depth, should be such that all controls are within the functional reach radius of the 5th percentile female (as illu-strated in Exhibit 6.1-9) and all displays and markings can be read.
l t 4-19
415-1/0 TABLE 4-2 ANTFROPODETRY SURVEY FRONGS & KDs CDERATED Page 4 of 9
- 6.1.2.3 (Cont'd) s.. / / o/ / /
- d. CCNTRG. DISTANCE FROM TK FRONT EDGE OF TE CONSOLE !
(1) Controle should be set back a N/A N/A minimum of 3 inches from the front edge to protect against accidental activation. (2) Other controls may be mounted as N/A N/A far back as 25 inches from the console edge. This distance accommodates the extended func-tional reach of the 5th percentile as defined.
- e. DISPLAY POSITIOPENG (1) All displays, including annunciator N/A N/A 4
tiles, should be mounted so that they are within the upper Ilmit of the visual field - 750 above the horizontal line of sight - of the 5th percentile female (see Exhibit 6.1-10). ,, (2) In addition, a!! displays should be N/A N/A mounted so that the angle from . the line of sight to the display face plane is 450 or greater (see Exhibit 6.1 10). The 5th percen-tile female determines the upper
!!mit. (Practically, there is no lower limit for a plaunible sit-down console design.)
- f. LATERAL SPREAD OF CONTROLS APO DISPLAYS - (Exhibit 6.1-11)
-(1) For control 'and monitoring N/A N/A actiorw that must occur in i
sequence, all necessary controle and displays should be within the , maximum extended reach and the j viewing range of the seated
- operator from a single reference point.
( i l 4-20
i 415-1/0 i TABLE 4-2
- ANTFROPOhETRY SERVEY FPOINGS & FEDS EVERATED Page 5 of 9 s.. / / J/ /
6.1.2.3f (Cont'd) (2) For the situation described in N/A N/A Item 1, above, and sustained or precise control action, the , operator should be able to reach the controls without having to . bend / stretch significantly.
- g. LEG Ato FOOT ROOM - Sufficient N/A N/A '
leg and foot room should be provided to enable seated operators to avoid awk-word and uncomfortable positions. i Exhibit 6.1-12 shows the dimensions involved and alves minimums and
! ranges necessary to accommodate the 5th to 95th percentiles (as defined in Exhibit 6.1-5).
- h. WRITING SPACE ON CONSCLES -
Writing space may be needed by operators working at consoles. I (1) An area at least 16 inches deep N/A N/A and 24 inches wide is recom-mended where these dimensions in the total configuration would fit operator reach capabilities. Less a space may be adeauste consider-j ing the frequency and duration of writing requirements at control room consoles. (2) If writing space is provided on the N/A N/A console itself, it should not inter-fere with viewing and manipu-
- lation of controls and displays. .
(3) If writing is necessary but soece N/A N/A
- on the console is not evallable, i other arrangements such as a nearby desk or table should be provided.
I l l l I 4-21 L _ _ . . _ - . _ . - - . . , . . .- , - . _ . . , , _ , . __.. . _ - . _ . . . - _ , ~ . . .
l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-2 ANRROPOhETRY SLRVEY FIf0INGS & KDs GEERATED Page 6 of 9 6.1'.2.4 SIT-STAfO WORK STATIONS
// s/ /
- a. CONTROL AfO DISPLAY POSI- O YES T10MNG - The height and lateral limits for controls and displays should conform to the guidelines given for stand-up consoles (Guideline 6.1.2.2).
- b. CHAIR KIGHT - The operator should O YES be provided with a high chair so that the seated eye height is approximately the same as standing eye height.
- c. KfCE ROOM - Knee room and com- O YES fortable foot support should be pro-vided.
6.1.2.5 VERTICAL PAELS
- a. CONTROL KIGiT (1) Controls should be placed in an M NO P.1.2-2 III Assessed for area between 34 inches and 70 P.1.2-3 III critical controls Inches above the floor. In V&V.
(2) Controls requiring precise or D NO P.1.2-6 Assessed in V&V - frequent operation and emergency Deleted. controls should be placed in an area between 34 inches and 53 inches above the floor.
- b. DISPLAY KIGHT (1) Displays should be placed in an M NO P.1.2-4 III Assessed for area between 41 inches and 70 P.1.2-5 III critical displays inches above the floor. In V&V.
(2) Displays that must be read fre- D NO P.1.2-8 Assessed for quently or precisely should be P.1.2-7 critical displays placed in an area between 50 in V&V - Deleted. inches and 65 inches above the i floor. l 4-22
415-1/0 TABLE 4-2 ANT 1-ROPOPETRY SURVEY FIPOINGS & FEDS CEPERATED Page 7 of 9 l s. 6.7.2 CATHOOC RAY TLEE (CRT) DIS-
/ lJ/ /
PLAYS 6.7.2.3 OPERATOR-DISPLAY RELATION-SFEPS
- a. VIEWING DISTANCE - Viewing dis- M YES tance should be greater than 18 inches.
- b. VIEWING ANGLE - The minimum M YES angle between the operatofs actual
!!ne-of-sight (LOS) as measured from the operatofs normal work station, and the plane of the display screen should be 450 or greater in either the horizontal or vertical direction. See Exhibits 6.7-8 and 6.7-10.
- c. SCREEN LOCATION, SEATED OPERATORS t (1) CRT displays which require fre- M quent or continuous monitoring, D YES or which may display important (e.g., alarm) Information, should be located within the, following limits as measured from the nor-
, mal operator work station (see Exhibit 6.7-9h (a) Horizontal limits - Not more M YES than 350 to the lef t or right of , the operatofs straight-ahead LOS.
(b) Vertical !!mits - Not more M YES than 200 above and 400 below the operatofs horizontal LOS. (2) CRT displays which do not require M YES frequent or continuous monitor-Ing, and which will not display important (e.g., alarm) Infor-mation, should be located within the following limits. (a) Horizontal limits - Not more than 950 to the lef t or right of the operatofs straight-ahead LOS. l 4-23
i 415-1/0 TABLE 4-2 . ANTEROPODETRY SURVEY F]POINGS & FEDS GEPERATED Page 8 of 9 6.7.2.3c (Cont'd) suosues / / J/ / , (b) Vertical limits - Not more M YES than 700 above and 900 below the operatofs horizontal LOS.
- d. SCREEN LOCATION, STAPOING OPERATORS f1) CRT displays which require fre-quent or continuous monitorino, or which may display important (e.g., alarm) Information, should be located within the followinn limits as measured from the nor-mal operator work station:
(a) Horizontal limits - Not more M than 350 to the left or right of D YES the operator's etraight-ahead LOS. (b) Vertical limits - Not more M than 350 above and 250 below D YES the operators horizontal LOS. (2) CRT displays which do not require frequent or continuous monitor-Ing, and which will not display important (e.g., alarmi infor-mation, should be located within the following limits (as measured from normal operator work stations which permit full operator head and eye rotationh (a) Horizontal limits - Not more M than 950 to the left or right of D YES the operatofs straight-ahead LOS. l I (b) Vertical limits - Not more M I than 850 above and 900 below D YES the ooeratofs horizontal LOS. A 4-24
l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-2 ANTEROPODETRY StRVEY FRONGS & FEDS CEFERATED Page 9 of 9
.-- / / J/ / \
6.7.2.3d (Cont'd)
- e. MOLNTING IN CONSOLES - When M YES CRTs are permanently mounted in con-sales, the console configuration, dimensions, and type of use (such as seated, sit-stand, or standingT affects the CRT/ operator interface. Consoles I
in which CRTs are installed should con-form to the guidelines of Section 6.1.2.
- f. VISIBILITY OF DATA - All data and O YES messages on the CRT screen should be within the unobstructed view of an operator at the normal work station.
1 i e f i - i 4-25
~. _ , . _. _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ . , - . . _ . _ _ _ . - - - . __ . . _ . ___
415-1/0 4.3 Illumination Survey This section documents the results of the illumination survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.3.1 Objectives The objectives of the illumination survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which the illumination levels under normal and emergency lighting in the control room conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700,
- b. Identify and document any characteristics of control room illumination that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.3.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of the illumination characteristics 1 in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The illumination topics evaluated include: o Illumination levels a Uniformity of illumir::: tion levels o Supplemental lighting o Task area luminance ratios o Shadowini) o Glare o Reflectance o Color l o Emergency lighting. 4.3.3 Criteria l The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, are: paragraph 6.1.5.3a through h, and 6.1.5.4c. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-3. s 4-26
415-1/0 4.3.4 Methods 4.3.4.1 Data Collection
- a. Data collected during operator interviews were reviewed to identify CR areas having potential illumination problems.
- b. Direct measurements of CR illumination were made using a Tektronix digital photometer (Model J16) with illuminance probe (Model J6511).
All equipment had been recently calibrated by Leasametric, Inc.
- c. Each control panel in the crimary operating area, as well as the operators' desk, were subdis d into one-foot-square gri6. An illumi-nation reading was taken at tne approximate center of each grid with the probe oriented toward the primary light source (i.e., overhead luminaire).
Measurcments were taken under both normal and emergency lighting. Extant Illumin stion levels were recorded on data sheets depicting the location at which the measurement was taken. All deviations from NUREG-0700 guidelines were noted and recorded. 4.3.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations ftom the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the lighting source or affected components, a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the illumination task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
i 4.3.4 Findings The findings of the illumination survey are presented in Table 4-3 " Illumination Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall,18 criteria were applied to.the displays in the Davis-Besse control room. . Of those criteria 10 (56%) were in compliance. Eight (44%) were not in compliance. A total of five HEDs were generated which document all of the eight criteria which were not met. In general, those HEDs address insufficient illumination levels in some areas, lack of uniformity in ILmination levels, shadowing and l glare in the control room, and inadequate illumination levels of the emergency lighting. l l 4-27
415-1/0 TABLE 4-3 l ILLLA4tNATION SLRVEY FROINGS & FEDS EPERATED Page 1 of 2 1 6.1.5.3 ILLUMINATION
-- /lJ / / .
- a. LEVELS - (from Exhibit 6.1-22)
Numbers a.e the min-recommended-max in ftC. (1) Panels, primary 20-30-50 M NO P.I.5-6 IIC (2) Aux panels 20-30-50 M YES (3) Scale indicators 20-30-50 M YES (4) Seated operations 50-75-100 M NO P.I.5-6 IIC (5) Reading, handwriting 50-75-100 M YES (6) Reading, print 20-30-50 M YES (7) Writing 50-75-100 M YES (8) Maintenance 20-30-50 M YES
- (9) Emergency operations - as above M YES for area / task,
- b. LNIFORhETY - The level of I NO P.1.5-1 III illumination should not VEy greatly over a given work station.
- c. StPPLEhENTAL LIGHT - I NO P.1.5-6 IIC Supplemental ilghting should be provided for personnel perforrr..ng specialized viseal tasks in areas where
- fixed illumination is not adequate.
- d. TASK AREA LtA4 NANCE RATIOS - I NO P.1.5-6 III 1 To determine task lighting requirements, it is necessary to consider the levels of Ilghting which surround a task. Great disparities between task and background lighting can lead to adaptation problems. To ensure effective visual performance, the task area luminance ratios in Exhibit 6.1-23 should not be exceeded. ,
l 4-28
415-1/0 TABLE 4-3 4 ILLUMINATION SURVEY FDOINGS & FEDS GDERATED Paga 2 of 2 *l i L1.5.3 (Cont'4
. // J/ /
- e. SHADOWING - To reduce operator fatigue and eyestrain, shadows should be avoided.
(1) Ambient illumination should be O YES provided via indirect or diffuse
; lighting.
(2) Labels, instructions, and other I NO P.I.5-4 III Re-evaluate written information should not be after illumina-in shadowed positions, tion has been ungraded.
- f. GLARE - Glare should not interfere ! NO P.I.5-5 III Re-evaluate with the readability of displays, labels, after !!!umina-or indicators. tion has been ungraded.
- g. REFLECTANCE - The amount of M YES reflected light is affected by illuminated surface colors. Reflectance should conform to the recommendations shown in Exhibit 6.1-24. (See also Exhibit 6.1-25.)
- h. COLOR - Surface colors should be I YES recognizable under both normal and emergency lighting conditions.
L1.5.4 EhERCENCY LICHTING
- c. LIGHTING LEVELS - The control M NO P.1.5-7 IIC room emergency tilumination system should be designed to provide a minimum tilumination level of 10 ,
footcandles at all work stations in the primary operating area. 4 J d l l I l 4-29 l
415-1/0 4.4 Ambient Noise Survey This section documents the results of the ambient noise survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.4.1 Objectives The objectives of the ambient noise survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which the ambient noise in the control room conforms to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the ambient noise in the control room that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.4.2 Scope The scope of the survey extends to the assessment of the ambient noise in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The topics evaluated include: o Auditory environment o Background noise o Noise distractions o Reverberation time and sound absorption o Auditory signals o Signal intensity. 4.4.3 Criteria The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, are: paragraphs 6.1.5.5a through e; 6.2.2.1c; 6.2.2.2b and c; and 6.2.2.6b and c. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-48. 4.4.4 Method 4.4.4.1 Procedure Preparation and Conduct - The procedure employed in the conduct of this task was as follows:
- a. The results of the operator interviews were reviewed to identify any potential problems with ambient noise levels in the CR.
4-30 l,
l I 415-1/0
- b. Data were collected using methods and procedures consisting of obser-vations, measurements, interviews and questionnaires.
- c. The operator questionnaire was administered to 13 of the licensed reactor operators for the plant.
- d. Noise data were collected on two separate occasions, once during July, 1983, and again during October,1983. All measurements were made using a Gerard Model 1562 noise meter and probe calibrated prior to data collections. Noise wa: measured in dB on the A-scale for weighted averages and the following octaves (in Hz):
o 31.5 o 63 o 125 o 250 o 500 o 1000 o 2000 o 4000 o 8000 o 16000 Figure 4-1 indicates the control room locations where noise measure-ments were taken. During both surveys, the reactor was at power and 12 - 14 people (including the data collectors) were in the control room. Both surveys were taken during the day shift. 4.4.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the noise source involved, a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. ~ Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant i plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the ambient noise task plan were annotated to indicate comp!!ance or noncompliance with the criteria.
4.4.5 Findings - I Table 4-4A presents the ambient noise data measured and documented during data ! collection. The upper left entry in each data location represent -noise measurements l f 4-31 L
l 415-1/0 l ? i l A NOT TO SCALE B l E H G F C I l l FIGURE 41 CONTROL ROOM hulSE SURVEY MICR0 PHONE LOCATIONS 4-32
I 415-1/0 LOCATION A B C D E* F G H* l' OTHER*
.s [ [
~
%% %X XXYAYA
Y YY Y Y f f 250 ggg gg g [ g ((
~
X XXXA%fAFA 2m gggggg[g [ g
- X XX XX XF AF A ,~
XXXXAXY/YA
==::::=::= == =:==:~ ~
TABLE 4 4 A SOUND SURVEY RECORD (dB (A)) F 4-33 l - .. . . .= _. .-.-,.~. ._- - _ _
.i
i . 415-1/0 noted during the first survey. The information in the lower right represents noise data collected during the second survey session. All data are expressed as dB(A). A series of peak noises was measured, source identified, and documented. Noise levels and their so'urces were as follows: dB (A-weigt:ted) Source 73 page 79 printer & door slam 81 printer & door slam 74 file drawer closed 84_ page & printer 84 page ) 78 laughter / conversation ! 77 page & printer 72 page
~
The findings of the ambient noise survey are presented in Table 4-4B " Ambient Noise Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall,11 criteria were applied to the ambient noise in the Davis-Besse control room. Of those criteria, seven (63%) were in compliance. Four (36%) were not in compliance. A total of four HEDs were generated which document all of the four criteria which were not met. In general, those HEDs address background noise levelt, auditory signals that are too loud and auditory signals that sound similar. lr C A e + 4 4-34 y ~p-- ---ye --r-' - - w-p
* '--W -
e - e y .my
l 415-1/0 1 TABLE 4-4B AbelENT NOISE SLRVEY FPOINGS & KDs EIERATED Page 1 of 2 l r L1.5.5 ALDITORY ENVROP4ENT - The
// J/ /
acoustic design of the control room should ensure that verbal communications between operators are not impaired; auditory signals are readily detected; and auditory distrac-tion, irritation, and fatigue of operators are minimized.
- a. BACKOROlko NOISE - Background I YES noise should not impair verbal com-munication between any two points in the primary operating area. Verbal communications between these points should be intelligible using normal or slightly raised voice levels.
- b. LIMIT - Background noise levels M YES should not exceed 65 dB(A).
- c. FURTER REDUCTIONS - Further I NO P.1.6 Pending -
l reductions in background noise may be reanalysis required where communications required batween the primary operating area and - other control room locations are neces-sary and voice transmission systems are not provided.
- d. NOISE DISTRACTIONS - Noise dis- O YES tractions generated either inside or outside the control room abould be j minimized.
i
- e. REVERBERATION TBE APO SOlko O YES ABSORPTION - The acoustical treat.
ment of the control room should limit reverberation time to one second or less. L2.2.1 USE OF ALEITORY SKNALS
- c. SELECTION i
l (1) Auditory signals should be ! YES { selected to avoid confusion with
. ambient control room noises.
(2)' Auditory signals should be I NO P.1.6-2 IIC selected to avoid interference
. with other auditory sources, including verbal communication.
e 4-35
~_ ._. _ _. . _ . . _ - _ _ _
4 415-1/0
, , TABLE 4-4B AnellENT NOISE SLRVEY FPOINGS & FEDS EPERATED Page 2 of 2
(
// ,/ / / ..
6.2.2.2 SIGNAL N
- b. Similar eJditory signals must not be I YES contradictory in meaning with one another.
- c. Auditory signals intended to alert the I NO P.I.6-4 IIC Assess in operator to a malfuention or failure Annunc. Study.
. must be different from routine signals such as bells, buzzers, and normal operating noises.
L2.2.6 SIGNAL NTENSITY
- b. COWORT - Auditory signal intensity I NO P.3.1.9 IC should not cause discomfort or ' ringing' in the ears.
- c. MAXIMLM INTENSITY - Auditory M YES signal intensities should not exceed 90
' dB(A), except for evacuation signals, which may be L:p to 115 cf3(A). i
?
s h a g 5 I i ) i s v. l 31,
- ~
k
~
v
% m 1 '4-36 '
n! :.
. g ..
'\ ' % .- ._
415-1/0 4.5 Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Survey This section documents the results of the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.5.1 Objectives The objectives of the HVAC survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which the HVAC in the control room conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the HVAC that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.5.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of the HVAC in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The topics evaluated include: o Temperature and humidity o /entilation. 4.5.3 Criteria The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, are: paragraphs 6.1.5.la and b and 6.1.5.2a and b. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-5. 4.5.4 Method 4.5.4.1 Data Collection
- a. All required data forms, plant documentatloa, engineering drawings, equipment, and materials were made available prior to conduct of this task. Permission was obtained for all required access to the control room.
- b. Data were collected using methods and procedures consisting of obser-vations, measurements, and document reviews.
4-37
415-1/0
- c. Plant documentation was reviewed to verify the items listed in the Document Review Checklist in the HVAC task plan. The required plant documents included:
HVAC system specifications Plant temperature and humidity Historical data. 4.5.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recordad information included the system involved, a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the HVAC task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the critoria.
4.5.5 Findings The findings of the HVAC survey are presented in Table 4-5 "HVAC Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall,'four criteria were applied to the HVAC systems in the <
- Davis-Besse control ronm. All criteria was in compliance and no HEDs were generated.
l i I l l'
'4-38
l l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-5
- HVAC SURVEY FINDINGS & l-EDs CEMRATED Page1of1 l
1 L1.5.1 TEh5'ERATURE AIO HLMIDITY
/ / o/ /
., / l
- a. COhFORT ZOPE - The climate con. M YES trol system should be capable of maintaining temperature and humidity within the shaded area comfort zone shown in Figure 8-1.
- b. TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL - D YES Air temperature at floor level and at head level should not differ by more than 100F,
&1.5.2 VENTILATION
- a. AIR QUANTITY - The ventilation D YFS system should be capable of ir troducing outdoor air into the control room at a rate of at at least 15 cuble feet per minute (cfm) per occupant.
- b. AIR VELOCITY - Air velocities in the D YES primary operating area should not exceed 45 feet per minute (fpm) measured at operator head level and should not produce a noticeable draught.
Y fflpfal&\ LP Da anmam-pan p g- To TM l# Y anamor kmtb ? l I t . 4 :
415-1/0 1 l 1 I 4.6 Emergency Equipment Survey This section documents the results of the emergency equipment survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.6.1 Objectives The objectives of the emergency equipment survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which the emergency equipment in the control room conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the emergency equipment that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.6.2 Scope The scope of the effort extended to the assessment of the emergency equipment in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The topics evaluated include: o Operators' protective equipment o Fire, radiation, and rescue equipment o Emergency equipment storage - o Emergency lighting o Emergency communications o Operator compatibility with emergency gear. The emergency equipment survey did not address emergency equipment lighting and communications outside the control room environment. l 4.6.3 Criteria ! The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, - l are: paragraphs 6.lA.la through 1, 6.1.4.2a through e, 6.1.4.3a and b, 6.1.5.4a and b, ! 6.2.1.8a through c(3), 6.4.1.ld. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-6.- 4-40
4 415-1/0 4 4.6.4 Method [ '4.6.4.1 Data Collection l 'a. Data were collected using the checklists contained in the emergency equipment task plan.
- b. The emergency equipment evaluated was limited to equipment stored in immediate proximity to the primary operating area; specifically, breathing apparatus and air packs. No protective clothing was available in the CR at the time of this survey (see HED #1.3-1).
- c. CR operators experienced in the use of the emergency equipment were
! observed donning and doffing the equipment. The operators were '- instructed to describe any problems encountered while using the equip-ment. Comments were noted and recorded. l 4.6.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure: l a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineerir., Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the equip-i ment involved (e.g., protective clothing), a description of the problem i including the NUREG-0700 - paragraph number of the criteria, and a i recommended solution. I b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or.more sources were contradictory, resolution of the i- conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with ccgnizant . plant personnel,
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the emergency equip-ment task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance
, with the criteria. 4.6.5 Findings The findings of the emergency equipment survey are presented in Table 4-6 l " Emergency Equipment Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall, 25 criteria were applied to the emergency equipment in the Davis-Besse control room. Of these,3 (12%) , were not applicable,20 (80%) were in compliance, and two (8%) were not in compliance. One HED was generated which documents the two criteria which were not met. In general, the HED addresses the lack of protective clothing in the control room. ? l
- 1. ~
i 4-41 r m ,
415-1/0 TABLE A-4 El ERENCY EQUIPDENT SLRVEY FPOINGS & l-EDs EbERATED Page 1 of 3 s.. / / J/ / 6.1.4.1 OPERATOR PROTECTIVE EQUIP. KENT
- a. TYPES OF EQUIPhENT - Protective O NO P.1.3 1 Ill equipment should include protective clothing and breathing apparatus.
- b. ANTiftOPOhETRY - Protective O YES clothing and breathing eaulpment should be compatible with riperator body sizes and tasks to provide ade-quote tactile sensitivity and ability to see, reach, move, communicate, and hear,
- c. PERIODIC CFECKS - Operator pro- D YES tective equipment should be periodi-cally checked to determine if it is in good condition.
- d. QUANTITY - There should be pro- O YES tective equipment available in sufficient quantitles and sizes for the required number of operators.
- e. MARKING - Protective clothing sizes O YES should be clearly identifiable.
- f. EXPEPOABl_ES - There should be an N/A N/A adequate supply of personal protection equipment expendables, such as filters.
- g. ACCESSELITY - All protective O iv; P.I.3-1 III equipment should be easily and readily accessible.
- h. TRAINING - Operators should be we!! D YES practiced in donning protective equip-ment.
I. PROCEDURL'i - Instructions for don. D YES ning, dof fing, and controlling personal protective equipment should be provided.
=
? l l l t 4-42
415-1/0 TABLE 4-4 EERENCY EQUtPENT StJtVEY FDOINGS & FEDS EERATED Page 2 of 3 s_. / / J/ / 6.1.4.2 FIRE, RADIATION, APO RESCtX EQUIPENT
- a. PERIODIC CFECKS - All equipment D YES should be periodically checked to deter-mine if it is in good condition.
- b. AC&SSIBILITY - All equipment O YES should be easily and readily accessible.
- c. TRAINING - Operators should be D YES trained in the use of all emergency equipment, i
- d. PRO &DLRES - There should be a D YES written, administratively approved procedure for each type of emergency or cornbination of emergencies,
- e. AUTOMATIC WARNING SYSTEM - O YES There should be an automatic fire '
warning system for control room fires. 6.1.4.3 EERTNCY EQUIPfCNT STOR-AT
- a. PROPER STORAE - Provision should O YES be made for the orderly storage, in the control room, of emergency equipment that is needed by control room person-nel.
- b. AC&SS - The storage location (si may 0 YES be away from the primary operating area but should be accessible, clearly marked, and known to all personnel.
, 6.1.5.4 EERENCY LIGiTING
- a. AUTOMATIC ACTION - A control O VES room emeroency lighting system should be automatically activated and immedi-ately available upon failure of the nor-mal control room lighting system. This system should be independent of any other plant lighting system that is available in the control roorr I
l l l b l 4-43
E 415-1/0 TABLE 4-6
- EERENCY EQUIPEPR SURVEY FNDINGS & EDs TERATED Page 3 of 3 l
l s.o . / / J/ / 6.1.5.4 EERENCY LIGHTNG (cont'd)
- b. OPERABILITY - Failure of the normal O YES control room lightirv) system should not ,
degrade operability of the emergency lighting system. 6.2.1.8 EMERTPCY COhNtNICATIONS
- a. BACMUP EQUIPENT - Previsions O YES should be made to assure complete internal and external communications capabilities durino emergencies
- b. EQUIPENT USABILITY - Communi. O YES cations equipment should be usable by personnel wearing protective near with-out impediment to their tasks.
- c. VOICE COMMLNICATIONS WITH MASKS (1) Emergency face masks should be N/A N/A equipped with diaphraoms that are specially designed to transmit speech.
(2) The diaphraome should be able to N/A N/A separate vcuce from exhaust valve action. (3) If not equipped with diaphragms, O YES ! masks should be equipped with electronic speech systems which pick up the voice with an internal microphone and transmit it to a loudspeaker attached outside the , mask. l 6.4.1.1 TERAL PRINCIPLES
- d. COMPATELITY WITH EERTPCY TAR - If used while wearing protee. O YES tive equipment (e.g., oxygen masks, protective gloves), controls should bet (1) Easy to identify.
(2) Easy to activate. O' 4-44
415-1/0 4.7 Maintainability Survey , This section documents the results of the maintainability survey conducted in the ! main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.7.1 Objectives The objectives of the maintainability survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which components with integral lighting are operator maintainable as defined in NUREG-0700.
- b. Assess the degree to which display failures are recognizable by the operator as defined in NUREG-0700.
- c. Assess to wh:t degree spare parts, operating expendables and special tools are available and adequate for use by the operator during operator maintenance activities as defined in NUREG-0700.
- b. To identify and document any features in the control room operator maintainability design that do not conform to the criteria defined in NUREG-700.
4.7.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of control room design features defined as maintenance performed by the operators in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The maintainability topics evaluated include: o Spare parts o Operating expendables o Tools o General requirements for voice communications systems o Lamp replacement of annunciator panels o Provisions for lamp failure on legend and nonlegend indicator lights o Characteristics and problems of indicator lights o General characteristics of graphic recorders. The Maintainability Survey did not address the general control room or plant design for maintainability. 4-45
415-1/0 4.7.3 Criteria The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, are: paragraphs 6.1.1.Sa through f,6.2.1.lb, 6.3.31c(1) through (3), 6.4.3.3c(1) through (4), 6.5.3.la(1) through (3) and c(2), 6.5.4.le and f. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-7. 4.7.4 Method 4.7.4.1 Data Collection
- a. Data were collected using the checklist contained in the Maintainability Task Plan,
- b. Since operating experience was required to assess compliance with the various maintainability guidelines, the necessary data were collected through interviews of CR operators.
- c. All discrepancies were noted and recorded.
4.7.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering 4 Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the equip-ment involved (e.g., bulbs, chart paper, inking pens, etc.), a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the maintainability task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
4.7.5 Findings The findings of the maintainability survey are presented in Table 4-7 " Maintain-l ability Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall, 20 criteria were applied in the maintainability survey in the Davis-Besse control room. Of those criteria 3 (15%) were in compliance. Seventeen (85%) were not in compliance. A total of 12 HEDs were generated which document all of the 17; criteria which were not met. In general, those HEDs address the lack of expendables or spare parts in the control room, lamp test, and ,
- lamp replacement.
l l 4-46
. , , , - -~ -
) 415-1/0 TABLE 4-7 MANTAINABILITY SLRVEY FPOINGS & EDs EERATED Page 1 of 3
// ,/ / / ..
6.1.1.5 SPARE PARTS OPERATNG EXPDOAm N, APO YOOLS
- a. SLPPLY - There should be an ade- I NO P.I.7-1 IC quate supply of expendables and spare parts: fuses, bulbs, Ink and inking pens, recorder charts, printer paper, etc
- b. ACESunir ITY - Expendables and I NO P.1.7-1 IC spare parts should be readily accessible,
- c. TOOLS - All necessary or special I YES replacement tools needed to Install expendables and spare parts should be available.
- d. STORAE SPAN - There should be i NO P.1.1-2 !!!
adequate storage space for expendables and spare parts.
- e. CODING - When different types, I NO P.1.7-5 IC sizes, or styles of expendables and spare parts are required, they should be clearly and distinctively marked to '
avoid misapplication.
- f. NVENTORY - Records should be kept I NO P.1.7-6 IC as to the status of expendables and spare parts.
6.2.1.1 TERAL REQUIRDENTS FOR VOl& COhWLNICATIONS SYSTEMS ,
- b. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE TESTS - ! YES These should be performed on all com-munication systems to ensure that the system is normally operative and of fective under changes in emblent noise levels that may have cccurred since the last check.
1 .I 4-47
415-1/0 TABLE 4-7 MAINTAINABILITY SURVEY FIPOINGS & FEDS KFERATED Page 2 of 3
~
.. // ,1 / /
6.3.3.1 VISUAL APNUNCIATOR PAfELS c4 LA W REPLA hENT (1) If a lamp replacement requires ! NO P.1.7-8 III Address in legend tile removal, there should Annunciator be a way to ensure that the tile is Study. repla:sd in the correct location. (2) Lamp replacement should not ! NO P.1.7-9 IC subject the operator to a shock hazard. (3) Operator sids should be provided i NO P.1.7-3 - Delete - Tool is if needed for lamp replacement. available 6.4.3.3 LETPO PUSFSUTTONS
- c. PROVISION FOR LAW FAILLRE (1) A lamp test or duallamp/ dual I NO P.1.7 10 IA Address in filament capability abould be . Special Study provided.
(2) Lamps within the pushbutton ! YES should be replaceable from the front of the panel. (3) Legend pushbuttons should not i NO P.1.7 11 IA short out during lamp replace-ment or be susceptible to inad-vertent activation during the process of lamp removal or replacement. (4) Legend covers should be keyed to I NO P.1.7 12 !!! prevent the possibility of inter-changing the covers. 6.5.3.1 CHARACTERISTICS APO PROBLEMS OF LIGHT DOICATORS
- a. PRECAUTIONS TO AS$tRE AVAILABLITY (1) Deal-bulb or dual-filament light I NO P.1.7-10 IC Address in assemblies should be used. Special Study e
e 4-48
. =. - _ - _. - - .
415-1/0 TABLE 4-7 MAINTANABILITY SLJtVEY FPOINGS & KDs EERATED Page 3 of 3 ? 6.5.3.1 CHARACTERISTICS Ato
. // J/ /
PROBLEMS & LIGHT NOICATORS (Cont's0
- a. PRECAUTIONS TO ASSLRC AVAILABLITY (Cont'to (2) Bulb-test capability should be ! NO P.1.7 10 IA Address in provided. Special Study (3) Design should encourage immedi- I NO P.1.7 11 1A ste replacement of burned-out bulbs by providing for rapid and convenient bulb replacement with power on and without hazard to personnel or equipment.
i
- c. PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID h4 SINTER-4 PRETATION (2) Provisions (design or procedural) I NO P.1.7-l' 111
- should be made to prevent inter-changing indicator lenses.
6.5.4.1 NERAI. CHARACTERISTICS & GRAPHC RECOr4DERS j 1 NO P.1.7 1 IC
- e. AVAILABILITY & EXPEPOABLES -
Paper, Ink, and other operator-maintained expendables should be provided and accessible in the control room. l f. EASE & ROUTDE REPLDESH- I NO P.1.7-7 IC l >ENT - Recorder design should permit quick and easy replenishment of paper and ink. e t e e 4-49
l 415-1/0 4.8 Communications Survey This section documents the results of the communications survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.8.1 Cbjectives The objectives of the communications survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which the communication systems in the control room conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the communication systems that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.8.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of the communications survey design in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The topics evaluated include: o Requirements for voice communications o Conventional-powered telephone systems o Walkie-talkie transceivers o Announcing systems o Intercom system o Emergency communications o Auditory signals o Signal meanings o Auditory coding techniques o Signal Intensity o Reliability of auditory alarms. Criteria pertaining to auditory signals are also assessed under the noise survey and the annunciator survey. 4.8.3 Criteria . The criteria app!!ad in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, f are paragraphs 6.1.3.lb; 6.2.1.1c(1) and (2); 6.2.1.2a through e; 6.1.1.3a through e; 4-50
415-1/0 6.2.1.4a through e; 6.2.1.5a through c; 6.2.1.6a through f; 6.2.1.7a and b; 6.2.1.8a through c; 6.2.2.la through c; 6.2.2.2a through c; 6.2.2.3a through e; 6.2.24a and b; 6.2.2.4a and b; 6.2.2.Sa and b; 6.2.2.6a through c; 6.2.2.7a through c. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-8. 4.8.4 Method 4.8.4.1 Data Collection
- a. The results of the operator interviews were reviewed to identify any potential problem areas in the design and/or operation of the various Davis-Besse communications systems.
- b. Data were collected using the checklists contained in the communi-cations Task Plan. Data were collected primarily through direct observation of the performance characteristics (e.g., intelligibility) of the various communications. As necessary, system documents (e.g.,
technical specifications for pubtle address system) were reviewed to augment or corroborate observations. 4.8.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the system involved (e.g., Gal-Tronics system, telephone system, meters, chart recorders, etc.), a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the commun'. cations task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
4.8.5 Findings The findings of the communications survey are presented in Table 4-8
" Communications Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall, 86 criteria were applied to the communications systems in the Davis-Besse control room. Of these, 29 (33%) were not applicable 48 (55%) were in compliance and nine (10%) were not in compliance. A total of 5 HEDs were generated which document all of the 9 criteria which w'ere not met. In general, those HEDs address telephone cords in traffic path and annunciator alarm not directional.
4-51
415-1/0 TABLE 4-8 COMA.NICATIONS SURVEY FROINGS & EDs EERATED Page 1 of 12 s. 6.1.3.1 LNIT NTEGRATION APO NTER-
/ /t J / /
FERENE
- b. SENIOR OPERATOR STATION - N/A N/A Senior operators who supervise and assist operations of more than one unit need to be stationed so that they can communicate effectively with opera-tors in each unit and have an unob.
structed visual path to the control boards of each unit. 6.2.1.1 EERAL REQUIREENTS FOR VOl& COMMLNICATION SYSTEMS
- c. EMERENCY KSSAES (1) OUTGOING - Priority proce- O YES dures should be established for the transmission of emergency messages from the control room by any of the communication systems.
(21 INCOMING - Procedures should O YES be established for handling com-municatione during an emergency and these procedures must be known by all operstors. I 6.2.1.2 CONVENTIONAL-POWERED TELE-PHOE SYSTEMS ,
- s. FREQUENCY RESPONSE - The pow- I YES
- ' ered telephone system must provide good frequency response in that portion of the auditory spectrum most essential for intelligibility. Standard telephone bandpass is acceptable (200-3300 Hz).
- b. HAPOSETS - Design should incor. O YES potete the following features:
(1) Size and shape should be compett. ble with operator's hand size and mouth-ear distance (standard telephone dimensions acceptable). A 4-52
415-1/0 l TABLE 4-8 COMMLNICATIONS SURVEY FPOINGS &'FEOs TIERATED Page 2 of 12 s_. / / J/ / 6.2.1.2 b.(Cont'd) (2) Should maintain firm ear contact O YES by receiver while transmitter is positioned to receive voice waves directly from mouth. (3) Cords should be of nonkink or O YES self-retracting type. (4) Cords should be of sufficient O YES length to permit reasonable operator mobl!!ty. (5) Cords should be positioned so es O NO P.2.1-2 III Review and to avoid entanolino critical con- replace cords trols or endangering passing traf- as necessary. fic. (6) Vertically mounted handset O NO P.2.1 3 !!! cradles should be designed and located to prevent the handset from being knocked out of the cradle by passing traf fic. (7) Where multiple telephone instru- O YES ments are located cl*ose together j ' (e.g., on a single desk) they should be coded to indicate circuit or function. (0) If a press-to-talk button is used, O YES the button should be convenient to both lef t and right hand opera-tion,
- c. SWITCHING PECHAMSM -
l (1) Switching should be designed O YES , and/or programmed to minimize j delay in making desired connec-tions under both normal and emergecy conditions. (2) Switchina should be programmed O YES to give the control room auto-matic priority of access to the switching system. j d. TELEPHOPE RINGING - Loudness of O NO P.7.1 4 til No eation ringing should be adjustable at the Indi required, vidual telephone Instrument. 4-53
- . . . a
415-1/0 l l TABLE 44
- COhMLNICATIONS SLRVEY FDOINGS & KDe GEKRATED Page 3 of 12 e.. / / J/ /
6.2.1.2 (Cont'd)
- e. A>NOLNCING (J5E - When tronomit. N/A N/A ters, within the powered telephone
! system, are used as the microphone input to the announcinq system, the trenomitter ohnuld be compatible with the rest of the announcing system. 1 i 6.2.1.3 SOLND40WERED TELEPHOPE SYSTEMS
- e. SOtND QUALITY - Within engineer.
Ing constreinte imposed by sound. powering, the system should provides (1) Good frequency response in the N/A N/A band from 200 to 3300 Hz (sten-derd telephone quality). , (2) In. phose feedback to the user. N/A N/A
- b. KADSETS - Headsets should reflect the following deelgo requirementes
- (1) Earphone cushioning to provide N/A N/A comfort for extended periods of l wear. Earphones should cover the outer ear but without causing j uncomfortable pressure.
(2) Supporting structure for eerpleces N/A N/A should not impose discomforts of welght, concentrated pressures, , or metal contact with the skin. (3) The earpiece should be held N/A N/A . firmly in place, yet be easy to j remove. (4) Ideelly, headsets should provide N/A N/A hands-free operation. This may have to be compromleed, how-ever, to accommodate a push-to. talk switch in enticipation of poselble use in areas of high 4 emblent notee. 4 e e 9 re- i e *- e e- ++et-4 e as,-- 4-54
. _ ~ ~ _ - - - - . ... .. - . - .. .
415-1/0 TABLE 4-8 CObe4LNCAT10N5 SLRVEY FDONGS & )EDs EPERATED Page 4 of 12
// .i //
~ _. / 6.2.1.'Ib (ContNf) (5) Blaural headsete shoukd be avell. N/A N/A oble for use by control room per-sonnel when they are required to leave the control room for plant areas with high emblent nolee levels and communicate with the control room from these areas using sound-powered communt-cation equipment.
; f6) A well-marked and accessible N/A N/A ! place should be provided for head-set stowage.
I
- c. RINGING -
(1) Need for ringing must be deter. N/A N/A mined for the Individual plant depending on the sound-powered phone procedures, t (2) If ringing le not Installed, then the N/A N/A user should be provided capability for directly switching the sound-powered transmitter to the paging system so that a desired party con be called to the line.
- d. JACK PROVISIOPE -
(1) Plug-in jocks for the sound- N/A N/A powered system should be pro-vided within the control room. (2) Jacks should be located close to N/A N/A the work stations to prevent need { for unduly long cords. 4
- 0) Jocke should not accommodete N/A N/A pluge of the conventionally powered phone system, in order to i evold wrong Instrument eystem connections.
- e. SWITCl@eG -
(1) The requiremente for switching N/A N/A must be esseeeed for the Individuel plant depending on procedures for use of eeund-powered phones. . 4-55
415-1/0 l TABLE 4-8 CObe4LMCAT10NS SURVEY FPONGS & leos EPERATED Page 5 of 12 6.2.1.3 e. (Cosft) e_. // J/ / (2) Patch eenels, when used. should N/A N/A l be conspicuously marked and , located in reasonably acceselble places. These requiremente are partleularly critical in back-penel stees. (3) A complete set of corde should be N/A N/A provided at each panel if cord. type petching is used. 6.2.1.4 WALKIE. TALKIE TRANSCEIVERS
- e. SOLNO QUALITY - Within the engl.
neering constrainte imposed by radio frequency spectrum evellability and by design for esey portability, walkle. - talkies should reallre the same quellty des! red throughout all of the communi. catione systems, namely: i ft) Good frequency response, prefer. O YES ably to telephone standerde of 200 to 3300 Hz. (2) Suffielent dynamle range end gain O YES to handle instantaneous pressures . found in speech and develop necessary signal level et the headphone or loudspeaker, j b. AREA COVERAE -
; (1) Modulation and a radio frequency 0 YES l ehould be chosen, se FCC rego.
I lettone permit, to provide broad. area walkle-talkie communtention to the control room. One conald. , eretion for frequency selection i should be radio. wave penetretton of metal or reinforced concrete berriers, which at certeln fre. quencies would tend to attenuate or bounce the signal. 1 I
- l 4-56
415-1/0 TABLE 4-8 COhMLNCATIONS SLRVEY FPOINGS & EDs EERATED Page 6 of 12 6.2.1.4b (Cont'd) s-- // J/ / (2) Use of walkle-talkies should be O YES prohibited in areas close to low-leve! analog or digital equipment unless EMI noise susceptibl!!ty tests have been conducted that demonstrate that equipment is not of fected by the frequency bands used.
- c. PACKAGING -
(D To the extent permitted by design O YES for effective electrical /RF" func-tion, walkie-talkies should be small light, and easy to carry. (2) Their use should leave one hand, O YES and preferably both, evallable most of the time for other tasks. (3) The microphone should be inte. O YES grated into the transceiver pack-age,
- d. PARTY IDENTIFICATION - When O YES there are more than two parties on a channel operating at separate locations, procedures must provide for unambig-uous identification of the speaker.
- e. BATTERY REPLEMSMNT -
(1) A supply of fresh replacement N/A N/A , batteries should be stowed in an accessible, well marked space, e (2) The stock should be kept large N/A N/A enough to support long periods of continuous operation in case of l emergency. 6 4-57 L-
415-1/0 TABLE 4-( COMMUNICATIONS SURVEY FDOINGS & KDe TERATED Peep 7 of 12 e. 6.2.1.5 FIXED-BASE LAF TRANSCEIVERS
// J/ /
- a. SICNAL QUALITY - Unlike walkie- N/A N/A talkies, fixed-base UHF treneceivers are not conettsined by being designed for portability. Therefore, they should readily achieve good voice Intelligl.
bility, provided by edequate frequency response at least within telephone standards of 200 to 3300 Hr. They should exhibit aufficient dynamic range to handle instantaneous pressures found in speech and develop sufficient gain to develop the necessary signal level at the loudspeaker,
- b. GAIN - Gain should be adjustable, but N/A N/A the gain control should be limited so
, that even at its lowest setting an aud. Ible alqnal le still presented.
- c. PROCEDLRES - Procedures should be O YES i established fand conspicuously posted) for use of the system, 6.2.1.6 APNOLNCING SYSTEMS
- a. INTELLIGIBILITY APO COVERAGE -
(1) Intelligibility reoutres the Inte. I YES i gration of carefully selected com. D ponente (microphones, emplifiers, and loudspeakers)into en overall system providing good frequency i response in the audio band which le critical for intet!!gibility. At a minimum, telephone quellty is required (200 to 3300 Hrh higher Intelligibility le achieved by a band of 200 to 6100 Hr.
- (2) Coverage depende on loudspeaker O YES location. Adequate coverage requires that speakers should be
- pieced so that they are ovellable in all necessary erees and that there are no " dead spoto within any eree.
e l 4-58
415-1/0 TABLE 4-8 COMMLb8 CATIONS SURVEY FPOINGS &lEDs GEPERATED Page 8 of 12 6.2.1.6 (Cont'd)
- s. / lJ/ /
- b. MICROPHOPE CHARACTERISTICS -
- 0) Frequency response should be O YES compatible with that of the rest of the system.
(2) If the powered telephone system N/A N/A is used to provide microphone input to the announcing system, the telephone system should con-tain transmitters of quality com-patible with that of the announc-Ing system. (3) Microphones should have high O YES sensitivlty to speech signals. (4) Dynamic range should permit 50 0 YES dB variations in signal input. (5) Microphone input should be oro- O YES vided within the control room.
- c. LOLOSPEAKER LOCATION (1) Speakers should be provided in the O YES control room and other areas where control room personnel operations might be (e.g., rest-i rooms, eating areas, locker rooms, etc.).
i (2) Speakers should be placed to yield O YES en intelligible level of signal throughout the area.
- d. SPEECH CLARITY - Since proper O YES speech over an announcing system dif-fers from normal conversation, operators should be famillerized with the proper way to speak on the announcing system.
- e. LOLDSPEAKER VOLLAE -
(1) Speaker volume should be O YES
, adjusted to ensure that speaker communleations will not prevent detection of auditory alarms, i
I l l i 4-59
415-1/0 l 1 l TABLE 4-8 COMMLNICATIONS SURVEY FROINGS &TEDa TIERATED Page 9 of 12 - s.. / / J/ / 6.2.1.6e (Cont'd) (2) Audio gain controls (if provided) O YES should be !1mited to preclude reducing volume below an audible level.
- f. PRIORITY - Control room inputs to O YES the plant announcing system should have priority over any other input. The control room input should be capable of interrupting an announcement in pro-gress, or of bypassing queued announce-ments.
6.2.1.7 POINT-TO-POINT NTERCOM SYS-TEMS
- a. INTELLIGIBILITY - At a minimum, I YES the intercom system should provide l transmission of the voice spectrum to telephone standards (200 to 3300 Hz).
- b. GAIN ADJUSTENT - Gain should be O YES adjustable at each Intercom unit, but adjustability should be limited to pre.
clude reducino volume below an audible level. 6.2.1.8 EERGENCY cop 44LNICAT10NS
- a. BACKUP EQUIPENT - Provisions O YES should be made to assure complete internal and external communications capabilities during emergencies. ,
- b. EQUIPMENT USABILITY - Communl- O YES cations equipment should be usable by personnel wearing protective gear with-out Impedirient to their tasks.
- c. VOICE COMMLNICATIONS WITH I, MASKS (1) Emergency f ace, masks should be N/A N/A equipped with diaphragms that are specially designed to transmit speech.
l . [. l 4-60
415-1/0 TABLE 4-8 COhe4LNICATIONS SLRVEY FPOINGS & IEDe GEPERATED Page 10 of 12 _. / / J/ / 6.2.1.Sc (Cont'd) (2) The diaphragms should be able to N/A N/A separate voice from exhaust valve action. (3) If not equipped with diaphragms, O YES masks should be equipped wit 5 electronic speech systems which pick up the voice with an internal microphone and transmit it to a loudspeaker attached outside the
; mask.
6.2.2.1 (JSE OF AUDITORY SIGNALS
- a. DEDICATED USE - Systems used to N/A N/A transmit nonverbal auditory signals should be used only for that purpose.
- b. LOCALIZATION - Auditory signals O NO P.2.b9 !!!
should provide localization cues that i direct operators to those control room work stations where operator attention is required.
- c. SELECTION -
5 ' IIC (1) Auditory signals should be O NO P.1.6-2
! selected to avoid confusion with ambient control room noises.
a (2) Auditory signals should be O YES selected to avoid interference with other auditory sources, including verbal communication. 6.2.2.2 SIGNAL hEAMNG 4 e. The meaning of each auditory signal O YES should be clear and unambiguous. Similar auditory signals must not be O YES b. contradictory in meaning with one another. I
- c. . Auditory signals Intended to alert the O YES i
operator to a malfunction or fatture j must be different from routine signals such as bells, buzzers, and normal operating noises. . , 4-61 f
415-1/0 TABLE 4-il COMMLNICATIONS SURVEY FROINGS & KDs TERATED Page 11 of 12 _. / / d/ / 6.2.2.3 AUDITORY CODING TECH 4GLES
- a. DISTINCTIVE CODING - Coding O YES methods should be distinct and unem-blguous, and should not confilet with other auditory signals.
- b. PtLSE CODING - Auditory signals N/A N/A may be pulse coded by repetition rate, but the number of codes should be limited (2 or M. Repetition rates should be sufficiently separated to ensure operator discrimination,
- c. FREQUENCY CHANGE CODING - If N/A N/A modulation of the frequency (Hz) of a signal denotes information, center fre-quencies should be between 500 and 1000 Hz.
- d. DISCRETE-FREQUENCY CODING - N/A N/A Discrete-frequency codes may be used for audible signal coding. Frequencies should be broad band f1100 Hz) and widely spaced within the 200-5001 Hz rerge. No more then 5 segetate fre.
qt ancies should be used.
- e. CODING BY INTENSITY - Coding by 0 YES intensity is not recommended.
, 6.2.2.4 PROPAGATION OF SKNALS
- a. DIRECTION OF SOLND - Sound O NO P.2.1-12 111 sources (spe skers, burrers, ete.1 should direct sound toward the center of the primary operating eres.
- b. AUDIBILITY - Auditory alest and O NO P.1.6-2 IIC warnino signals should be audible in all parts of the control room.
6.2.2.5 FREQUENCY
- a. RANGE - Auditory signal fregaencies O YES Compliance should be between 200 and 500 Hz. The essessed in optimum frequency range is between Noise Survey 500 and 3000 Hr.
4-62
415-1/0 TABLE 4-8 COMMLNCATIONS SURVEY FNDINGS & EOs EERATED Page 12 of 12
. / lJ/ / ..
6.2.2.5 (Cont'd
- b. BAf0WlOTH - Wide-band auditory 0 YES signals of approximately 200 Hz should be used.
6.2.2.6 SIGNAL NTENSITY
- a. OEERAL - In general, a system O YES capability to develop a signal-to-noise ratio of 20 dB in at least one octave
, band between 200 an 5000 Hz should be adequate for all control rooms and environments. This algnal-to-noise ratio capability should apply throughout the primary operating area. However, a 20 2 difforential may not be neces-sary for all signale and all environ. ments. A normal value of 10 @(A) above averaga ambient noise is generally adequate (See Guideline 6.3.2.1.)
- b. COWORT - Auditory signalintenalty 0 NO P.3.1-9 IC Assessed in should not cauee discomfort or " ringing" Annunciator in the ears. Survey,
- c. MAXIMLN INTENSITY - Auditory M YES Assessed in signal intensities should not exceed 90 Noise Survey.
dB(A), except for evacuation signals, which may be up to 115 s(A). 6.2.2.7 RELIABILITY
- a. FAILURE OF ALARM CIRCLATRY - O YES ,
Failure of auditory signal circultry should not adversely affect plant equip. ment.
- b. FALSE ALARMS - Auditory alarm O NO P.3.1 21 !!C l eystems should be designed so that false alarms are evolded.
- c. SYSTEM TEST - Auditory signal sys. O YES tem test capabilities should be pro-vided.
I e 4-63
415-1/0 , 4.9 Annunciator Survey This section documents the results of the annunciator survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.9.1 Objectives The objectives of the annunciator survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which the annunciator system in the control room conforms to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the annunciator system that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.9.2 Scope , The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of the annunciator system design in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in'NUREG-0700. The topics evaluated include: o General system design o Alarm parameter selection o 4 Fiest out annunciators o Prioritization o Cleared alaIrms g o Signal detact5on' i iki o Auditory con!ng Visual annu'ocidtor panels ' ~ o - o Visual alarm,recorinition an61dentificatida .. s O) o Arrangsme afdb riy ' tiles # i 7, o Tile l$ger.ds / '9 - s . ' o - Tile readability / I
# *o- ' Annuncletoi, controls ' / ' .~
7.n . so Annuncistor resporae procydures. .g N' . 4.9.3 Criteria *A4. x . - -
; W
-^
! : # . The criteria, applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-07.00 paragraph number,
.i. ,a p are p,aragraphs'6.3.lg 6.3.1.2a througg d(2); 6.3.1.3a through d; 6.3.1.4a and b; 6.3.1.Sa through b(3); 6.3.2.th.th'ro' ugh f; 6.3.3.lb through b(2); 6.3.2.2a and b; 6.3.3.la through c(3);
, y a" 3. ; 4 , )
3- .
~
'a ,; ..
/
3
., ,,g
d 415-1/0 6.3.3.2a through f(2); 6.3.3.3a through f; 6.3.3.4a through d; 6.3.3.5a through d(6); 6.3.4.la through d(2); 6.3.4.2a through c; 6.3.4.3a and b; 6.5.1.6a through c(2) and e(1) through 3(3); and 6.6.6.2a, b, and c. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-9. 4.9.4 Method 4.9.4.1 Data Co!! action
- a. Data collected during the operator interviews were reviewed to identify any potential problems in the design or operation of the annunciator system.
- b. Data were collected using the checklists contained in the annunciator task plan.
- c. Data were collected primarily through measurement and direct obser-vation of the annunciator system in the CR. As necessary, system documentation (e.g., P&lDs, electrical drawings, annunciator response procedures) were reviewed to augment and corroborate observations and interviews.
4.9.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. P-ecorded information included the compo-nents or system involved, a obscription of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended 4
solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution o'f the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the annunciator task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
4.9.5 Findings The findings of the annunciator survey are presented in Table 4-9 " Annunciator Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." l Overall, 98 ' criteria were applied to the annunciator system in the Davis-Besse control room. Of these, 25 (26%) were not applicable, 38 (39%) were in compliance and thirty-five (36%) were not in complianco. A total of 30 FEDS were generated which document all of the 35 criteria which were not
~
l met. 'In general, those HEDs' address auditory signals,-annunciator controls, distinctive i ebding of annunciator tiles, nuisance alarms, alarm messages, -multi-input alarms, annunciator response procedures, and annunciator tile grouping and'prioritization. 4-65 l
415-1/0 TABLE 4-9 ANNLNCIATOR SURVEY FPOINGS & KDs GDERATED Page 1 of 14 s.. // J/ / 6.3.1.1 EERAL SYSTEM DESIQ4 Annunciator warning systems are the primary D YES control room interf ace to immediately alert the operator to out-of-tolerance changes in plant condition. Annunciator warning sys-tems consist of three ma'or subsystemas (a) en auditory alert subsystem,(b) a visual alarm subystem, and (c) en operator response subsystem (see Exhibit 6.3 1). Together, these three subsystems should be designed to provide a preferred operational sequence for annunciator warnings as indicated in Exhibit 6.3.2 - 6.3.1.2 ALARM PARA >ETER SELECTION
- e. SET POINTS - The limits or set points for initiating the annunciator warning system should be established to meet the following goals (1) Alarms should not occur so fre- I NO P.3.1-21 !!C Assess in quently as to be considered a Annunc. Study.
nuisance by the operators. (2) However, set points should be I YES established tc g!ve operators adequate time to respond to the warning condition before a serious problem develops. i b. GEICRAt ALARMS - , (1) Alarms that require the control I NO P.3.1-24 IIC Assess in room operator to direct en Annunc. Study. euxiliary operator to a given plant location for specific information should be evolded. i (2) If general alarms must be used, I YES they should only be used for cord ditions that allow adequate time for auxiliary operator action and subsequent control room operator action. f . L 4-66
415-1/0 TABLE 4 9 ANNLNCIATOR SURVEY FINDNGS & KDa OEERATED Page 2 of 14 l l 6.3.1.2 (Cont'd) e_. /lJ / /
- c. MLA.TICHAPNL OR SHARED ALARMS -
(1) Annunciators withinputs from D NO P.3.1 37 !!A Asses in more than one plant parameter Annunc. Study. set point should be evolded. Multl. input alarms that sum. martre single. Input annunciators elsewhere in the control room are an exception. f21 Where multi Input annunciators I NO P.3.1 28 !!C Assess in must be used, an alarm printout Annunc. Study, capability should be provided. The specifies of the alarm should P.3.1 29 !!C Being addressed be printed on en alarm typer with in computer aufficient speed and buffer design program. storage to capture all alarm data. (3) A refissh capability should be i NO P.3.1 27 IIC Assess in provided to allow subsequent Annunc. Study, alarms to activate the auditory alert mechanism and reflash the visual tile even though the first alarm may not have Been cleared.
- d. MLLTI.LNIT ALARMS -
(1) Alarms for any shared plant sys. N/A N/A tems should be dup!!cated in all control rooms. (2) When an item of shared equ!p N/A N/A ment is being operated from one centrol room a status display or signal should be provided in all other control rooms which could
- potentially control this eaulp.
ment. 6.3.1.3 FRST OUT AbNLNCIATORS
- a. REACTOR SYSTEM -
(1) A separate first out panel should O NO P.3.1 30 !!C Assess in be provided for the reactor sys Annunc. Study. tem. 4-67
415-1/0 TABLE 4-9 , APNLNCIATOR SURVEY FNMNGS & EDs CEERATED Page 3 of 14
- s. / / J/ /
6.3.1.3a (Cont'd) (2) The first out panel should consist I YES of separate annunciator t!!es for each of the automatic reactor trip functions. (3) In the event of 2 reactor trip, the I NO P.3.1-30 IIC tile associated with the event should illuminate, and no other,
- b. TURBINE-TERATOR SYSTEM - A O NO P.3.1-31 !!!
separate first out panel, similar in function to the reactor system panel,is recommended.
- c. POSITION - First out panels atould be N/A N/A located directly above the main control work station for the system.
- d. APPLICATION - First out annun N/A N/A clators should conform to the general auditory, visual, and operator response guidelines of this section.
6.3.1.4 PRIORITIZATION A. LEVELS OF PRIORITY - (1) Prioritiration should be accom O YES plished using a relatively small f 2-4) number of priority levels. (2) Prioritiration should be based on D NO P.3.1 39 !!C Assess in a continuum of importance, Annunc. Study. severity, or need for operator action in one or more dimensions, . e.g., likelihood of reactor trip, release of radiation. Exhibit 6.3-3 provides an example of prioritiration based on three levels of prioritiration.. l i I f l - f.- l 4-68
1 415-1/0 TABLE 4-9 . AffAJNCIATOR SURVEY FIPOINGS & l{Ds CEFERATED Pege 4 of 14 I l L3.1.4 (Cont'd) s-- / J/ /
- b. PRIORITY CODING - .
(1) Some method for coding the I NO P.3.1-39 IIC Assess in visual signals for the various annunc. study priority levels should be employed. Acceptable methods for priority coding include color, position, shape, or symbolic cod-ing. (2) Auditory signal coding for priority I NO P.3.1-39 IIC levelis also appropriate. See Guideline 6.2.2.3 for recom-mended coding techniques. 03.1.5 CLEARED ALARMS
- a. AUDITORY SIGNAL - Cleared alarms O NO P 3.1-41 IIC should have a dedicated, distinctive audible signal which should be of finite duration. -
- b. VISUAL SKNAL - The individual tile O YES should have one of the following (1) A special flash rate (twice or one-half the normal flash rate is preferred, to allow discriml-nation), or (2) Reduced brightness, or N// N/A (3) A speelst color, conalstent with the overall control room color coding scheme, produced by a differently colored bulb tnhind the tile.
6.3.2.1 SKMAL DETECTION
- a. NTENSITY - The signal should be M YES such that operators een re!! ably discern the signal above the ambient control room noise. A nominal value of 10 dB(A) above average ambient noise is generally adequate.
8 . I 4-69
415-1/0 TABLE 4-9 APNLNCIATOR SLRVEY FPOINGS & FEDS EfERATED Page 5 of 14
.s s.
// ,/ / , / .
63.2.1 (Cont'd
- b. CONTROL - Signal intensity, if D YES adjustable, should be controlled by administrative procedure.
- c. LIMITS - The signal should capture the I NO P.3.1-9 IC operator's attention but should not cause irritation or a startled reaction.
- d. DETECTION - Each auditory signal I NO P.3.1-10 IC should be adjusted to result in approxi-mately equal detection levels at normal operator work stations in the primary operating area.
- e. RESET - The annunciator auditory N/A N/A alert mechanism should automatically reset when it has been s!!enced.
- f. IDENTIFICATION - The operator I NO P.3.1-6 Ill should be able to identify the work '
station or the system where the audi-tory alert signal orig:1sted. Separate auditory signals at each work station within the primary operati,ng area are recommended. L3.2.2 ALAXTORY CODING
- a. LOCALIZATION 1
(1) Auditory coding techniques should 1I N/A , be used when the rperator work station associated with the alarm is not in the prlmary operating area. , (2) Coded signals from a single audio I N/A source should not be used to identify individual work stations within the primary operating area. I
- b. PRIORITIZATION - Coding may be I NO P.2.1 III used to Indicate alarm priority. (See Guideline 6.3.1.4.)
I L l l l. l l s 4-70
415-1/0 TABLE 4-9 l APNUNCIATOR SLRVEY FDOINGS & EDs TIERATED Page 6 of 14 l 6.3.3.1 VISUAL APNUNCIATOR PAPELS
/0 J / /
~
- a. LOCATION - Visual alarm panels I NO P.3.1-23 IIC Assess in should be located above the related Annunc. Study.
controls and displays which are required for corrective or diagnostic action in response to the alarm. (See Exhibit 6.3 -4.)
- b. LARFI ING-(1) Each panel should be identified by I YES a label above the panel.
(2) Panel identification label height I YES should be consistent with a sub-tended visual angle of a least 15 minutes when viewed from a cen-tral position within the primary operating area. 6.3.3.2 VISUAL ALARM RECOG APO IDENT
- a. FLASHING - The specific tile (s) on an O YES annunciator panel should use flaJilng illumination to indicate an alarm con-dition.
- b. FLASH l(ATE - Flash rates should be O YES from three to five fisshes per second with approximataly equal on and off times.
- c. FL ASWR FAILtRE - In case of I NO P.3.1 20 Pending - Eng.
flasher fallure of an alarmed tile, the study. tile light should illuminate and burn , steadily.
- d. CONTRAST DETECTABILITY - There O YES should be high enough contrast between alarming and steady-on tiles, and between illuminated and nonilluminated tiles, so that operators in a normally illuminated control room have no pro-blem discriminating alarming, steady-on, and steady-off visual tiles.
P l I ! ~ l l 4-71
415-1/0 l l TABLE 4-9 APNLNCIATOR SURVEY FMXNGS & WPs GEPERATED Page 7 of 14 s.. / / J/ / 6.3.3.2 (Cont'd)
- e. " DARK" Af4A.NCIATOR PAPELS - A O NO P.3. 17 !!C Assess in
" dark" annunciator panel concept should Amune. Study.
be used. This means that under normal operatino conditions no annunciators would be illuminated; all of the visual tiles of the annunciator panels would be
" dark."
- f. EXTEFOED Dt. RAT 10N ILLUh4-NATION - If an annunciator tile must D NO P.3.1 18 IIC Assess in be "ON" for en extended period during Amune. Study.
normal operations (e.g., during equip-ment repair or replacement), it should bes (1) Distinctively coded for positive recognition during this period, and (2) Controlled by administravle N/A N/A procedures. 6.3.3.3 ' ARRANThENT OF VISUAL ALARM TILES
- e. MATRIX ORGANIZATION - Visual O YES alarms should be organized as a matrix of visual alarm tiles within each annunciator panel,
- b. FLNCTIONAL GROLFING - Visual D NO P.3.1-38 llc Assess in alarm tiles should be grouped by Amune. Study.
function or svstem within each amun-clator panel.' For example area radi. { ation alarms should be grouped on one panel, not spread throughout the con-trol room.
- c. L ABELING OR AXES -
(1) The vertical and horizontal axes O NO P.3.1-3 5 III of annunciator panels should be labeled with alphanumerles for ready coordinate designation of a particular visual tile. 4-72
415-1/0 TABLE 4-9 ADNLNCIATOR SLRVEY FROINGS & 6 TfERATED Page 8 of 14 ) I s.. / / J/ / 6.3.3.3c (Cont'd) (2) Coordinate designation is O NO P.3.1-34 III Assess in preferred on the lef t and top sides Annunc. Study. of the annunciator panel. (3) Letter height for coordinate O YES i designation should be consistent with a subtended visual angle of at least 15 minutes as viewed from a central position within the primary operating area.
- d. PATTERN RECOCNITION -
(1) The rumber of alarm tiles and the O NO P.3.1-33 III Assess in matrix density should be kept low Annunc. Study. (a maximum of 50 tiles per matrix is suggested). (2) Tiles within an annunciator panel D NO P.3.1-38 IIC Assess in
<tx should be arouped by sub Annunc. Study.
.ystem, function, or other logical organization.
- e. DUT-OF-SERVI ALARMS - Cues ! NO P.3.1 19 III for prompt recognition ofin out-of-servlee annunciator should be designed into the system,
- f. BL ANK TILES - Blank or unused O YES annunciator tiles should not be illuml-nated (except during annunciator testingi 6.3.3.4 VISUAL TILE LEEPOS
- a. LNAMBIGUOUS - Annunciator visual O NO P.3.1-40 IIC Assess in tile legends should be specific and Annunc. Study, unambiguous. Wording should be in concise, short messages.
- b. SINGlLARITY - Alarms wNch refer ! NO P.3.1-25 III Assess in
. the operator to another, more detailed Annunc. Study. annunciator panel located outside the ( primary operating area should be mini-mized. 4-73
415-1/0 TABLE 4-9 , AtedlNCIATOR SURVEY FROINGS & HEDs GEPERATED Page 9 of 14 s.. / / J/ / 6.3.3.4 (Cont'd)
- c. SPECIFICITY - Tile legends should I NO P.3.1-26 I!C Assess in address speelfic conditions; for Annunc. Study.
example, do not t.:-- one alarm for HIGH. LOW, TEMPER ATURE-PRES-SURE. 6.3.3.5 VISUAL TILE READABILITY
- a. DISTANCE - The or,erator should be able to read a!! the annunciator tiles from the position at the work station where the annunciator acknowledge control is locat ed.
(1) Letter height should subtend a O YES minimum visual angle of 15 minutes, or .004 x viewing distance. The preferred visual angle is 20 minutes, or .006 x viewing distance. (2) Letter height should be identical M YES for all tiles, based on the maxi. mum viewing distence. Separate calculations should be made for stand-up and sit-down work stations.
- b. TYPE STYLE - The alze and style of lettering should meet the fullowing:
(1) Type styles should be simple. O YES (?) Type styles should be consistent O NO P.3.1-32 III Address in on all visual tiles. Labelang Study. - (3) Only upper-case type should be O YES used on visual tiles.
- c. LEGEPO CONTRAST - Legends should provide Ngh contrast with the tile background.
(1) Legende should be angraved. O YES
-(2) Legende should be dark lettering O YES on a light background.
P 4 4-74
415-1/0 s TABLE 4-9
- APNLNCIATOR StJRVEY FINDINGS & KDa CEERATED Page 10 of 14 8
s.- / / J/ / 6.3.3.5 (Cont'e
- d. LETTER DIENSIONS APO SPAC-ING -
(1) S t rok e - wi dth- t o- charact er- hei ght M YES ratio should be between 1:6 and g 1:8. (2) Letter width-to-height ratio M YES should be between 1:1 and 3:5. - (3) Numeral width-to-height ratio M YES = should be 3:5. (4) Minimum space between char- M YES E acters should be one stroke width. (5) Minimum space between words M YES should be the width of one char-acter. (6) Minimum space between lines M YES E should be one-half the character E height. 6.3.4.1 CONTROLS (See Exhibit 6.3-5.) l I a. SLENCE - - (1) Each set of operator response O NO P.3.1-11 IIA . e controle should include a silence -- g ~ con'.rol. g-(2) It should be possible to silence an N/A N/A f [ auditory alert signal from any set L.l E of annunc:stor response controls ~
~
E- In the primary operting stem. r y-E b. ACKNOWLEDGE E , (1) A control should be provided to I YES y terminate the flashing of a visual tile and have it continue at steady [ lliumination until the alarm is cleared. W 2_ m m Z 4-75 w
415-1/0 1 TABLE 4-9 APNUNCIATOR SURVEY FlfOlNGS & 6 TFERATED Page 11 of 14 s.s, .r / s/ ,
/ ,/
6.3.4.1 (Cont'd)
~
-(2) Acknowledgement should be pos- 1 N/A sible only at the work station where the alarm originated.
- c. RESET (1) If an automatic cleared alarm i NO P.3.1-13 !!C Assess in feature is not provided, a control Annunc. Study.
should be provided to reset the system after an alarm has cleared. (2) The reset control should silence I NO P.3.1-14 IIC Assess in any audible signalindicatlag Annunc. Study. clearance and should extinguish tile illumination. (3) The reset control should be offec- I NO P.3.1-15 III Assess in tive only at the work station for Annunc. Study. the annunciator panel where the alarm initiated.
- d. TEST (1) A control to test the auditory I YES signal and flashing illumination of all tiles in a panel should be pro-vided.
(2) Periodic testing of annunciators ! YES shuuld be required and controlled by administrative procedure. ti.J.4.2 CONTROL SET DESIQ4
- a. POSITIONING OF REPETITIVE N/; L N/A GROLPS - Repetitive groups of annunciator controls should have the same arrangement and relative location at different work stations. This is to facilitate " blind" reaching.
- b. CONTROL _ CODING - Annunciator O YES response controls should be coded for easy recognition using techniques such
, as: 4-76
lI 415-1/0 TABLE 4-9 APNLNCIATOR SURVEY FINDINGS & KDa CEERATED Page 12 of 14 ')'
- s. / / J/ /
6.3.4.2b. (Cont'd) (1) Color coding; O YES f2) color shading the group of annun- O YES clator controls; (3) demarcating the group of ennun O YES clator controls; or (4) shape coding, particularly the N/A N/A silence control. (See Exhibit 6.3-5, Example 2.)
- c. NONDEFEATABLE CONTRCLS - I N/A Annunciator control designs should not allow the operator to defeat the con-trol. For example, some pushbuttons used for annunciator silencinq and acknowledgement can be held down by inserting a coin in the ring around the pushbutton. This undesirable design feature should be eliminated.
6.3.4.1 APeNUCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDLRES
- a. AVAILABILITY - Annunciator I YES response prc,cedures should be avalleble in the control room.
- b. INDEXING - Annunciator response D NO P.3.1-36 IIC procedures shou'd be Indexed by panel indentification and annunciator tile ccord: nates.
l 6.5.1.6 COLOR CODING ,
- s. REDtNDANCY - In all applications of N/A N/A See Conven-color coding, color should provide tions Survey redundant inforrnation. Tt.at is, the Report pertinent information should be avall-able from some other cue in addition to color.
l l l l i ? I 4-77
- ,~
415-1/0 TABLE 4 9 AteANCIATOR SURVEY FPOINGS & KDa GEERATED Page 13 of 14 s._ / / J/ / 6.5.1.6 (Cont'd
- b. NLAeER OF COLORS -
(1) The number of colors used for N/A N/A See Conven-coding should be kept to the mini- tions Survey mum needed for providing suf. Report ficient information. (2) The number of colors used for N/A N/A See Convere-coding should not exceed 11. tions Survey Report
- c. MEANING OF COLORS -
(1) The meaning attached to a parti. N/A N/A See Conven-cular color should be narrowly tions Survey defined. Report (2) Red, green, and amber (yellow) N/A N/A See Conven-should be reserved for the fol tions Survey lowina uses: Report Reds unsafe, danger,immediate operator action requ' red, or an Indication that a critical parameter is out of tolerance. Greens safe, no operator action required, or an Indication that a parameter is within tolerance. Amber (yellowh hazard (potent! ally unsafe), caution, attention recuired, or en indl-cation that a matoin11 value er parameter exish
- d. PRINCIPLES OF COLOR SELECTION (1) The primery principle which N/A N/A See Conven-should be applied in selecting tions Survey colors for coding purposes which Report do not have the immediate safety Irnplications of red, green, and amber is to ensure that each color is recognized as different frem any other. Exhibit 6.5-7 lista 22 colors of maximum contrast.
Each successive color has be3n selected so that it will conteest maximally with the color just preceding it and satisfactorily 4-78
415-1/0 TABLE 4-9 APNLNCIATOR SURVEY FPOINGS & FEDS EPERATED Page 14 of 14 1 6.5.1.6d(l) (Cont'd) e__ / J/ / with earlier colors in the !!st. The first 9 colors have been selected so as to yleid satis-factory contrast for red. green. deficient as well as color-normal observers. The remaining 13 colors are useful only for color-normal observers. (2) Colors selected for coding should O YES contrast well with the background on which they appear. (3) Ambient lighting in the area in O YES which color coding is used will influence the apparent color of the coded element (especially for surface colorsi. Each color selected for coding should be evaluated under all lilumination conditions under which it is used. 6.6.6.2 DEMARCATION
- a. USE - Lines of demarcatfon can be used to:
(1) Enclose functionally related die. N/A N/A plays. (2) Enclose functionally related con- N/A N/A trols (3) Group related controls and dis. N/A N/A plays.
- b. CONTRAST - Lines of demarcation N/A N/A should be visually distinctive from the panel ba::kground,
- c. PERMAPEPCE - Lines of demar N/A N/A cation should be permanently attached.
l 4-79 l
415-1/0 ! l 4.10 Controls Survey This section documents the results of the controls survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse . DCRDR Program Plan. 4.10.1 Cbjectives The objectives of the controls survey were to:
- a. _ Assess the degree to which all controls in the control room conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the controls that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.10.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of the control design in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The control topics evaluated include: o General principles of control design o Prevention of accidental activation o Direction of moveinent o - Coding of controls o Pushbutton design - o Round pushbuttons o Legend pushbuttons o - Rotary selector controls o J-Handle controls o Continuous adjustment rotary controls o Thumbwheels o Slide switches - o Toggle switches o Separation of controls.
.Several NUREG,0700 guidelines appropriate to controls were addressed as part of task 3
analysis and taak verification and validation activities. These have, therefore, been incorporated into the verification and validation evaluation reports. 4-80
415-1/0 4.10.3 Criteria The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, are: paragraphs 6.4.1.la(1) through c(2) and e(l) through e(3); 6.4.1.2a through g; 6.4.2.1; 6.4.2.2c(1) through c(4), e and f(l) through f(3); 6.4.3.lb and c; 6.4.3.2a(1) through d; 6.4.3.3.b(1), (2), (4), (5) and d(l) through e(5); 6.4.4.la; 6.4.4.2a(1) through b; 6.4.43a through g(3); 6.4.4.4a through e(5); 6.4.4.5a through f; 6.4.5.la through d(2)(e); 6.4.5.2a through b(2); 6.4.5.3a through c(6); 6.4.5a(1) through e(4); 6.5.1.6a through c(2) and d(3) through e(3); and 6.8.3.la through c. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presentedin Table 4-10. 4.10.4 Method 4.10.4.1 Data Collection
- a. ' Data collected during operator interviews were reviewed to identify potential problems in the design, location, or operation of CR controls,
- b. Data were collected using the checklists contained in the Controls Task Plan. The majority of the data were collected through interviews with CR operators and direct observation of controls in the CR. As necessary, measurements were made of the physical characteristics (e.g., size, separation, displacement of the controls).
4.10.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering
, Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the control or controls involved (e.g., rotary controls, pushbuttons, J-Handla con-trols, etc.), a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review ano discussions with cognizant plant peracanol.
- c. Upon_ completion of all analyses, the criteria of the controls task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
4.10.5 Findings The findings of the controls survey are presented in Table 4-10 " Controls Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall,142 criteria were applied to the controls in the Davis-Besse control room. Of these, 35 (25%) were not applicable, 79 (56%) were in compliance, and 28 (20%) were not in compliance. A total of 23 HEDs were generated 4-81
415-1/0 which document all of the 28 criteria which were not met. In general, those HEDs address
- accidental . activation of controls,' inconsistent direction of movement, pushbutton resistance, and control separation, j 4
d 6 s 5 e 1 1 4 4-82
, , - , - -, e , - , , . . ., - .w
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10
- CONTRG.S SURVEY FROINGS & KDs EERATED Page 1 of 19 )
6.4.1.1 EERAL PRINCIPLES e-- / / J/ /
- e. ADEGUACY -
(1) It should provide a sufficient I YES range of control. (2) It should be easily adjusted with ! NO P 4.1 19 !!C the required level of precision.
- b. ECONOMY -
i (1) There should be a good reason to I NO P.4.1-9 !!C require e control for the function concerned. (2) Dup!!:stion of controls sFould not ! YES occur, exaept for a specific reason. (3) The precision and range of e I NO P.4.1-18 III control should not greatly exceed the need. (4) Selected controls should be O YES economic of space. + c. HLMAN StATABILITY - 4 (1) Each control should be recog- I NO P.4.1 11 !!! n'reble in terms of its function. (2) Each control should be of the type I NO P.4.1 11 III norme!!y enticipated for the operation concerned. This means conforming to operator expectations, matching to other , controls for the same fu'etion. end generally conforming to conventione) practice.
- s. DLRABILITY -
- (1) Broken, chipped, or crumbled O YES control surfaces should not ordi-nerily occur.
ll 4-83
l l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTROLS SURVEY FPOINGS & FEDS GDERATED Page 2 of 19 l l sessuse #
/ 8/ @
/ +/
04.1.la. (Cont'd) (2) Control knobs or handles should I YES not rotate, slip, or move loosely on their shafts. (3) Na internal wear or breakage I YES should occur which alters the
" feel" or other sensory feedback of a control. Controls should not deyelop internal loosenees, binding, or backlash.
L4.1.2 PREVENTION OF ACCIDENTAL ACTIVATION
- s. PROPER LOCATION - Controls 1 NO P.4.1-4 IA Controls Study should be located and oriented so that the operator is not likely to strike or move them accidentally in any sequence of control movements,
- b. FIXED PROTECTIVE STRUCTtRES -
(1) Controls may be recessed, O NO P.4.1-25 IIC shielded, or otherwise surrounded P.4.1-31 IIC by physical barriers. (See Exhibit 6.4-1) (2) The control should be entirely 0 YES contained within the envelope described by the recess or barrier.
- c. MOVABLE COVERS OR GUARDS -
(1) Controls may bs coverec' or O YES guarded with movable (e.g., hinged) barriers. (See Exhibit 6.4-2) (2) Safety or lock wires should not be O YES used. (3) When the guard is in the open i NO P.4.1-2 III position, it should not interfere with the operat8on of the guarded control or other adjacent controls. e 4-84 s e ur'Ni w ~ -
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTROLS SURVEY FPOINGS & IEDs OEfERATED Page 3 of 19 , 6.4.1.2 (Cont'd)
. - - / / J/ /
- d. INTERLOCKING CONTROLS -
Controls may be provided with inter-locks so that: (1) Extra movement is required (e.g., 1 NO P.4.1-6 IIC Additional a side movement out of a detent analysis position or a pull-to. engage required. clutch). (2) Prior operation of a related or I NO P.4.1-6 IIC Additional locking contro! le required. analysis required. l e. RESISTANCE TO MOVDENT - I NO P.4.1-13 IIC Controls should be provided with resist-ance (e.g., friction or spring-loadingi, so that distinct or sustained effort is required for activation.
- f. SEQUENTIAL ACTIVATKN - When a ! NO P.4.1-7 IIC strict sequential activation is neces-sary, controls should be provided with locks to prevent the controls from passing through a position, Further movement should require a new control action.
- g. CHOICE OF ACTION - Rotary action ! YES 4
controls should be used in situations where linear or pushbutton controls would be subject to inadvertent activa-tion, and fixed protective structures are 1.npractical or inappropriate. 6.4.2.1 DIRECTION OF MOVDENT To minimize operstor error, control movements should conform to the following population stereotypes (for U.S. population only):
- s. ON, START, RLN, OR OPEN - Up, O NO- P.4.1 28 III
. right, forward, clockwise, or pull.
- 5. OFF, STOP, CLOSE - Down, lef t, O NO P.4.1 29 III
- backward, counterclockwise, or push. P.4.1 30 III e
l l i h 4-85
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 , CONTROLS SURVEY FNOINGS & KOs GEERATED Page 4 of 19 6.4.2.1 (Cont'd) s.- / d/ /
- c. RIGHT (AS A FINCTION) - Clockwise O YES or right,
- d. LEFT (AS A FINCTION) -Counter- O YES clockwise or lef t,
- e. RAISE - Up, O YES
- f. LOWER - Down.
- g. INCREASE - Forward, up, right, or O YES clockwise.
- h. OECREASE - Backward, down, lef t, or O YES counterclockwise.
6.4.2.2 COOING OF CONTROLS
- c. SIZE CODING (1) No more than three different I NO P.4.1-11 IIC sizes of controls should be used for discrimination by absolute size.
f21 Controls used for performing the , O YES same function on different items of equipment should be the same size. (3) When knoh diameter is used as e I NO P 4.1-11 IlC coding parameter, differences between diameters should bs et least 0.5 Inch. l (4) When knob thickness is a coding I NO P.4.1-11 IIC parameter, dif ferences between LNeknesses should be at least 0.4
- inch.
l I ( 4-86
4 415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTROLS SURVEY FPOINGS & KOs CEERATED Page 5 of 19
. / J/ / .
6.4.2.2 (Cont'd)
- e. ROTATING KNOB SHAPE OPTIONS - O YES Rotating knob controls for different types of control actions should be dis-tinguishable by sight and touch and not easihy confused with each other.
Exhibits 6.4-4 through 6.4-6 give examples of 15 suitable knob designs developed for three major classes of knobs, each class intended for a dif-feren' purposes multiple rotation, fractional rotation, and detent post-tioning.
- f. COLOR CODING (1) Color coding should follow the N/A N/A See Conven-recommendations of Guideline tions Survey 6.5.1.6. Report (3) The color of the control should O YES contrast with the panel back-ground. (See Guideline 6.1.5.6.e)
, 6.4.3.1 PUSFBtJTTON DESIGN PRINCIPLES
- b. IPOICATION OF ACTIVATION - To I NO P.4.1-20 IC ensure that the operator knows that a pushbutton has been pressed f ar enough for activation, a positive indication should be provided in the form of a anap feel, an audible click, or an integral
- light.
- c. PUSFEUTTON 3URFACE - For best - O YES operation, the surface of a pushbutton should offer slip resistance, or be
! concave. i r i f l r ! 4-87 l
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTRCLS SLRVEY FPOINGS & KDa TERATED Page 6 of 19 s. 6.4.3.2 ROLND PLEEUTTONS (See Exhibit
// J/ /
6.4-7)
- a. Diameter (D), for fingertlp operation (inchesi (1) Unquarded and nonrecessed push M YES buttons Minimum 0.385 (2) Guarded or recessed pushbuttons M YES mig nrn 0.75
- b. Diameter (D), for thumb or heel of hand M YES operstion (inchesi Minimum 0.75
- c. Displacement (A), for thumb or finger M YES operation (inches)
Minimum 0.125
- d. . Resistance (R), for fingertip operation M NO P.4.1-27 III (ounces)
Minimum 10 Maximum 40 6.4.3.3 LEEPO PLSEUTTOriS
- b. LE EPO (1) The legend should be readable O YES under ambient light conditions, with or without internal illumina-tion.
(2) The illuminated condition should O YES be clearly recognizable under the highest predicted ambient light condition and should be at least 10% brighter than the surrounding panel. (3) Legend lettering and contrast N/A N/A See Displays should conform to recommende- Survey Report tiene for legend lights (Guldeline ! 6.5.3.31 o
.* # * *.,.se- ..w.e =.-..,e h
4-88
i 415-1/0 T ABLE 4-10 CONTROLS SURVEY FROINGS & EDs GEERATED Page 7 of 19 '
. // J/ / ..
6.4.3.3b. (Cont'd) (4) The !cgend message should be O NO P.4.1-26 IIC specific, unambiguous, and concise. (5) The legend message should con- O YES teln no more than three lines of lettering.
- d. BARRIERS (1) Rstriers should be used when O YES legend pushp uttons are '
contiguous. (2) Berriais shouM ha: counded O YES edges- I
- e. LEEND PUStetJTTON DIMENSIONS - For mr dmem l effectiveness of legend pH.utton controls, the following dimer.slons should be used (see Exhibit 6.4.8):
(1) Size (C)(inches) M YES Minimum 0.75 Maximum 1.5 (2) Displacement (A)(inches) M YES Minimum 0 (touch plate) Minirnum 0.125 (all others) Maximum 0.250 (3) Barrier width (B w)(Inches) M YES Minimum 0.125 (4) Barrier depth (B d)(inches) M YES Minimurr. 0.183 Maximum 0.250 (5) Resistance (ounces) M NO P.4.1 27 III I Minimum 10 (except touch plate) Maximum 40 I l l - 4-89
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTROLS SURVEY FPOINGS & FEDS TFERATED Perp 8 of 19 1 i 1 s-- 6.4.4.1 ROTARY CONTROL DESKN
/ J/ /
PRINCIPLES
- a. DIRECTION OF ACTIVATION -Rotary 0 YES 1 control settings should increase in value l with a clockwise rotation. )
6.4.4.2 J-HAFOLES
- a. HIGH-TORQUE DESIGNS - J-handles should conform to dimensions as follows (see Exhibit 6.4-9h (1) Length (L)(inches) M YES Minimum 3.75 Optimum 4.0 (2) Clearance (C)(inches) M YES Minimum 1.0 Optimum 2.0
- b. LOW-TORQUE DESICNS - For certain I YES purposes, smaller scale J-handles may be used. In such cases the handle proportion usually has a flattened or flared tip for finger placement, and the clearance between handle and panel surf ace can be less.
6.4.4.3 KEY. OPERATED CONTROLS
- s. USE - Key-operated controls should be N/A N/A No key used when system requirements dictate switches used that the function being controlled should be secured eqainst activation by unauthorized personnel. If key-oersted rentrols cannot be justified in terms of security, they are probably ret necessary and should at be used. Key-operated switches should not be used solely as a means of shape coding.
- b. TEETH: SINGLE ROW - Keys with a N/A N/A No key sing!s row of teeth should be Inserted switches used into tre lock with the teeth pointing up or forward.
l i , l 4-90
S 415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTROLS SURVEY FPOINGS & KDs EERATED Page 9 of 19 L4.4.3 (Cont'd) e.. // J/ /
- c. TEETH: DOL.BLE ROW - If keys have N/A N/A No key teeth on both edges, they should fit the switches used lock with either side up or forward.
- d. ON-OFF OREPfrATION - Locks N/A N/A No key should be oriented so that the switch is switches used OFF for SAFE) when the key is in the vertical position,
- e. KEY REMOVAL - Operators should N/A N/A No key not normally be able to remove the key switches used from the lock unless the switch is turned to the OFF or SAFE position.
i f. LABELNG - Control positions should N/A N/A No key i be labeled. switches used
- g. KEY-OPERATED CONTROL DIME.NSIONS - The following dimensions should be used for key-
' operated controls (see Exhibit 6.4 10).
(1) Displacement (A)(degrees) N/A N/A No key Minimum 800 switches used - Maximum 90o
-(2) Height (H) (inchesi N/A N/A No key Minimum 0.5 switches used Maximum 3.0 (3) Resistance (inch / pounds) N/A N/A No key Minimum 1.0 switches used Maximum 6.0 L4.4.4 CONTDAJOUS ADJUSThENT ROTARY CONTRG.S - To ensure precise O YES control along a continuous verleble, con-tinuous adjustment rotary controle are appropriate.
- a. KNOBS - Knohs for continuous adjust- O YES ment controls should be round in shape, with knurled or secreted edges.
4-91
_y_ _ _ _ .. , 415-1/0
*A'-
%, I
?
- (.i
- TABLE 4-10 3/>#)
'/ CONTRG.S SERVEY FDONGS & EDs TERATED Page 10 of 19 q, ,
- y..<\' ;
I , W ?es_ L
// J/ '
/
~\ ', 6.4.4.4 ((Coned 5
- b. POSITIONINDICA770N - When en O YES '
s ind'estloe of posillonis desirable, the j. / pointer conUgurations shown in Edibit ' * ,
~ 6.4 11'n o' y be used. Where more .
accuracy le required, a line should be " '! ' engraved fand filled with contrasting ! p%ynent) both on too and down the elde '
' of the pointer, as shown on the krob at N the bottom of the esNbit. ,
+
?
- c. ClWNSKMS g ; .'
(1) Fingertlp grasp lenobs huld con- , form to the fol!owing dimenslans: > fa) Height (inchesi M YES, , Minim @ 0.5 - '/* Maximum 1.0 / s i i (b) Diameter finches) . M Y25 i Minimum 0.175 ' Maximum 4.U # (2). : Thumb and forefinger ancircled M i YES , knobs should conform to the ' following diciensionst) ( Diameter (inchtui 5 , Minimum 1.0 r ! ' -, Maximum 3.0 r
- d. TORQUE - Knoh torque should be / M YES '
within the range of 4.5 to 6.0 '
- 1 inch / ounces.
- e. CONTINUOUS ADJUSTENT ROTARY -
- CONTRG S WITH MNOB SKIRTS - If ' y i!
knob skirts are used, such controle - .} c5ould conform to approximately the following dimensions. ,See Exhibit , 6.4-12. (1) Skirt diameter (D Sh 2.0Inchee. M YES > (2) Skirt height (HSh c.15 inch. M YES 4 / I; * ,
-f -w w y
6n-4-92"
' . , , . .___.4 , ,_g,,
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTROLS SURVEY FROINGS & KDe TERATED page 11 of 19 s.s.
,/ , ,/ /
6.4.4.4e. (Cont'd) (3) Finger stop diameter (DF ): 1.25 M YES inches. (4) Finger stop height (Hp) plus M YES rotary knob height (Hgh total 0.75 inch. (5) Knob diameter (Dg): 0.75 inch. M YES 6.4.4.5 ROTARY SELECTOR CONTROLS
- s. SELECTION - Rotary selector con- I NO P.4.1-14 !!C trols should be used when three or more detented positions are required, and may be used for two-detented position operation.
- b. POSITIONING i O) To ensure proper positioning of a I YES discrete rotary control, detents should be provided at each control position.
(2) It should not be possible to post- I NO P.4.1-15 IIC tion a control between detented positions. (3) A maximum of 24 pos!tions should O YES be used on a rotary selector d Control. (4) To minimize the possibility of I YES placinq a rotary selector control in en unused position, stops should be provided at the limits of the control range. -
- c. READABILITY - To maximize read O YES
< ability, rotary controls should have a moving pointer and fixed position settings. w ,e - 93
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTRO.S SLRVEY F90tNGS A KDs CEERATED Page 12 of 19 s .. #/ / r/ ,
/ ,/
6.4.4.5 (Cont'd)
- d. POSITION DOICATION
- 0) Position Indication should be provided. Desirable alternatives ares (a) Illuminated Indicator lights, O YES (b) A line engraved both on the O YES top of the knob and down the side, or (c) A pointer shape. O YES (2) It should not be possible to con- O YES fuse the position of the knob in reference to position markers on the pane!. To minimize the problem cf parallax, pointers on knobs should be mounted close to the settings to which they point.
- e. DIENSIONS - Recommended dimensions for rotary selector switches are as follows (see Exhibif6.4-13):
(1) Length (L)(Inchesi M YES Minimum 1.0 (2) Width (W) finchesi M YES i Maximum 1.0 (31 Diameter (Di (inches) M YES Minimum 1.0 (4) Depth (H)(inchesi M YES Minimum 0.625 (5) Resistance (inch /poundai M YES Minimum 1.0 Maximum 6.0 4-94
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTRG.S SlJtVEY FDOINGS & KDa EERATED Pays 13 of 19
- i 6.4.4.5 (Cont'd) s-- / / J/ /
- f. MOhCNTARY CONTACT ROTARY SELECTOR CONTROLS - Knobs for I NO P.4.1-16 III spring-loaded momentary contact rotary selector controls should be large enough to be easily held against the spring torque, without fatigue, for as long as necessary to accomplish the control action.
6.4.5.1 THLAeWWELS
- a. VISIBILITY - To minimire error, O YES thumbwheel readouts should be visible from the thumbwheel operatino position.
- b. CODING - If the thumbwheel is used O YES as an input device, the OFF, zero, or normal position should be coded to facilitate visual recognition of status.
- c. CONTINUOLE ADJUSThENT THUh6-WHEELS - The dimensions of thumb-wheel controls which permit continuous adjustment (not stepped or detented) should be as follows:
(1) At least 1 inch of the wheel M YES should be exposed to permit easy manipulation. (2) Resistance shotJd be between 3 M YES j and 6 ounces. (3) If the thumbwheel has an OFF N/A N/A
- position, a detent should be pro-vided for feedback at that point.
l l l l 4-95
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTRG.S SURVEY FPOINGS & KDs EERATED Page 14 of 19 6.4.5.1 (Cont'd) sostums #// 8/ &
/ /
- d. DISCRETE SETTING (STEPPED)
THLAGWWELS (1) Thumbwheel controls which have ! N/A discrete settings should be detented between positions. The control should snap into each position, and resist intermediate or uncertain settings. (2) Discrete thumbwheel controls should conform to the following speelfications. (See Exhibit 6.4 -141 fa) Diameter O)(Inchesi M YES Minimum 1.5 Maximum 2.5 (b) Trough distance (L)(inchesi M YES Minimum 0.45 Maximum 0.75 (c) Width (W)(inches) M YES Minimum 0.1 (d) Depth (H) (inchesi M YES Minimum 0.125 Maximum 0.5 (e) Resistance (ounces) M YES Minimum 6 Maximum 20 6.4.5.2 SLIDE SWITCKS
- a. SURFACE - The surface of slide O YES
. switches should be serrated or knurled.
- b. DlhENSIONS - Slide switches should
! conform to approximately the following dimensions. See Exhibit 6.4 15. (1) Thickness (T): 0.25 Inch. M N/A 4-96
415-1/0 TABLE 410 CONTROLS SURVEY FROINGS & KDs TERATED Page 15 of 19 6.4.5.2b (Cont'd) s- /lJ / / (2) Length (L): 1.0 inch. M N/A 6.4.5.3 TOOQ.E SWITCKS
- a. POSITIONING - To minimize the pos- I N/A sibility of inadvertent activation or setting between control positions, toggle switches should have an elastic resistance that increases as the control is moved and drops as the switch snaps into position.
, b. FEEDBACK - Toggle switches should 1 NO P.4.1 24 IIC emit an audible click, or provide some other source of feedback on activation,
- c. DIENSIONS - To ensure the most of fective use, toggle switches should confctm to the following dimensions.
See Exhibit 6.4 16. (1) Arm length (L), for use by one M YES finger (inches) Minimum 0.5
- Maximum 2.0 (2) Tip diameter (D)(inchesi M YES Minimum 0.125 Maximum 1.0 (3) Resistance (small switch)(ounces) M YES Minimum 10 Maximum 16
-(4) Resistance (large switch) (s.uncesi M YES Minimum 10 Maximum 40 (5) Displacement (A), two position M YES (degrees)
Minimum 30 Maximum 120 i l l 4-97
l l 415-1/0 l TABLE 4-10 CONTRCES SLRVEY FPOINGS & KDa CDERATED Page 16 of 19 6.4.5.3c (Cont'd)
. - - / / J/ /
(6) Displacement (A), three position M YES (degrees between settings) Minimum 18 Maximum 60 Optimum 25 6.4.5.4 ROCKER SWITCKS N/A N/A No Rocker awitches.
- a. ORIENTATION - Rocker switches should ordinarily be oriented vertically.
(1) Activation of the upoer part N/A N/A No Rocker should control the ON or switches. INCREASE function. (2) Horizontal orientation should be N/A N/A No Rocker used only when the location of the switches. controlled function or equipment l requires it.
- b. INDICATlON OF' ACTIVATION (1) Activation should be indicated by N/A N/A No Rocker a snap fee!, an audible click, or an switches.
integral light. (2) In the ON positten, the top of the N/A N/A No Rocker switch should % flush with the switches. panel surf ace,
- c. RESISTANCE (1) Control resistance should N/A N/A No Rocker gradually increase, then drop to switches.
2ero when the control snaps into , position. (2) This resistance should preclude N/A N/A No Rocker the switch being placed between switches. positions.
- d. INADVERTENT ACTIVATION - If it i NO P.4.1 1 IIC
! controls a critical functitn, the switch should be protected by channel guards
- or other means to prevent Inadvertent l activation.
e 4-98
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTROLS SmVEY FDOINGS & EDs TERATED Page 17 of 19 6.4.5.4 (Cont'd) s-- a/ / J/ /
- e. ROCMER SWITCH DDEPEIONS - (see N/A N/A No Rocker Exhibit 6.4-17): switches.
(1) Width (W)(inches) Minimum 0.75 Maximum 1.5 (21 Resistance founces) N/A N/A No Rocker Minimum 10 switches. Maximum 40 (3) Displacement, two-position N/A N/A No Rocker switches (A) (degreesi switches. Minimum 30 Maximu n 120 (4) Displacement, three-position N/A N/A No Rocker switches (A) (degrees) switches. Minimum 10 Maximum 60 Optimum 25 6.5.1.6 COLOR CODING , s. REDLNDANCY - In all app!! cations of N/A N/A See Conven-color coding, color should provide tions Survey redundant information. That is, the Report pertinent information should be evall-ab!c from some other cue in addition to color.
- b. NUheER OF COLORS N/A N/A See Conven-(1) The number of colors used for tions Survey coding should be kept to the mini- Report mum needed for providing suf-ficient information.
(2) The number of colors used for N/A N/A See Conven-4 coding should not exceed 11. tions Survey Report i I . '5 4-99
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 CONTROLS SURVEY FPOINGS & KDa EERATED Page 18 of 19 6.5.1.6 (Cont'd) s / / r/ /
/
- c. MEAMNG OF COLORS (1) The meaning attached to a par. N/A N/A See Conven-ticular color should be narrowly tions Survey defined. Report (2) Red, green, and amber fyallow) N/A N/A See Conven-should be reserved for the tions Survey following uses: Report Reds unsafe, dancer, immediate N/A N/A See Conven-operator action required, or an tions Survey indicat*on that a critical param. Report eter is out of tolerance.
Greens safe, no operator action required, or an Indication that a , parameter is within tolerance. Amber (yellowh harard (potentially unsafe), caution, attention required, or en indica-tion that a marginal value or parameter exists. ,,
- e. PRINCIPLES Of" COLOR SELECTION l
(1) The primary principle which N/A N/A See Conven-should be app!!ed in selecting tions Survey colors for coding purposes which Report do not have the immediate safey implications of red, green, and ember is to ensure that each color is recognized as different from any other. Exhibit 6.5-7 !!sts 22 colors of maximum contrast. Each successive color has been selected so that it will contrast maximally with the color just preceding it and satisfactorily with earlier colors in the list. The first 9 colors have been selected so as to yield satis-factory contrast for red-green-deficient as well as color-normal l l 4-100
415-1/0 TABLE 4-10 / CONTROLS SURVEY FPOINGS & KDs EERATED Page 19 of 19 6.5.1.6e(1) (Cont'd)
// J/ /
observers. The remaining 13 colors are useful only for colct-normal observers. (2) Colors selected for coding should O YES contrast well with the background on which they appear. (3) Ambient lighting in the area in O YES which color coding is used will influence the apparent color of the coded element (especially for surface colors). Each color selected for coding should be evaluated mder all illumination , conditions under which it is used. 6.8.3.1 SEPARATION OF CONTRO_S l ! Recommended minimum control ! separation distances are shown in Exhibits 6.8-2 and 6.8-3. In most cases, control room operations will require greater separation. The function requirements that should be considered are:
- a. ACCESS - Control access should not 1 NO P.4.1-5 III be impeded by any position of an adjacent control.
- b. INADVERTENT ACTUATION -Control I NO P. A.1 -4 !!C actuation should not result in advertent actuation of an adjacent control.
- c. SIMLA.TAKOUS ACTUATION - N/A N/A See Verification .
! Simultaneously actuation of adjacent and Validation controls (where requiredi should be Survey Report possible.
i I f l 1 1 b ! 4-101 ll
415-1/0 4.11 Displays' Survey This section documents the results of the displays survey conducted in i 'e main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the . requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.11.1 Objectives The objectives of the displays survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which all displays in the control room conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the displays that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.11.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of the display design in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The display topics evaluated include: . o Display failure o Usability of displayed values o Readability o Printing on the display _ face o Scale markings o Coding o Display movement o Scale pointers a Zone markings o Light indicators (legend and simple) o - Legend design o Trend recorders. CRT displays were evaluated as part of the computer survey. Several NUREG-0700 guidelines appropriate to displays are addressed as part of task analysis = and task verification and. validation activities. These guidelines ~ have been incorporated into the verification and validation evaluation reports. 4-102
- v , --g .-
415-1/0 4.11.3 Criteria
-The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, are: paragraphs 6.5.1.lf; 6.5.1.2d(l) through e; 6.5.1.3a through c(1) and d(1) through d(6);
6.5.1.4a(1) through f; 6.5.1.5a through e and e and f; 6.5.1.6a through c(2) and d(3) through e(3); 6.5.2.la through c; 6.5.2.2a(1) through c; 6.5.2.3a through c; 6.5.2.4a through c(3); 6.5.2.5c; 6.5.3.la(1) through c(1) and d; 6.5.3.2a(1). a(3), and b; 6.5.3.3a(1) through b(7); 6.5.4.la through d and g through k; 6.5.4.2a(1) through b(4); 6.5.5.la(1) through c(2); and 6.5.5.2a(1) through c. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-11. 4.11.4 Method 4.11.4.1 Data Collection
- a. Data collected during the operator interviews were reviewed to identify potential problems with the design, location, or information content of the CR displays.
- b. Data were collected using the checklists from the Displays Task Plan.
Data were collected primarily through operator interviews and direct observation of displays in the CR. As necessary, measurements were made of the physical characteristics (e.g., characterize, height-to-width ratios, etc.) of CR displays. Where guidelines refer to consistency with operating procedures (e.g.,6.5.1.4.e), existing procedures were reviewed.
- c. Data were recorded on the appropriate forms.
4.11.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the instru-ment or instruments involved (e.g., legend lights, meters, chart recorders, etc.), a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution,
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel,
- c. Upon. completion of all analyses, the criteria of the displays task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
4.11.5 Findings ' The findings of the displays survey are presented in Table 4-11 " Displays Survey Findings and FEDS Generated." A total of 105 criteria were applied to the displays in the 4-103
_ - . ~ -_ - . ._ 415-1/0 Davis-Besse control room. Of these, 22 (21%) were not applicable, 47 (45%) were in ! compliance, and 36 (34%) were not in compliance. A total of 33 HEDs were generated
- which document all of the 36 criteria which were not met. In general, those HEDs address - display labeling, readability, adequacy of information presentation and methods of - information presentation.
f 9 6 i e It t O 4-104-
--n, , .v.,-e, -~, , ,
415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SLRVEY F1POINGS & KDS EERATED PAE 1 OF 15 s- // J/ / 6.5.1.1 PFORMAT10N TO BE DISPLAYED
- f. DISPLAY FALL #tE - When pane! I NO P.5.1-7 IIB instruments, such as meters, fell or become inoperative, the failure should '
be apparent to the operator (e.g., through off-scale indication). 6.5.1.2 USABLITY OF DISLAYED VALtKS
- d. SCALI RANE - Sca'es should be selected to (1) Span the expected range of opera- I NO P.5.1-4 !!C tional parameters, or (2) Employ appropriate scale ranging I YES techniques, or (3) Be supported by auxiliary wide- I NO P.5.1 6 IIA
! tange instruments.
- e. SCALE SIZE - Scale ranges may be O NO P.5.1-24 III expanded (or contracted) by multiplying or dividing indicated scale values by powers of ten. All such scales should be clearly marked as to whether the indicated values should be multip!!ed or divided, and the factor involved (e.g.,
10, 100, 1000). 6.5.1.3 READABLITY
- a. CHARACTER ElGIT - Character M NO P.5.1-36 III height should s4 tend a minimum visual angle of 15 minutes, or 0.004 x viewing distance. The preferred visual angle is
, 20 minutes, or 0.006 x viewing distances. 1
- b. TYPE STYLE - Exhibits 6.5-1 and O NO P.5.1-32 !!!
6.5 2 present two recommended sets of characters, character size and style should meet the followings (1) Type styles should be simple. O YES I (2) Type styles should be consistent. O NO P.5.1-35 !!! 4-105 l
415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SURVEY FROINGS & EDS CEERATED PAE 2 OF 15
- s. // o/ / /
6.5.1.3b (Cont'd) s'3) Only upper-case letters should be O YES used.
- c. CONTRAST - Highest contreet le provided by black and white.
(1) Visual displays should normally 0 YES contain black merkings on a white background,
- d. CHARACTER DIENSIONS APO SPACING -
(1) S t rok e-wi dth-to-charact er-height M YES ratios should be between 1:6 and 118. (2) Letter width-to-height ratios M YES should be between 1:1 and 3:5. (3) Numeret width-to-height rettos M YES should be 3:5. (4) Minimum space between cher. M YES acters should be one stroke wldth. (5) Minimum s--ee between words M YES should be the width of one character. (61 Minimum space between !!nes M N/A should be on-half the cherecter height. 6.5.1.4 PRINTING ON TE DISPLAY FAN
- e. PROVISION OF EEDED ESSAT -
If any information is required to use the display, it must be provided close enough to the scale so that the scale . and the message are clearly associated. !' The message may be communlested: ) (1) By printing on the display face. O NO P.5.1 40 IIC (2) By en appropriate label adjacent O NO P.S.1-40 11C to the display. 4-106
l i 415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SURVEY FPOINGS & KDS TIERATED PACE 3 & 15 s_. / / J/ / 6.5.1.4 (Cont *d)
- b. AVOIDANCE OF EXTRATOUS O NO P.S.1-26 IIC ITEMS - Categories of information not e,eeded in using th.e display should be 4 avolded (e.g., potent notices, manu.
facturer's trademark or addressi.
- c. BREVITY - To avoid distraction and O YES Interference with the needed essential markings, messages should be written as briefly as clarity permits.
- d. ABBREVIATIONS - Only standard and D NO P.5.1-39 III commonly accepted abbreviations should be used.
d
- e. CONSISTENCY WITH PROCEDURES - D NO P.5.1 37 !!!
The printed message should use the same terms as the procedures in display ( Identification, parameter identifi-cation, and units displayed.
- f. IPOICATION OF TRANSFORMATIONS O NO P.S.1-24 III PEEOED - Where necessary to multi-ply or divide the displayed readings by powers of 10 to determine quantitative value, the operation reoulred and result derived must be clearly Indicated.
6.5.1.5 SCALE MARKINOS
- a. USE OF GRADUATIONS - Scales for O YES quantitative readino should be provided with graduations consistent with the progression of their numerals. ,
l (1) No more than 9 graduations O NO P.5.1-27 11C l should separate numerals. (2) Major and minor graduations O YES should be used if there are up to four graduations between aumerals. (3) Major, intermediate, and minor graduation should be used if there O YES are five or more graduations l between numerals. l I l 4-107
o 415-1/0
)
i TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SLRVEY FHMNGS & KDS TERATED PAT 4OF15 s-- // J/ / l 6.5.1.5 (Cont'd)
- b. GRADUATION KICHT - Graduation O NO P.5.1-25 III heights as a function of viewing distance should het
- c. VALLES NDICATED BY UNIT O NO P.5.1 28 IIC GRADUATIONS - Successive values Indicated by unit graduations should be one of those shown below or those values multiplied by some power of 10.
- e. LIKAR VS LOGARITt+4tC SCALES - I YES Logarithmic scales should be evolded unless needed to display a large range of values.
- f. MLA.TISCALE IfOICATORS -Multi- I NO P.5.1 9 IIA scale indicators U.e., single pointer, multiple scalesi should be evolded unless they can be justified as of opera-tional benefit, and precautions are taken to avoid operator confusion.
6.5.1.6 COLOR CODING
- a. REDLNDANCY - In all applications of I N/A SEE CONVEN-color coding, color should provide TIONS SURVEY redundant information. That is, the REPORT pertinent information should be a,all.
able from some other cue in addition to color. 4 6 6 4-108
)
l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SURVEY FPOINGS & KDS TERATED PA K 5 & 15
- e. // / / /
6.5.1.6 (Cont'd)
- b. NUME3ER OF COLORS -
(1) The number of colors used for i N/A SEE CONVEN-coding should be kept to the mini- TIONS SURVEY mum needed for providing suf. REPORT fielent information. (2) The number of colors used for I N/A SEE CONVEN. coding should not exceed 11. TIONS SURVEY REPORT
- e. MEANING OF COLORS (1) The meaning attached to a par. I N/A SEE CONVEN-ticular color should be narrowly TIONS SURVEY defined. REPORT (2) Red, green, and amber (yellowi i N/A SEE CONVEN-should be reserved for the fol- TIONS SURVEY lowing uses: ,
REPORT Red unsafe, danger, immediate operator action required, or en Indication that a critical param-eter is out of tolerance. Green safe, no operator action required, or en Indication that a parameter is within tolerance.
! Amber (yellowh harard . (potentially unsafel, caution, attention required, or en Indica-tion that a marginal value of parameter exists.
l l l 4-109
415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SURVEY FINDINGS & FEDS OCERATED PACE 6 OF 15 s-.. / J/ /
- e. PRINCIPLES OF COLOR SELECTION (D The primary principle which I N/A should be app!Ied in selecting colors for coding purses wNeh do not have the imemdlate safety implications of red, green, and ember is to ensare that each color is recognized as different from any other. Exhioit 6.5-7 lists 22 colors of maximum contrast.
Each successive color has been selected so that it will contrast maximally with the color just preceding it and satisf actorily with earlier colors in the list. The first 9 colors have been selected so as to yield satis-factory contrast for red-green-deficient as well as color-normal observers. The remaining 13 colors are useful only for color-normal observers. (2) Colors selected for coding should O YES contrast well with the background on which they appear. (3) Ambient lighting in the area in O N/A SEE CONVEN. which color coding is used will TIONS SURVEY Influence the apparent color of REPORT the coded element fespecially for surface colors). Each color selected for coding should be evaluated under all illumination conditions under which it is used. , 6.5.2.1 DIRECTIONALITY OF MOVEhCNT AW NUWERING WITH FIXED-SCALE AW MOVING-POINTER ETERS
- a. CIRCt1AR SCALES - Scale values O YES should increase with clockwise move-ment of the pointer as in Exhibit 6.5-8.
- b. VERTICAL STRA1CHT SCALES -Scale O YES values should increase with upward movement of the pointer as in Exhibit 6.5-9.
9 6 4-110
415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SLRVEY FROINGS & KDS EFERATED PAE 7 OF 15
. - - /lJ / / .
- c. HORIZON (AL STRAIGiT SCALES - O YES Scale values should increase with pointer movement to the right as in Exhbit 6.5 10.
6.5.2.2 POINTERS
- a. POINTER TIP FORM -
(1) Pointer tips should be simple. O NO P.5.1-33 III Examples of preferred and non-preferred types are given in Exhibit 6.5-11. (2) Pointer tips should be selected to O YES minimize concealment of scale reduation marks or numerals. ee Exhibit 6.58.)
- b. POINTER POSITIONING RELATIVE TO SCALE -
(1) Pointer tip should extend to M YES within about 1/16 inch of (but not overlap) the smallest graduation marks on the scale. (See Exhibits 6.5-8, -9,-10.) (2) Pointers should be mounted to M NO P.5.1 29 !!A avoid parallau errors.
- c. POINTER VISIBILITY - Pointer / I NO P.5.1-10 IIC
, background contrast and pointer size O P.5.1-33 111 , should be adequate to permit rapid recognition of pointer position. 6.5.2.3 ZOPE MARKING (Exhibit 6.5 12)
- a. Zone markings should be conspicuous O NO P.5.1 30 !!!
and distinctively different for different zones.
- b. Zone markir:g should not interfere with O NO P.5.1-31 III reading of quantitative markings.
- c. If color is used for coding, color should O N/A SEE CONVEN-be related to meaning as given in T!ONS SURVEY Guideline 6.5.1.6.c. REPORT
%-.e . ..
4-111
e .. - - 4 415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SURVEY FROINGS & KDS GEERATED PAT 8 OF 15
. // J/ /
6.5.2.4 ORENTAT10N OF MARKINGS ON FIXED-SCALE ETERS
- e. NUERAL ORENTATION -Individual O YES numerals on any type of fixed scale should be vertical (see Exhibit 6.5-13).
This holds true for circular as well as lineer scales.
- b. ZERO-POINT ORENTATION -
(1) Where pointer movement is more O N/A then 3600, the zero point should be located at the 12 o' clock position. (2) Where positive and negative O YES values are displayed around a zero i or null position, the zero or null point should be located at the 12 ! o' clock position,
- c. END-POINT NDICATION ON l PARTIAL-REVOLUTIO"J SCALES -
(1) Where the scale covirs less then e a ygg full rotetton of the pointer, scale end-points should be Indicated by a break in scale (see Exhibit 6.5 13). (2) The break should be et least one O YES numbered Intervel in length. (3) The break should be oriented at O YES the 6 o' clock position. 4 , 6.5.2.5 MOVING-SCALE ETERS Moving-scale flued-pointer meters are Infre- 0 N/A quently seen in nuclear power plant control I rooms. They should be evolded in f avor of l the more of fective flued-scale moving. l pointer types. I l l A-112
. .m _.
415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SURVEY FROINGS & FEDS TPERATED PAT 9 OF 15 s- }/ J / / 6.5.3.1 CHARACTERISTICS APO PROBLEMS OF LimT DOICATORS
- b. PRECAUTIONS TO ASSLRE I NO P.5.1 -1 !!C UNAMBICUOUS SENSING RY OPERATORS - Lights should not appear to be glowing when in f act they are of f, or vice verse. To that end, ambient !!ght sources should be selected, located, or cont *olled to evold reflections or refreetions. (See Guideline 6.1.5.3.)
- c. PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID MISINTERPRETAT10N -
(1) System / equipment status should i NO P.5.1 -2 IIA be inferred by lituminated Indica-tors, and never by the absence of . Illumination.
- d. (JSE AS ALERTINGINDICATORS - I NO P.5.1 3 IIC Alerting the operator to unf avr.'able status should be a function of the annunciator system and not assigned to light Indicators.
6.5.3.2 DESim APO USE OF NOPLEEPO LIGHT INDICATORS
- a. IDENTIFICAT10N OF PEAPGO -
(1) Where meaning is not apparent, O NO P.5.1 21 III labelino must be provided close to the light indicator showing the , message Intended by its olowing. (3) The color of the light should be i NO P.5.1-14 III clearly identifiable. 4
- b. LIGHT NTENSITY - The Illuminated O YES Indiestor should be at least 10% greater in light Intensity than the surroundino panel fas measured by a spot photom-eter).
4-113
415-1/0 TABLE 411 DISR.AYS SWYEY FRONGS & FEDS EFERATED PAT 10 OF 15 s_. // J/ / 6.5.3.3 DESKN APO USE OF LEEPO LKNT PotCATORS
- a. VISIBILITY FACTORS -
(1) Light intensity of the illuminated O YES Indicators should be at least 10% greater than the surrounding panel (as measured by a spot photometer). (2) Legends should be legible under O NO P.5.1 22 III ambient illumination with Indica. tor lights off. (3) Legend lettering should contrast O NO P.5.1 24 !!C l~ well with background under both emblent and tranelliuminated lighting,
- b. LETPO DESKN (1) General legend design should be O YES consistent throughout the contro!
, room. (2) Lettering should be simple, and M YES should follow Guideline 6.5.1.3 for style and size. (3) Symbolle legends should be clear O N/A and unambiguous as to their meaning. (4) Text should be short, concise, and O YES unambiguous. (5) Legend messages should contain O YES no more then three !!nes of text. (6) Nomenclature and abbreviations O NO P.5.1-38 !!! should be standard, and consistent i with usene througnout the control j room and in the procedures. (7) Legende should be worded to tell O YES ( the status Indicated by glowing of l the light. 4 i 4-114
415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS St.RVEY FPOINGS & WDS TERATED PAGE 11 OF 15 s- // J/ / 6.5.4.1 GEERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF ORAPHIC RECORDERS
- a. QUALITY OF EXPDOABLE I YES MATERIALS - Pens, inks, and paper should be of a quality to provide clear, distinct, and reliable merking. For example, ink should not clog pens or smudge on the paper.
- b. SCALE C00@ATIBILITY - Scales O YES printed on the recording paper should be the same as the scales shown on the recorder.
- c. SCALE DESIGN - Recorder scales O NO P.5.1 24 !!!
should be numbered and marked O NO P.5.1-28 IIC accordino to the ceneral principles of seele graduntion (Guideline 6.5.1.9, , with number style and dimensions secordino to Guidelines 6.5.1.3 and 6.5.1.4.
- d. PAPER TAKELP APO CUTOFF - A I YES takeup spool should be pratided to receive completed recordings. On most instruments this is provided as an inherent part of the design. Also, means should be provided for toering off completed records for storage,
- g. USE - As a general rule, recorders I NO P.5.1 13 lit i should be used to record trend Informa-tion and material which may be needed for later reference.
- h. PLACEENT OF RECORDERS - Ae I YES devices which must be verified and attended by the operator, graphie
- recorders shou'd in principle be located within the pririory operating area rather then on back panela.
- 1. PAPER-SPEED ADJUSTABILITY -Not I NO P.5.1 14 III only should Ngh paper speed option be provided to run out records for detach-ment, but a selection of lower speeds should be evallable to permit adjust-I ment of the time scale so that rete-of-l change Information etn be Indicated.
t l 4-115
l l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SURVEY FNDINGS & EDS TERATED PAT 12 OF 15 soones 8 # 6.5.4.1 (Cont'd)
}. APNOTATION - It should be con- 1 NO P.5.1-15 III venient to annotate recordings with date and time markings, with paper speed if varied from normal, with parameter identification, or with any other relevant information.
- k. VISIBILITY - Recorder deslan should 1 NO P.5.1-16 IIC ensure that all data will be visible through the window of the recorder and not require open-door operation to exposeit.
6.5.4.2 SPECIFIC RECORDER TYPES
- a. CONTINUOUS RECORDERS -
(1) L ABELING - Labels should O YES Identify the parameters recorded. With multiple-pen recorders, parameters should be listed in the order of the associated scales on the recorder. (2) INK COLORS - Each pen should O YES use a different colored ink to permit channe! identification from line color. Colors selected should be distinctively different and should af ford good contrast with the paper.
- b. DESCRETE RECORDERS -
(D CHANNCL OVERLOAD - The I NO P.S.1-?O III recorder should not be loaded beyond its designed channel capacity because this adds com-plexity to the analysis and pro-longs sampling cycle time. I f2) CHANNEL IDENTIFICATION ON O NO P.5.1a32 Ill
. INSTRUNENT - Discrete recorders should be equipped to display an easily viewed manner the channel being plotted.
Viewing from odd and incon-
- venient angles should not be .-
! Imposed. A 4-116 9
415-1/0 4 TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SURVEY FWOINGS & KDS TERATED PAT 13 OF 15 s_. /lJ / / 6.5.4.2b (Cont'd) (3) CHANNEL IDENTIFICATION ON O YES RECORDING - Number-printing mechanism should be designed and maintained to provide clear, . sharp, and small numbering to avoid crowding of data and conse-quent analysis problems. ' (4) CHANNEL SELECTION I YES CAPABILITY - Provision should be made to select any single channel for immediate display without awaiting completion of a sampling cycle. 6.5.5.1 DRtM-TYPE cot.NTERS
- s. NUKRICAL PRESENTATION FACTORS -
(1) ORIENTATION - Multidigit O N/A numbers formed by several counter drums should be read horizontally from left to right (see Exhibit 6.5-14). (2) WIDTH. HEIGHT RATIO - To M N/A compensate for the distortion imposed by the curved surface of the drum, counter numerals should reflect a width-height ratio of 1:1, not 3:5 as recom-mended for numerals and other
. displays.
(3) GROUP!NG OF NUhERALS - If O N/A more than four digits are required, they should be grouped and 'he groupings separated as appropriate by commas, by a - i decimal point, or by additional l space (see Exhibit 6.5-15), f4) CONTRAST - The color of the O N/A numerals and of the background should be chosen to yield Ngh contrast. Black numerals on wNte drum surface is . recommended. *
'4-117
415-1/0 TABLE 411 DISPLAYS SURVEY FDONGS & FEDS TPERAlED PAT 14 OF 15 s.. / / J/ / 6.5.5.la (Cont'd) ($) DRUM FINISH - The surface of O N/A the drums and surrounding areas should have a matte finish to minimite glare,
- b. MOLNTING -
(1) Drum-type counters are clearly 0 N/A readable only within a viewing angle that is more restrictive than for most displays. Accordingly, they should be mounted perpendicular to the operator's line of sight. (2) Counters should be mounted as O N/A close as possible to the panel surface to minimize shadows and ! maximize viewing angle. (3) The window should be sired to 'O N/A allow no more than one digit per drum to appear in the window at any one time.
- c. DRLM MOVEhENT -
(1) Numbers should change by snap O N,'A 4 action rather than throuoh con. tlnuous movement. (2) The counter drums should move O N/A upward with increasing values. 6.5.5.2 ELECTROMC COLNTERS
- a. NUhERICAL PRESENTATION FACTORS -
- (1) bRIENTATION - Multidigit O YES
! counters should be oriented to , read horizontally from lef t to right. 3 i r e 1 i [ - l-l :, 4-118 l
415-1/0 , 1
~
TABLE 4-11 DISPLAYS SLRVEY FDONGS & EDS TERATED PAT 15 CF 15 s- / / J/ / 6.5.5.7a (Cont'd) (2) CHARACTER STYLE - Simple O YES character fonts should be used. Styles using variable stroke widths, slanted characters, etc., should be evolded. (3) NUMERAL KICHT - Numerals M YES should be of such a height as to subtend a visual angle of 15 minutes from the farthest antici. pated viewing distance. (4) WIDTH-TO-HEIGHT RATIO - M YES Width-to-heigh ratio of numerals should be approximately 3 5. (5) SPACING - Horizontal spacing M YES between numerals should be between one-quarter and one-half the numeral width.
- b. RATE OF CHANT - Numerals should M YES not follow each other faster than two per second when the operator is expected to read the numerals consecutively.
- c. CONTRAST - Character-to-background M YES contrast ratio should be between 15:1 minimum and 20:1 preferred.
4 . 4-119
1 6 i 1
. , 1 1
,( L
/.
1 415-1/0 if . ~ S12 Labels and Location Aids Survey
, T,h!s section documents the results of the labeis and location aids survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in-accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Prograrn Plan.-
s
'4.12.1 Objectives The objectives of the labels and location aids survey were to:
' a. Asses the~ degree to which all labels and location sids in the controi room conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features'of the labels and location aids that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
. r i
4.12.2 [ Scope The scope ,of the effort extends to the assessment of the labels and location aids in the main controI room.at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station uaing' the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. 'The topics evaluated include: - o Laboli'ng of annunciator panels. o Color codind of labels o Need for labeling o Hierarchical labeling - o Placefnent of labels o Mounting of labels o Spatial orientation of labels i o - Label disibility
, o ' Cabel' content 4 /
' o ' Word selection , ,
o Consistency, l ,
~ o Symbols
, .o Controi position labehng ,
T o Label readability e ,. 7
'o Temporary labels <
' / # ^
o - Demarcation - c
./ >
r o M: nics, ff
, _ '. nj .
+ < , . ,-
,y- r -
<_ v. - -
.h '
..~.
?
7 [" 4-120. , L 't - 2
.4 '
, mj
;a .
;~*.
; ,?
l x y '/.;
+
c
~, '
, , ; r/
.,- C$ ""# *
, $ :. g [. '
, 'l -[ # ,
415-1/0 4.12.3 Criteria The criteria applied in mis survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, ares paragraphs 6.3.3.3c(3); 6.5.1.6a through e; 6.6.1.1, 6.6.1.2a and b; 6.6.2.la through f; 6.6.2.2a and b; 6.6.2.3a and b; 6.6.2.4a through d; 6.6.3.la through e; 6.6.3.5; 6.6.3.6, 6.6.3.7a and b; 6.6.3.8a through c; 6.6.5.la through h; 6.6.5.2a and b; 6.6.6.2a through c; 6.6.6.3; 6.6.6.4a and b; and 6.8.3.2d. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presentedin Table 4-12. 4.12.4 Method 4.12.4.1 Data Collection
- a. Data collected during operator interviews were reviewed to identify potential problem in the design, location, or content of CR labels and other location sids.
- b. Data were collected using the checklists from the Labels and Location Aids Task Plan. Data were collected primarily through interviews with operators and direct observation of the CR labeling. As necessary, measurements were made of the physical characteristics (e.g., character size and separation, height-to-width ratios, etc.) of the CR labels. For those guidelines related to consistency with operating. procedures (e.g.,
6.6.3.3.c), operating procedures were reviewed.
- c. Data were recorded on the appropriate data collection forms.
4.12.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the labels involved, a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the labels task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
4.12.5 Findings The findings of the labels and location aids survey are presented in Table 4-12
" Labels Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall,113 criteria were applied to the labels and locatfon aids'in the Davis-Besse control room. Of these,12 (10%) were not applicable,61 (53%) were in compliance, and 40 (35%) were not in compliance. A total of 26 HEDs were generated which document all of the 40 criteria which were not met. In 4-121-
415-1/0 general,' those' HEDs address label content,' temporary labels, lack of a hierarchical labeling scheme, nonstandard abbreviations, readability of labels, and lack of demarca-tion. -- f d 4 4 t
~
- ~
I 1 4 '
.- A.
4-122' - i
415-1/0 l TABLE 4 LABELS SURVEY FINDINGS & KDs GEERATED Page 1 of 13 sootues #
/ 8/ @
/ #
/
6.3.3.3 ARRANCEPENT OF VISUAL ALARM TILES
- e. LABELING OF AXES (1) The vertical and horizontal axes O NO P.3.1 3 5 III of annunciator panels should be labeled with alp 5anumeries for ready coordinate des!qnation of a particular visual tile.
(2) Coordinate desionation is prefer. O NO P.3.1 -M !!! Assess in red on the lef t and top sides of labeling study. the annuncistor panel. (3) Letter beloht for coordinate M YES designation should be consistent with a subtended visual angle of at least 15 minutes as viewed from a central position within the primary operating area. 6.5.1.6 COLOR CODING
- a. REDLNOANCY - In all app!! cations of O YFS color coding, color should provide redundant information. That is, the pertinent information should be available from some other cue in addition to color.
- b. NtNBER & COLORS .
^~'
(1) The number of colors used for O YES coding should be kept to the minimum needed for providing _ suf ficient information. (2) The number of colors used for O YES coding should not exceed 11
- c. MEANING OF COLORS (1) The meaning attached to a O YES particular color should be narrowly defined.
4-123.
i j l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-12 LABELS SURVEY FINDINGS & KDa TFERATED Page 2 of 13 sessuse #
/ 8e/ a
/ #
/
L5.1.6c. (CONT'D) (2) Red, green, ember (yellow) should be reserved for the following uses: Red: unsafe, danger, immed O NO P.8.1-1 !!! Assess in late operator action required, labeling study. or an indication that a critical parameter is out of tolerance. Greens safe, no operator O NO P.8.1-3 !!! Assess in action required, or en Indi labeling study. cation that a parameter is within tolerance. Amber (yellow): hazard O NO P.8.1-4 !!! Assess in (petentially unsafe), caution, labeling study. attention required, or an Indi. cation that a marginal value or parameter exists.
- d. CONSISTENCY OF hCANING (3) The meaning of a particular color N/A N/A Addressed in should remain the same hoth Conventions within and among the various Survey systems to which it is applied.
- e. PRINCIPLES OF COLOR SELECTION (1) The primary principle which should be applied in selecting colors for coding purposes which do not have the immediate safe'./
implications of red, green, and amber is to ensure that each color is recognized as different from any other. Exhibit 6.5-7 lists 22 colors of maximum contrast. Each successive color has been selected so that it will contrast maximally with the color just preceding it and satisf actorily - with earlier colors in the list. The first 9 colors have been selected so as to yleid saftisfactory contrast for red-green-deficient as well as color-normal observers. The remaining 13 colors are useful only for color-normal observers. I 4-124
415-1/0 l TABLE 4-12
- LABELS SURVEY FROINGS & KDs GEERATED Page 3 of 13 s-. / / J/ /
6.5.1.6e. (CONT'D) (2) Colors selected for coding should O YES contrast well with the background on which they appear. (3) Ambient lighting in the area in O YES which color coding is used will influence the apparent color of the coded element (especially for surface colors). Each color selected for codino should be evaluated under all l!!umination conditions under which it is used. 6.6.1.1 KED FOR LABELING Controls, disolays, and other equipment items I NO P.6.1 -1 IIC Assess in that must be located, identified, er manipu labeling study. lated should be appropriately and clearly labeled to permit rapid and accurite human performance. 6.6.1.2 HIERARCHICAL SCHME To reduce confusion, ooerator search time, O NO P.6.' ' t) IIC Assess in and redundancy, a hierarchical labeling labeling study. should be used. (See Exhibit 6.6 1.1
- a. RAPE < LNG (1) Major labels should be used to O YES identify major systems or operator work stations.
f2) Subordinate labels should be used - 0 NO P.6.1 11 IIC Assess in to identify subsystems or func . labeling study. . tional groups. (3) Component labels should be used O YES to identify each discrete panel or console element. (4) Labels should not repeat infor- N/A N/A mation contained in higher-level labels. 1 4-125
l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-12 LABELS SURVEY FINDINGS & KDa GEbERATED Page 4 of 13
/
/ #/
sumiues # a' + ! 6.6.1.2 (CONT'D)
- b. LETTER GRADATIONS - Labels should be craduated in letter size such that:
fli System / work station labels are M YES about 25% larger than (2) Subsystem / functional group labels M NO P.6.1 28 III Assess in whleh are about 25% larger than labeling study. (9 Component labels which are about M YES 25% larger than
'41 Control position identifiers. M YES 6.6.2.1 PLACEMENT
- a. NORMAL PLACEMENT - Labels O NO P.6.1 12 !!A Assess in should be placed above the panel ele labeling study.
ment's) they describe.
- b. PAEL LABELING - The placement O NO P.6.1-12 !!A Assess in of labels on control panels should con labelino study.
form to the guidance shown in Exhibit 6.6-1.
- c. VISIBILITY EPNANCEMENT - Labels O NO P.6.1-12 IIA Assess in of elements located above eye level labeling study.
should be positioned to ensure label visibility,
- d. PROXIMITY - Labels should be placed O YES close to the panel element. See Exhibit 6.6 - 2.
- e. LABELS ON CONTRCLS - Labels D YES should not appear on the control itself when en adjustment or manipulation is required that causes the operator's hand j to obscure the label for an extended time period,
! f. ADJACENT LABELS --Adjacent labels O YES should be separated by sufficient apace so that they are not read as one continuous ! label. See Exhibits 6.6-3 and 6.6-4, 6.6.2.2 MOLNTING l a. INTEGRITY- Label should be mounted O YES in such a way as to preclude accidental , . removal. 4-126
415-1/0 i TABLE 4-12 LABELS SURVEY FINDINGS & KDs GEPERATED Page 5 of 13 s.- / / J/ / \ 6.6.2.2 (CONT'D)
- b. SURFACE - Labels should be mounted O YES on a flat surface.
6.6.2.3 SPATIAL ORIENTATION
- a. HORIZONTAL ORIENTATION (1) Labels should be oriented hort- O YES zontally so that they may be read quickly and easily from left to right.
(2) Althouoh not normally recom- O YES mended, vertical orientation may be used only where space is limited.
- b. CURVED PATTERNS - Curved O YES patterns of labeling should be avoided.
See Exh! bit 6.6-5. 6.6.2.4 VISIBILITY
- a. OTWR INFORMATION SOLRCES - 0 NO P.6.1 15 IIA Labels should not cover atiy other infor-mation source. They should not detract from or obscure figures or scales which must be read by the operator.
- b. CONCEALMENT - Labels should not O NO P.6.1-16 !!! Assess in be covered or obscured by other units in labeling study.
the equipment assembly.
- c. CONTROLS - Labels should be visible I YES to the operator during control actuation.
- d. CLEAMNG - Administrative pro- I NO P.6.1 -7 Ill Turn over to cedures should be in place for the ops, admin.
periodic cleaning of labels. 6.6.3.1 KINDS OF PFORMATION
- a. PRIMARY FLNCTION - Labels should 1 NO P.6.1-3 !!C describe the function of equipmtist items.
- b. SECOPOARY FLNCTION --If needed for O YES clarity, engineering characteristics or nomenclature may also be described.
l
.4-127
415-1/0 TABLE 4-12 LABELS SURVEY FINDINGS & KDs GEERATED Page 6 of 13 s-. / J/ / l 6.6.3.2 WORD SELECTION
- a. INTEPOED ACTION --The words employed i NO P.6.1-4 IIC Assess in in the label should express exactly what labelino study.
action is intended.
~
- b. CL ARITY - Instructions should be ! YES clear.
- c. DIRECT - Instructions should be I YES direct.
- d. MEANING - Words should be used that I NO P.6.1 -5 Ill Assess in have a commonly accepted meaning for labeling study.
all intended users.
- e. TECFNICAL TERMS - Unusual tech. I YES nical terms should be avoided.
- f. SPELLING - Words should be correctly 0 YES spe!!ed.
6.6.3.3 CONSISTENCY
- b. INTERNAL CONSISTENCY - Labels O NO P.6.1 17 Ill Assess in should be consistent within and across labeling study.
pieces of equipment in their use of words, acre '/ms, abbreviations, and pai /syste.n numbers. See Exhibit 6.6-6.
- c. CONSISTENCY WITH PROCEDLRES D NO P.6.1-26 IIC Assess in
- There should be no mismatch labelino study.
between nomenclature used in pro-cedures and that printed on the labels. 6.6.3.4 SYMBOLS .
- a. MEANING - Abstract symbols should I YES be used only if they have a commonly accepted meaning for all intended users f e.g., %).
- b. DISTINGUISHABILITY - Symbols 1 YES should be unique and distinguishable from each other.
- c. STAPOARD - A commonly accepted I YES standard configuratlon should be used.
- d. CONSISTENCY - Symbols should be O YES consistently used within and across panels.
I f 128
1 l i 415-1/0 TABLE 4-12 LABELS SURVEY FIPOINGS & FEDS EPERATED Page 7 of 13 s-- / at / / 6.6.3.4 (CONT'D)
- e. ROMAN NUhERALS - Use of Roman O YES numerals should be avoided.
6.6.3.5 BREVITY Brevity should not be stressed if the results I NO P.6.1-5 III Assess in will be unfamiliar to operating personnel, labeling study. Words on labels should be concise and st!!! convey the intended meaning. See Exhibit 6.6 - 7. 6.6.3.6 SIMILARITY Words and abbreviations of similar appear. O YES ance should be avoided where an error in interpretation could result. When labels containing similar words, abbreviations, or acronyms are located in close proximity to each other, different words should be selected or means of coding should be used to reduce the probability of selecting the wrong control or reading the wrong display. See Exhibit 6.6-0. 6.6.3.7 FUNCTIONAL GROLPS
- a. FUNCTIONAL RELATIONSHP - O NO P.6.1-11 ' liC Assess in Labels should be used to identify labeling study.
functionally grouped controls or displays.
- b. LOCATION - Labels should be located O YES above the functional groups they ident-ify.
6.6.3.8 CONTROL POSTION LABELING
- a. POSITION All discrete functional O NO P.6.1-32 III Assess in control positons should be i&ntified. labeling study.
- b. DIRECTION - Direction of motien O YES (increase, decrease) should be identified for continuous motion rotary controls,
- c. VISIBILITY - Control position infor- I YES mation should be visible to the operator during operation of the control.
129
415-1/0 TABLE 412 LABELS SURVEY FINDINGS & KDa GEKRATED Page 8 of 13
]
s-- 6.6.3.9 ACCESS OPENING, DANGER
/ lJ/ /
WARNING, APO SAFETY INSTRUCTION LABCLING
- a. ACCESS OPENING LABELS - Each O YES access opening used by control room operators should be labeled to identify the function of items accessible through it.
- 5. DANGER, WARNING, APO SAFETY O YES INSTRUCTION LABELS - All danger, warning, and safety instruction labels should be in accordance with appropri-ate safety standards.
6.6.4.1 READABILITY
- a. CHARACTER KlGHT (1) Character height should subtend a M NO P.6.1-20 !!! Assess in visual anole of 15 minutes as a labeling study.
minimum, or 0.004 x viewing distance. A visual angle of 20 minutes, or 0.006 x viewing dis-tance, is preferred. , (2) Letter height should be identical M NO P.6.1 27 Ill Assess in for all labels within the same labeling study. hierarchical level, based on the maximum viewing distance.
- h. CONTRAST (1) To ensure adequate contrast and O NO P.6.1.18 !!! Assess in prevent loss of readability la5eling study.
because of dirt, dark characters should be provided on a light background. (2) If color print is used for coding N/A N/A purposes, it should conform to the established color codho scheme for the control room. (See Guide-line 6.5.1.6.1 Colors should be chosen for msnimum contrast against the label background. Exhibit 6.6-9 rstes various color combinations in terms of relative
' legibility.
, 4-130
415-1/0 TABLE 4-12
- LABELS SURVEY FIbOINGS & EDs GEERATED Page 9 of 13 s.- / / J/ /
6.6.4.2 STYLE (Exhibita 6.5 1 and 6.5-2)
- a. CHARACTER SELECTION (1) Labels should be prepared in capi- O YES tal letters.
-f2) The design of letters and num- O YES erals s5ould be simple and without flourishes or serifs.
- b. CHARACTER WIDTH Oi Letter width-to-height ratio M YES should be between 1:1 and 3:5.
(2) Numeral width-to-height ratio M YES shesuld be 3:5 except for the num-eral"4" whic5 should be one stroke width wider and the num-eral"1" which should be one stroke in width.
- c. STROKE WIDTH - Stroke width-to. M NO P.6.1-3f1 III Assess in character height ratio should be labeling study. .
between 1:6 and 1:8.
- d. SPACING 2
(1) The minimum space between M NO P.6.1-31 III Assess in characters should be one stroke labeling study. width. (1) The minimum space between M YES words should be one character wldth. ] (3) The minimum space between lines M YES should be one-half of the char-acter height.
- 6.6.5.1 USE OF" TEMPORARY LABELS
- a. ECESSITY - Temporary labels should i NO P.6.1 -7 III . Asasess in be used only when necessary, labeling study.
l [ b. HLMAN FACTORS PRACTICES - 0 NO P.6.1 19 111 . Assess in i Temporary labels should conform to ' labeling study. good human engineering principles. l l t 4-131 l
415-1/0 TABLE 4-12 LABELS SURVEY FINDINGS & KDs OENERATED Page 10 of 13 svenues #
/ 8/ @
/ #
/
6.6.5.1 (CONT'D)
- c. VISIBILITY - Temporary labels should O NO P.6.1 15 IIA not obscure prior permanent labels unless the old label is to be replaced.
- d. IDENTIFICATION - Tag-out labels O YES should clearly identify out-of-service components and equipment,
- e. MOLNTING - Tao-outs should be O YES securely affixed.
- f. OBSCURATION - Tag-outs should not O NO P.6.1-15 !!A obscure the la5el associated with the
! nonoperable device.
- g. ACTIVATION - Tag-outs should be ! YES designed to physically prevent actu-ation of a control.
- h. ADJACENT DEVICES - Tag-outs O NO P.6.1-15 !!A should not obscure any adjacent devices or their associated labels.
6.6.5.2 CONTROL OF TEMPORARY LABELS
- a. ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES - D YES The use of temporary labels should be administratively controlled.
- b. REVIEW PROCEDURES - A review D YES procedure should be in place that will result in a determination of:
(1) when temporary labels are needed; (2) how they will be used; D YES (3) their content (given human engi. D YES neering requirementsh j (O their installation; D YES
'(5) the impact of their use on other D YES j system equipment (e.g., annun-l clators, mimicsh I.
4'* l 4-132
415-1/0 TABLE 4-12 LABELS SURVEY FINDINGS & FEDS GEPERATED Page II of 13 6.6.5.2b. (CONT'D) s_. // J/ / (6) documentation reaulrements; D YES f7) retraining reautrements; D YES (R) their periodic review; and D YES (4) their removal. D YES i 6.6.6.2 DEMARCATION (See Exhibit 6.8-1)
- a. USE - Lines of demarcation can be used to:
/11 Enclose functionally related dis- N/A N/A plays.
'21 Enclose functionally related con- N/A N/A trols.
(3) Group related controls and dis. N/A N/A plays.
- b. CONTRAST - Lines of demarcation N/A N/A should be visually distinctl*ve from the panel background.
- c. PERMAPENCE - Lines of N/A N/A demarcation should be permanently attached.
6.6.6.3 CC1.OR Color should be dedicated to specific fune- N/A N/A See Conven-tions or conditions throughout the control tions Survey room in order for the code to elicit the Report expected operator response. The color cod-Ing scheme should be used consistently throuq50ut the control room. Refer to Guideline 6.5.1.6 for specific recom-mendations on the use of color. l \ L 4-133
415-1/0 TABLE 4-12 I
!.ABELS SURVEY FIFOINGS & FEDS GDERATED Page 12 of 13 l sesume #
/ $/ G
/ #
/ ,
6.6.6.4 USE OF MIMICS
- a. COLOR (1) Flow paths should be color coded. O NO P.6.1-20 !!C Assess in Colors should be selected in con labelli.g study.
formance with Guidesines 6.5.1.6. (2) The mimic colors should be dis- I NO P.6.1-9 !!C Assess in criminably different from each labeling study, other. (3) There should be adequate contrast O YES between the mimic colors and the panel. (4) Mimic lines depicting flow of the O NO P.6.1-20 !!C Assess in same contents (e.g., steam, labeling study. water, electricity) should be color coded the same throughout the control room. (5) No more than 4 mimic lines of the O YES same color should run in parallel if the operator must quickly identify any one of the lines.
- b. MIMIC LIPES (1) Differentialline widths may be O YES used to code flow paths (e.g.,
significance, volume, level). , (2) Overlapping of mimic lines should O YES be avoided. (3) Flow directions should be clearly 0 YES , indicated by distinctive arrow-heads. (4) All mimic origin points should be O NO P.6.1-23 III Assess in labeled or begin at labeled com labeling study. ponents. (5) All mimic destination or terminal O NO P.6.1-23 III Assess in points should be labeled or end at labeling study." i labeled components. I i (6) Component representationa on O . NO P.6.1-24 IIC Assess in mimic lines should be identified. labeling study. a. A 4-134
415-1/0 TABLE 4-12 LABO.S SURVEY FIPOINGS & KDa GEfERATED Page 13 of 13 6.6.3.4 (CONT'D) s-- / J/ /
- c. SYMBOLS (1) Graphic symbols should be readily N/A N/A See Conven-understood and commonly used. tions Survey Report f21 Symbols should be used consis. N/A N/A See Conven-tently. tions Survey
. Report 6.8.3.2 STRINGS OR CLUSTERS OF SIMILAR COP @OPENTS
- d. LARGE MATRICES (1) Large matrices of similar com. N/A N/A ponents should have the coordinate axes labeled for identification of any single component within the grid. The left and top sides of the matrix should be used for labeling (see -
Exhibit 6.R-6% (2) Large matrices should be sub- 0 NO P.6.1-25 !!C divided by appropriate demar-cation, f 4 l 4-135
l 415-1/0 4.13 Conventions Survey , This section documents the results of the conventions survey conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.13.1 Objectives The objectives of the conventions survey were to:
- a. Identify the NUREG-0700 defined conventions that are applied in the Davis-Besse control room.
- b. Determine if the applications of the identified conventions are con-sistent across the applicable design features.
- c. Document any inconsistent or missing conventions in the control room.
4.13.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of color, shape, and arrangement coding across design features in the main control room at Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The topics evaluated include: o Coding of controls o Color coding of controls and displays o Label content consistency o Enhancements of emergency controls. Abbreviations and acronyms used within the control room were addressed in the labeling survey, 4.13.3 Criteria The criteria applied in this survey,' identified by NUREG-0700 paragrsph number, are: paragraphs 6.3.3.4d; 6.4.2.28, b, f(1) and f(2); 6.5.1.6b(2), c(2), and d(1) through d(3);
~
l 6.5.3.2a(2); 6.6.3.3a; 6.6.6.4c(1) and c(2); and 6.8.1.3c and d. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-13. 4.13.4 Method 4.13.4.1 Data Collection
- a. All required data forms, plant documentation, engineering drawings, equipment, and materials were made available prior to conduct of this 1
4-136
415-1/0 task. Permission was obtained for all required access to the control room.
- b. Data were collected using methods and procedures consisting of obser-vations and document reviews.
- c. Administrative procedures were reviewed to verify the items listed in the Document Review Checklist in the conventions task plan.
4.13.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the compo-nents involved (e.g., controls, meters, labels, etc.), a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the :.rlteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
- c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the conventions task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria.
4.13.5 Findings The findings of the conventions survey are presented in Table 4-13 " Conventions Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall,18 criteria were applied to the conventions in the Davis-Besse cor.:rol room. Of these, eight (44%) were not applicable, one (5%) was in compliance, and nine (50%) were not in compliance. A total of six HEDs were generated which document all of the nine criteria which were not met. In general, those HEDs addressed inconsistent uses of color, no administrative control over the uses of abbreviations and no enhancement techniques used on emergency controls. 4-137
415-1/0 , I TABLE 4-1} CONVENTIONS SURVEY FNDINGS & FEDS GEPERATED Page 1 of 3 s.. 6.3.3.4 VISUAL TILE LEGENDS
/ J/ /
- d. ABBREVIATIONS - Abbreviations and N/A N/A Addressed in aeronyms should be consistent with Labels Survey those used elsewhere in the control room.
6.4.2.2 CODING OF CONTROLS (Exhibit 6.4-3)
- a. CONSISTENCY - The coding system N/A N/A should be uniform throughout the control room.
- b. t.OCATION CODING - Controls should N/A N/A be located so as to be easily related to functions and functional groupings.
Controls with similar functions should be in the same location from panel to panel. (See Guideline 6.8.2.3.1
- f. COLOR CODING (1) Color coding should follow the O NO P.8.1 1 !!! Assess in recommendations of Guideline labeling study.
6.5.1.6. ,, (2) When color coding is used to N/A N/A relate a control to its corre-sponding display, the same color should he used for both the control and the display. 6.5.1.6 COLOR CODING
- b. NLMBER OF COLORS O YES (2) The number of colors used for coding shuld not exceed 11.
l l 4* 4-138
415-1/0 l TABLE 413 CONVENTIONS SURVEY Fih MNGS & KDs GEERATED Page 2 of 3 4 6.5.1.6 (CONT'D) s-- EJ/ /
- c. MEAMNG OF COLORS (2) . Red, green, and ember (yellowi should be reserved for the following uses:
Red: unsafe, danger, immediate O NO P.R.1 -2 III Assess in operator action required, or an labeling study. indication that a critical param-eter is out of tolerance. Green: safe, no operator action - 0 NO P.R.1 -3 111 Assess in required, or an Indication that a labelinQ study. parameter is within tolerance. Amber (yellowh hazard O NO P.R.1 - 4 !!! Assess in fpotentially unsafel, caution, labeling study. attention reoulred, or an indica-tion that a marginal value or parameter exists,
- d. CONSISTENCY OF DEANING (1) The meaning assigned to partico. O NO P.A.1-1 !!! Assess in lar colors s50uld be consistent labeling study.
across all applications within the control room, f2) The meaning of a particular color O NO P.R.1 1 III Assess in should remain the same whether labelino study. applied to panel surf aces or pro-jected in signal lights or on CRTs. f3) The meaning of a particular color N/A N/A should remain the same both , within and among the various systems to which it is applied. 6.5.3.2 DESIGN APO USE OF NOM.EGEND l LIGHT INDICATORS l
- a. IDENTIFICATION OF DEAMNG
(?) The color of the light Indicator O NO P.R.1 -1 III Assess in when transilluminated should labeling study. conform to the general code established for the control room, fSee Guideline 6.5.1.6.) { i . 4-139
415-1/0 4 TABLE 4-13 CONVENTIONS SURVEY FPOINGS & EDs GEERATED Page 3 of 3
.-.. / ri / /
6.6.3.3 LABEL CONTENT CONSISTENCY
- a. ADMINISTRATIVE CONTROL - A list D NO P.O.1-5 III Assess in of standard names, acronyms, abbrevia labeling study.
tions, and part/ system numbers should , be in place and administratively controlled. 6.6.6.4 USE OF MIMICS
- c. SYMBOLS Oi Graphic symbols should be readily N/A N/A understood and commonly used.
f21 Symbols should be used N/A N/A consistently. 6.8.1.3 DMANCING RECOCNITION AND IDENTIFICAT10N
- c. COLOR SHADING - Color shading NA N/A may be used to enhance recognition of controls, displays, or functional groups.
When color shading is used, colors should provide adequate contrast, and should be consistent with other color coding in the control traom.
- d. EMERENCY CONTRCES -Distine. O NO P.R.I.6 Ill Assess in tive enhancement techniques should be labeling study.
used for emergency controls. 4 4 4-140 y
, m . - n, m -
l 415-1/0 4.14 Computer System Survey This section documents the results of the computer system conducted in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station. This review was conducted in accordance with the requirements of NUREG-0700, as specified in the Davis-Besse DCRDR Program Plan. 4.14.1 Objectives The objectives of the computer system survey were to:
- a. Assess the degree to which the computer system in the control room conforms to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
- b. Identify and document any features of the computer system that do not conform to the criteria in NUREG-0700.
4.14.2 Scope The scope of the effort extends to the assessment of the computer system design in the main control room at the Davis-Besse Nuclear Station using the applicable guidelines as stated in NUREG-0700. The topics evaluated include: o Software security o Operator / computer dialogue o Prompting and structuring o Keyboards o Computer function controls o Other control devices o Computer response time o Access aids o CRT display characteristics o Symbol and character size o Operator-display relationships o Data presentation format o Screen layout and structuring o Messages o Graphic coding and highlighting o Multiple-page considerations o Printer characteristics o Alarm messages o Graph and table requirements. 4-141
415-1/0 4.14.3 Criteria The criteria applied in this survey, identified by NUREG-0700 paragraph number, are: paragraphs 6.5.1.6d(2), 6.7.1.1a through d, 6.7.1.2a through d, 6.7.1.3a through e, 6.7.1.4a through 1, 6.7.1.5a through d, 6.7.1.6a through d, 6.7.1.7a and b, 6.7.1.8a and b, 6.7.2.la through h, 6.7.2.2a through g, 6.7.2.3a through f, 6.7.2.4a through q, 6.7.2.5a through n, 6.7.2.6a through 1, 6.7.2.7a through m, 6.7.2.8a through e, 6.7.3.la through f, 6.7.3.2a through f,6.7.3.3a through d. The detailed definitions for each criterion are presented in Table 4-14. 4.14.4 Method 4.14.4.1 Data Collection
- a. Data were collected using the checklists contained in the Computer System Task Plan. Data were collected primarily through direct observation of the computer system in the CR and examination of hard-copy printouts of display pages. As necessary, personnel from the Davis-Besse computer group were consulted to augment or clarify observations.
Measurement of physical characteristics of the computer system (e.g., key displacement, character size and separation, etc.) were made. System documentation, including operating procedures and hardware specifications, were reviewed, as required.
- b. All pertinent observations were recorded on the appropriate data forms.
4.14.4.2 Analysis - Data were analyzed according to the following procedure:
- a. All deviations from the criteria were recorded on Human Engineering Discrepancy (HED) reports. Recorded information included the items Involved, a description of the problem including the NUREG-0700 paragraph number of the criteria, and a recommended solution.
- b. The data collection method was also recorded on the HED form. Where data from two or more sources were contradictory, resolution of the conflict was achieved through data review and discussions with cognizant plant personnel.
l c. Upon completion of all analyses, the criteria of the computer system task plan were annotated to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the criteria. l j 4.14.5 Findings The findings of the computer system survey are presented-in Table 4-14 " Computer l Survey Findings and HEDs Generated." Overall,226 criteria were applied to the computer- [ . system in the Davis-Besse control room. Of these 27 (12%) were not applicable,165 (73%) were in compliance, and 31 (14%) were not in comp!!ance. A total of 16 HEDs' were l L 4-142
415-1/0 generated which document all of the 31 criteria which were not met. In general those HEDs address uses of colors as the CRT displays, computer procedures, character separation on CRT displays, blink rates, flicker on CRTs, display formats.
.P*.
_ 4-143 _____e_ __ _ . _ _ - _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ , _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 Coke'LJTER SURVEY FIPOINGS & IEDa GDERATED Page 1 of 29 ) s-
// J/ /
6.5.1.6 COLOR CODING
- d. CONSISTENCY OF hEA>5NG (2) The meaning of a particular color - O NO P.8.1 1 !!! Assess in should remain the same whether labeling study.
applied to panel surfaces or pro-jected in signallights or on CRTs. 6.7.1.1 SOFTWARE SECURITY
- a. AUTHORIZATION - The system O YES should include positive protection pro-visions to ensure that only properly authorized personnel can make changes (by entry, deletion, or alteration).
- b. SECURE STORAGE - At least one O YES copy of the current operating software should be stored in a secure remote location.
- c. EDITING - When characters, words, or O YES phrases are to be Inserted, such items should first be collected and displayed on a buf fer area of the screen, and then collectively inserted by on*e operator command.
- d. ACKNOWLEDGEhENT - Before any 0 YES operator requests are processed that would result in permanent changes to existing date, the computer system should require operator acknowledge-ment.
6.7.1.2 OPERATOR / COMPUTER DIALOGL.E
- a. LANGUAGE CHARACTERISTICS (1) Dialogue should be based on the O YES
. operator's point of view, not the programmer's.
(2) Dialogue should be logical. O YES (3) Dialogue should be used in a con- O YES sistent manner. E 1 i l 4-144
. 415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COwuTER SURVEY FIPOINGS & KDs EPERATED Page 2 of 29 '
sestues #
/ 8/ 8
/ /
6.7.1.2a (Cont'd) (4) Dialogue should reflect the O YES vocabulary and syntax of the expected user population. (5) Input words (e.g., keywords) O YES should approximate real words. (64 Dialogue should require an O YES explicit command in order to terminate en interaction.
- b. ENTRY LENGTH - Individual Input O YES words which must be typed should not
. exceed 7 characters.
- c. ABBREVIATIONS (1) Abbreviations should be used O YES whenever possible to minimize operator input reoultements.
(t) If the operator is usino a synonym O YES or abbreviation for a system com-mand name, the computer system should use t5e same synonym or abbreviation when referring to that command in messages, prompts, etc., to the operator. O) The use of abbreviations or con- O YES tractions for output text s50uld be evolded.
- d. ERROR AVOIDANCE - Operator O YES inputs, responses, or actions which ,
could significantly degrade computer system or plant performance should not be dependent on a single keystroke. 6.7.1.3 PROWTING Ato STRUCTLRING
- o. OPERATOR REQUESTS - The com O YES
- puter system should contain prompting l and structuring features by which an operator can request additional Infor.
motion. t
- 4-145 l
l
- --n-o---wt- - 415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COwitJTER SURVEY FINDINGS & EDs CEERATED Page 3 of 29 6.7.1.3a (Cont'd)
.. Ih / /
- b. CCRRECTION OF DATA - The ecm. O YES puter system should contain prompting and structuring features by which an operator can request corrected infor-mation when an error is detected.
- c. MODE / FILE DISPLAY - The corf,taer O YES system should display the mode desig-nation and the file (si being processed.
- d. SPECIFIC ERROR CORRFCTION - O YES The computer system should permit correction of individual errors without requiring re-entry of corr 2ctly entered data.
- e. ENTRY FILE - The computer system O YES should contain a sequential file of operator entries, ava!lable upon opera.
tor request. 6.7.1.4 DATA ENTRY - KEYBOARDS
- a. ALPHANUERIC KEYBOARD -
ARRANGEMENT - Keyboa-ds that' O YES combine alphabetic and numeric fune-t!ons on a single keyboard abould con-f arm to the standard "QWERTY" arrangement. See Exhibit 6.7.-l.
- b. NUMEft!C KEYBOARD ARRANCE- O YES MENT - The configuration of a key-board used to enter solely numeric data should be a 3xhl matrix, eitber "telechone" style er " calculator" style, see Exhibit 6.7-2. s
- c. USE OF Mll.TIPLE KEYBOARDS - If N/A N/A there is more than one computer system keyboard in a control icom, the alp 5anumeric and/or numeric-only key configuration should be the same in a!!
cases. ,
- d. KEY hEASUREMENTS - To maximSe O YES the ef fectiveness of keyboards, key dimensions anti separation should be as illustrated (see Exhibit 6.7-3).
1 ?
\
s t 4-146
> - i ,
U N N N, ' m
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COh43tJTER SURVEY FINDINGS & KDs GEERATED Page 4 of 29 seenet #
/ 5/ g/ 4
/
6.7.1.4 (Cont'd)
- e. KEY DISPLACEPENT AND RESISTANCE - To provide positive key movement feedback to the opera-tor, and to reduce inadvertent activa-tion of keys, (1) Key displacement should be as M YES shown in Exhibit 6.7-4.
(2) Key resistance should be as showa M YES in Exhibit 6.7-4.
- f. POSITIVE INDICATION - To provide O YES positive key actuation feedback to the operator, a definite Indication shou ld be provided (e.g., snap, feel, audible click, release of resistance).
- g. KEY'30ARD SLOPE - Keyboards M YES should have a slope between 150 end 250 from the horizontal (see Exhibit 6.7-53
- h. VISUAL FEEDBACK - Data beino O YES entered via keyboards shoilld be dis-played as it is keyed.
I. RELEVANT KEYS - The presence of O YES nonrelevant keys, such as those that might be used by programmer person-nel, adds to keyboard complexity and Induces operator errors. Control room keyboards should contain only those keys which are used by operators. 6.7.1.5 COh4) UTER FLNCTION CONTROLS
- a. CONTROL DESIGN - When dedicated O YES controls are used for selection of computer or display functions or modes, the design of the controls should con-form to the appropriate ouldelines specified in Section 6.4, Controls.
I 1 i 4-147
^2- ^<,
-]f, y;
, ,i
-/ .)
~
.-L ,' . .J 415-1/0
~' ,- i 1 - l
- t--
V
, .s . ,
4M y i COWUTER SUF#CY FINDI W- P,ERATED Page 5 of 29
,_1
~ '
,e ;
i N -{,[ f
.; ' suotuot #/m If 8 #
< v
-"'.~'
'yri j
" 6.7.1.5 (Copyd) _, t, . a ,
. r
.? b. 21.ADELING ANO PKMNCLATURE -- '
',0 YES Terms, nomencle'th re,'andybbreviations '
. used on function contrait thot/.d be the .
same as or consiste- with the terms, l - s
-. 2 '
Domenclature, enr'7abbfce!ationrs of the C p -' ~f computer functicWwhich is 33!ecteu or
' /
displayed. A
,;g e. MASlER CONTROL -When 09To are O YES
; ,, . ~ _ f Stubject to operation by central!y
*-located master controls, a postLive
' " Indication should be provided: -
(1) At the master-controllocation to O YES
.-..- identify those drolsys under beat o; , or master cortru!. -
1'*
- fti At the Indivfdual CRT'to indicate whether the diepinyis unofr master or local contro?.
w d. FUNCTION CObrrRO.S a _ . .. ..
./ / (1) ' Wher: -Jer',ier.ted coMmis are used O YES
/ to fitta'te! active'.e functions, the ,
[ keys t%uld be gr$ticed to7:ther.-
.- 4 ' , (2) Function controls s5culd be easily O. YES g / <; dietl.ngulthed frz:* oiner types o'
,/ .. 95s on the computer console, J
- r. J: v
, ~O /Esch function contrel shrt!d be O YES
/ alearly labeled to indicate its -
, y ' function to the operatnr. N I41 If multiple computer consoles ~
N/A N/A
, w. exist in the control 100T, tl@y j
"* design a?d layout c{Lhe function ',
controls shoul:f be consistent for
'l
~' s , p 7,
s all consoles.: -' q--
,( ,g ~
i s*l ~
.i : ' 7.- ,:
l ! ..s s*,q . y _~ , r ' -
-ss ..
- ~ :/ ~. ,
a ', . l
, y y ..~
j- &**'%. . /, - l
, ~ - t
~:. .m-s ' r, , . /
; ,y 4**,,**m
. , p*4 %1 .
i
.- , ./
.- r 4
' ,,' ] ,
* ./ J" > ; ,,,
3',. y -
~ ,,/,j' ,
' A .; 4-148 5 , wr-
\ ..
- u. r - , .
l 1 415-1/0 TABLE 4-14
' CO8@tJTER SURVEY FINDINGS & KDs OEERATED Page 6 of 29 sostuer #
/ 8/ /
57 +/ 6.7.1.5d (Cont'd) (5) When function keys are included O YES with an alphanumeric keyboard, the function keys should be physically separate. (Avoid multiple-mode keyboards wHeh utilize the same keys for both alphanumerles and functions by using "shif t" keys or mode selection controls.1 6.7.1.6 OTFER CONTROL DEVICES
- a. LOCATION - The control devices O YES should be operable from the location where the operator is most likely to need to interact with the computer (e.g.. keyboard, computer console, dis-play screen4 .
- b. SPEED - The control device should provide rapid positioning of cursors or selection of choices,
- c. ACCURACY - Device or method O YES accuracy should be commensurate with the functions to be served.
- d. DISPLACEMENT - Control design O YES should allow the operator freedom of movement to perform cther duties.
6.7.1.7 COMPUTER RESPONSE TIE TO OPERATOR QL.ERIES
- a. MAXIMIZE RESPONSE TlWS - The O YES computer system should provide the correct response to each type of query within the recomrr. ended response times IIsted in Exhibit 6.7-6.
- b. RESPONSE DELAY MESSAGES -When O YES response time for any query exceeds 3 seconds, e delay message should be presented to maintain the operator's attention and to confirm normal com-puter operation. fSee also Guideline 6.7.2.6.1 b
l 4-149
415-1/0 TABLE 414 COwuTER SURVEY FINDINGS & KDs CEERATED Page 7 of 29 6.7.1.8 ACCESS AIDS s.- / J/ /
- a. COMPUTER SYSTEM PROCEDURES (1) A compute set of computer sys. D NO P.7.1 6 !!!
tem operating procedures and continqency procedures should be avella51e in the control room. (2) Procedures should be prepared D YES from the point of view of the control room operator. (3) Procedures should be in hardcopy D YES form as a minimum. (4) Operating procedures should describe: foi The overall computer system. D YES (b) The computer system D YES components with which the operator can Interface. (ci The specific prog,edures D YES necessary to accomplish all of the operator-computer inter-face functions. f5) Contingency procedures should describes (ai Indications available to the D YES operator which identify failure or malfunctioning of the computer system. (b1 Neces.ary actions to be per- D YES formed by the operator if the computer falls or malfunc-tions. 6 g> 4-150
l 415-1/0 T 1 LE 4-14 COW) UTER SURVEY FIPOIVe & EDs GEERATED Page 8 of 29 a 6.7.1.8 (Cont'd) s.- / J/ /
- b. DATA POINT NDICES (1) The specific codes, or addresses, by which data disolsys can be called up by an operator should be cross-indexed by:
(a) Alphanumeric or numeric code D YES (b1 Program name O NO P.7.1 12 !!! f c) System / subsystem identifica-~ D NO P.7.1-12 Ill tion (d) Functional grouc Identifica- D NO P.7.1 12 III tion.
/
f)2 Cross-Indices should be available D NO P.7.1 12 I!! l In the control room in hardcopy i form as a minimum. ! 6.7.2.1 CRT DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS
- a. READABILTTY - Alphanumeric and O YES graphic characters should be easily readable by the operator under all con-trol room lighting conditions.
- b. REFLECTED GLARE - CRT screens O YES shculd be installed to minimize or eliminate reflected glare at normal operator viewing angles,
- c. SCREEN LUMNANCE (1) Ambient illumination should con- O YES tribute no more than 25% to O screen luminance through diffuse reflection and phosphor excitatior:.
i (2) When ambient illumination in the N/A N/A vicinity of the CRT is in the l medium to high range (see Guide- ! line 6.1.5.3), the CRT should use l dark characters and symbols on a light background. l l . 151 l
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14, COWUTER SURVEY FIPOINGS & KDs GEERATED Page 9 of 29 6.7.2.le (Cont'd) s-- / lJ/ / (3) When the CRT uses dark N/A N/A characters on a light background, the screen background luminance should be 23 foot-Lamberts (ft-Li minimum and 46 ft-L preferred. (4) When the CRT uses light D YES characters on a dark background, the character luminance should be 23 ft-L minimum and 46 f t-L preferred.
- d. LUMINANCE CONTRAST (1) Contract between light O YES characters and a dark screen backt i round should be 15:1 mini-mum and 20:1 preferred.
(21 Contrast between dark characters O YES and a liq 5t screen background should be 1:1.5 minimum and 1:20 preferred,
- e. GEOKTRIC DISTORTION - The O YES cumulative effects of all geometric D distortion should not displace any point M within the viewable area of the screen from Its correct position by more than 5% of picture height.
- f. RESOLUTION - Discrimination of fine detail is a function of the number of scan lines or addressa51e points
(" resolution elements") per unit length. (1) CRTs for displaying simple alpha- M YES numeric text should have o
- minimum of 20 resolution
! elements per inch. (2) CRTs for displaying complex N/A N/A l symbols and graphic detall should l have a minimum of 100 resolution l elements per inch. 4-152
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 cop @ UTER SURVEY FIPOINGS & KDa TERATED Page 10 of 29 6.7.2.1f (Cont'd) s-.. / lJ/ / (U Complex symbols which must be M YES distinguished from other complex shapes should have a minimum of 10 resolution elements for the longest dimension of the symbol. (4) Alphanumeric characters should M YES have a minimum of 10 resolution elements per character height.
- g. REENERATION RATE - The recen- 0 NO P.7.1 11 !!!
eration rate for a particular CRT dis-play should be above the critical frecuency at fusion so that the occur-rence of disturbing flicker is not perceptible.
- h. CRT DISPLAY CONTROLS (1) Parameters such as luminance O YES (brightnessi, contrast, and color should be adjustable by the con-trol room operator.
(2) Adjustment controls'*should con- O YES form to the appropriate guidelines in Section 6.4, Controls, and Section 6.9, Control-Display Integration. 6.7.2.2 SYMBOLS AND CHARACTERS
- a. SYMBOL SIZE - When a displayed M NO P.7.1-9 !!!
symbol of complex shape is to be dis-tinguished from another symbol s5 ape that is also complex, the visual angle of the symbol should subtend not less than 20 minutes of are at the reautred # viewing distance.
- h. ALPHANUPERIC CHARACTER SIZE (1) The height of alphanumeric M YES characters should have a visual Engle of not less than 12 minutes of arc at the required viewing distance.
4-153
415-1/0 TABLE 414 COS4'tJTER SURVEY FPOINGS & FEDS GEPERATED Page 11 of 29 suenues #
/ q/ $g/ a
/ 4
/
6.7.2.2b (Cont'd) (2) Alphanumeric characters should be uopercase letters.
- c. CHARACTER WIDTH-TO-HEIGHT D YES RATIO - The width-to-height ratio for alphanumerics should be between 3:5 and 1:1.
- d. STROKE-WIDTH-TO-CHARACTER-HEIGHT D YES RATIO - Stroke-width-to-character-height ratio should be between 1:5 and 1:10.
- e. GRAPHICS - A graphic line will D YES appear continuous if the separation between addressable points, or resolu-tion elements, is less than one minute of arc. To provide the !!!usion of continuity, graphic lines should contain a minimum of 50 resolution elements per inch,
- f. CHARACTER APO SYMBOL SEPARATION (1) Horizontal separation between D YES characters or symbols should be between 10% and 65% of char-actar or symbol helght.
(2) Separation should be not less than O NO P.7.1-7 Ill 25% of character or symbol height when any of the following degraded conditions exists: foi When character or symbo! M NO P.7.1 -7 III .
. width is less than R5% of height; (b) When character or symbol M NO P.7.1-7 !!!
luminance is less than 12 f t-L; (c) When luminance contrast is M NO P.7.1-7 !!! less than B8%; (d) When CRT screen location is M NO P.7.1-7 III
. greater than 350 to the lef t or right of the operator's straight-ahead line of sight; 4-154
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COMPUTER SURVEY FIPOINGS & KDs GEERATED Page 12 of 29
~1 s.. / / J/ / .
6.7.2.2f(2) (Cont'd) (e) When the visual angle sub- M NO P.7.1-7 III tended by symbol height is less than 15 minutes of are; (f) When the visual angle sub- M NO P.7.1-7 III tended by character height is less than 12 minutes of arc.
- g. CHARACTER STYLE (FONT)
(1) Simple character fonts should be O YES used, with no serifs, variable stroke widths, slanting, etc. (2) When dot-matrix characters are O NO P.7.1-2 III used,7x9 dot-matrix should be used in preference to 5x7 dot-matrix. (3) Character styles such as Lincoln / O YES Mitre or Leroy should be used. 6.7.2.3 OPERATOR-DISPLAY RELATIONSHIPS
- s. VIEWING DISTANCE - Viewing dis- M YES tance should be greater than 18 inches.
- b. VIEWING ANGLE - The minimum M YES I angle between the operator's actual line-of-sight (LOS) as measured from '
the operator's normal work station, and the plane of the display screen should be 450 or greater in either the hori-
, zontal or vertical direction. See Exhibits 6.7-8 and 6.7-10.
- c. SCREEN LOCATION, SEATED OPERATORS (1) CRT disp?sys which require fre- N/A N/A quent or continuous monitoring, or which may display important (e.g., alarm) inf;. mation, should be located within the following limits as measured from the normal operator work station (see Exhibit 6.7-9):
I 4-155
415-1/0 TABLE 414 COMPUTER SURVEY FROINGS & KDs GEERATED Page 13 of 29 s_., / / J/ / 6.7.2.Te (Cont'd) fai Horizontal limits - Not more N/A N/A than 350 to the lef t or right of the operator's straight-ahead LOS. (b) Vertical limits - Not more N/A N/A than 200 above and 400 below the operator's horizontal LOS. (21 CRT displays which do not require freouent or continuous moni-toring, and wNch will not display important fe.o., alarmilnforma-tion, should be located within the following limits (as measured from normal operator work stations which permit full operator head and eye rotationi . See Exhibit 6.710h fai Horizontal limits - Not more N/A N/A than 950 to the lef t or right of the operator's straight-ahead LOS. , (bi Vertical limits - Not more N/A N/A i than 700 above and 900 helow the operator's horizontal LOS.
- d. SCREEN LOCATION, STAPOING i
OPERATORS (1) CRT displays w5tch require fre-- auent or continuous monitoring, or which may display important (e.g., alarr.4 % formation, should be located within the following limits as measured from the normal operator work stations (a) Horizontal limits - Not more M YES than 350 to the left or right of the operator's straight-ahead LOS. (b) Vertical limits - Not more M YES than 150 above and 250 below the operator's horizontal LOS. l 4-156
i O-415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COMPUTER SURVEY FIFOINGS & DEDs CENERATED Page 14 of 29 s.sn
,/ s/ / .T
,/ .
6.7.2.3d (Cont'd) (2) CRT displays which do not require frequent or continuous moni. toring, and which will not display important (e.g., alarm) Informa-tion, should be located within the following limits (as measured from norn sl operator work stations which permit full operator head and eye rotation): (a) Horizontal limits - Not more M YES than 950 to the left or right of the operator's straight-ahead LOS. (b) Vertical limits - Not more M YES than 850 above and 900 below the operator's horizontal LOS.
- e. MOlNTING IN CONSOLES - When M YES CRTs are permanently rr.ounted in con-soles, the console configuration, dimensions, and type of use (such as seated, sit-stand, or standing) af fects the CRT/ operator interface. Consoles in which CRTs are installed should conform to the guidelines of Section 6.1.2.
- f. VISIBILITY OF DATA - All data and M YES messages on the CRT screen should be within the unobstructed view of an operator at the normal work station.
6.7.2.4 DATA PRESENTAT10N FORMAT , 4 s. USABILITY OF DATA (1) Data should be presented to the O NO P.7.1 16 !!I operator in a readily usable format. (2) There should be no requirement O YES for transposing, computing, inter. potating, or mentally translating [ displayed data into other units or numerical bases. I I i i 4-157
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COMPLRER SLRVEY FirolNGS & FEDS GDERATED Page 15 of 29 s-. /lJ / / 6.7.2.4 (Cont'd)
- b. ILLUSTRATIONS - Illustrations should O YES be used whenever possible to supple-ment or explain text.
- c. CHARACTER GROLPING (1) When 5 or more digits and/or non- O NO P.7.1-15 Ill text alphanumerics are displayed, and no natural (i.e., population stereotyped) organization exists, characters should be grouped in blocks of 3 to 4 characters each.
(2) Groups should be separated by a O YES minimum of 1 blank character space.
- d. MAINTENANCE OF ORDERING -
Elements in a data field should be dis- O YES played in logical order (e.g., chrono-logical).
- e. PRESENTATION OF IDENTIC/u. DATA (1) The manner of presentation of O YES identical data should be based on the uses to which the data will be put by the operator.
(2) Within the limits of (1) above, O YES identical data in dif ferent presentations should be displayed in a consistent, standardized manner.
- f. MENU DESIGNATORS (1) Numbers should be used as des!g- O YES
, nators when listing selectable l Items. (2) Numerical designators should O YES start with the number "1"(not zero). l 4-158 l
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COMPUTER SURVEY FNDINGS & KDa GEERATED Page 16 of 29 suotuus #
/ #/ d
/ /
I 6.7.2.4f (Cont'd) e (31 If the use of numbers as desig- N/A N/A nators would create confusion because of other numbers which make up the item to be deslo-noted, alphabetic characters should be used. (4) When used, alphabetic designators N/A N/A should start with the letter "A."
- g. LISTS (1) Lists should be vertically aligned O YES .
and lef t-Justifled. (2) Indentation should be used for O YES subclassifications,
- h. TABLES AND GRAPHS - Quantitative O YES data which must he scanned and com-pared should be presented in either tabular or graphic form.
I. HYPKNATION - The use of hyphena- O YES tion should be minimized." J. ALIGNhENT (1) When presented in tabular form, O YES alphanumeric data should be lef t-justified. f2) When presented in tabular form, O YES numeric data should be right-justified with decimal points aligned,
- k. PERIODS - Periods should be placed O YES af ter item selection designators and at the end of a sentence.
1 4-159
415-1/0 TABLE 414 COMPtJTER SURVEY FIPOINGS & KDs CEERATED Page 17 of 29 6.7.2.4 (Cont'd) s__ // J/ /
- 1. STAPOARDIZED F1 ELDS - The fo!-
lowing standardized fields should be used: (1) Telephone Number: (9141555-1212 O YES (2) Time: HH:MM:SS, HH:MM, O YES MM:SS:'.S) 01 Date: MM:DO:YY. O YES
- m. DATA GROUP LABELING (1) Each Individual data group or O NO P.7.1-13 Ill messace should have a descriptive
, title. (2) Labels should reflect some unique O YES characteristic of the content of the data group or messace.
- n. LABEL PLACEhENT - Labels should O YES be located in a consistent manner either above or to the left of the data group or message they describe.
- o. LABEL ORIENTATION - Labels should O YES be oriented horizontally.
- p. LABEL HGHLIGHTING (1) Labels should be high!!ghted or O NO P.7.1-14 !!!
otherwise accentuated to facill-tate operator scanning and recog-nltion. . (2) The technique used to highlight N/A N/A labels should be easily dis-tinguished from that used to high-light emergency or critical messages.
- o. OPTION LABELS - When presenting a O NO P.7.1 -1 !!!
list of operator options, the label e5ould reflect the question or choices being posed to ths operator. 0 4-160
i 415 ./0 TABLE 4-14 I COMPUTER SURVEY FROINGS & l-EDs EPERATED Page 18 of 29 4 s__ / / J/ / 6.7.7.5 SCREEN LAYOUT APO STRUCTURING
- a. ORGANIZATION OF DATA (1) Displayed data should be organized in a logical, consistent manner.
f2) Displayed data should reflect O' YES some obvious and inherent Quality of the data groups fe.g., hier-archical, sequential, or mimic relationshipsk
- h. LOCATION OF DATA OROUPS - O YES Physical location of specific data gt oups fe.g., slarms, menusi on the screen should be consistent.
- c. OEMARCATION OF DATA O YES SUBGROtPS - Organization and separation of information subgroups
$5ould be made apparent to the operator through the use of blank spaces, lines, or some other form of visible demarcation.
- d. USE FREQUENCY RAP 4GNG - Lists O YES of options should be organized according to the probability of selection for each item, with high pro 5 ability items presented first.
- e. ALPHANUhERIC RANKING - Non- O YES option lists of equal-probability options should be presented in alphabetical or numerical order,
- f. SEPARATION OF PARAGRAPHS - N/A N/A Paragraphs in continuous text should be separated by at least one blank line,
- n. SELECTION DESIG4ATORS - O YES l
Selection designators in menus should be separated from text descriptors by at least one blank space. l i I i { 4-161
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 i COhPUTER SURVEY FINDINGS & EDs TERATED Page 19 of 29 i i s.. / / J/ / 6.7.2.5 (Cont'd)
- h. PAT DESIGNATION - When data are N/A N/A contained on multiple pages, each page should display both page number and total number of pages.
I. CONTINUOUS NLM3ERING - Items N/A N/A contained in a numbered list and described on " continue" pages s'ould be numbered relative to the first number on the first page of the list. J. PLA& MENT OF INSTRUCTIONS - N/A N/A When dirpations to the operator accompany a list of options, such directions should precede presentation of the list.
- k. URTNT MESSATS (1) Urgent messages reauirina O YES immediate operator response should be highllahted to attract the operator's attention.
(2) Urgent messages abduld always be O YES displayed in the same location.
- 1. USE OF CURSOR - In systems in N/A N/A which selection is made by use of a cursor, formats should be organized to minimize positionina movements of the cursor,
- m. SCREEN LOADING - The amount of O YES information-bearing activated screen area should not exceed 25% of the total screen area. This does not include demarcation lines used to separate i
groups of data. l l l I ! 4-162
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COMPUTER SURVEY FINDINGS & EDs EERATED Pr.ge 20 of 29 s-- / / J/ / 6.7.2.5 (Cont'd)
- n. TREND PLOT SCALES - CRT dis- O YES played trend plot scales should be con-sistent with the Intended functional use of the data. (For example, the monl-toring of neutron flux at reactor trip may have a variable scale of 0% to 1%
of t5e design value and a time scale resolution of seconds. However, post. trip monitoring may have a variable scale of 0% to 10% with a time scale resolution of minutes. Finally, opera-tional log data of neutror, flux may have a tim? scale resolution of hours.) 6.7.2.6 hESSATS
- a. MESSAES, EERAL (1) Messages s5ould be concise. O YES (21 Messages should provide the O YES operator with the information a necessary to complete a specific action or decision secuence,
- b. MESSAT CONTENT - Information O YES contained in messages s50uld be necessary, complete, and readily usable.
- c. USE OF PROWTS - Prompts s5ould N/A N/A be displayed whenever the operator may need directions or guidance to initiate or complete an action or sequence of actions. ,
- d. CONTENT OF PROWTS - Prompts N/A N/A i
should contain clear and specific cues and instructions which are relevant to the action to be taken.
- e. PROWT PFORMATION
! SEQUENCE - Directions should be O YES placed in the sequence to be used by the operator. de 4 h 9 4-163
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COMPUTER SURVEY FROINGS & KDs GEERATED Page 21 of 29 sensunt #
/ 8/ &
/ #
/
6.7.2.6 (Cont'd)
- f. USE OF ERROR ESSATS -When. O YES ever an operator error or invalid input is detected, an error message should be displayed.
- g. ERROR CORRECTION GLADANCE - 0 NO P.7.1-3 !!!
Error messages s5ould contain instruc-tions to the operator regardino required corrective action.
- h. ERROR CORRECTION EASE'- O YES Capability should be provided for operator correction of Individual errors without affecting adjacent valid entries.
- 1. SYSTEM STATUS FEEDBACK O YES ESSATS - Feedback messages should be provided to the operator to indicate changes in the status of system functioning.
J. SELECTION FEED 8ACK - When a O YES displayed message or datum is selected as an option or input to the system, the subject item should be highlighted, or otherwise positively identified, to indi-cate acknowledgement by the system.
- k. DELAY FEED 8ACK - When system O YES functioning requires the operator to stand by, such as when the computer is searching for requested data, periodic feedback should be provided to the operator to indicate normal system operation and the reason for the delay.
- 1. ACTIVITY COMM.ET10N O YES FEEDBACK - When a process or sequence is completed by the system, positive Indication should be presented to the operator concerning the outcome I of the process and reoutrements for l subseouent operator actions.
1 L l \ l 4-164
415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 COMPUTER SURVEY FINDINGS & KOa'GEERATED Page 22 of 29 s-., 6.7.2.7 GRAPHIC CODING AfO HIGHLIGHTING
/ J // /
- a. USE OF HIGHLIGHTING -Hig511ghting O YES should be used to attract the orfator's attention to any displeyed data item or message which is important to decision-making or sction reouirements.
- h. CONSISTENT APPROACH (1) Highlighting methods which have O YES information value beyond their attention-getting quality should have the same meaning in all app!! cations.
(2) Highlighting methods associated O YES with emergency conditions should not also be used in association with normal conditions. c CONTRAST EPHANCEPENT - When N/A N/A contrast enhancement fl.e., increased illumination Intensity level) is used for highlighting, not more than two (preferable) or three (maxir um) brightness levels should be used in a single presentation.
- d. FLICKER OR BLINKING - Blinking of O YES a symbol or message (e.g., ON-OFF or alternating high-low brightnessi for purposes of highlighting should be reserved for emergency conditions or i similar situations requiring immediate operator action.
- e. BLINK RATES (1) When blinking is used for high- M NO P.7.1 -9 !!!
lighting, a maximum of 2 blink rates s50uld be used. (2) When a single blank rate is used, M NO P 7.)-10 !!! the rate should approximate 2 to 3 " blinks" per second with a i minimum of 50 msec "on" time l between blinks. i I l l 4-165
f-415-1/0 TABLE 4-14
- COMPUTER SURVEY FIPOINGS & KDa CEERATED Page 23 of 29 6.7.2.7e (Cont'd) s.s - / J/ /
'3) When 2 hiink rates are used, the M NO P.7.1 9 !!!
fast blink should approximate 4 per second and the slow Cink should approximate 1 per second, f41 When 2 b!!nk rates are used, the M NO P.7.1 9 Ill "on.off" ratio should approximate 50%. (5) When 2 blink rates are used, the M NO P.7.].9 III higher rate should apply to the most critical information.
- f. INVERSE VIDEO - Image reversal O YES ,
fe.g., dark characters on a light back. groundi should bs used primarily for highlighting in dense data fields, such as a word or phrase in a paragraph of text, or a set of characters in a table of data.
- g. USE OF GRAPHIC CODING - Graphic 0 YES codino methods (e.g., symbols, boxes, underlines, colorsi should be used to present standard qualitative infor-mation to the operator or to draw the operator's attention to a particular portion of the display.
- h. GRAPHIC COOC CCNSISTENCY - O YES Graphic codes, used separately or in combination, should have the same meaning in all app!! cations.
I. GEOhCTRIC SHAPE CODING - When O YES geometric shape (symbol) coding is used, the basic symbols should vary widely in shape. J. NUhEER OF SYMK1.5 (1) The number of basic symbols used O YES for coding should be kept sma'l. (2) The upper limit under optimum O YES display conditions should be 20. 4-166
415-1/0 TABLE 414 cop 4' UTER SURVEY F1POINGS & KDa CEERATED Page 24 of 29 s_ / / J/ / 6.7.2.7) (Cont'd) (3) The upper !!mit under adverse O YES display conditions should be 6. (4) When needed, other highlighting O YES and graphic technioues (color, filled versus unfilled, and other
" modifiers") should be used to display different states or qualities of a basic symbol,
- k. USE OF COLOR - (Exhibit 6.7-11)
(1) Colors used on the CRT to convey O NO P.7.1 4 111 Information should be consistent in use and meaning with all other color codes in the control room. (2) Once colors are assioned a O NO P.7.1-5 !!! , specific use or meaning, no other l color should be used for the same I purpose.
- 1. COLOR hEANINGS - When color is used, the meaning of the colors should, where applicable, equate with the com-monly understood meaning of those 4
colors. The following specific meanings for selected colors should apply when these colors are used in CRT displays:
/1) Red - Unsafe condition, danger, O NO P.9.1-2 Assessed as immediate operator actioS part of required, or critical parameter Conventions value out of tolerance. Survey (2) Green - Safe condition, no O NO P.R.1-3 Assessed as operator action required, or part of parameter value is within Conventions tolerance. Survey (3) Yellow / Amber - Hazard, O NO P.R.1 -4 Assessed as potentially unsafe, caution, part of i attention required; marginal Conventions i parameter value exists. Survey l
t I s-l l 4-167
415-1/0 ; TABLE 4-14 COMM.lTER SURVEY FirolNGS & KDs TERATED Page 25 of 29 6.7.2.7 (Cont'd) s.s - / d/ /
- m. RED-GREEN COMllNATIONS (1) Whenever possible, red and green O VES colors should not be used in com-bination.
(2) Use of red symbols / characters on O YES a green background should especially be avoided. 6.7.2.8 MULTIPl.E-PAGE CONSIDERATIONS
- a. OPERATOR EMORY (1) Page design and content planning O YES should minimize requirements for operstar memory, i (2) All data relevant to a specific O YES operator entry should be displayed
- . on a single page.
- b. AUDIT TRAll - When pages are O YES organized in a hierarchical fashion, containing a number of different paths through the series, a visual audit trail of the choices should be available upon operator request.
- c. LOCATION REFERENCES
, (1) When the operator is required to N// N/A r ' scroll or pan on a large logical frame, location references should be provided in the viewable por. tion of the frame. (For example, when scrolling a list, ony part of which is visible at any one time, ( the present and maximum loca. l tion should be shown.) (2) Sectional coordinates should be N// N/A used when large schematics must be panned or magnified. s 4-168
I 415-1/0 TABLE 414 COM) UTER SURVEY FINDINGS & KDs GEERATED Page 26 of 29 s_ / / d/ / 6.7.2.8 (Cont'd)
- d. OPERATOR CONTROL - The opera- O YES tor should have some capability for controlling the amount, format, and complexity of information fe.g., core dumps, program outputs, error mes-sagesi being displayed by the system.
- e. LOCATION CONSISTENCY - If the O YES message is a variable option list, com-mon elements should maintain their physical relationship to other recurring elements.
6.7.3.1 PRINTER CHARACTERISTICS
- a. PRINTER APPLICATIONS fl1 Printers s50uld be part of the O YES process computer system and be located in the primary operating area.
(21 Control room printers should O YES provide the capability to record alarm data, trend data, and plant status data.
- b. DISPLAY COPIES (O The system should, if possible, be O YES designed to provide harocopy of any page appearing on the CRT at the request of the coerator.
(2) If the copy will be printed remote O YES . to the operator, a print confirma-tion or denlet message s50uld be displayed, fM Printer operation should not alter O YES screen content.
- c. FORM OF PRINTED IWORMATION - O VES Printed information should be presented in a directly usable form with minimal reautrements for decodino, transposino, and Interpolating.
A 4-169
i l l 415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 I COMPtJTER SURVEY FROINGS & KDs TERATED Page 27 of 29 s_ / J/ / ! 6.7.3.1 (Cont'd)
- d. PRINTER SPEED - Printers used for O YES recording trend data, computer alarms, and critical status information should have a hiah-speed printing capability of at least 300 lines a minute to permit printer output to keep up with com-puter output.
- e. PRINTER OPERATION - Paper, ribbons, and ink (if usedi should be con-sistent with the following:
(1) Hard-finish matte paper should be O YES used to avoid smudged copy and glare. (2) There should be a positive indica- O YES tion of the remaining supply of recording materials. f31 Instructions for re:oading paper, O YES ribbon, ink, etc., should appear on an instruction plate attached to the printer. (4) When the printer is down during O YES reloading, data and information which would normally be printed must not be lost. (5) A takeup device for printed O YES materials should be provided which requires little or no i operator attention and which has ! a capacity at lease equal to the feed supply.
- f. PRINT COPY ACCESSIBILITY - The following features should be provided to enhance operator accessibility of printed material:
U) Provisions should be made so that O YES the operator can always read the most recently printed !!ne. 4-170
415-1/0 l TABLE 414 COMPUTER SURVEY FINDINGS & KDs'CEERATED Page 28 of 29 s-.. // J/ / 6.7.3.lf (Cont'd) f21 Printed material should have an O YES ndeouste contrast ratio to ensure easy operator reading. (1) It should be possible to annotate O YES the print copy while it la still in the machine, f4) The recorded matter should not O YES be obscured, masked, or otherwise hidden in a manner which pre-vents direct reading of the material. 6.7.3.2 ALARM PESSAGES
- a. ALARM RECORDS (1) A printer should be provided for O YES recording alarm messages.
(?) All annunciator alarms should be O YES recorded.
- b. ALARM SEQUENCE - A' farm mes- O YES sages should be recorded in the sequence of their occurrence,
- c. OPERATOR-REQUESTED O YES PRINTOUT - Provisions should be included to provide, upon operator request, printouts by alarm group fe.o.,
system, subsystem, componenti.
- d. ALARM IDENTIFICATION - Alarm O YES messages should be readily distinguish-able from other messages,
- e. ALARM DISCRIMINATION - Alarm messages s5ould provide rapid identif t-cation of the nature of the alarm.
- f. CONSISTENT TERMINOLOGY - O YES Wording in alarm messages should:
(1) Clearly relate to the specific annunciator tile that is illumi-noted. 4-171 i ; .a,.; L / 4dd 2 cp ;,?..~ < ' . P;. f
- A '~' ' ..
.. 21 " ' V4 , . . ' g (; e . ./V Ni%.' ',9 , pfs
i 415-1/0 TABLE 4-14 l COMPUTER SURVEY FIPOINGS & EDs'EERATED Page 29 of 29 - l
. 6.7.3.2f (Cont'd) e_. // J/ / .
(2) Contain at least that information O YES (i.e., wordingi presented in the illuminated annunciator tile. (3) Provide additional speelfic date. O YES 6.7.3.3 GRAPH APO TABLE REQUIREENTS
- a. SHAPE OF FLNCTION - If the N/A N/A general shape of the function is important in making deelslons, a graph should be used,
- b. INTERPOLATION - If Interpolation is N/A N/A necessary, line graphs are preferable to bar graphs and tables.
- c. GRIDS t
(1) Graphs should be constructed so N/A N/A that numbered grids are bolder than unnumbered grids. (2) If 10-grid Intervals are used, the N/A N/A fif th intermediate grid should be less bold than the numbered grid, , but bolder than the unnumbered grids.
- d. TABLES (1) Tables should be simple, concise, O YES and readable.
(2) When table columns are long, O NO P.7.1-15 III numbers should be separated into a groupe by providing a space between groups of five. (3) When colurans are not separated g yg3 by verties! lines, the columrn should be separated by at least 2 character widths. I l \ l - 4-172
415-1/0 5.0 SYSTEM FUNCTIONS REVIEW, TASK ANALYSIS Ato VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION 5.1 System Functions Review 5.1.1 Objective The objective of the system functions review was to identify those instruments and controls that the operator needs to respond to a spectrum of plant operations, with emphasis on abnormal and emergency conditions. The results of this review were used as input to the task analysis, verification of task performance capability, and validation of control room functions described in paragraph 5.2 below. 5.1.2 Approach To accomplish this objective a two-pronged approach was utilized. The first element consisted of performing the system functions review (SFR) based on the symptom oriented emergency operating procedure. Each step of the procedure was reviewed to determine the instruments and controls required by the operators to perform that step. The actual Davis-Besse instruments and controls that would be used to perform these functions were then identified. In parallel with this effort, and SFR using a top-down functional approach was conducted, identifying the safety systems, system functions, operator actions and instrumentation and control requirements necessary to satisfy critical safety functions. The results of the two approaches were compared and differences resolved. This two-pronged approach permitted a detailed review of the allocation of functions between systems and human operators afforded by a procedure review and at the same time provided an independent assessment of the functions performed by systems and operators using the top-down functional approach. In addition, the two-pronged approach assured that the review would not result in a circular logic co-validation of the EOPs and the function and task analysis which is internally consistent, but that may not be operationally correct. The following pragraphs give a more detailed description of the implementation of each approach and the background leading to the development of each approach. The information provided in these paragraphs is shown in a flow chart format in Figure 5-1. l 5-1 i
c SEQUEEE OF EVENTS LEADING TO THE SYSTEMS FUNCTION REVIEW TABLES FIGURE 5-1
/
)
~
~
l Part of the
--' 1.Part of E0P Progres~ lRoom Detailed Control Part of ATOG Program Design Review l l
.. Y i i i -
1 I i i l i l Preparation i
+ ,
I i/ I I l Preparation l l Preparation l ' l 'lPreparation.ofl l Multiple l l l of upgraded 1 l of Systems l Procedure Failures I of ATOG I -l Tunctfons l Review l l Safety I l l Gufdelines ! l E0Ps l 1- Sequence .. l _ land Additf ocal I (Symptom iteview l Approach I, Transient i l i Tabies i
-l. Diagrams" l _l l l based) .
i
.-l l ' l Analyses I I l 1 ~~
- -' l i 1I I l' l_. I I I I i l I
' ~
h Preparation
'l.l of Generic
' I Systes !
-1 l Functions i l l
'I !
I' Revfew l l Tables ! Top-down f l l l l Functional i l Aporoach l 2:
?
t' ca
i 415-1/0 l 5.1.2.1 Procedure Based System Functions Review Implementation - This approach consisted of reviewing each step of the symptom oriented emergency operting procedure, identifying the operator actions required for each f step, the instrumentation and control requirements to execute the required operator action and the existing Davis-Besse instrumentation and controls available to perform 4 these actions. The results of this review were documented on Systems Functions Review t . Tables (SFRTs). A sample SFRT is shown on Table 5-1. The " Plant / System Status" and
- " Operator Action Required" columns were taken directly from the procedure. The
" Instrumentation and Control Requirements" columns were completed by the analyst l based on his experience to identify these indicators and/or controls that the operator
! would need to execute the operator action requirement. The " Existing Davis-Besse 1 Instrumentation and Controls" columns were completed using the Control Board mockups ! and the Control Room Inventory. Completion of these tables provided the basis for task analysis and verification of task performance capability. These tables facilitated the verification of the availability and human engineering suitability of required instrume,-- f tation and controls by providing the task specification requirements and the actual Davis-l- Besse instruments and controls including their locations on the same table. Backaround - The Symptom Oriented Emergency Operating Procedure was ' pre-i pared by Toledo Edison utilizing the Davis-Besse Abnormal Transient Operating Guidelines (ATOG). The Davis-Besse ATOGs were generated as part of and overall program consisting of the following elements: l Identification of Event Sequences. A set of l'nitiating events was selected
- 1. ~
i . which was representative of the complete. set of initiating events analyzed in
- Chapter 15 of the FSAR in terms of exercising a complete range of system i
functions and operator actions. The set of initiating events selected were as follows: o Small Break LOCA l o Small Steamline Break i ! o Loss of Normal Feedwater ! o l Excess Feedwater - L o Loss of Offsite AC Power u.
- o - Steam Generator Tube Rupture.
i
- 2. Event Evaluation and ~ Function Identification. Each event selected was evaluated and documented by preparing a functional flow diagram (referred to in the ATOG program as Safety Sequence Diagrams) for each sequence. '.These diagrams show the systems whose responses are necessary to providing 'the 4
j( .-
'5-3
.m m,. . ~ . _ . , - , . _ . u . _ . . .. . ,4 . . _ , , , , . . - . _ .. . , -
N E s y 1 )
. /
415-1/0 S I a.g_: 1 j - g , , p.
$$$ s ae ___ _ ____
H!- _ _ _ _ ____ H - s ::
!*8 8
j;i. 5.3 , 1
~
#5
- m. B O
8 e --- - r -- - - -- :, u .. n 3 ..' ::I
-* .3, E 3 I_
*0 1~ :5
.[. 8-
- =
53 c3 s: r
. r. :.
vi gg f?v a ss s
-c Ig
~_
.o -- .T 33?? TT 5
}' 8 " 23 .33 65 4*
~
IS4
- c.
~$
C -Q In 2 "E "c - g -
. -: =3 8 ~e 3
y
- N : h5
_ s I ! { iI a a
- 3 -
3 a s :- W .
~
5 s e
- 3 3
T.E:El il
# I, W
C 3 j
) -
3
* .. E .g i E
_ _E 55
. _m 3 II 8'
3 .I. pp 4 1
- r
-I ts -
3- .. s- II i e : u
- E _g
-5 3 1- !3
-3 e .I I:
yp -- sfa 23 a:8g c.=-
-- - ___ s,; :
E
- t i .c5 a3:
.- k 132 2 3 3 3325 5 -
33 .{" n s5
-. ::{.g
^3" lI 5g, 3:
. m. .g .
s ..
\t:3
** i__ __
4
= w w w 'e i
5-4
l l 415-1/0 functions required to mitigate the consequences of the postulated event. The basic philosophy of the safety sequence analysis is to evaluate the plants ability to achieve and maintain critical safety functions (i.e., reactivity control, reactor heat removal, primary level control, etc.). This is demon-strated by establishing success paths consisting of a series of system functions which result in the achievement of a safety function. In addition to showing all the systems inv alved in achieving a safety function, the safety sequence diagram shows input signals, logics, setpoints, output actions, parameters monitored, and operator functions required. The operator functions are further broken down into where the control of the function resides (e.g., control room, local or a combi-nation). TMs analysis addressed not only the " prime" systems such as Reactor Protection, High Pressure Injection, Low Pressure Injection, Auxiliary Feedwater, etc., but also support systems such as electric power, component cooling water, service water, instrument air, etc.
- 3. Event Propogation and Additional Transient Analysis. The event sequences were then propogated beyond single failure to include multiple f ailure and operator errors. Additional transient analysis were per-formed to predict the plant response following the postulated additional failures and the resulting plant configurations.
- 4. Preparation of Davis-Besse ATOGs. Utilizing the diagrams and addi-tional transient analyses discussed above, the Davis-Besse ATOGs were prepared. The objective was to produce a set of technical guidelines that could be turned over to the plant staff for conversion into a symptom based emergency operating procedure. The basic philosophy was instead of having the operators try to diagnse the precise event and then follow the EOP for that event, the operator would concern himself immediately following an event with maintaining certain critical safety function parameters within acceptable limits by monitoring these param-eters and assuring the operation of appropriate systems.
5.1.2.2 Top-Down Functional System Functions Review _ Implementation - This approach consisted of taking the Safety Sequence Diagrams discussed above and identifying the systems, system functions, major components, operator actions, and instrumentation and control requirements necessary to satisfy critical safety functions for each selected event sequence. A determination was then made as to the availability of Davis-Besse Instrumentation and controls to support these system functions. Finally each Instrument and control identified, was located within the upgraded EOP to ascertain if any additional instrumentation was identified. The r3sults of this review were documented on Generic Systems Functions Review Tables (GSFRTs). A sample is shown on Table 5-2. Basis -.- This approach results in a systems functions review based upon the same
. analysis that had been used in developing the symptom based EOPs.
5-5
Dw\bE 1 f Il 1l IlIi!ll1iIlllilI I1i I 0 s
/ t l
n e 5 m 1 m 4 :: a
.O
- eee ttt C
/
s aaa s ue3 DDD t e- e tt5 n rs n ot e ptp R e eeo nnP il3 lI ll II 0 0 e 4 9 0 lb a n e 0 0 3 0 cpl 1 iOt 3 8 4 lEc pU e , ,0 0 y:y b yb A p S 00 20 0.1 6 3 1 1 0 3 0 3 0 8 d db ,, ,0 , , , . ede rev ek o 00 17
- 0. I 5I 0 0 7 i 0
4 0 2 0 1 0 2 0 4 tcr -l' i!1Il 1l' I eep i I s rhp .l PCA 5rr) uo
- ttu Dsn/ T T T T T T T T 7 noT ICI j:I1lllili l1 I t p t / s t s ls ss s p s r T
A o rnet r e er e r im rr i e f.r r eei t i P Ti .t W t cpf f it t, e mt t n ain S Dn ds r ero eo i v E C RTC li C R Ro CC RP 1lt l fm u 1 di 1 ! a dn s s ea l 2 u o r o r e p ie r h mh 5 fl ue qt t n t cpt c uc Pt C et e eli E L u u Ro t C erw Cwi niS P$ S A F n i l II el s I i T 1 m r e s t D u te r p c n s e n s e n T 5 t s e c m s ue rl a r P e
. it e
r W ,s T n id Pt a wme eem t' i ta Ffs S I n Ct oml S C ds eo se 4ir
- fe C RS II" bl 5DP I
I lI P1F1gR , i I lRP ; aF R s E t ren n E E om je ae Mr a C Ilg lIl, i 1l 1 !ls u e
, g f se sd a g o ie tg p teens n n o
p e sw i i r it i r ctist c cvE e t t n t VesR idr r u s U s mC c e s F su ss s e m l e eerm o a t ud i n l u t e d u ig ,r gnrf oe e y d o - s o rie rl t m y m e pk r e i S npae l m vs $ - S eiew l o aA T P A nrro O. t b p er mf GC rR R A 4la lIl1l I s y m t e y es f m t s y t ae S y t e y I erst fos f n. as 3 e ny oS t y 5 ae Se t pu N e C t - S m f S s i A n s T at rt 5 e N a C M C R C e n tI R A nlh il l1 e se s eyo n ts l y as t te tti i t t et vl e-ds tfc ian itr o lei rS u pct v C F ien . oe TB ree THC _ Ill Il I vb
415-1/0 l 5.2 Task Analysis and Task Verification and Validation A task analysis was performed of the principal operator taeks performed by the Davis-Besse operators. The objectives of the task analysis were to: 1) identify the control room information and control requirements required to support operator allocated tasks, and 2) prepare for task verification and validation which would assess the suitability of the control room design in supporting task performance. System Function and Task Analysis and V&V activities were conducted in four basic steps, as follows: o Identify / review tasks and task sequences
- identify system functions
- develop task lists and task identification o Analyze tasks
- analyze tasks for each task sequence
- develop Spatial-Operational Sequence Diagrams o Verify task performance capability / human engineering suitability o Validate control room functions.
Each of these steps is discussed in the following sections. I 5.2.1 Identify / Review Functions and Tasks The overall objective of the task analysis was to identify and organize plant systems, functions, and operator tasks to identify task requirements in terms of information/ control requirements and to identify control room' design requirements based on task requirements. 5.2.1.1 Identification of Functions and Tasks- Function and task identification was made by review of the System Function Review Table (SFRT). As previously discussed, SFRTs identified the functions, tasks, task sequences, and information and control requirements required to maintain plant safety given system failures, as specified in the i ATOGs, and upgraded EOPs.
~5.2.1.2 Develop Task Lists - The objectives of this subtask were: 1) to identify motor, perceptual, and information processing tasks associated with performance of system ' and subsystem functions, and 2) to identify / analyze task sequences, decision points, and task dependencies.
j Through review of the' system function review table, and, as required, EOPs, conditions which initiate operator tasks in relation to performing functions were identi-fled (initiatcrs include alarms, routine monitoring, administrative procedures, etc.). Also l 5-7
t 415-1/0 i l identified were the prerequisite conditions for the conduct of functions and the possible variations in the conduci of fur.ctions based on presence or absence of prerequisite conditions. By reviewing the system function review table individual tasks and decision points involved in function performance were identified. Detailed descriptions of task actions were identified depicting: 1 o Tasks o Task sequences o Decision points o Task dependencies o Task doscriptions. 5.2.1.3 Task Identification - Task. and task lists were identified for the follow!ng sequences: i o Reactor and plant symptoms and diagnostics o Monitoring of automatic system functions o immediate cperator action in response to safety system actuation 1
- o Supplementary operator actions in responses to plant system failures I o Monitoring and restoration of subcooling margin o Recovery of primary to secondary heat transfer
' o Monitoring and control of cooldown o Reactor shutdown and control given steam generator tube ruptures o Recovery from inadequate core cooling o Control of large loss of coolant accidents j o Steam generator cooldown with saturated RCS !. o Make up/ low pressure injection system cooldown o Steam generator cooldos.n with pressurizer solid. ( 5.2.2 Analyze Tasks (_
. The basic objective of this activity'.was to use the data previously generated to analyze, in detail, operator-allocated tasks for each of the functional sequer.ces selected for analysis. Subtasks are discussed below.
5.2.2.1 Analyze Tasks for Each Function - The objectives of this subtask were _to-further analy,7.e task Iequirements to . determine' information requirements, control
. requiremehts, communication requirements, constraints (time,' etc.)' on task performance, -
L 8
415-1/0 and to document task requirements in an accessible, usable format for each task and task cequence. The SFRT and task lists were used as a basis to determine detailed task require-ments. Detailed task descriptions were analyzed, and for each task the following information was assembled on the Task Data form (See Figure 5-2): o RSD - Response Selection Diagram, a flow diagram which identifies decisions, decisio 1 options, observations, and control actions. o Task elements - operational elements which comprise high level tasks o Task allocation - task allocation among operators personnel, including control room and auxiliary personnel o Task actions - parameter monitoring, observation (display reading, etc.), controlling / manipulating, decision-making, response selection, and communicating o Task object of action -- the specific operator-system / function inter-action, resolving to:
- plant system (e.g., RCS)
- plant component (e.g., RC pumps)
- plant parameter (e.g., RC flow)
- state (e.g., RC pump status, RCS flow, etc.)
o Means of action - addressing CR designs currently employed to allow task requirements (task object of action). These included:
- components (alarms, controls, displays, etc.)
- component locators (panels)
- ranges (of controls / displays)
- types (alarms, controls, etc.)
o Communications - indicating plant action and task conducted out-side at the control room o Remarks - incidental remarks entered to clarify tasks, require-ments, designs, etc. The task action and object of action columns identify task requirements in terms of behaviors involved, information requirements and control requirements. The means of action and communications columns represent control room components in the inventory which are available to meet task requirements. Thus, on the task data form are both task requirements and, as applicable, the associated CR components. In all cases, task requirements were identified and analyzed prior to review and the control room inventory. 5.2.2.2 Develop Spatial-Operational Sequence Diagrams - The objective of this subtask was to present graphically sequential task accomplishment on line drawings of the board layouts. 5-9
1 TOLEDO EDISON COtePANY Owis - sesse inwir na TASK OATA FOctae
- LeR mi 11J .+c LL t _. m a < , .., ,m. , ,
,A v sr y w t L .J.t a .t S4 eu,li M m,. n . ,,,c. , L ,t L /__ ' 2. ,. ,m -h u, s s a m s *%, o Mt '2 c'? 1 esoscs or acnom usans or acnom m SEWW m guart PLaert PLass
$3158 cemrmum name cease uses.
TT84 NN E y ggggggggy e - m e us N e-w. ,w ra , w* s.s ss o.oz
,,,; * " ?"'" * *
- u,L s bca,s.
"Y"[*
.+ o b ser.s. 'Rc s SJ., J.-f re r*$ *
;a;,; r
[Sh Al % s*t
- g RCS RC p-ps %f is Ms1ksti b^ - *r**
- 1 **'***
to-M *s sa 'T"* ' W "' o i&+s u ni #~'8 W" C
- dS g-s kina W*'
b o bs, ,e s Rts ik- p.=t Aafs Zero* la-ra =ssi % =A is ts assi Ca '**
- 0 '** 'D c et to tt-h iai ?. A ps 1811h3% O*80 F 19e,90e SWd 5 .
q.) .. J/a.w
,.s . ,- e m .,,A,.*
e6. s ,b u , on _ ,. a,,, sw. a a . 3,,, 4 1 , %,,
!*D.'.1 + = m asa i
FIGimE 5 2 e-
* >a
- u I
w N O
415-1/0 I Using Task data forms as input, human factors engineering analysts graphically represented task sequences on panel line drawings (i.e, Spatial-Operational Sequence Diagrams). The procedure for generating Spatial-Operational Sequence Diagrams is as follows: o Assemble line drawings of control board o Code components with locator codes on task analysis forms o Sequentially link control board instrumentation and displays based on Task Analysis / Response Selection Diagram data o Numerically identify links with task code numbers from task analysis data form-o Assemble and file Spatial-Operational Sequence Diagrams for subse-quent analysis. The outputs and results of this subtask were Spatial-Operational Sequence Diagrams for each system and subsystem function that identify: o Sequence of control / display use o Frequency of control / display use o Decision and task sequences o Existing CR components that support task performance. The outputs and results of this subtask were verification or identification of: Instru-mentation and communications requirements for performance of tasks, and workload assessment. An example spatial OSD is presented in Figure 5-3. 5.2.3 Verify Task Performance Capability / Human Engineering Availability and Sultability This task required further analysis and evaluation of operator-allocated tasks. Subtasks for this task are discussed below. 5.2.3.1 Perform Operator Traffic Analysis - The objective of this subtask was to I develop operator traffic analyses for each task sequence analyzed. For each event sequence which underwent evaluation, event evolutions (courses) were identified and the ! plant status and operational status ensuing after an initiating event was analyzed. l The procedure for developing operator traffic analysis was as follows: o Identify the previously defined functions and tasks as operationally sequenced in the event o Identify branch points (e.g.,' diagnostic decisions, etc.) o Analyze operations and tasks to identify event progressions o Obtain control room floor plan drawings 5-11
415-1/0 l l l Ii! l = lli is m
!Il giri n;
- e st rg l li Xl
! Is sinsi p~, = g ;j io Il 'l : si l
~
ii! si - II "!!"pe , li -11l I',0! ,,* i= si lTli7l it
'il e ,i ,; si li'l '8IN 8 li- 5 es! I ill ti II 11
=ul l e@g [g i IIe si al l .iilri) l C',0lmi*
un N N N
~
l y II l , '
- u. _.
t i r----------- l ! si i o l i l'
- =
ii l a i I i si i sn
!3 i l Ed
- i . ; e3 m
l __ l ! i
=g 3
i i si i 5
- a
- - z
! I. .3 'i E
i = l l I i a i L------------ g il sa na l[igi s
~
if I I lI N - I Ill -
=1 11: la "l-I,se.=gq
!!l !i Nl .
,.... 3 si.
s il
\/
. . .:. ! .s !a.
i i s Ip v., 7... 3
, El
. is i
ils di ' "
" ll.,EE 43:5 m .i;ig.,lE:.
g =l-l i nii l rd .. i 5-12 l !!'
f 415-1/0 l l o Sketch the traffic paths for all operations as required by the task sequence o Identify functional (operational) dependencies, as required. Sequential functions were overlaid on control room floor plans and sequentially - l numbered to identify and analyze potential control room traffic patterns. Figure 5-3 l presents an example traffic analysis. 5.2.3.2 Verification of Equipment Availability - The objectives of this subtask were to identify availability (presence) of required instrumentation and controls in the control room to support performance of system functions. The presence of unused equipment was incidentally identified during walk-throughs. The basic criteria for the subtask were: 1) the c; . trol and display designs should match the task needs and operators' capabilitiss, 2) frequently required or important instritmentation or controls should be located in the control room, ar.d 3) infrequently used or unimportant instrumentation should be excluded from the primary panel locations in the control room. The method used to verify equipment availability included the walk- and talk-throughs of the SFRT, the GSFRT, and the task data forms. During the walk-/ talk-throughs, the following equipment availability questions were asked of the operators: o Is all i.he information you require present in the c antrol room to perform the task (s) o All needed controls provided to perform the task (s) o Do the controls and/or displays provide the appropriate range of information/ control , o Are the controls / displays adequate in terms of precision and accuracy? Potential equipment availability questions identified during task data collection and analysis (from the comments section of the task data form) were specifically addressed during the walk-through. All findings were documented in the form of HEDs. 5.2.3.3 Verify Human Engineering Suitability - Thr. %jective of this subtask was to identify man-mt. chine interface proulems that may affect i.ask performance, but that may not be evident in component surveys. There are four major design is'.ues tr.ct this subtask addressed: 1) the grouping of components with respect to function, sequence, importance, and frequency-of-use cri-teria; 2) control and display integration to ensure that associated controla and displays are l 5-13 .
y- 1 415-1/0 TOLEDO EDISON COMPANY DAVIS BESSE UNIT 1 l.0 SYMPTOMS - TRAFFIC PATTERN ( i l p---------------------------------- l 1
- l 1
l I t I l l 1 1 1 I I - I u2 l iu I I I ! I I
- i e X I \
l 1 I l ee l $ l 1 5 1 :; ; a i - ~ . . s. I - - I : I - I I l I I I 1 _ l l .J.s u.i I i i g _ ._
@ OPERATOR 1
@ OPERATOR 2 -
FIGURE 5 4-5-14
415-1/0 not dispersed and that their designs are compatible; 3) component discrimination through enhancements such as demarcation and coding techniques; and 4) panel layouts for consistency of conventions across all panels / units. Specific checklist items regarding the above issues were used as compliance standards. Verification of human engineering suitability was performed 1) during conduct of the task ana!ysis review of S-OSD and traffic patterns, and 2) walk-through of task sequences by Davis-Besse operators using the CR mockup. With regard to the first method, verification during task data co!!ection and analysis, potential interface problems were identified by the human factors analysts. These included preliminary HEDs when obvious panel layout problems were evident (such as S-OSDs revealing sequential tasks at distant locations) or when control room instrumentation did not support task performance (for example, lack of required infor-mation). For the most part, suitability issues identified during analysis were verified and validated during the second method, task walk-through and observation. The objectives of the walk-/ talk-throughs were twofold. First, to verify the completeness of the task analysis, and second, to review the human engineering suitability of the control room design. 4 During the walk-throu;h, all tasks analyzed were observed and reviewed in terms of human engineering suitability. Over the course of one week two systems engineers, two human factors specialists, and two Davis-Besse operators walked and talked through each of the operator allocated and analyzed tasks using a full scale, color mockup of the Davis-Besse control room. The walk-/ talk-throughs were not conducted in a real time environment. Instead, each task was sin.ulated in terme, of performance, and task requirements discussed by the review team. At the end of each task or groups of related tasks, the participating operators were asked the following questions pertinent to task i performance: o Does the CR design adequately support task performance? o Does equipment layout adequately suoport task performance? l o Does equipment design adequately support task performance? o Do you know of any errors which have occurred during performance at this (these) task (s)? ,., in addition, and as appropriate, questions were asked concerning workload, excessive task complexity, and time constraints in task performance. In all cases where suitability issues
- were identified, the issue was discussed in detail and subsequently documented in the form 5-15 h
l 415-1/0 of HEDs. At the conclusion of the walk-/ talk-through, task performance checklists were applied to ensure all HEDs were identified. Findings (HEDs) are presented along with validation findings in Appendix B (V&V summary tables). 5.2.4 Task Analysis / Verification and Validation Findings Once the task analysis was validated, all recurrent tasks were collated and documented in the task analysis verification and validation form (see Appendix B). A list of the tasks included in the V&V activity is presented in Table 5-3. Recurrent tasks and their task requirements are summarized across tasks and sequences. The information on the form includes for each task: o Information and control requirements o Information/ control range required o Summary of information/ control availability o Summary of human engineering suitability assessment o Comments (including HED numbers. If =~ --
- o Task number 7
One hundred fifteen H P , and validation efforts. Tabl (Nif7 IggCne wCT'iW (yavoc with cross references to HEL . - we u# remarks. 'T C /# vM E f# sen s /scau= watC2W ' 5-16
415-1/0 TABLE 5-3 VERIFICATION Af0 VALIDATION TASK LIST 4 1 Verify Reactor Trip 2 Verify Turbine Trip 3 Verify SFAS Actuation 4 Verify SFRCS actuation 5 Verify Rapid Feedwater Reduction (RFR) Control 6 Verify Turbine Bypass Valve Setpoint T ansfer 7 Verify Fast Dead Bus Transfer 8 Isolate Letdown 9 Verify Containment Isolation 10 Verify NNI Power AC and DC 11 Veiy ICS AC and DC Power 12 Verify AC Emergency Buses are Energized 13 Verify Auto Start and Loading of Emergency Diesels 14 Makeup System Operation 15 Verify Main Feedwater Operation 16 Instrumentation Air System Operation 17 Verify Auxiliary Feedwater Operation 18 Verify Steam Generator Tube Rupture (RCS to Secondary Integrity) 19 Check if RCS Depressurization can be Stopped 20 Verify Adequate Subcooling Margin 21 Verify Primary to Secondary Heat Transfer 22 Check for Secondary integrity (Steam Line Rupture) 23 Verify Steam Generator Level Control by AFW 24 Trip Reactor Coolant Pumps 25 Start reactor Coolant Pumps 26 Check for Natural Circulation 27 Check for RCS Integrity (LOCA) 28 Verify SUFP Availability 29 Start SUFP 30 Check for Inadequate Core Cooling 31 Tranfer SUFP Suction from D. A. Storage Tank To C.S.T. 32 Check for Major LOCA 5-17
415-1/0 TABLE 5-3 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION TASK LIST (Continued) 33 Initiate MU/HPI Cooling 34 Check for Excessive Heat Transfer (Overcooling) 35 Lineup HPI and LPI for Piggyback Operation 36 Verify Pressurizer Operability 37 Transfer Electrical Loads from Aux Transformers to S/U Transformers l 38 Verify Pressurizer and Loop High Point Vent Operability 39 Control Rod Drive System (Manual Reactor Shutdown) 40 Transfer Makeup Pump Suction to BWST 41 Verify LPI System Operation 42 Verify CCW System In Service 43 Verify Service Water System in Service 44 Verify Containment Spray System Operation 45 Monitor and Control Containment Conditions 46 Establish Decay Heat Removal System Cooling 47 Control Turbine Bypass Valves 48 Control Atmospheric Vent Valves 49 When BWST Level Decreases to 8' Transfer LPI(and Core Spray if Running) Pump Suetions to Recirculation from the Containment Emergency Sump 50 Establish a Bubble in the Pressurizer 51 Initiate RCS Boration , 52 Determine if Safety Injection can be Terminated 53 Establish Flow to the Steam Generators 54 Use Essential Power Indicators X and/or Y 5-18
415-1/0 I TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION Fl?OINGS & I-EDS GEtERATED PAGE 1 OF 24
.-- / / J/ /
6.1.1.2 CONSISTENCY OF MAtNING WITH EQUIPPENT LAYOUT
- a. COVERAGE - Control room O NO 9.2-43 !!A SFRCS Study manning and task assignments I 9.2-46 III should ensure complete and timely coverage of controls, displays, and other equipment required during all modes of e operation.
- b. UTILIZATION OF ADDI- I NO 9.2-46 !!I
, TIONAL PERSONrEL - 9.2-50 -- Deleted Additional onsite or offsite personnel may augment the normal crew complement under certain conditions (e.g.,
refueling). If so, acivities and task assignments should be planned to ensure prope.' coor-dination. (Note: special training for this situation may be required.) 6.1.3.1 UNIT INTEGRATION Ato INTERFERENCE
- a. EQUIPEPENT ARRANGE N/A MENT - Equipment should be arranged with movement and communication patterns in mind, so that each unit opera-tions do not interfere with each other.
- b. SENIOR OPERATOR N/A STATaON - Senior operators who s@ervise and assist operations of more than one unit need to be stationed so that they can communicate effectively with operators in each unit and have an unobstructed visual path to the control boards of each unit.
i f e 5-19
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & FEDS EfERATED PAGE 2 OF 24 s-- // J/ / 6.1.3.1 (Cont'd)
- c. SHARING OF N/A l PERSOMEl - Where opera-tors may assist those of another unit, potential task loading should be evaluated to assure that each unit can be covered adequately in all situations.
6.1.3.2 LNIT MIRROR IMAGING If a mirror image design has been used:
- a. DEDICATED CREWS - N/A Operational crews should be committed to one or the other unit. They s,hould not be allowed to alternate between the two mirrored units. This includes operators manning a single center desk station.
- b. ACCENTUATE DIFFER N/A i
ENCES - The distinctiori* between the mirrored units should be heightened as much as possible so that there will be no confusion about where one unit ends and the other begins. This can be done by i using a different color scheme for the elements of each unit, including carpeting, desks, and other work station equipment, as well as the board surface areas. l l l l I
$-20
l 415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 . TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & D EDS GEtERATED PAGE 3 OF 24 s_ / / J/ / . 6.4.2.2 CODING OF CONTROLS f'2) When color coding is used to N/A relate a control to its corre-sponding display, the same color should be used for both the control and the display. 6.4.;.1 PUSriBUTTON DESIGN PRINCIPLES
- a. POSITION - Pushbuttons in a N/A row or matrix should be posi-tioned in a logical order, or in an order related to the proce-dural sequence.
6.8.1.1 ASSIGNING PAPEL CONTENTS Controls and displays should be placed within the control room at locations which promote efficient procedures, safe operation, and maximum operator awareness of the current system condition. There are three general methods for achieving this condition. They are: (a) grouping by task sequence, (b) grouping by system function, and (c) grouping by importance and frequency of use.
- a. GROUPING BY TASK D NO 9.2-1 IIA SEQUENCE - Controls and I 9.2-2 !!C displays should be assigned to O 9.2-3 !!!
work stations so as to mini- 9.2-4 IIB mize operator movement. To 9.2-5 !!B the extent, practical, this 9.2-20 IIA assignment should consider 9.2-30 IIA both normal and emergency 9.2-43 IIA procedures. It should be practical to perform all frequently occurring routine tasks, with a minimum of human movement from panel to panel. 5-21
415-1/0 j l TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & KDS EFERATED PAGE 4 OF 24 seesuse #
/ $ 6
/ 4
/
6.8.1.1 (Cont'd)
- b. GROT.FING BY SYSTEM O NO 9.2 20 IIA FLNCTION - Within the 1 9.2-30 IIA constraints of grouping by task 9.2-40 III sequence, controls and displays should be assigned to panels in functional groups related to system structure.
This grouping should promote easy understanding of the relationship between contreis and system, and should assic graphic or pictorial display or system relationships.
- c. GROLPING BY IMPORTANCE O NO 9.2-20 llA AND FREGINCY OF I 9.2-30 llA USC - Within the constraints of grouping by task sequence and by system function, controls and displays should be assigned to panels depending on their importance and frequency of use. Controls or display 2 which are neither important to plant safety nor frequency of use. Controls or displays which are neither important to plant safety not frequently used should be 8nstalled in secondary panel locations, i
5-22 p--- - - -
-y , m~ w -e.e y y
1 415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS /VERFICATION & VALIDATION FifOINGS & EDS TERATED PAGE 5 OF 24
. - - / J/ / .
6.8.1.2 EFTECTIVE PAEL LAYOUT The location of controls and O NO 9.2-2 IIC displays within a single panel ! 9.2-3 Ill should make the effective use of D 9.2-5 IIB the viewing and manual manip 9.2-20 !!A ulative areas. The ellocation of 9.2-30 IIA panel positions should first ensure 9.2-40 III the integrity of arrangement or 9.2-50 -- Deleted grouping by system function and 9.2-56 -- Deleted - Locattor l task sequence. Within those confirmed in constraints, consideration should V&V walk-through be given to the following factors: 9.02-60 -- Deleted - Arrange-(a) the frequency with which ment confirmed irl controls and displays are used; V&V walk through (b) the significance of controls and dispiays in terms of their pos91ble use during an emergency;(c) the importance of controls and displays to overall system performance; and . (d) special requirements in using a control device or display instru-ments, such as the need for accuracy, speed, application of j force, or a particular type of movement. 6.8.1.3 EMMNCING RECOG-NITION APO IDENTFICATION
- a. SPACING - Spacing consists O NO 9.2 33 IIA SFRCS Study of physically separating groups I 9.2-47 !!A of components On a panel with 9.2-58 IIC enough space between groups 9.2-59 IIC so that the boundaries of each group are obvious. Spacing between groups should be at least the width of a typical control or display in the group (see Exhibit 6.8-1).
5-23
415-1/0 l l I TABLE 5-4 1 ( TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & KDS OEERATED PAGE 6 OF 24 secouse
/
#, 8e/ a
/ /
6.8.1.3 (Cont'd)
- b. DEMARCATION - Demarcation O NO 9.2-47 IIA consists of circumscribing I 9.2-61 IIC functional or selected groups of controls and displays with a contrasting !!ne. The appil-cation of demarcation tech-niques should conform to Guideline 6.6.6.2 (See also Exhibit 6.8-1).)
6.8.2.1 SEQUENCE, FREGLENCY OF USE, AND FUNCTIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
- a. SEQUENCE - Controls and displays which are used together during a normal task sequence should be grouped together.
(1) Displays which are O NO 9.2-30 !!A observed in a specified I sequence, as during hot-leg temperature check for all reactor coolant loops, should be grouped together. It is desirable that they be positioned so that they are normally used in a left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or other natural sequence. (2) Controls which are O NO 9.2-53 IIC operated in sequence, as in I 9.2-54 IIA energizing a system or 9.2-55 III aligning a series of valves 9.2-56 - Deleted - Locatlon for a particular function, confirmed in V&V i should be grouped walk-though together. It is desirable
- that they be positioned so that they are normally used in a left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or other natural sequence.
5-24
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 i TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & KDS EtERATED PAGE 7 OF 24 son, suer #
/ 8/ 4
/ #
/
6.8.2.la. (Cont'd) (3) When there is a set of O NO 9.2-60 - Deleted - Location related controls and I confirmed in V&V displays, the layout of walk-through displays should be symmet-rical with the controls they represent.
- b. FREQUENCY OF USE - O YES Frequently used controls and displays should be arranged to reduce search time and mini-mire the potential for error dering use.
(1) They should be near the center of the preferred visual and manual areas. (2) They should be positioned so as to be easily iden-tlfied.
- c. FLNCTIONAL CONSID O NO 9.2-53 IIC ERATIONS - Functionally I 9.2-54 IIA related controls and displays 9.2-55 Ili should be grouped tcgether 9.2-56 -
Deleted - Location when they ares confirmed in V&V 9.2-60 - Deleted - Location (1) Used together to perform confirmed in V&V tasks related to a specific function (e.g., operation of the residual heat removal system). (2) Identical in purpose (e.g., reactor coolant pumps). 6.8.2.2 LOGICAL ARRANGE-MENT Ato LAYOUT
- b. OTKR EXPECTATIONS - O NO 9.2-23 III Where other operator expec- I tations can be identified, components should be arranged to match these expections.
5-25 l
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANAi.YSIS/ VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & FEDS EFERATED PAGE 8 OF 24 sostums #
/ 8 4
/ /
6.8.2.4 STANDARDIZATION When a precedent has been estab-lished in the arrangement and loca-tion of controls and displays, that standard practice should be followed unless other crucial considerations necessitEte a change.
- a. PAPEL TO PAfEL STAN- O NO 9.2-6 IIA OARDIZATION - Standardizatim I should be maintained where similar functions or panels are located at several work stations or units are !ccated at several work stations or units and must be used by the same personnel.
- b. SIMLA.ATOR-TO-CONTROL N/A ROOM STAFOARDIZA-I TION - Standardization should be maintained where simulators or procedure trainers are used that himulate the actual operational equip-ment.
6.8.3.2 STRINGS OR CLUSTERS OF SIMILAR COf@OPENTS On occasion it may be necessary to have a large group of similar components arranged together in strings, matrices, or other clusters. Those human factors principles presented in Section 6.8.2, Layout Arrangement Factors, should not be compromised where large clusters of components are concerned. However, consider-ations such as search time, discriminability of components, and avoidance of selection errors will of ten make a string or matrix the preferred arrangement. The following criteria should apply: l l 5-26
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 l TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & FEDS GDERATED PAGE 9 OF 24 s.s.u.,
,/ s/ ,
/ ,/ .
6.8.3.2 (Cont'd)
- a. ORENTATION'- Horizontal O YES rows of displays should be used I rather than vertical columns (see Exhibit 6.8-4)
- b. STRING LENGTH - Strings O YES of small displays should not I exceed about 20 inches on the control board.
- c. NUMBER OF COWOPENTS (1) No more than 5 similar O YES components should be laid I out in an unbroken row or column.
(2) If more than 5 similar O YES components must be laid out I together, the string nr cluster ( should be broken up by tech-niques such as physical spacing or demarcation (see Exhibit 6.8-5). 6.8.3.3 MIRROR IMAGING Mirror-imaging is an arrangement N/A in which two functional groups are laid out symmetrically so that one is a complete, or almost complete, reversal of the other. Mirror-Imaging should not be used, and any recurring functional groups should be replicated. 6.9.1.1 SINGLE CONTROL APO DISPLAY PAIRS i Controls and displays which are O NO 9.2-4 IIB ! normally used together should be I located in close proximity to each I other, but positioned and separated i sufficiently so that the display is not obstructed during operation. l i 4 5-27
l l 415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS /VERFICATION & VALIOATION FINDINGS & W.DS TfCRATED PAT 10 OF 24
- s. // J/ /
l 6.9.1.1 (Cont'd)
- a. PROXIMITY - A visual O NO 9.2-4 IIB display that will be monitored I during control manipulatlon should be located sufficiently close that an operator can read it clearly and without parallax from a normal oper-ating posture.
' b. OBSCURATION - Controls O YES and displays should be located I so that displays are not obscured during contr:1 opera-tion (see Exhibit 6.9-1),
- c. ASSOCIATION - Related O NO 9.2-20 IIA controls and displays should be I l'
eas'ly identified as belng associated. This association ~ l can be established (or f enhanced) by (1) location, (2) labeling, (3) coding, (4) demarcation, and (5) consistency with operator expectations. The following relationships should be immediately apparent to the
- operators (1) Association of displays with controls.
(2) The direction of movement of control and display. 1- (3) The rate and limits of l movement of the control and display. t i 5-28
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & FEDS GEPERATED FACE 11 OF 24 ~ sponse #
/ 8 a
/ /
6.9.1.2 MLA.TIPLE CONTROLS OR DISPLAYS The control and monitoring of nuclear power plant systems will occasionally require either multiple controls or multiple displays. Control display relation-ships in mult!ple arrays should be apparent to the operator and consistent with human expections.
- a. MtA.TIPLE CONTROLS, N/A SINGLE DISPLAY -
(1) Controls chould be mounted below the display. (2) Controls should be centered on the display. l (3) Controls should be grouped in a line or matrix. (4) If not feasible to mount - controls directly below the display, controls should be mounted to the right of the display. (5) Where there is a normal
- order of use, evntrols should be arranged for use in left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or other natural ,
sequence. (6) Where the above tech-niques cannot apply, or where for other reasons l the relationships are not i readily apparent, layout l enhancement techniques j should be employed - l spacing, demarcation, i color shading, insert l panels, panel relief, and l the use of mimics. See Guideline 6.9.1.3. i f i 5-29
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & KDS GEERATED PAGE 12 OF 24 s-- // J/ / . 6.9.1.2 (Cont'd)
- b. SINGLE CONTROL, N/A MULTIPLE DISPLAYS -
(1) Displays should be located above the control. (2) The control should be placed as near as possible to the display, and nrefer-ably underneath the center of the di? play array. (3) Displays should be arranged horizonta!!y or in a matrix. (4) If it is not fetsible to mount displays above the control, they shoulc; be moutited to the left of the control. (5) Where there is a normal order of use, displays should read from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or in other natural sequence. (6) Where the above tech-niques cannot apply, or where for other reasons the control-display relationship is not clearly apparent, layout enhance-meat techniques should be employed. See Guideline 6.8.1.3. (7) Displays should not be obscured during control manipulation,
- c. DIS') LAY SELECTORS -
Where display are selected for viewing using a rotary selector switch, the following should apply: 5-30
415-1/0 TADLC 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS /VEll!FICATION A VALIDATION FINDINGS A FEDS OENERATED PACC 13 OF 24 seosues #
/ 8/ a
/ / .
6.9.1.2c (Cont'd) (1) The control should rnove O YES clockwise from OIT (if I appropriate) through settings 1, 2, 3...n. (2) The control rcom poultion O YES sequence should conforrn I to tie dlsplay sequence. (3) Control position Indica- O YES tions shoald correspond I with display labels. 6.9.2.1 LOCATION AM) AltitAtKIMENT OF CONTitOL-DISILAY GtOU'S
- a. FUNCTIONAL INTEGtlTY - 0 NO 9.2 20 IIA Multiple controls or displays I related to the same function D (e.g., power, status, test) shou ld be grouped togther,
- b. SEQlENCE OF LII - YES Sequence of use should be as follows:
(1) Lef L to right. (2) Top to bottom. (3) The above combined (normal reading order). 6.9.2.2 SING.C PAM;L + AHilANM MENTS Appropriate arrangements for NO 9.2-4 !!!) control-display relationship,in order of preference, are (a) display above each control,(b) displays and controle in matched rows, and (c) multi row displays with a single row of controls. Practles should be consistent, so that operator expectations are not confused. 5-31'
I 415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & FEDS mtERATED PAGE 14 OF 24 s- / J/ / 6,9.2.2 (Cont'd)
- a. DISPLAY ABOVE EACH CONTROL - The preferred configuration is as shown by Exhibit 6.9-3, with the display above each control. If this configuration is used the following should apply:
(1) Each display should be locateo directly above its associated control. (2) The display / control palts should be arranged in rows.
- b. CGNTROLS APO DISPLAYS IN ROWS - As an alternative, displays may be arrayed in rows as the upper portion of a panel, matched to controls arrayed in similar rows below, as shown in Exhibit 6.9-4.
(1) Each control should occur the same relative position as the display to which it is associated. (2) Controls and displays should have corresponding labels.
- c. MULTI-ROW DISPLAYS WITH -
SINGLE-ROW CONTROLS - A less desired arrangement is , that of Exhibit 6.9-5, in which l two or more rows of displays are arrayed above a single row of controls. l (1) Displays should be ordered l left to right and top to t'ottom (in normal reading order), and matched to controls ordered left to right. 5-32
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 I TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & FEDS GEbERATED PAGE 15 OF 24
.-- / / J/ / .
6.9.2.2c (Cont'd) (2) Controls arni displays should have corresponding labels. , d. CONSISTENT PRACTICE - Arrangements of functionally similar controls and displays should conform to the same convention throughout the control room,
- e. CONTROL / DISPLAY PACKAGES - When controls and related displays cre assembled using modular pack-aged units, the design of the packages will limit the loca-tion and arrangement which can be achieved. In this case, modules should be selected and arranged to achieve maximum conformity with the principles described above.
6.9.2.3 CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS IN SEPARATE PLAfCS
- a. SEPARATE CONTROLS AIO O YES DISPLAYS - Where displays I are on separated panels, they should preferably be on the adjacent upper panel from their associated controls. See Exhibit 6.9-6.
- b. FACING PAfELS - In no O N/A case should related controls and displays be located on separate panels that face each other.
l l l 5-33 i
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & KDS GEERATED PAGE 16 OF 24
-- / / J/ /
6.9.3.1 GENERAL MOVEMENT RELATIONSHIPS
- a. ROTARY CONTROLS - O YES Rotary controls should turn I clockwise to cause an increase in parameter value. The associeted display movements should be as follows:
(1) Linear scales, up or to the right. (2) Digital displays, increasing in value. (3) Strings of indicator lights, bottom-to-top or left-to-right. (4) Circular meter pointers, clockwise,
- b. LIEAR CONTROLS - O N/A Linear controls should move up or to the right to cause er.
Increase in parameter value. The associated display relationships should ber (1) Linear scales, up or to the right. (2) Digital scales, increasing in value. (3) Strings of Indicator lights, bottom-to-top, or lef t-to-right.
- c. DISPLAY RESPONSE T&E LAG -
(1) There should be no time O YES lag between system condi- I tion change and display indication. 5-34
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS /VERFICATION & VALIDA110N FINDINGS & KDS GEERATED PAGE 17 OF 24 emetunt #
/ /
$q/ q
/ /
6.9.3.lc (Cont'd) (2) When there is a time lag O YES between control actuation I and ultimate system state, there should be an immediate feedback indication of the process and direction of parr:neter change. l l l I I' 5-35
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FitOINGS & EDS EERATED PAGE 18 OF 24 s-.. / / J/ / . 6.1.1.1 ACESSIBILITY OF INSTRUENTATION/ EQUIPMENT
- a. PRESENT IN TE CONTROL I NO 9.8-3 IIA Addendum ROOM - Control room D 9.2-12 IIC instrumentation and 9.2-13 III equipment should include all 9.2-14 III Under operations controls and displays needed review for (1) detection of abnormal 9.2-18 IIA conditions, and (2) bringing the 9.2 39 IIC Under operations plant to a safe shutdown review condition. 9.2-57 - Deleted 9.2-62 Vari- See HED Summary thru ous Table for V&V 9.2-115
- b. ARRANGED TO FACILITATE I NO 9.2-43 IIA COVERAE - Operators O should not have leeway to D 9.2-50 --
Deleted leave the primary operating area (see Exhibit 6.1-1) to attend control room instrumentation on back panels during operational sequences in which continuous monitoring or the timing of
- control actions may be critical.
6.1.3.1 UNIT INTEGRATION APO INTERFERENCE
- d. SHARING OF N/A PROEDURES - Each unit should have its own set of procedures and other reference documents as required to make sure that references are easily available to personnel in each unit, and to avoid conflicting needs for the same reference.
- e. SHARING OF EQUIPPENT - N/A (1) Control of plant equipment from one control room should not effect the ability of operators of other control rooms to maintain control of their respective units.
. 5-36
.- . ,... c . . . ,, .. , ..
415-1/0 = TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & l-EDS TJERATED PAGE 19 OF 24 sestuas # 8 & + 6.1.3.le (Cont'd) (2) The status of plant equip. N/A ment under the control of one control room should be displayed in all control rooms capable of control-ling that equipment. (3) If control of plant equip N/A ment from one control room renders that equip-ment unavaHable to other control rooms, availability status indications should be displayed in all control rooms. (4) A single, centrally located N/A control panel / console may be used for dual-unit control rooms within the same isolation boundary when this design does not conflict with the panel layout and control-display integration guidelines of Sections 6.8 and 6.9 (5) Administrative procedures N/A should be in place which assign responsibility for allocation of use of controls of shared plant equipment to single control room. 6.3.4.3 APNUNCIATOR RESPONSE PROCEDURES
- a. AVAILABILITY - Annunciator O YES response procedures should be I available in the control room.
b 5-37
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS /VERFICATION & VALIDATION FirOINGS & N EFERATED PAGE 20 OF 24
. - - // J/ / .
6.3.4.3 (Cont'd)
- b. INDEXING - Annunciator I YES response procedures should be indexed by panel identification and annunciator tile coordi-4 nates.
6.5.1.1 IWORMATION TO BE DISPLAYED
- a. TASK ANALYSIS - Analysis O NO 9.2-31 IIC of operator tasks in relation to I 9.2-51 - See Appendix C system engineering and system D 9.2 57 - Deleted based functional objectives is on I&C review recommended as the surest means of establishing operator information requirements.
, b. COf@LETENSS OF IrFOR. NO 9.8-3 HA MATION - Visual displays 9.2-21 - Deleted provided in the control room 9.2-22 IIC should give operators all the 9.2 26 III information about system 9.2-28 IIB status and parameter values 9.2 29 IIC that is needed to meet task 9.2-41 III requirements in normal, 9.2-44 III abnormal, and emergency 9.2-48 - On SPDS situations. 9.2-51 - See Appendix C
- c. (A@ECF.SSARY IrFOR- NO 9.2-15 III MATION - Efficient per-formance requires not only display of all needed informa-tion but also avoiding the display of extraneous informa-tion in the prime operating area.
- d. REDurOANCY - Redundancy I YES in the presentation of information items should be limited to cases where needed for backup or to avoid excessive operator movement.
5-38
- n. - . . .
i 415-1/G ! TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS /VERFICATION & VALIDATION Fif0INGS & FEDS GEfERATED PAGE 21 OF 24 l
. - - // J/ /
L5.1.1 (Cont'd)
- e. OEMAFO Irf0RMATION VERSUS STATUS Nf0R-MATION - Demand infor-mation shows that equipment has been commanded (by control settings or otherwise) to a particular state or level.
It shows only what is demanded - not what is ' actually being realized. Status information shows the state or level actually in effect. (1) To prevent operator con- I NO 9.2-28 UB fusion, it is essential that O 9.2-42 !!A displays be identified as to whether they reflect demand or actual status. (2) Visual display of actual I system / equipment status O NO 9.2-16 HC should be displayed for all important parameters.
- f. DISPLAY FAILURE - When O NO 9.2-21 - Deleted panelinstruments, such as ! 9.2 29 IIC meters, fail or become inoper- 9.2-34 -
Deleted bas:d 1 ative, the failure should be on operations apparent to the operator (e.g., review through of f-scale indication). L5.1.2 USABILITY OF DIS-PLAYED VALL.ES
- a. SCALE SELECTION - Scale O NO 9.2-7 . HA units should be consistent with I 9.2 HI the degree of precision and D 9.2-17 !!C accuracy needed by the oper- 9.2 19 IIC ator. 9.2-35 IIC 9.2-37 IIC
- b. ELIMINATION & O NO 9.2-9 IIC OPERATOR CONVERSION - I 9.2-21 - . Deleted All displays should indicate D 9.2-23 III values in a form immediately 9.2-26 III usable by the operator without 9.2-34 - Deleted based requiring mental conversion. 9.2-36 IIC on I&C review 9.2-38 HC 9.2-49 111 i
i I F L 5-39 l i
- . . , s _
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FIFOINGS & FEDS GErERATED PAGE 22 OF 24 seesues # / 6.5.1.2 (Cont'd)
- c. PERCENTAGE IrOICA- 0 NO 9.2-38 IIC T10N - Percentage I indi*ation may be used may be used when the parismeter is meaningfully reflected by percentage.
- d. . CALE RANGE - Scales O NO 9.2-8 IIC
+ aould be selected to: I 9.2-11 IIC 9.2-41 III (1) Span the expected range of 9.2-44 111 operational parameters, or 9.2-48 - Deleted-on SPDS 9.2-50 - Deleted
, (2) Employ appropriate scale ranging techniquas, or l (3) Be supported by auxiliary wide range instruments.
- e. SCALE SIZE - Scale ranges I YES may be expanded (or con-tracted) by multiplying or dividing indicated scale valuet by powers of ten. All such scales should be clearly marked as to whether the indicated values should be multiplied or divided, and the
+ factor involved (e.g.,10,100, 1000).
- f. SENSITIVITY - Display i NO 9.2 24 III dynamic sensitivity should be 9.2-32 IIC tJnder study selected to minimize the dis.
play of normal random variations in equipment performance. 6.5.1.4 PRINTING ON TFE DIS-PL AY FA&
- a. SCALE COWATBILITY - 0 NO 9.2-42 IIA When two or more displays of I 9.2-49 Ill -
the same parameter (e.g., pressure, temperature) must be compared, scales should be compatible in numerical progression and scale organi-zation.'(See Exhibit 6.5-6). Y 4 P 5-40
415-1/0 TABLE 5-4 TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & M EfERATED PAGE 23 OF 24 s-- / / J/ / 6.5.1.4 (Cont'd)
- e. LIPEAR VS LOGARITMC I NO 9.2-17 !!C SCALES - Logarithmic scales should be avoided unless needed to display a range of values.
- f. MRTISCALE I NO 5.1-9 IIA INDICATORS - Multiscale indicators (i.e., single pointer, multiple scales) should be avoided unless they can be justified as of operational benefit, and precautions are taken to avoid operator con-fusion.
6.9.1.2 MRTIPLE CONTROLS AND DISPLAYS
- c. (4) Displays should read off- N/A sea:e, not zero, when not selected, especially if zero is a possible parameter .
displayed (see Exhibit 6.9 - 2). 6.9.3.2 CONTROL-DISPLAY RATIO
- a. CONTROLS - Controls I YES should provide a capability to affect the parameter con-trolled easily, with the required level of precision.
They should be effective in sufficient time, under expected dynamic conditions, and within the limits of manual dexterity, coordi. nation, and reaction time,
- b. OSPLAYS - Displays should I NO 9.2 25 IIC grovide a capabilify to distin. O 9.2-27 I!C g sish significant levels of the 9.2-49 III system pie neter controlled.
5-41
415-1/0
- T ABLE 5-4 l
TASK ANALYSIS / VERIFICATION & VALIDATION FINDINGS & FEDS EFERATED PAGE 24 OF 24
.__ ,/ / </ / ,, ,/ .
09.3.2 (Cont'd)
- c. EXCESS PRECISION - Both displays and controls should have a precision which does not greatly exceed that J
required.
- d. FEED 8ACK - Feedback from 1 NO 9.2-57 - Deleted based the display should be apparent O on 1&C review for any deliberate movement of a control.
i 1 l l 42
415-1/0 6.0 ASSESSMENT Af0 DISPOSITION OF KDs Once a Human Engineering Discrepancy was identified, its disposition had to be determined. This section of the sumr ary report: 1) describes the means whereby Human Engineering Discrepancies were assessed for error-inducing potential and system conse-quences of induced errors, and 2) details the means by which Human Engineering Discrepancies will be disposed of (enhancement, design changes, additional studies). The assessment process determined the category and priority of the HED as a function of the potential consequences of the discrepancy. The disposition process determined the means by which a Human Engineering Discrepancy will be corrected. This process is described below. 6.1 Assessment The basic assessment process was divided into four steps, as follows: i I o Assess extent of deviation from NUREG-0700 guidelines o Assess Human Engineering Discrepancy impact on error occurrence o Assess potential consequences of error occurrence on plant operation / safety o Assign Human Engineering Discrepancy scheduling priority. A Human Engineering Discrepancy Assessment Form and a Logic Diagram are presented in Flyure 2-3. Human engineering discrepancies were reviewed by a committee consisting of, as a minimum, two human factors specialists, two systems engineers, two I&C engineers, and two operations specialists from Davis-Besse. l 6.1.1 Assess Extent of Deviation from NUREG-0700 Guioellnes l-This step required that a subjective assessment of the extent of discrepancy from NUREG-0700 guidelines be made with regard to the control room. For example, symbol / background contrast might be 40 percent rather than 50 percent, or only small ! amounts of parallax may exist in a display. A judgement was made based on the content f of the guideline being applied and the control room component under assessment. Extent ! of deviation was. subjectively scaled from "1"(some deviation) to "5"(complete deviation). There was also a category N/A (not applicable) for Human Engineering Discrepancies which are not described in NUREG-0700 but which have been reported by operators as 6-1 4
415-1/0 problems. Extent of deviation judgements are n_ot t used directly to assess priority or scheduling of backfits, but relate to assessment of operational error potentials. It is possible to have little deviation from the guidelines and high error assessments, and vice versa. 6.1.2 Categorization of I-EDs Given that no control system can be designed to be operationally error-free, the purpose of the assessment process was to estimate Human Engineering Discrepancy impact on hypothetical (unknown) baseline error rates of control room components; e.g., will additional errors be induced by discrepancies from the guidelines? Estimates of Human Engineering Discrepancy impact on error occurrence were qualitatively arrived at by consideration of the interaction of the discrepancy and the following: o Bodi physiology
- fatigue / physical stress
- discomfort
- injury
- anthropometry o Sensory / perceptual performance
- vision
- audition
- proprioception
- touch o Information processing
- overlead
- confusion
- recall
- pattern matching / recognition
- data manipulation (comparing, extrapolating, etc.)
o Learning
- inhibition
- habituation
- response predominance *
- transfer
- response competition
- response latency o Task demands
- frequency .
- duration
, competition
- sequence
- speed
- communication
- precision information.
6-2
415-1/0 ( Assessment of error occurrence was estimated for the following: o Overall operator performance is/is not degraded by the Human Engineering Discrepancy impact on body physiology? . o The Human Engineering Discrepancy does/does not degrade sensory performance? o Information processing capability is/is not exceeded as a result of the Human Engineering Discrepancy? o The Human Engineering Discrepancy does/does not directly induce error due to principles of learning? o Task difficulty and reliability is/is not affected by the Human Engineering Discrepancy? ' Based on the above, a subjective error assessment was generated on a 5-point scale; "1" indicating a low probability of induced errors is expected as a result of the Human Engineering Discrepancy, and "5" indicating a high probability of additional er-ors being induced. Any discrepancy having an error probability assessment greater than "1" was classified as a Category II HED. Category I Human Engineering Discrepancies are those which have been noted from documented (ferational errors or problems reported by operators. All Category I Human Engineering Discrepancies are deemed to increase error potential, but consequences must still be easigned to determine ultimate scheduling priority. Category II Human Engi-neering Discrepancies are those discrepancies noted during field surveys, task analysis, and/or operator interviews, which have been determined to be of valid concern and require corrective action, but for which no documented cases of operator error were found during the Review of Operating Experience, but which have an error potential greater than "1". Category Ill Human Engineering Discrepancies are those discrepancies noted by field surveys and/or operator interviews which have been determined to have little or no impact on operator performance, and for wnien no documented cases of operator error were found during the Review of Operating Experience. 6.1.3 Prioritization of FEDS Once an HED had been categorized, its priority was determined by evaluating the potential effect of the hypothesized error on plant safety. Review team, technical staff, and operations representatives evaluated system consequences of hypothesized opera-tional errors. Four determinations were made: o Does the Human Engineering Discrepancy relate to plant safety functions? 6-3
415-1/0 o Does the Human Engineering Discrepancy relate to plant functions required to mitigate the consequences of an accident? o Could an error lead to unsafe operations or plant conditions? o Could an error lead to violations of technical specifications? Each of these required a yes/no type response. The Logic Diagram in Figure 2-3 (Human Engineering Discrepancy Form) shows how these data were integrated to assign categorios and priorities to Human Engineering Discrepancies. As indicated in Figure 2-3, three HED priorities were assigned: "A," "B," and "C." Each of these priorities and its associated scheduling implications are pressated below. o Priority A - Prompt-first autage, given engineering lead time, avail-ability of materials and coordination with the Integrated Living Schedule o Priority B - Near term - second outage, given engineering lead time, availability of materials and coordination with the Integrated Living Schedule o Priority C - Long term. 6.2 FED Disposition After an HED had been assessed and na "' sition was selected. D" ' , bility and effectivenes y giqlg5) W selected solution was NW pe, 7, Section 7.0). g @W mpanies Due to backfits to a i utreme caution with r dies are being conduct. 've and well-integrate < 's have been initiated: o I o L . .. aius study o Controls study o Displays study o Noise study o Illumninstion and lighting study 6-4
415-1/0 0 Computer study a SFRCS study o Engineering study o Operations study. Toledo Edison is proceeding to integrate these studies with the Davis-Besse living schedule. A summary of HED status and disposition is presented in Appendix C. Original HEDs are being maintained in the central project filas. e f+ 6-5 ,
415-1/0 7.0 It@LEMENTATION AND SCWDULE OF CORRECTIVE ACTIONS As indicated in Section 6.0 of this report, two major types of dispositions are being implemented as a result of the Detailed Control Room Design Review as follows: 7.1 Short Term Corrective Actions Based on the HED assessment and disposition process, a number of HEDs were identified which were amenable to short term corrective actions (enhancements, proce-dure revisions, training, etc.) without jeopardizing the integrated control room design improvement plans that emerge from the special studies described below. A list of the affected HEDs is provided in Table 7-1. Refer to Appendix C for the specific corrective actions. 7.2 Special Studies The goal of the disposition process was an integreted control room design improve-ment effort that will solve problems cost effectively wiuiout introducing new problems. Therefore it was decided that the total package of solutions and the overall effects on the control room as en integrated system be considered before committing to individual design solutions. To this end, a series of special studies are being conducted to ensure that all proposed changes are both maximally effective and well-integrated into the existing design. At present, the following special studies are being initiated: o Annunciator study o Labels and location alr3 study o Controls study o Displays study o illumination and lighting study o Computer study o SFRCS study o Noise study o Engineering study o Operations study. Table 7-2 provides a list of the HEDs that will be addressed in each special study. The objective of each special study will be as a minimum to review and resolve each 7-1
p 415-1/0 associated HED listed in Table 7-2 while assuring that the resolution does not generate any additional HEDs. Each special study will De conducted In three phases as follows: o Planning Phase - During this phase a clear definition of the study will be provided including the required tasks, the management and staffing of the study, and the final deliverables will be defined. o Review Phase - During this phase, appropriate documents will be reviewed, personnel will be interviewed, and the methodology developed in the planning phase will be implemented. o Recommendation Phase - Based upon the findings of the review ' phase, recommendations including conceptual designs will be pro-vided. Recommendations will be made in an integrated :::shion factoring in the results of all related special studies. As per NRC Letter to Toledo Edison Company dated 6/5/84 re: " Supplement 1 to NUREG-0737: Request for Modification of Commission Order dated 2/21/84," in January ' of 1985 Toledo Edison will provide detailed schedules for the completion of the short term actions and the special studies discussed herein. Scheduling of all DCRDR activities will F w be based on the categorization and prioritization system discussed in Section 6.0 and will 5 ultimately be factored into Toledo Edison's Integrated Living Schedule. F M E Z E F L 5 .. b r F E 7-2 k
415-1/0 l I Report No. 415-1/0 Revision 0 TABLE 7-1 LIST OF HEDs FOR WHICH SHORT TERM CORRECTIVE ACTIONS HAVE BEEN IDENTIFIED I HED NO. TITLE P.1.1 - 3 Work Space - Reference Document Storage P.1.1-5 Work Space - Dedicated Comunication Links P.1.6-6 Noise - Signal discriminability P .1. 7-1 Maintainability - Recorder supplies P.1. 7- 5 Maintainability - Bulb and recorder markings P.1.7-6 Maintainability - Spare parts records P.1.7-7 Maintainability - Paper and ink replenishment P. l . 7-9 Maintainability - Bulb replacement P.1.7-11 Maintainability - Lights shorted out P. 2.1-2 Comunication - Telephone cords P. 3.1 - 29 , Annunciators - Alarm typer P.3.1-35 Annunciators - Coordinate Designators P. 3.1 - 36 ' Annunciators - Annunciator response procedures P.4.1-1 Controls - Critical control guards P. 4.1 - 7 Controls - Interlocks i P.9. 2-7 V&V - Walk-through - AFW Display Accuracy P.9.2-30 - VAV - Walk-through - Display Visibility , P.9. 2-37 V&V - Walk-through . Display Accuracy P.9.2-88 V8V - Walk-through - Timers 7-3
- . . . . l 415-1/0 Report No. 415-1/0 Revision 0 TABLE 7-2 SPECIAL STUDIES VERSUS HUMAN ENGINEERING DISCREPANCY REPORT NUMBERS SPECIAL STUDIES HUMAN ENGINEERING DISCREPANCY LPORT NUMBERS Annunciator Study P.l.6-4, P.l.7-8 P.3.1-11, P.3.1-13, P.3.1-14, P.3.1 -15, P.3.1-17, P. 3.1 -18, P.3.1-20, P.3.1-21, P. 3.1 -23, P.3.1.-24, P.3.1-25, P 3.1-26, p.3.1-27, P.3.1-28, P.3.1 10, P.3.1-32, P. 3-1-33, P.3.1-34, P.3.1 -37, P.,s.1-38, P.3.1 -3h P. 3.1 -40, P. 3.1 -41, P. 5.1 -5 P.9.2-67, P.9.2-72, P.9.2-83, P.9.2-89, P.9.2-91
\ Computer Study P.7.1 -1, P. 7.1-3, P.7.1 -4, P. 7.1-5, P.7.1 -7, P.7.1 -8, P. 7.1 -9, P 7.1 -10, P.7.1 -l l , P.7.1-12, P.7.1 -13, P.7.1-14, P.7.1 -15, P.7.1 -16 Controls Study P.4.1-5 P.4.1-ll , P.4.1-13, P.4.1-14, P.4.1-1$,P.4.1-6P. 4.1 -i6, P.4.1-19, P.4.1-20, P.4.1 -24, P.4.1-25, P.4.1-26, P.4.1-27, P.4.1-28, P 4.1-29, P.4.1-30, P 4.1-31 P.9.2-2, P.9.2-6, P.9.2-15, P.9.2-53, P.9.2-55, P.9.2-97 Displays Study P. I .7-10 P. S.1-1, P.S .1 -2, P. S .1 -4, P.S.1 -6, P.S.1 -7, P. S .1 -9, i P.S.1-10, P.S.1-16, P.S.1-24, P.S.1-25, P.S.1-26, P.S.1 -27, P.S.1 -28, P.S.1 --29, P.5.1 -30, P .5.1 -31, P.S.1-35, P.S.1-36 P 9.2-4, P.9.2-15, P.9.2 16, P 9.2-17, P.9.2-20, P.9.2-24, P.9.2-25, P.9.2-;S, P.9.2-38, P.9.2-40, l P.9.21-65, P.9.2-70,'P.9.2-74, P.9.2-76, P.9.2-79, l P.9.2-80, P.9.2-81, P.9.2-94, P.9.2-86, P.9.2-90, P.9.2-82,P.9.2-10 P.9. 2-84),P.9.2-85, P.9.2-lll l f P.9.8-7, P.9.8-8, P.9.8-11 Engineering Study P.9.2-8, P.9.2-ll , P.9.2-28, P.9.2-31, P.9.2-95 Illumination and P l.5-1, P.1.5-4, P.1.5-5, P.l.5-6, P.1.5-7 Lighting Study l 7-4
415-1/0 Report No. 415-1/0 Revision 0 TABLE 7-2 SPECIAL STUDIES VERSUS HUMAN ENGINEERING DISCREPANCY REPORT NUMBERS (Continued) SPECIAL STUDIES HUMAN ENGINEERING DISCREPANCY REPORT NUMBERS Labels and Location P.4.1-4 Aids Study P.S.1 -21, P.5.1 -22, P.5.1 -23, F .5.1 -37, P.S.1 -38, P.S.1-39, P.5.1-40 P.6.1 -1, P.6.1 -3, P.6.1 -4, P.6.1 -5, P.6.1 -7, P.6.1 -9, P.6.1 -10, P.6.1 -11, P.6.1 -12, P.6.1 -16, P.6.1 -17 , P.6.1-18, P.6.1-19, P.6.1-20, P.6.1-23, P 6.1-24, P.6.1-25, P.6.1-25, P.6.1-27, P.6.1-28, P.6.1-29, P.6.1 -30, P.6.1 -31, P.6.1 -32 P.8.1 -1, P.8.1 -2, P.8.1 -3, P.8.1 -4, P.8.1 -5, P 8.1 -6 P.9. 2-5, P.9.2-9, P.9.2-22, P.9.2-23, P.9.2-33, P.9.2-36, P.9.2-47, P.9.2-49, P.9.2-58, P.9.2-59, P.9.2-61, P.9.2-66 P.9.8-5 Noise Study P.l .6-1, P.1.6-2 P. 3.1 -9, P.3.1 -10 Operations Study P.l.7-7 P.6.1 -2, P.6.1-15 S, team Feedwater line P.9. 2-1, P.9. 2-18, P.9.2-42, P.9. 2-43, P .9.2-54, Rupture Control P.9.&-68,P.9.2-73,P.9.2-75,P.9.2-92,P.9.2-96 System (SFRCS) 7-5
APPENDIX A WRATOR QUESTIONNAIRES I 1
415-1/0 177 TP-1.5 ILLUMINATION 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE 4 BIOGRAPHICAL DATA: Name: Age: i Sex: Height: Weight: Current Position /
Title:
T
- 1. Do you have a current reactor operator's license? YES NO 2.- Amount of licensed experience at this plant:
- 3. Total amount licensed experience:
- 4. Related experience and amount (example: operator-trainee, Hodge NPP Unit 1, 1 yr.}:
- 5. Education:
- a. Highest level attained:
- b. Specialized Schools or courses (list):
1 6.- Military experience: } i A-1
T 415-1/0 177 TP-1.5 ILLUMINATION 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 1. Are there any noticeably great differences in *.he illumination level or a given work area? YES NO
- 2. In remote areas or where fixed illumination may not be adequate, is there sufficient supplemental lighting available to support your required job in that area? YES NO
- 3. Are there areas in the primary operating area where illumination is not sufficient for the task performed? YES NO
- 4. Do shadows ever interfere with reading labels, instructions, and other written information? YES NO
- 5. Does glare ever interfere with the readability of displays, labels, or indicators? YES NO
- 6. Are colors used on panel surfaces, controls, and displays recognizable under both normal and emergency lighting conditions? YES NO I
( i P
, A-2
415-1/0 l l r C C E e-E w l z z t.3 C.D 3 3 z w
=
w C C
=
LJ
=
w E us E w C O w w C C) Z Z W-m m E sAJ w X gg w w a 5 5 2 Q m m E E
>= = =
m o W a W W = = m E o E o t.!3 e e (E ge . . . .
! . . .g .
3 . . . . ;: E Em . , , . . . . . . , , . , : Q$e + i + + + + + + + + + + + 46
"" zn + + + + + + . , + + + + . ;f g gm . . . . . . .t. . . . . . 4; , 5- . . . . . . , , , . . . . . : - 5 - ~ n e e m ~ m a g = g g l 3 SH38WAN 801VH3d0 m
a
.md.
I l 2
.g -
g .h
=ug b$ 1 I
sE O u +I , :n l l A-3
I 415-1/0
-. 177 TP-1.6 APNUNCIATOR SYSTEM 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE BIOGRAPHICAL DATA:
Name: A;,;t
~
- Sex
- Height: Weight:
! Current Position /
Title:
l {
- 1. Do you have a current reactor operator's license? YES NO t
- 2. Amount of licensed experience at this plant:
- 3. Total amount licensed experience:
- 4. Related experience and amount (example: operator-trainee, Hodge NPP Unit 1, 1 yr.):
5 I 5. Education: j a. Highest level attained: i
- b. Specialized Schools or courses (list):
i r
- 6. Military experience:
l l l A-4
415-1/0 177 TP-3.1 Af43UNCIATOR SYSTEM 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 1. Are there any areas of the control room that are so noisy you can't hear or be heard when using normal noise levels? YES NO
- 2. Are there any areas of the control room where you feel that back-ground noise should be lowered more than normally, or that an intercom should be required? YES NO
- 3. Are auditory signals coded in such a way that you can identify them anywhere within your normal work area? YES NO
- 4. Are there any auditory signals that seem to interfere with other signals or voice communciations because they are too loud or distracting? YES NO
- 5. Are there any auditory signals that sound similar to you, yet they have contradictory meanings? -YES NO
- 6. Do auditot; alarm horns which announce a malfunction or a failure sound different to you than routine signals such as bells, buzzers, etc.? YES NO A-5
$?CO E
S I OS R7 E
+ + + - - + + +_. - - - +- e 4 4 NB M 6 + + + - + - + . - - + + -
i,
- +
5 3 U5 + + + - + + + . + + + + + l U TN N 4 - - - - - + + - - - - + + t-4 N O3 I
+ + + + + + +
u + + + + +
+
U IM E TS I 2 + + + + _ + + + . + + - +
- 1 U
E _+_+
+ + _ + s + . + + + + + U BU1Q 1 2 J 4 5 6 7 a g 0 1 2 3 M 1 1 1 1 mCJ2E=>2 uCual l gt zEC$o A .
es e s n noe op ps s e r ReRi u ep r e v v it =- it ngoa n o eN PN Y E
-- A K + - N fm
415-1/0 j i..- 1177 TP-1.7 MANTAINABILITY 1 May 1983 4 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE 4 , f BIOGRAPHICAL DATA: 4 Name: Age: _ Sex: Height: Weight: Current Position /
Title:
- 1. Do you have a current reactor operator's license? YES NO J
- 2. Amount of licensed experience at this plant:
i
- 3. Total amount licensed experience:
i 4. Related experience and amount (example: operator-trainee, Hodge NPP Unit 1,
- 1 yr.)
} }
- 5. Education: ,
4 j a. Highest level attained:
- b. Specialized Schools or courses (list):
r
- 6. Military experience:
i A-7
. . . _ . ._, _ _ . . . _ _ _ . _ , . . _ _ - . . . .~ - , - . . . . .
415-1/0 177 TP-1.7 MAINTAINABILITY 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
-1. Do you have an adequate supply of expendable items such as ink,
. pens, printer paper, etc.? If NO, please list the expendables and the amounts you feel you need. YES NO
- 2. Do you have an adequate supply of spare parts such as fuses, bulbs, etc.? If NO, please list the spare parts and amounts you feel you ' ' " ~
need. - r
- 3. Do you have all nec '
'L o ^ OS # ' #
too ? If O, pleas Ocs % &' Omn skars u .vw ( o/ @uwL' 0'b ~~=a l , , , , en my w tw# ka- War Fe rtns " A _ estet < OzA[gz:s k;w 4* Are the expendables - (rruA . Sr>m, ) accessible?
- 5. Are the spare parts that are stored in the control room easily accessible? YES NO
- 6. Are all necessary or special replacement tools needed to install j expendables and spare parts easily accessible? . YES 'NO l <.
~
f. A-8
e- l 415-1/0 177 TP-1.7 MAINTAINABILITY 1 May 1983 ; APPENOIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 7. Is there ample storage space available in the control room for expendables, spare parts, and tools? YES NO
- 8. When different types, sizes, or styles of expendables are required, are they clearly visible? YES NO
- 9. When different types, sizes, or styles of spare parto are required, are they clearly marked? YES NO
- 10. Do you keep records on the status of expendables and spare parts for inventory? YES NO
- 11. Are recorders designed to permit quick and easy replenishment of paper and ink? YES NO
- 12. Are periodic maintenance tests performed on all communication systems in your control room to ensure that the systems are functioning adequately? YES NO e
A l 415-1/0 177- TP-1.7 MAINTAPIABILITY 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 13. If bulbs are replaced in annunciator panels that require legend tiles to be removed, are the tiles marked to ensure that they will be replaced in the correct position? YES NO J
- 14. Have you (or any one that you know of) ever been shocked while replacing a bulb? YES NO
- 15. Are the legend pushbuttons in your control room provided with either -
dual filaments, dual lamps, or lamp test function? YES NO
- 16. Can you replace bulbs in legend pushbuttons from the front of the panel? YES NO
- 17. Have legend pushbuttons ever shorted out while you were replacing a bulb? YES NO
- 18. Have you ever inadvertently activatM a legend pushbutton while replacing a bulb? ,
, YES NO sh e-d 1
s, e eg o ," d I + g l s A-10 E
415-1/0 177 TP-1.7 MAINTAINABILITY 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 19. Are legend covers keyed or marked in some way to prevent you from interchanging the covers? YES NO 4
- 20. Do all indicator lights have either dual filaments, dual bulbs, or bulb test function? YES NO
- 21. Can you replace indicator light bulbs easily, with the power on, and j without danger to yourself or the equipment? YES NO
- 22. Are indicator light lenses designed in such a way that they cannot be
, interchanged? YES NO i
- 23. Do you have an operational procedure which prevents the interchanging of indicator light lenses? YES NO t
9 A-11
t MAINTAINABILITY QUESTIONNAIRE QUESTION NUMBERS 1 234 56 78 9 10 11121314151617181920212223
. i + + L. + . . + + . - - + - - - + - . - - +- -
2 + + - + + . + . + - . + m'a. - . . . - - . - -
' 0PERATOR SAYS BULBS ARE CHANGED ONE AT A TIME a . + + + . . + + + - Na + -Na + - + - + - - + - -
- l a C REPLACES PENS AND INK & CHANGES BULBS 4 + + + + + + + - - -
n'a+- . - . . + - - + - -
- l & C REPLACES PENS AND IRK 5 - + . - + + - + + - + + - . - . - + - - . - -
us x Es
- m
- - + - + . + + . - m'a. - - - + + + - - - - -
- l a C REPLACES PENS AND INK a
?
w 2 m 7 - . - + . . . + + - . . . . - . - + - - . - - m o
- g. . . . . . . - . . - . . . . - . . . . - . - -
e og . . . . n - + - - + + + - + - + + - . - + + + - - + - - n . + + + + + + + + - ma + - . - + + + - - + - -
- l & C REPLACES PENS AND INK n . + + + + + + + + - - + - + + + - + - - + - -
n - . . + + + + - + - . + - + - . - + - - + - - 1 3 ; 2- u 5 u- .- a- o- I- u- u-
.. a. .. .. a. a. m. .. .. 1. a. .. i. a. 1. a. a.
4 2 M M KEY $
+ - Postne Response ?
- - Negative Response t o NA - Non-applicable
- 415-1/0-1
'177 TP-3.1 APNUNCIATOR SYSTEM 1 May 1983 ADPENDIX B2 OPERATOR IN EERVIEW/ QUESTIONNAIRE BIOGRAPHICAL DATA:
Name: Age: Sex: Height: Weight: Current Position / Title.:
- 1. Do you have a current reactor operator's license? YES NO
- 2. Amount of licensed experience at this plant:
- 3. Total amount licensed experience:
- 4. Related experience and amount (example: operator-trainee, Hodge NPP Unit 1, 1 yr.):
i
- 5. Education:
- a. Highest level attained:
- b. Specialized Schools or courses (list):
- 6. Military experience:
A-13 i
415-1/0 177 TP-3.1 AbNLNCIATOR SYSTEM 1 May 1983 4 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE j
- 1. Do you have a first out annunciator panel where only the tile
. associated with the reactor trip event illuminates and all subsequent alarms on that panel are " locked out"? YES NO
- 2. Do you know of any automatic reactor trip functions that do not have a separate annunciator tile on the first out panel (either missing or shared with other functions)? YES NO
! 3. Are the annunciator panels in the control room identified by a label above each panel? YES NO
- 4. From your primary operating area, can you read all annunciator panel labels with a minimum of effort? YES NO k
- 5. Is the annunciator system priority coded by color, position, shape, or symbolic coding of the tiles? YES NO-
- 6. If color coding is used, are there more than eleven colors used for coding the panels? YES NO 4
d6
- 7. If color coding is used, is the meaning redundant, as an example, if priority coding uses color, does it also use tile position? YES NO
.. A-14 b
415-1/0 177 TP-3.1 i APNUNCIATOR SYSTEM 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPEP,ATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 8. Is there only one meaning attached to each color used for coding the tiles? YES NO
- 9. Are all meanings attached to any color coded tiles standard to those color meanings throughout your control room? YES NO 4
- 10. For color coded tiles is:
- a. red always used for unsafe, danger, immediate operator action required, or as an indication that a critical parameter is out of tolerance? YES NO
- b. green always used for safe, no operator action required, or as an indication that a parameter is within tolerance? YES NO
- c. amber (yellow always used for hazard (potentially unsafe),
caution, attention required, or as an indication that a marginal value or parameter exists? YES NO , 11. Do you know of any unnecssary color coding on the annunciator tiles or panels? YES NO~
- 12. For colors used in tile coding, are any difficult to tell apart? YES NO A-15 L
I 415-1/0 i 177 TP-3.1 1 AbNUNCIATOR SYSTEM 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 13. Are auditory signals priority coded by pulse, frequency change (warbling), intensity, or dif ferent frequencies for dif ferent signals? YES NO
- 14. If you have separate alarm horns, can you easily identify the work station or system where the auditory signal originated? YES NO
- 15. Do you have different alarm horns for work areas not at the main control board? YES NO
- 16. If the auditory alarm signal has only one source,is the sound coded to direct you to different work areas? YES NO
- 17. Do any of the alarm horns startle or irritate you? YES NO
! 18. If you have different alarm horns, do any of them sound too loud or too sof t in comparison to the others at your normal work station? YES NO
- 19. Do you have a silence control with each set of response controls in your primary operating are? YES NO l
l l A-16 L
t 415-1/0 ! 177 TP-3.1 AbNJNCIATOR SYSTEM 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2
- OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
. 20. Is a control provided which terminates a flashing visual tile, but allows a steady illumination until the alarm is cleared? YES NO
{ i
- 21. Can you acknowledge an alarm from more than one response control .
- area? YES NO i'
i
- 22. -If cleared alarms do not reset automatically, do you have a control to reset them yourself? YES NO i
i
- 23. Does the reset control silence the auditory signal as well as
{ extinguish the illumination? YES NO < i a j 24. Does the reset control operate from more than one response control
; area? YES NO l
I
- 25. Can you defeat any of the annunciator controls, such as locking out the audible alarm or locking down the acknowledge control? YES NO l
- 26. Can you test the auditory and flashing tilumination signals of all tiles for each panel? - YES NO f
A-17
, 415-1/0 177 TP-3.1 i AP44UNCIATOR SYSTEM 1 May 1983 l l APPENDIX B2 l OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 27. Is there an administrative procedure that controls the periodic test-ing of all annunciators? YES NO I
- 28. Are all tiles dark on annunciator panels when no alarm is indicated? YES NO
- 29. Can you easily tell if a tile is normally on for an extended duration during normal operating conditions? YES NO
- 30. Are you immediately aware if an annunciator tile is out of service? YES NO 4
- 31. Can you immediately determine when the flasher of an alarm ti!e fails? YES NO
- 32. Do you know of any alarms that occur so frequently that you consider them a nuisance? YES NO I
- 33. Do you know of any alarms that do not give you ample time to respond to a warning condition? YES NO l
i A-18
415-1/0 177 TP-3.1 APNUNCIATOR SYSTEM J May 1933 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 34. When responding to an alarm tile, can you readily locate the controls and displays required for corrective or diagnostic action? YES NO
- 35. Do you have access to annunciator response procedures in the control room? YES NO I
- 36. Do you know of any alarms which require you to obtain additional
, information from a source outside the control room area? YES NO j
- 37. Are there too many alarms which require additional information from panels outside your operating area? YES NO i 38. If alarms are used that require information outside the control room,
, do they allow you ample time to respond? YES NO
- 39. Are alarms provided for shared equipment in all control rooms? YES NO
- 40. Is there a status display or signal provided for shared equipment in all control rooms which indicates that the equipment is currently being operated? YES NO 1
A-19
415-1/0 177- TP-3.1 APNUNCIATOR SYSTEM 1 May 1983 i i APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 41. . Do you have any tiles with dual messages such as HIGH-LOW 7 YES NO
- 42. Does the multi-input alarm have a reflash capability that reflashes the visual tile af ter an auditory alert even if the first alarm has not been cleared? YES NO
- 43. Do multi-input annunciators provide you with an alarm printout? YES NO i
- 44. Does the multi-input alarm typer have sufficient speed to print the alarm data fast enough for your needs? YES NO l
1
- 45. Does the alarm typer ever skip or loose information, or garble (mix up) the printing?
YES NO l 1 L f
-,- A-20
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM QUESTIONAIRE QUESTION NUMBERS 1 234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546 1 . . . .
.i.p.p.pp. - - . - - - . . . . . . . . . . . - - - . . . . .
.i.p- . . . .
2
- . . . ..W.'..W i l i l
. - . .. . . . . ... 1
. . . . . . .'. 1 3 - + - -
+ NANANAMANANANANA -
NA + - - - + + + NANANA + + + + - - - - + - + - + + NA h A + - - + + 1 1 I t i i i 1
. . . . . .ry.ppyp. - - . - -
i I I y3 5 - . + + - WA NA.I NA.INANANA I . . + + - - + . - - . - + . . - . - - - . . . . + ..u. - . . - cc i l I i
$s - + + +
I I
+ NA NA . NA....
I - - . - + + - + - . . - + + + + - - - - + -
. - . . .'. - - +
NANA
- HAS NOT HAD ANY EXPERIENCE n,
No E - . . . ..l..l..l.l.l. 1 i l i I
. - . . . . . . . - . - . . . . . - - - . . . . . . .l. - -
lN THE USE OF THE TYPER 8 - + + + - NANANAMANANANANA - NA + - - + - + - + + - + + + + + - - - + + + + + + NANA - NA + + - Ei 9 - + - + + .I.I.I i i l i i i I NANANANA . i
- - - - - - - + - - - - - . . - . - - - + . . + -
+ NA .
I i O - + + + . .i I i l i NANANANANA ANA 1 i i i
- + - + - + - + - - + - + + + + + - - - - + ++ + + .INA -
i
+ + + -
11 - + + + + NANANANANANANANA - NA + - + + - + - + - - + + + + - - - -
+ + + - + + NA NA - + - + +
i i i i i i i 12 - . . . . .l.I.I.l.I. .i. I i i
- . . - . . . . - . - - . . . . . - - - . . . . . . .l.
i u . . . . . QN$NfN$. - - - - . . . . . . . . . . . . - - .- . . . - - .
,.,N$ -
- g. 3 g . 2-o ..
3 9 8-....,...,-3-. ~8- 6 8- . 3 13 - o -
. . . . . . . . . . . . , . I.
I 8 . . . . . . , . . . . l === ---- ; ; ; ;;; -- ; ;; KEY
+ - Postin Response U
- - Negatin Responsa NA - Non-appheable ko l .
__ __ _ _ _ _ . ~ . . . _ . . _ . , _ . _ . . ._ 415-1/0
. 177 TP-4.1 CONTROLS 1 May 1983 7 i
APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE BIOGRAPHICAL DATA: Name: Age: Sex: Height: Weight: Current Position /
Title:
- 1. Do you have a current reactor operator's license? YES. NO
- 2. Amount of licensed experience at this plants i
- 3. Total amount licensed experience:
- 4. Related experience and amount (examples operator-trainee, Hodge NPP Unit 1, 1 yr.)
I i S. Education: I a. Highest level attained:
- b. Specialized Schools or courses (list):
i , 6. Military experience: d I 4
, A-22
415-1/0 177 TP-4.1 CONTROLS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 1. Do you know of any controls that activate a critical function that do not have a movable cover or guard? YES NO
- 2. When you open a cover or guard, does it get in your way when you activate that control or any adjacent control? YES NO
- 3. Do you know of any areas on the board where toggle, lever, or pushbutton controls should be replaced with rotary controls because of accidental activation? YES NO
- 4. Have you ever accidently activated an adjacent control because it was positioned too close to the one you wanted to manipulate? YES NO
- 5. Have you ever had difficulty activating a control because an adjacent control was in the way? YES NO
- 6. Do you know of any controls that interlock unnecessarily? YES NO
- 7. Are there any controls that you think should require an interlocking device, but don't? YES NO A-23
)
415-1/0
'177 TP-4.1 l CONTROLS 1 May 1983 i APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE i
- 8. When a strict sequential activation is necessary, do you know of any controls which are not provided with some type of interlock? YES NO
- 9. Does each step in a sequentially operated switch require a new l control action (i.e., a release of the knob and then a reactivation)? YES NO
( i j 10. Can you recall any controls that you are never required to use? YES NO !l 4
- 11. Are there any controls that are duplicated unnecessarily? YES NO 1
I i
- 12. Can you recognize a control in terms of its function, such as one type i
handle or a specialized color for all pumps? YES NO
- 13. Are there any controls that you would expect to be of a certain type or size, and they are not? YES NO
- 14. If control color coding is used (in addition to indicator light colors),
are there more than eleven colors (list actual number used)? ~ YES NO _g. c
- A-24
l 415-1/0 177 TP-4.1 CONTROLS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 15. Where control color coding is used, could you identify all you need to know about the controls if the colors were not there? YES NO
- 16. Is there only one meaning attached to each color used for control coding? YES NO
- 17. Are all meanings attached to control color coding, including indicator
- lights and il gs, standard to your control room conventions?
YES NO
- 18. For control indicator lights, flags, and general control coding ist
- a. Red always used for unsafe, danger, immediate operator action required, or as an indication that a critical parameter is out of tolerance? YES NO
- b. Green always used for safe, no operator action required, or as an indication that a parameter is within tolerance? YES NO
- c. Amber (yellow) always used for hazard (potentially unsafe),
caution, attention required, or as an Indication that a marginal value or parameter exists? YES NO I e A-25
415-1/0 177 TP-4.1 i CONTROLS 1 May 1983 ; APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 19. Do you know of any unnecessary control color coding? YES NO
- 20. For the colors that are used in control coding, are any difficult to tell apart such as a yellow-amber and an orange-yellow? YES NO 1
- 21. Do you know of any key-operated switches that are used solely as a i means of shape coding? YES NO
- 22. Do keys with double row teeth fit into locks with either side up or forward? YES NO
- 23. Do you know of any keys that can be removed from locks in positions other than the OFF or SAFE position? YES NO 1
- 24. Can you recall any knobs or handles of control switches that slip or are loose on their shafts? YES NO B
4 0
- A-26
415-1/0 177 TP-4.1 CONTROLS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 25. Are there any contrcle that move so easily that you can't tell when you've activated them? YES NO
- 26. Rotary selector controls should be used when three or more detented positions are required. Do you know of any place where this is not.
true? YES NO 1
- 27. Do you know of any discrete rotary selector switches that do not have detents at each control position? YES NO
- 28. Can you position any selector switches between detented positions? YES NO
- 29. Are knobs on spring-loaded selector switches large enough to be held against the spring torque comfortably and without causing fatigue? YES NO l
- 30. - Do you know of any small J-handles that should be larger because of the torque required to operate them? YES NO I
A-27
~ 415-1/0 177 TP-4.1 CONTROLS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 I OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 31. Do you know of any selector switches that do not have stops which limit the range of control? YES NO
- 32. Are there any controls that allow you a wider range than you need? YES NO
- 33. Do you know of any controls with a greater accuracy than you need? YES NO
- 34. Are there any controls that are difficult to adjust to the precise level you need? YES NO
- 35. Do you get immediate feedback that a pushbutton has been activated? YES NO
- 36. Does the ambient lighting cause any legend pushbuttons to appear off when they are on, or on when they are off? YES NO
- 37. Do all stepped (i.e., with detents) thumbwheels have detents at each position? YES NO
- A w_ .
415-1/0 177 TP-4.1 CONTROLS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE i
- 38. Do any of the stepped thumbwheels slip out of detent positions too ;
easily? YES, NO
- 39. Do you know of any continuous adjustment thumbwheels that do not have a detent in the OFF position? YES NO
- 40. Do all of the toggle switches that you know of snap, rather than slide, 4
into position? YES NO i s
- 41. Do toggle switches provide you with some tmerce nf feartback n,nnn activation? N L's ;a ;
- 42. Do all of the rocker switches that you know of snap, rather than slide, into positon? YES NO
- 43. Do rocker switches provide you with some source of feedback upon activation? YES NO
- 44. Do any of the rocker switches slip out of position too easily? YES NO
~-
9 ( . A-29
415-1/0 u W tE
.5, n.
O b
=
m w a Q
', -t .t-.,.,. E- = -5= 7 x = 5,.
- _= y t,t "= .,_
- u. t_=
- . 1"i =.
= __ tt__a_- _i ,.T . , =. i .=. =.
7_ *f_-
~
- _ . ., . -t = __
=A= =;_=_x
- - , i .i,! . . T.~ g _ =. _ . . . . . . 42-s g - .j.j.j.
, i gi.i,
'= . ,j. .
.!g
. . 44-3 a:
= .
3i.l . . g .l3 .;.j..;j.j.!.j. . l gj . 4 -s i g i . i . ; . i.3 .! e i . i.!.ig;. 42-3 g . .i .i .
!.i. .i.j.i.j.j. . s
= . ; .j ., . , .i. .!.i,! .i .!.!. 2:
x . i
.!.,. . , .3 i . 1 .,.j,j.I.i. -s n .i.i.i. . .t .i.i. .t .i . 24-s W g .
- 1. ! .
i. i.gg .l.;.l. .i .j . c a -: E q s g
.i.i.!
, i .i .
i . j .g r . ; . i . i . j . ;.gj . .i.i. 6 -3 s .: g = . . i . j .g ! . . .;.i,i e !. . 44-3
, i .
3 = .. .i , i . . i.g
- ,l j.j j.! . 24.s g
., .. .; . . ..g..i.,.i.,.,. .
Onn i
- ce
. .i .i .
! . i . i. . i. . i. . : .j .!. . :s p gm .
.! , ! . i . i.g,.i.!.i.i.!.i. 24-g3= D n .l .! +! + i . *~
i* gi*i.
- I eI
W-
.I ei.~ 40-3
_WT4
~
W ZN = _ =T. _ . _ = _i~.TW~L."_L
._=-._= a =1=._ sc *~d]C 1 = _J~=d i~ d_ _
3: 31 2 3 NJ 1- ! : D e-EN . 7 DyN w2
! 7.i 3._= _.J.c_ o.l='_ _2.L.3
. = 1 i 3 !- L = _kL.7=. _=4_=_
= -_
5 ,1 5: Si51Ei _;.=. .;_ . _== a _.i 2
. ., - t -. a j.t.
3 3
!.4_ 33
= _ _==.T ___=.._-
u o, .- ' . _=i _.= =.3 _ = r_._ _
! I I I I I I I
^* =_1-g a _;7,_g.
r. ygag7=7 -t .=
- r E N 3
7 g =...=Ta~f~-- : H 3
- _ = A. -_ = 1 = _ = _ _5 _* = _ =_
= _ g .!_ = . i_3 _1E .i =___
T. 21 = _' =i _. 3_2 , a
* =_ _ 3_ _ =* _ _
E C e =- I I
.t<
I ! = g _g _.7__h . I ' I E g,,3 = = = _2_7._3 ^ *= _ 3- _. t .= T_ = 2_ = T._i a _i_LE_Llii_L._i_3__!_2
.i .! , ! .
. . . . . . LE.4 i_i__
8 a e i i I e j . e l + , e . . , e . 44
- .j . .j . . e . . . . . ., ._
A4 g .j . e i e i . . . . + e . A4
. , , , , , . . . . , , e . 44 s 3.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 m . . . . . . . e . . . . e f
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . s J
,,, .. . . , . g. . . . . . . . 24- _, , i e e + + _-g e . . i e i e 44-3 g.ej n i e i e s e e e a . e e a: 1 n . e . e' . . . e .
. . . . 4&
- i e e . . e . e . l e e i , a;
- N n w m . m . m g a D D SW38WAN WO1VW3d0 i
, A-30
415-1/0 177 TP-5.1 DISPLAYS 1 May 1903 APPENDIX B2 OPER ATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 1. Does the ambient lighting cause any Indicator lights to appear off when they are on, or on when they are of f 7 YES NO
- 2. Is system / equipment status inferred by any indientor light being of f instead of illumin9ted? YES NO
- 3. Are any indicator tights used as alert or alarm signals or as a substitute for an annunciator alarm signal? YES NO
- 4. Are there any Indicator lights in which the colors are nriblguous or faded (i.e., a yellowish white lens or a faded yellow or ornber lens)? YES NO
- 5. If display color coding is used, nre there more than 11 colors? YES NO
\
- 6. Is the meaning applied to the color of a color coded display redundant information; that is can you determino all you need to know without the color? YES NO
- 7. Is there only one meaning attached to each color used for display color coding? YES NO 4
A 31
415-1/0 177 TP.5.1 DISPLAYS 1 May 1983 APPENOlX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 8. Are all meanings attached to any colors used in color coded displays ,
standard to your control room conventiora? YES NO
- 9. For display color codes does l
- a. Red always mean unsafe, danger, or parameter out of '
tolerance? YES NO ;
- b. Green always mean safe or parameter in tolerance? YES NO
- c. Yellow always mean caution, potentially unsafe, or marginal parameter value? YES NO
- 10. Do you know of any unnecessary display color coding? YES NO 1
- 11. Are any display colors used for coding difficult to tell apart? YES NO
- 12. Do operational parameters of displayed values on meter scales span the range that you would expect? YES NO J
A 32 ,
415-1/0 ! 177 TP-5.1 DISPLAYS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 13. Do you know of any scale ranges which are too wide for the maximum displayed values (i.e., meter never indicates over half scale)? YS NO
- 14. , Do you know of any scales where maximum values are too large for the scale (i.e., pointer reaches maximum, then stops) and supporting wide-range instruments are not provided? YES NO i
- 15. Do all meters fail off-scale? ' YES NO
- 16. Do you know of any logarithmic scales that could be linear because of the range you are required to use? YES NO
- 17. Do you know of any multis'cale displays (i.e., single pointer, multiple -
scales) that should be single scale displays? YES NO
- 18. Are any of the multiscale displays confusing to read? YES NO i
il'
- 19. f re any displays difficult to read because of poor contrast between .
. the pointer and the background? YES NO g = m Ng .
N - _
415-1/0 177 TP-5.1 i DISPLAYS 1 May 1983 i APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE I
- 20. Do you know of any displays that would be easier to read if the pointer was larger? YES NO
- 21. Are all recorders that you are required to use located within your primary work ares? YES NO
- 22. Do you know of any recorders that are used for a purpose other than to record trend information and material for later reference? YES NO
- 23. Do you have a fast and a slow paper-speed adjustment on all recorders? YES NO
- 24. Is it easy to make notes on the recording paper (i.e., is there a backing plate and is the paper speed slow enough or can you slow it down)? YES NO
- 25. Can you easily read all the data through the window of the recorder without opening it? - YES NO i
l l
~A-34
l 415-1/0 177 TP-5.1 DISPLAYS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 l OPER ATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 26. Do you know of any graphic recorders in which the ink clogs the pens or smudges the paper? YES NO
- 27. Do all recorders have a takeup spool? YES NO
- 28. Can recorder paper be torn off easily to provide permanent records for storage? YES NO
- 29. Do you know of any strip chart or impact recorders in which the pens or the printing heads are frequently driven to their maximum, then tend to mechanically or electrically hang up? -YES NO
- 30. Where multiple channel inputs are control- or switch-selectable for display on a strip chart recorder, do you know of any case where af ter input selection, there is an appreciable delay before the parameter is actually displayed? YES NO 1
i I
~
- A-35
DISPLAYS QUESTION NUMBERS 1 234 5 6 7 8 9a 9b 9c 1011 1213141516171819 20 2122 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 i +!+ + + + + + +
+ LAlulu'NA'n'u'u'n'NA + . + +
2 . . . . .IpA I
. . . .,u,. . - - - - . . . -
I '
+ +
3 -
+ MMNAUNApAM'MNA + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + - + - +
I " 4 - - - + uMAmuMANA,umNA
- + - - + + + - - + + NA + - + + + + +
- DOES NOT KNOW, I & C MAKES i ALL ADJUSTMENTS
+ NA NA NANANA;NANANANA +
g5 + + - + - + + - - + + + + - + - + + + - + E I l
- s s - - + + NANANANAunuMANA - - + - + + + + + + - - - + + + - + +
3 I i i
- I II p g7 + + + +
NA;NAM,NA NAM,NA M NA
+ + + - + + + + -
+ - + - + + NA - +
- DOES NOT KNOW, HAS NOT TRIED IT
$8 a.
+ + + + m'u A'u'NA.NANANA'NA I
' I i 1 i
+ - + - + . + - - - - . - - -
. . + .
O I l l l 9 - + + + NANANANARA NA NANANA + + + - + - - + + + + - - - + + + - + 1 1 1 10 + + + + - - - - + + + + + + + - + - - + + - + NANANANAlNANANANA 1 l t NA 11 + - + + NANANANANANANANANA + + + - + + + - + + + - + + - + - + + 1 1 I l 12 + - + + NANANANANANA NANANA + + + - + . - - - + + - + + - + - - + 1 n - - - . apApApApApA,ulapn. - - . . . . - . - . . . . . . . . . S- S 4 5 1 3 5 4- W W I s-
- s. s. s. u. s.s.s.t.u.n.m.s.s.n.s.t.a.s.a.u.s.l.a.
mmmmmmmmm i : M m KEY &
+ - Pbsitive Response Y'
- - Negative Response C NA - Non-appicable
- 415-1/0 TP-6,1 177 LABELS AlO LOCATION AIDS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPER ATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE BIOGRAPHICAL DATA:
Name: Age: Sex: Height: Weight: Current Position /
Title:
- 1. Do you have a current reactor operator's license? YES NO
- 2. Amount of licensed experience at this plant:
- 3. Total amount licensed experience:
- 4. Related experience and amount (example: operator-trainee, Hodge NPP Unit 1, 1 yr.):
- 5. Education:
- a. Highest level attained:
- b. Specialized Schools or courses (list):
- 6. Military experience:
A-37 f Tr N- evmT w' e - N
415-1/0 177 TP-6.1 LABELS APO LOCATION AIDS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 1. Are color coded labels and location aids supported by additional cues )
(e.g., shape or functional nomenclature) which designate their ; meaning; that is, can you determine all you need to know without the color? YES NO
- 2. Do you know of any unnecessary label color coding? YES NO
- 3. Is the meaning attached to each color coded label narrowly defined and reserved only for that color? YES NO
- 4. Are all meanings attached to any colors used in color coded labels standard to your control room conventions, with the colors red, green, and amber reserved for the following uses:
- a. Red: unsafe, danger, immediate operator action required, or an indication that a critical parameter is out of tolerance? YES NO
- b. Green: safe, no operator action required, or an indication that a parameter is within tolerance? YES NO
- c. Amber (yellow): hazard (potentially unsafe), caution, attention
- required, or an indication that a marginal value or parameter exists? YES NO l
l A-38
, 415-1/0 177 TP-6.1 LABELS AfO LOCATION AIDS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 5. Are the meanings assigned to particular colors consistent across all applications within the control room, including panel surfaces, signal lights and CRTs? YES NO
- 6. Are any label colors used for coding difficult to tell apart? YES NO 1
- 7. Are controls, displays, and other equipment items appropriately and clearly labeled to enable rapid and accurate location, identification, and manipulation (if applicable)? YES NO
- 8. Are labels pertinent to control actuation visible during actuation? YES NO
- 9. Are labels periodically cleaned as a maintenance procedure? YES NO
- 10. Do labels describe the primary function of equipment items? 'YES NO k
- 11. Do the word $amployed in the label express exactly what action is intended, if *: tion is necessary? YES NO i
{ A-39. t
415-1/0 177 TP-6.1 LABELS APO LOCATION AIDS 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 12. Are instructions on labels clear and direct? YES NO
- 13. Do words have a commonly accepted meaning for all users? YES NO
- 14. Are there any unusual technical terms used in labels? YES NO
- 15. Are there any symbols (e.g., abstract symbols like %) which have uncommon meanings? YES NO
- 16. Are symbols used in a commonly accepted standard configuration? YES NO
- 17. Is the use of temporary labels restricted to only necessary situation (e.g., need to replace a damaged, dropped, or changed label while a permanent one is made)? YES NO i
l
- 18. Does the method used for " tagging-out" a control prevent actuation of the control? YES NO e
-A-40~
415-1/0 177 TP-6.1 LABELS APO LOCATION AIDS I May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 19. Is there any place in the control room where mimic lines are difficult to distinguish quickly due to similarity in color and/or placement in a parallel configuration. YES NO t
4 1 i-I i
' A-41 '
' ,~M - .a .g
,1-LABELS AND LOCATION AIDS QUESTIONNAIRE QUESTION NUMBERS 1 2 3 4a 4h 4c 5 6 7 8 910111213141516171819
, .v.v.p.. I 2 NANANANANANANANA + + - + + + + + + + + - -
.,..l.p.,.. - . - . . . . . . . . . .
.'.p.l.pAl.,.-
4 . - -. . . . . - . . . I I l m5 NANAlNANAlNANANANA + + - + + + + + + + + + + cc l
$6 NANA NA NANANANA NA -
+ - + + + - + + + + + -
r e Iii s cc 7 o NA NA NANA,NA NA NA.NA + l l } l
+ - + + + + + + + + + +
$ D I I cc 8 NANANANANANANANA I I
+ + - + - + + + + + + + -
c5 l l l l 9 NA NANANA NAlNANA + + - NA
+ + + + + + - + - +
I I l 10 NANANANANANANANA + + - - + + + + + + + + + l l I I 11 NANAlNAlNANANANANA + + - + + + + + + + + + - u .'NAlNANANA,NAlNAlNA . . - - . . . . . . . - . I n NApApApA,. ipa, I I. 3- Q 1- 1- 2- 3 ' W. Q. m. U. u. u. Q u. n.13 3 3 j uwwmuuum KEY g
+ - Positive Response y'
- - Negative Response t o
NA - Non-applicable
415-1/0 177 TP-9.8 VERIFICATION OF TASK PERFORMANCE 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR /I & C INTEVIEW/ QUESTIONNAIRE 1 1 BIOGRAPHICAL DATA: Name: Age: 1 Sex: Height: Weight: Current Position /
Title:
- 1. Do you have a current reactor operator's license? YES NO
- 2. Amount of licensed experience at this plant:
- 3. Total amount licensed experience:
- 4. Related experience and amount (example: operator-trainee, Hodge NPP Unit 1, 1 yr.):
- 5. Education:
- a. Highest level attained:
- b. Specialized Schools or courses (list):
- 6. Military experience:
l l A-43
415-1/0 177 TP-9.8 VERF1 CATION OF TASK PERFORMANCE 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR /I & C INTEVIEW/ QUESTIONNAIRE
- 1. Are all the instrumentation and equipment necessary for you to detect abnormal plant conditions present in the control room? YES NO
'I If no, please explain.
- 2. Are all the instrumentation and equipment necessary for you to bring the plant to a safe shutdown condition present in the control room? YES NO If no, please explain.
- 3. Are there any operational sequences in which you are required to leave the primary operating area to attend to instrumentation on back panels when continuous monitoring or control actions may be critical? YES NO If yes, please explain.
- 4. Are you aware of any cases in which control of shared plant equip-ment from the control room will interfere with the operators' ability to control the shared equipment from the other control room? YES NO If yes, please explain.
i
' 5. Is the status of all shared plant equipment, including availability status, displayed in all control rooms? YES NO If no, please explain.
l
.A-44
.l I
415-1/0 177 TP-9.8 VERFICATION OF TASK PERFORMANCE 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR /l & C INTEVIEW/ QUESTIONNAIRE
- 6. Are there administrative procedures available that assign responsi-bility for allocation of use of controls for shared equipment in a single control room? YES NO If yes, what is the procedure name and number?
- 7. (I & C) Were operator tasks analyzed to determine operator infor-mation requirements prior to selection of control room display? YES NO If yes,is a copy of the task analysis available?
L. Do the visual displays in the control room provide all the information that you need to meet task requirements for normal, abnormal, and emergency operations? YES NO If no, please explain.
- 9. Are there any visual displays in the control room that are uncessary or should be replaced by more important displays? YES NO If yes, please explain.
- 10. Are there any redundant displays that are not needed for backup or to avoid excessive operator movement? YES NO If yes, please explain.
- 11. Are all displays that present equipment status clearly labelled to indicate whether the display is of actual or demand etatus? YES NO If no, please explain.
A-45 - 1
415-1/0 177 TP-9.8 VERIFICATION OF TASK PERFORMANCE 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR /I & C INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 12. Are there any displays that indicate demand status for safety-related equipment that you believe should indicate actual status? YES NO If yes, please explain. '
- 13. Is there always a positive indication that an instrument, such as a meter, has failed or become inoperative? YES NO If no, please explain.
- 14. Are there any displays that have scales that do not provide the pre-cision or accuracy you require when using them? YES NO If yes, please explain.
4
- 15. Are there any displays that require you to perform some form of conversion in order for you to effectively use the information (e.g.,
converting percent level to gallons in a storage tank)? YES NO If yes, please explain.
- 16. Are there any d! splays that indicate percentage instead of level or flow as some other value that would be more useful to you? YES NO If yes, please explain.
- 17. Are all display scales adequate in terms of the range they span, or are they at least supported by auxiliary wide-range instruments? YES NO If no, please explain.
A-46 L
415-1/0 177 TP-9.8 VERIFICATION OF TASK PERFORMANCE 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPER ATOR/I & C INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 18. Are there any displays that are difficult to use because they display normal random variations in equipment performance? YES NO If yes, please explain.
- 19. Are there any displays for which information is required to use the display (e.g., multiply display out by 100) but the information is not located on or adjacent to the display? YES NO If yes, please explain.
- 20. When you have to compare two or more displays of the same parameter (e.g., pressure, level) are the scales always compatible in terms of numerical progression and scale design? YES NO If no, please explain.
- 21. Are there any unnecessary logarithmic scales in the control room? YES NO If yes, please explain.
- 22. Are there any unnecessary multiscale indicators (i.e, single pointer, multiple scales) in the control room? YES NO If yes, please explain.
- 23. For selectable displays (e.g., multiple channel displays), nonselected displays read off-scale, not zero. YES NO If no, please explain.
A-47
~
415-1/0
'177 TP-9.8 VERFICATION OF TASK PERFORMANCE 1 May 1983 APPENDIX B2 OPERATOR /l & C INTERVIEW / QUESTIONNAIRE
- 24. Do all controls provide the precision necessary for you to easily and effectively control the affected parameter? YES NO If no, please explain.
- 25. Do displays of controlled parameters allow you to distinguish signifi-cant levels (changes) in the parameter being controlled. YES NO If no, please explain.
- 26. Are there any controls or displays that are either overly precise or not precise enough for the tasks you have to perform?
YES NO If yes, please explain. . 27 Is adequate feedback concerning control movement available through control room displays. YES NO If no, please explain. i 4 l t A _ - . _
VERIFICATION OF TASK PERFORMANCE QUESTIONNAIRE QUESTION NUMBERS 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12131415161718192021222324252627 l I ' I + + + NA{NANA - + + + -
+ - - + + + + + + + + NA - + + +
7 + + - NANANANA + - + - - - - - - + + + + + + NA - + - +
- OPERATOR DOES NOT KNOW l
I 3 + + + NANA:NA - + + + - - - + - - + + + + + + NA + + + + i I 4 + + - NANANA + + + + + + - - - - + + + - + + + + + - + g5 + + - NANANANA - + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + + + +
- OPERATOR DOES NOT KNOW i.u CO 26
=>
+ + + NANANA - + + + - - - + + + - + + + + + - + + + +
ac g7 + + + NANANA - + + + + + - - - + + + + + + + NA - + + + e 4 i 58 o.
+ + + NANANA - - - + - + - - - + + + + + + + + + + + +
o 9 + + - NANANA - + + + - + - - + + + + + - + + NA + + ++ i 10 + + - NANANA + + + + + + - - - - + + + + + - - + + + n + + - NANANANa + + + + + - + - + + + + + + + NA + + + +
- OPERATOR DOES NOT KNOW i
l 12 + + + NA NA NA - + - + + + - - - - + + + + + + - + + - + . u . . - - . . . . . . - . - . . . . . . NA . . - . N$N$NA 7- 8 l- 4 S 12 - W 6 3# l 3- 4-13138 2 12. S 13+ 7. W.1 3 5+ 7 12 13+ 13 11 13,12e 3. W.13 9 13 MM M 3 7 M M KEY ~
+ - Positive Response Y'
- - Negative Responsa C NA - Non-applicable
APPENDIX B CATION AND VAUDATION
SUMMARY
TABLES I l \ l l l l 1 t I 1 l l l
h- -w .__ ., __ . . . . . _ ,
- . - , ~ - -
Q"# , q o Toledo Edison Compargy o APPEIGIX B Report 100. 41 5-1/0 Dests-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 O' VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION Sul04ARY TABLE Page B-1 ') Test Designation: Verf fy Reactor Trip r- TA/3FRT: 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 1.5.1, 2.1.1, 3.1, 3.2, 4.6.1, 4.15(3), 4.15(10), 8.1, 8.1.1, 8.1.2, 8.6, 8.6.1, 8.6.2 O l Range Ave 11 ability Sultab111ty ( l Inferination and Control Regf rements I l Precision Accuracy Tes no Yes so ED llumber Comments ! ') 1o Al? rods insert (rod bottom lights) In - Out X X Except Group 8., (N I l I ED 9.2-25 addresses Ifght dis- ) tinguishability O o Rod position indicatios (all rods l'i) 0 - 1005 l X X i i I I I t) m lo Reactor neutron flux indication 1 0 - 1205 X l l X l I l l i 1 l l ~) l - Sours:e range , 10 106 cps X l X l l ll l 0 - Intermediate range i 10 10-3 amps X X l l l ')
- Power range 0 - 1205 X X Q )
o Startup rate meter .5 - +5 dpa X l L l o Reactor trip breakers status Open/ closed X ED 9.2-106 I I
)
o Annunciator alarus Off/on X X I I )
.I o Manual reactor trip pushbuttons l On/off X X . .
. I o Aeactor trip breakers l Open/ closed I X KD 9.2-108 i I I l
~)
l l o Control rod drive breakers (local) len/ closed X l X l l l l ( o RPX channel trips I l l 1 -) X l X l 1 I p i i l )
, I
- i .
t i 1 ! l I g I I l J 1 I l l i i i j l J l l i i ! I I ; l
- V l l ,
. i i '
i ! u eg
- - - " " ~
_ . . . . . . . . . . _ . - ---w.- l
- Tiledo Edison Compaq APPENDIX B
)
Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-tesse Unit No.1 Revision 0 , VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION Sule4ARY TABLE page B-2 ) T:sk No. 2 . Task Designation: Verify Turbine Trip i TA/5FRT: 2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.5, 3.3, 4.7.1, 8.6. 8.6.1 ' l Range Availability Suitability i Infor ation and Control Reautrements I precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No IED Muuber Cannents ') e Turbine stop valve position indication l Open/ closed X X l l l ) e Turbine governor valve position indicatfor. 1 Open/ closed X X ll l l e Turbine cambined intermediate valve indication ll Cpen/ closed I X X H l I
)
l 1 l e Turbine generator breakers position l Open/ closed X l X l l 1 o Turbine shaft speed i , ll l ) 0 - 2500 rps l X l X i l l e Generator electrical load disply 0 - 1200 au X l X l ) o Generator field cirv:uit breaker position Open/ closed X X i l I I o Turbine bypass valve position. I ) l 0 - 1005 X l l X l NEO g.2-g concerning display I L l i I scaling l l l i i ~
. I e Itain staan presture i 600 - 1200 psig X I l )
X l I l l I o Annunciator alarms l X l X l l ) ! o Ilanual tur6fne trip pushbuttons l , I i 1 I r i On/off X X 1 i i ! J I e Switches to manually open generator breakers l Open/ closed X X l
- l I
I l o Switch to manually open generator field circuit breaker Open/ closed X l X i [. I I t
- .i I l , I ) ,
t l i I L I J 4 I i 1; I I I I I I I I I
' I I I I J i I I I I I i I. l I
l I 1 I I I ) t i J l i l l 1 Y ,
w e' u ..;_ : . _ _ . ._ . _-._. ~_ .--.- - s
)
w Toledo Edison Company
)
APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 - VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 4ARY TABLE Page B-3 ) Task No. 3 Task Designation: Verify SFAS Actuation T TA/SFRT: 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 1.5.2, 2.2.1, 4.9.1, 4.9.2, 4.9.3, 4.9.4, 4.9.5, 4.9.6, 4.15(8), 6.2.8, 8.14.2, 8.18.3, 10.2, 10.7, 11.2, 12.2, 13.2, 13.4 9 l' Range Availability Sul tabi li ty_ l l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No HED Number Comments 1 o Status indication for Safety Features Actuation System . X X HED 9.2-20 addresses SFAS SAM l equi, gent. Ifght arrangement in general l ) l 1
- Valve position i Open/ closed X X HED 9.2-61 addresses demarcation l
1 - Pump operation Running X
)
I X l T SFAS channel status l Activated /off X i X l HED 9.2-26/9.2-27 addresses difficulty in interpreting SAM
,i l' lights )
i l Io Safety injection flow indication B L l l l l l l l l l l
- High pressure injection flow l )
II 0 - 500 gpa X l X l HED 9.2-8 addresses scale ranges
! I
- Low pressure injection flow 0 - 5,000 gpa X l X l HED 9.2-8 addresses scale ranges )
- Containment spray flow 0 - 2,000 gpa X X HER 9.2-8 addresses scale ranges l
o Annunciator alarms X X HED 9.2-91, item 32,' addresses l SFAS anr.unciators l ' lo Pump discharge presure indication X No discharge pressure displays l l 1 for engineered safety features l l l I pumps. HED 9.2-86 'I I ' I i lo Emergency diesel generators running 0 - 1,200 rpe X X l l I ) l l l lo Anneters for HPI, LPI, CS pianps 0 - 150,100, 300 amps X X o SAM lights Activated /off l X X HED 9.2-26/27 o containment emergency coolers and fans on Start / normal /stop X X j lo Manual pushbuttons to activate SFAS channels l Activate /off X X ' l Io Manual controls for Safety Features Activation System '* l X X I equipment , I l
- Pumps '
l ll l l ll l .) Valves . Open/ On/off X X l 1 closed X X 1 - Emergency diesels l l I l I' i l ll l l i l d I i l I ha a I l
~* - -w , _ _ - _ - _ _ .. . -..n 5 .-
)
i ' Tiledo Edison Compasqr APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 T:sk No. 3 (continued) VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SLBMWtf TABLE Page 8-4 ) 6 T:sk Designation: Verify SFAS Actuation TA/SFRT: 1. 2.1. 1. 2. 2, s .b.2, 2.2.1, 4.9.1, 4.9.2, 4.9.3, 4.9.4, 4.9.5, 4.9.6, 4.15(8), 6.2.8, 8.14.2, 8.18.3,10.2,10.7,11.2,12.2,13.2,13.4 ') } 1 Range Aval14b111ty Sultability i Inforimetion and Contml Reef rements Precision Accuracy Yes no Yes no IED Number Comments ) e SFAS bypass pushbuttons X X HED 9.2-14 concerns SFAS blocks I and unassociated equipment ) ~ I I l o SFAS reset pushbuttons X l X HED 9.2-6 concerns contml 1 d l I l type and operator expectancy I l 1 ) I I 5 i , I l i I ! I I I i l I i f I I
)
I I I I ) l . l .
)
i I I I I I i i ' l i I i 1 I I I i 1 I I I I I I i 11 I ) 1
~l i I l 1 I i I
2 l I 1 1 I I l ) 1 I; I I ll l 1 I i ! .I I I ) l l i I I I I I i ; I I I i I i 1 I I i I I I e
- = * ~ ^ & -
T ledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATluN SUMARY TABLE Page B-5 ) , Task Designation: Verify SFRCS Actuation TA/SFRT: 1.3.1, 1.3.2, 2.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.3.3, 4.4.2, 4.7.2, 4.8.1, 4.10.1, 4.10.2, 5.3, 6.5.4, 6.11.1. 7.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.2, 7.13, 7.14, 7.20.1, 7.28, 7.29 7.31.1, 8.14.4, 8.18.5 ') l Range Availability Sultability i l l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments l ) I e Valve position indication for: X X
- Atmospheric vent valves Open/ closed X HED 9.2-1 addresses SFRCS component:
arrangement. In general, arrange-MSIV bypass valve position 0 to 1005 X sent is unsuitable for SFRCS system ) l l ll as a whole. I, 1 - Main steam drain valves i Open/ closed X l HED 9.2-32 concerns possible
! - Startup feedwater control valves Open/ closed X failure to get SFRCS.
- Main steam to AFPT , Open/ closed X l l )
Main steam isolation valves Open/ closed i X i i > l - AFP discharge valves l Open/ closed l X 1
*l l l -
Main feedwater block valves Open/ closed X 1. , I . ( ) I i 11 1; l i - Main feedwater control valves i Open/ closed Xl Il 1 i l i I I I J l - AFW discharge to steam generators Open/ closed X l X HED 9.2-7 addresses accuracy I o Turbine tripped by SFRCS X ' X
)
I l e Steam generator level 0 - 650" X l X HED 9.2-42 4 49 addresses temp. 1 I- compensation ) I o Steam generator pressure .l 0 - 1200 psig X X i l i HED 9.2-18 addresses information 1- l appropriateness l l il l l
)
l o SFRCS trip confirmed status Trip-off X X HED 9.2-18 addresses SFRCS logic, 1 I o Annunciator alarms I l l X X l and annunciators ) l l l I I l e Feedwater to steam pressure AP X ll X l HED 9.2-18 P not available ll .) e Valve switches to operate valves Open/ closed X X HED 9.2-43 addresses control locattons ! e SFRCS Manual initiation switches Trip-of f X X HED 9.2-54 discusses locations / arrangements J e SFRCS block switch Blocked / unblocked X X 1 HED 9.2-43 addresses control l I I locations l l 1 l ' I 1 I 1 l l l ll l se I I I I I I i 1
M~ '- - . - w _ _ _ _. _..... . . . ... .. ...m.- s l
) ,
l 7 , Tiledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 i Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 i VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUtMARY TABLE Page B-6 l T:sk No. 5 ) ' l T;;sk Designation: Verify Rapid Feedwater Reduction (RFR) Control - TA/SFRT: 2.1.4. 4.8.2 1
- I Range Availability Suitability Infonmation and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments )
e Main feedwater pump speed 0 - 8000 RPM X X
)
s Main feedwater control valve position 0 - 100% ! X X l l I I i o Startup feedwater control valve position 1 0 - 1001 1X l X l l )
- l l l l i l
I e Steam generator operate level O - 1001 1 X l X I HED 9.2-49 addresses temp. 1 I l I compensation '
)
ll e Steam generator wide range level 0 - 650" 1. X l 1 ll X ll i HED 9.2-42 addresses display . I o Steam generatoi :,tartup range level 0 - 250" X , X appropriateness ) i I I I e Main feedwater flow 0 - 7000 kpph X l X HED 9.2-28 addresses potential I i for misleading FW flow indication > l I e Main feedwater pianp speed control X X e Main feedwater control valve manual control stations
)
X X l e Startup feedwater control valve manual control stations I X X ; I l 1-1 1 I I ) I
- I I I .
l l . I ) I 1, I I I I I I l I ) 1 - 1 l l 1 I J l l l i , o I I l I I i 1 ll 1 l i ; u I I I I; i ()
a
- - - ~ * ~ -
m+ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ - . _ . .
---.. . - . -- - ~ _ - - . . -
i Tiledo Edison Comparty )' APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION Sul#UWtY TABLE Page 8-7 .) Task No.6 Task Designation: Verify Turbine 8ypass Valve Setpoint Transfer TA/SFRT: 2.1.3 9 i Range Ava11ab111ty suitablit ty B Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes no IED Number Comments 1 e Main steam pressure 600 - 1200 psig X X l l I l o Steam generator pressure ) 0 - 1200 psig X X l e ' Turbine bypass valve position indication 0 - 1005 X XN )
! l l l e RCS pressure I?.V - 2500 psig X X o RCS inlet temperature 520* - 620*F X X .
o RCS outlet temperature 520* - 620*F X X e RCS average temperaturt 520* - 620*F X X e Turbine bypass valve setpoint controller 0 - 1005 X X HED 9.2-9 Addresses unit I conversions
. l l I I I I I I I i I I I i 1 I 1 I l 1
1 I I n I i ; i l 1 1 I I I I I i l i I l l '
- 1. .
l l i l i I I I I I I > 1 . 1 I' I i - i i i *
-~-&- . . - - - _ _ . ., . .~ . . . ~ . . .
5 T:;ledo Edison Comparty APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit no.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 4ARY TABLE Page 8-8 ) T:sk No. 7
- Tist Designation: Verify Fast Dead Bus Transfer i TA/SFRT: 2.1.5, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.9.4, 4.15 (4) )'
l l Range Availability Sul tabih ty l Information and Control Requirements i Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments l ) I e Generator breakers position Open/ closed X X l l 1 l0 Generator field breaker position Open/ closed X l X 1 I l l0 5tartup transfonners breaker status i Open/ closed X X 1
)
I l , I l o Electrical buses voltage indication Various ! X l l X HED 9.2-19 addresses size of ll l l l l l=km ) i I u 1 I l c Electrical Buses Anneters l Various X X 1 I l l 1 l l ) l e Electrical bus feeder breaker positions i Oper./ closed X l l X l I I I I I I l o Reserve source selector switch I X ll X l l ) i 1 1 1 l l e Generator breakers control I X X l l . I I I I I ) I o Generator field breaker control X X l l 1 I i l i i I ) 1 I I I I I I I i 1 ) i I l 1 I I I I . I I I I I I i l . I 1 ) 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I i l I ) 11 1 1 , I ll 1 1 I I I I , I I I I . I I y i I I I I Il l I I I I I . I I i ~ 1 I l i I I ( l i I I I I I I I I I I I I i i I l 1 I I i I ' I 1 a I ; I , I i 1 1 I I i 1 l ll l l l l l l l . I I
__m , _ _ .
.w _ _ _ _ , _ . -_ .. _. _ _ _ _ . - - - - - "
)
Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Devis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION St# MARY TABLE Page B-9 ) Test No. 8 Tast Designation: Isolate Letdown (Return Letdown to Service) $ TA/SFRT: 3.4. 4.9.5(2). 5.5.2. 7.2, 8.20.4, 13.8, 13.10 ) l Range Ava t lebt 11 ty sustabt11ty l Information and Control Requirements l Precision Accuracy Tes l No Yes No ED thaber Comments 1 i l 6 l0 Letdown flow I 0 - 160 gpa X i X l i ED 9.2-35 addresses display scale i I o Letdown temperature I 0 - 200*F l l X l 1 I X l 1 l I ,
')
1 l l 1 I I I l o Letdown pressure 1 0 - 30 psid I X l l X l l 1 1 1 I I I I I I 1 l0 Letdown isolation valve position 1 Open/ closed I X l l l X l ED 9.2-69 addresses in- 1 l l l l l l l dication of these valves ! J l i i 1 l l l0 Letdown radiation indication I l X l l X l l l l l H I ) I 1 o Letdown flow controller position 1 0 - 1001 X l X i l i l i I I l0 Letdoun isolation valve switch ! Open/ closed X l l I l i 1 ) 1 1 1 I I l l0 Letdown flow contmiler 1 0 - 1001 X l i I I I i i I I i , I I J l i i 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I i 1 I I I I I ) i 1 1 1 H I I
! I I I I ,
I i i I I i 1 l l l > 1 1, I I I . I I I I I l l l l 8 I I I I I I I J l i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 I I > I I I i 1 1 1 !I I I I l l I I I I i 1 1 I i 1 i > l I I I I I i 1 1 1 I I I i 1 l 1 1 I I i 1 1 1 -> I I I l l 1 1 I I I I I I I I i *
. I I I I I I J l i I I I l 1 I ll l 1 ,
I > 1 1 l 1 ll 1 I l l l 1 1 I I I I I i l i I i I I I i I 1 I 1 I W 1
- - - - -- C ._ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ ._ .
1
.y Tolede Edf see Compasqr APPEND!I B Report No. 415-1/0 Revis-tesse linit leo.1 Reviston G VERIFICATI001 AIS VALIDATI001 SuletARY TABLE Page B-10 )
Task Ito. 9 . Task Besignetten: Verify Contatament Isolation
- TA/5FRT:
')
I Range IAva11ab111ty 15uttah111ty i I l Information and Control Requirements Prectsion Accuracy I Yes no Yes I no ED llumber Comments I I ) i i i i i l o Automatic f selation logic status l l I 1 I l 1 l l l l l ) l o Valve positten indicatten for all contaf ament 1selation I open/ closed l I I i 1 I I ED 9.2-20, 26 address SAfl i 1 valves .I I I I I ' grouping i i I I I I I l l I ) I I I I I I NED 9.2-27 addresses brightness l ' l l l l l l I discrief nettons l l 1 I i l I i i 'n I o Personnel alrieck closure status l l l 1 l l l Ilo display for af riock i 1 I i 1 I I l NED 9-2-104 I I I I I I i i l I o E,fpment access hatch closure status ) i I l I I I I llo display for egipment access ! I I I I I l l hatch MED 9-2-104 l l0 Air sapply f selation dampers position i Open/ closed l I I I I l l l i i i i i l i I I o Atr exhaust iselation dampers posttfon i Open/ closed 1 I l l I I l I I I I I I I I I ) I o Centainment pressure 1 0 - 60 psia i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I o Centainment temperature 1 0 - 200*F l 1 l l 1 1 I I i 1 1 I I I I I o Centaimment coe11ag and filter units start indication On/off I I I o Valve serttches to close valves i Open/ closed I l I l l l l l l l o Damper serttches to close dampers l l I l l I I I l
)
I I I I I I I l0 Isoletten damper block sarltches ! I I l l I I i i i i i i i i i I j i l i I I I i i l I I I I I I i l i I i i i I ) i I I I I I I l I I I i i I i i i l I i i i l ) i I I I I I I I I I I l 1 I I I I I I I I I I > I I I I I i 1 I l 1 1 I I I I i i l i i l i I ; I ~ I I I I I I I I l I I l l l l I I I I I I I I I I i i l I i I I I I I I I I i w I I I I I I I I
_ . . . . . . ... . _ . ., . , ~ . , . . . . . T11edo Edison Campasy ArPENSTY 8
' )' f Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Oesse Unit No.1 Revision 0 Tr.sk No.10 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUMARY TABLE Page 8-11 )
T:sk Designation: Verify NNI Power AC and DC ' TA/SFRT: 4.3.1, 4.3.2, 4.3.3, 4.15(5), 5.12.1, 5.12.2, 8.8.3 ') l Range lava 11ab115ty sui tablit ty - - I I Infonmation and Control 4eelrements Freef sf on Accuracy Yes No Yes No KD Mumber Comments I ) l s I o NNI AC and DC power source status Or./off X X KD 9.2-34 addresses 1811 logic l l l I ) I o Neter status noters labeled X or Y l X l ! X / -
/ -6 o Annunciators I X I
X HED 9.2-89, addresses luil 1 annunciators
-) ;
7'. I 1 I 1 I I I l , l* I
;)
I I I I
-l 'l i l I H I i I )
l I i l 1 I I I l l
'I I I >
I ll 1 I 1 i I I I I I I I l' I l l ) I I I I I I I I I l i l I ) 1 I l i I
)
I I l I i I I i I I I ) ll 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I . I l I ) 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I J , i I i i I J l l l > i I I l l l 1 I l t l l i J 1 1 I I l l I I I I I I I I l, _> I i l l n 4 n i I 1 I l' I i a
l-
}
T.ledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SlMUUtY TABLE Page B-12 ). T;sk No. 11 i Task Designation: Verif TA/SFRT: 4.4.1. 4.15(6)y ICS AC and 7.20.1 DC Power
. 1.31.1 . 7.31.2 '>
I Range . Availability Sul tabili ty l l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No ED mmber Corments l ') l ie ICS AC and DC power source status On/off X X l -
')
le ICS AC and DC power source failures (annunciators) 1: On/off I X 1 l X HED 9.2-89, addresses ICS l l annunciators I l l '
)
l l l I I I 'I I 1. I l l l 1: I l I l i I I i ') l I I I I
! I )
l l l 1 I I I i i !, l I n I I l i I: 1 I I ' I I l , I I I I 1, I I
- l. ' '
I \ \ l\ l ' 1 , l , I i ) I l l L i i " l l l l l I I I , I l l l l l . l l I I I I I I I l I I I I i L i I I I I J l l 1 1 I I t i I I I ' I l
*l ) ! 1 l ll l
_ _ - ~ . . . . _ _ . .% T11edo Edison Company
')
APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION StN#1ARY TABLE Page B-13 ) Task No.12 .
- Task Designation: Verify AC Energency Buses are Energized L TA/SFRT: 4.1 I i fiange Availability 15uitability l Inforination and Control Requirements l
l Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments l I l e Voltage indication for emergency AC electrical buses i
, 0 - 5.25 kw X X HED 9.219 concerns display i I l readability due to sire, location, l )
scaling i e Breaker position for emergency AC buses Open/ closed X l X
)
l e Aspere indication for emergency AC electrical buses 0 - 1500 asps I X X l l l \ \ 1, I o Switches to operate emergency AC bus breakers Open/ closed I X X ll l 1
)
I : 1 l I I - I
.i :l 1 l 1 >
l I 1, I I I , ,
, 3 1
1 1, I l i I I l l l ) l
)
11 l l' I
)
l y I I J i . I i i ; u , i e I i i U w I 1 l 1 l 1
--- ~ ' ' - ' " _ _ , .
Tiledo Edison Conapany
)
APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0
- VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION StM4ARY TABLE Page B-14 )
T:sk No.13 Task Designation: Verify Auto Start and Loading of Emergency Diesels TA/SFRT: 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.9.4
)
i Range ,Availab111ty Sul tabill ty le*armation and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No ED Number Comments ) e Di'esel generator tachometer 0 - 1200 rps X X -
)
I o Diesel generator voltage 0 - 5.25 kw X X. HED 9.2-57 addresses immediacy of 1, I information availability e Diesel generator frequency I 55 - 65 t.z X . X )
'I \
o 4160 volt emergency bus voltmeters 0 - 5.25 kw X 1 X l l l , I ; I > l e 4160 volt emergency bus anneter 0 - 600 amps X l ' X ll l 1 1 l ; l I l e Diesel generator synchroscope ' Slow-fast I X l X l 1 I l e Diesel generator ammeter 0 - 600 anps X X l l
)
e Fuel oil day tank level X l ED 9.2-107 addresses DG info. I e Control power status I X l KD 9.2-107 addresses DG info. ) l I I o Starting air pressum I X l l HED 9.2-107 acidresses DG info. 1 I ' ll l I o Crankcase pressure l l l X i ll ED 9.2-107 addresses DG info. l l l l o Bearing temperatures I l X ED 9.2-107 addresses DG info. ll l
)
l l l o Jacket water temperature l X ED 9.2-107 addresses DG info. 1 I l 1 1 10 Lube oil pressure I l l X 1 ED 9.2-107 addresses DG info. l - 1 l e Excitation voltage i X KD 9.2-107 addresses DG info. ) e CCW pump running indication 0 - 100 amps X X ED 9.2-31 addresses CCW logic l o MU pump evnning indication 1 0-100 amps 1 X , X l l l e Annunciator alarms l I X I ! X 1 , j i o Service water pump running indication 0 - 150 amps X X ED 9.2-314.ddresses SW logic
)
e Diesel generator incoming voltage 1 0 - 5.25 kv l X l I l X l ED 9.2-107 addresses DG info. I I I I I l
,o Instrument air compressor running indication l I X l ED 9.2105 addresses IA info. l .;
I I I I l e Diesel generator running voltage 0 - 5.25 kw X X l e Diesel generator manual start Start i X l X , i l 1o Diesel generator manual stop Stop X X gg, i I I
----+- e _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . . .. ___, - . ._ _
f_._.. . . . . . . _ . . . . . _ _ _ . -
. ')
Toledo Edison Compaq 7 APPENDIX 8 Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-8 esse Unit No.1 Revision 0 Task No.13 (Continued) VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUIMARY TABLE Page 8-15 ') '
- Test Designation: Verify Auto Start and Loading of Emergency Diesels TA/SFRT: 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.9.4 7
i Range ; Ava11ab111ty i5uitab111ty l l Infomaticr. and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No ED Number Comments 1 -) l o . Diesel generator governor control Lower / raise X X
- I
)
'i
-lo Diesel generator exciter auto / manual switch Auto / manual l l X l HED 9.2-107 addresses DG info. l 1
l Io Diesel generator manual boltage control I X ' X ) i I Io Diesel generator output breaker control Open/ closed X X l 1 1 I ) o Diesel generator droop switch ll' X X lo Diesel generator unit / parallel switch Unit / parallel (local) X X ) I , lo CCW pump switch On/off X X HED 9.2-31 addresses CCW logic 1 1 I ) Io MU pump switch On/off X X l l lo Service water pump switch l On/off X X l HED 9,2-31 addresses SW logic ) l l l I L l ' Io Instrument air compressor switch ! X i l ED 9.2 '305 addresses IA info. I I I I ) i l .l 1 i I i I
) ,
I )
- l. l 1 I I
)
l I I I I I I I I i 1 I I I I i . I I I l l I I l- 1 I I ) .- i I
.)
l . I I I i
' I J l
I r i i i l l ll u I I I l
*l
~-
.nc - . . . . . . - . - .-..- -
~ ~ ~ -
Isledo Edison Company ) APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Da.is-8 esse L'ait No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATI0h AND VALIDATION Supt 4ARY TABLE Page B-16 ); T:sk Designation: h keup System Operation TA/SFRT: 4.5.1, 4.5.2, 4.5.3, 4.5.4, 4.9.5(2), 7.1, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 8.13.4, 8.17.3, 8.20.2, 8.20.3, 8.20.4, 8.20.6, 8.20.8, 9.1, 10.8, 11.3, 12,10, 12.12, ~ 13.8 >) Range Avaliab111ty Sultability , I Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No HED planber Comments ( ) e Makeup header pressurt I 0 - 3000 psig X X f 1 i l e Letdown flow 0 - 160 gpa X X HED 9.2-35 addresses display scaling I e Letdown temperature ) 0 - 200*C I X l X l I l l l o Letdown pressure l l X I X I )
.I ,
l l l l e Makeup tant le.el I O - 100" X l X l t l e Makeup tank pressure 1 0 - 100 psig
)
l l I X X ll ll l l l e Makeup filter D/P 0 - 30 pst I X . X l i
)
I l 1 e Letdown filter D/P l 0 - 30 pst X X l 1 1 I ) l e Makeup pump discharge pressure 0 - 3000 psig X X l l l l e Makeup flow indication 1 0 - 160 gpm X X HED 9.2-11 addresses display l ' ) l range i I , I o Seal injection flow I O - 80 gpa , X X l 1
)
l e Seal injection filter D/P I 0 - 30 psi X X l ' l e Deelneralizer diff. pressure indicator I ) X HED 9.2-10g addresses desin. e Letdown radiation indication I X X
)
e Makeup pump amp indication 0 - 100 amps X X o Makeup pump controls Off/ auto /on X
)
l X l e AC lube oil piamp controls l Off/ auto /on X X HED 9.2-16 concerns MU pump logic j 1 for lube system - e DC lube oil p u controls , Off/ auto /on , X X i ll \ \ l e Letdown flow controller 1 0 - 1001 X X l l loMakeupflowcontroller l
. 0 - 1001 X X l I
J l 1, li l ll o AC gear oil pisap controls Off/ auto /on X l X HED 9.2-16 lube oil logic o Seal injection flow controller 1 0 - 100s- X X Ciosed/o,en x HEo 9.8-3 add, esses iocai cont,ois
;evai.e,witestoo,e,ateessentiai.ai.es x og
--A.--.w ___ _, _ _ , , , . _ _ _ ,
t Toledo Edison Company ) APPENDIX 8 Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 N VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SupmARY TABLE Task No.15 Page 8-17 O Tast Designation: Verify Main Feedwater Operation
. TA/SFRT: 4.8.2, 4.8.3, 6.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.5.1, 6.6.1, 7.5.1, 7.6.1, 7.6.2, 7.6.3, 7.9, 8.3.5, 12.10 O l Range Ava11 sb111 ty suitablisty i I l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy V Mo Yes No l ED Number Comments I l e
o H pump speed indication 1 0 - 8000 rpm X X l ) o H pump discharge pressure indication 10 - 1500 psig l X l X o H flow indication 0 - 8 all-lbs/hr X X HED 9.2-28 addresses meter rendout ) l l 1 l o SG 1evel indication 1 0 - 650" X l X HED 9.2-42 and 49 addresses temp. I I ,
.I compensation I )
I I o DEAR storage tank pressure 0 - 80 psig X X
)
o ' SG pressure indication 10 - 1200 psig X X l Io Feedwater flow control valve indication 1 0 - 1005 X X l ) i I i lo DEAR storage tank level 1 0 - 16' l X X l l I ) o Feedwater isolation valves indication Open/ closed X X l o FPT vibration X X ) I I Feedwater heaters valve indication h I X , U l l Open/ closed I X Io 1 1 I I l I ) o FPT condenser vacuum I I X ' X lo Feedwater temperature 0 - 600*F X X i ) Io Vacuum trip reset Normal /close X X l ) Io Main FW valve pressure differehtf al 0 - 100 psig ' X X l l lo Turbine turning gear status Engaged / disengaged . X l X l ) i I l , l 1o Bearing oil pump controls l Start /stop/ auto I X X l I o Emergency bearing oil pump controls 1 Start /stop/ auto I X 1 1 X I
)
l 1o Turning gear motor controls Start /stop/ auto I X X l _) I l Controllers for FW control valves l Open/ closed X i X ,, lo I I l J o H pump tu4fne reset pushbuttons l Monnal/ reset X X i o Manual controllers for main feedwater pump turbines Ratse/ lower X X l i lo Valve switches to manually operate the valves Open/ closed X X l
. ~ :- ~ .u - __
.)
)
T.ledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 4ARY TABLE Page B-18 ) T sk No.15 (Continued)
- T;st Designation: Verify Main Feedwater Operation TA/5FRT: 4.8.2, 4.8.3, 6.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.5.1, 6.6.1, 7.5.1, 7.6.1, 7.6.2, 7.6.3, 7.9, 8.3.5, 12.10 )
l Range I Availability Sultabillty l l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No IED Number Consents I ) iO ffld pump manual trip pushbuttons X X l I 1. 1 I ) i i 11 l 1 I I I 1
)
I I l I I I ')
- I I
I 1 I I l I .
)
l I I I 11 1 ~ : I I I l 1 1 I I i l 1 1 I I l i I I I I I 1 I ) I I l l , 1 .l l 1 1 I I i i ! I I I I I I I I I I I ) l- I , I I I I I I I I n I I I I . I I I ) i I I I I I I I I I I I I ) i 1: ll :I I I ) I ! I I ) i I H I I ) i I I I l I I I l l I l l 1 . .) I . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I 1 I 1 I I w I l
-----~.w
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ , . _ , _ . ._. . . ..~ 1
)
T;1edo Edison Company APPENDIX B Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Report Nc. 415-1/0 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 4ARY TABLE Pasa B-19 ) T sk Designation.: Instrument Air Systee Operation TA/SFRT: 4.2.1, 4.15.7, 7.31.2 i
~)
I Range aMs ty l sultabili ty l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No ICD lhamber Comments 1 I . O Instrument air compressor status Dn/off . X HED 9.2-105 addresses I A info. I , I o Instrument air pressum ) 0 - 150 psi 3 X X l Io Instrument air temperature ! X HED 9.2-105 addresses IA info. j i ll , l l l 1 o Instrument air compressor controis ' Start /stop I X 1 l 11 HED 9.2-105 addresses IA info. I I ! I I , I o Emergency instrument air compressor controls J Auto / start /stop/ lockout I X l l l l l 1 I I I i l ,
)
I > l l i I I > I l i I I I i ! l 1 I I I I I I i l i l Il i I I I I I I I i I ) I I I I I I l i I I i I ) I H I I - 1 I ' I I I I I I I
)
1 1 1 I ll l l l l I I i !
- 1. ,
i' ', I I I I l I I g i
! i l
l 1 l J i L
- i 1 L
-a w -.. _ -_ . . . - . . . . . . . .. - - - - - . . -
)
- T
)
Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Desis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 p VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUN 4ARY TABLE Page B-20 ) Task Designation: Verify Auxiliary Feedwater Operation e, TA/SFRT: 4.10.2(3), 5.3, 6.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 7.5.2, 7.7, 7.7.1, 7.7.2, 7.16, 7.16.1, 7.16.2, 7.17, 7.17.1, 7.17.2, 7.17.3, 7.19, 7.25, 7.27, 7.29, 7.30 9.9. 10.13, 12,10 ') 1 I Range l Availability Sultability i l l Information and Contml Requirements i Precision Accuracy I Yes No Yes No IED Number Comments ! ) i I o 'AFW pesap status i On/off I X X l i I I > lo AFW flow I O - 1000 gpa X l l X HED 9.2-7 addresses AFW meter l 1 l . accuracy I i , I i 1 ) Io AFW pump discharge pressure 0 - 1500 psig X ll X l l lo AFPT speed indication 0 - 5000 rps I l X X ) 1o AFPT governor valve position i Open/ closed X X l .1 l
^
lo CoMensate tank level I; C - 50' I X l X ll t i I I lo Condenser hotwell level 0 - 7' l l l X 1 ll l X l l l
)
Io AFW suction valve position 1 Open/ closed I X l X l i I o Steam generator levels l l 0 - 650" I l X l I i , I )
. l X ED 9.2-42 and 49 addresses l l 1 l l dispiay appropriateness l l Io RCS Cooldown rate 520* - 620*
1 1 I ) X i X o AFW Pump discharge valve position Open/ closed X X
)
.o AFP emergency suction switch position Open/ closed X X HED 9.2-33 addresses overall AFW l instrumentation and controls l ~)
I i l Io AFW pump switches ' Off/ auto /on X l X ED 9.2-20 concerns AFW controls i 1 l 'l located in level 4 SFAS SAM l l l light group i i lo AFW valve flow controller 1 0 - 1005 ll X X l l l 1o AFPT governor speed control Raise / lower I X X l ; AFW Valve switches ! Open/ closed X lo I X l ll l ll l ' 1 I I I l ll 1 l l
---c ~ ~ ~ ~ u _ _ . . _ . . . -_ .. .
)
Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 41'i-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION St#94ARY TABLE Page B-21 ) T.:sk Designation: RCS to Secondary Integrity / Verify Steam Generator Tube Rupture TA/SFRT: f 1.4.1, 1.4.2, 3.1, 4.14.1, 4.14.2, 4.15(9), 5.15.1, 5.15.2, 6.22, 6.22.1, 6.22.2, 6.22.3, 7.12, 7.12.1, 7.12.2, 7.22, 7.22.1, 7.22.2, 7.22.3 1 7.33, 7.33.1, 7.33.2. 8.0, 8.3, 8.3.1 I Range Availabili ty l5uitability l Infonmation and Control Requirements l Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED lhamber Comments l ' I I o Condenser off-gas radiation indication X X l o Main steam lines radiation monitors I X l X ED 9.2.10 concerning cycle time i trending, sensitivity I l )
'l l l , ED 9.2-12 addresses possible l l l l l radiation detection errors !
I i ll 1 - ll l l ;I ED 9.2-17 addresses scaling 1 I . I' I o Secondary sample analysis l l X l X l ) l I I l l L I o Reactor coolant system pressure indication 1 0 - 2500 psig X X l 1 I I o Pressurizer level indication 1 0 - 320" X X l o Makeup tank level indication 0 - 100" X X ~) i I l o RCS makeup flow indication 0 - 160 gpa i X i X HED 9.2-11 addresses scale range l l i l L 1 ) l o Steam generator level 1 0 - 650' ' X l l X li HED 9.2-42 and 49 addresses ! l l l display appropriateness 'l l l l l ) I o Position or flow indication for main steam line safety l l l X l HED 9.2-110 addresses MS safety l valves l 1 l l valves i l l I I 10 Failed fuel detector ) l l X l I X l l t i I I I o Steam generator pressure 10 - 1200 psig l X l X HED 9.2-37 concerns display
)
l I preefston 1 I I I I I-I
.)
l I I I . I I I ! I I ! 4 l. 1 I I I i 1 1 I .) i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l 1 1 1 1' W I
---- w . _ . , . __ . - . -, . - - - . . ---- -- -- -
T;1edo Edison Company ') APPENDIX B Aeport No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 Task No.19 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION Sl#94ARY TABLE Page B-22 ) :' T sk Designation: Check if RCS Depressurization can be Stopped TA/SFRT: 5.5.1, 5.5.3, 5.5.4 6 7! I i Range lAvaliab111ty suitability l Infonnation and Contn1 Requirements Precision Accuracy Yet No Yes l No I
~
KD thauber Comments ) l I o Pressurizer spray valves position Closed /open X X l l ) I o Pressurizer block valves position Closed /open X X l i I l0 Pressurizer PORY position l Closed /open X X1 l I ,I l i I
)
l o Pressurizer code relief valve position ' Closed /open X l X1 1 I I I I I I o Relief valve discharge line temperature l X l l HED 9.2-101 addresses RCS
*l I
l l depressurization l i I ) I o Acoustic monitor on PORY discharge l X HED C.2-101 addresses RCS I 1 depressurization i 1 o Differential pressure indicator on discharge Ifnes l l l X l HED 9.2-101 addresses RCS l ll l l I depressurization I o Pressurizer sample isolation valves pcsition l 1 l ) l Closed /open X l X l l I I I I l o Pressurizer level l 0 - 320" X l l X l ED 9.2-49 addresses temperature l l ) l l l l compensation I l l 1 o Pressurizer vent valve position I l l Closed /open l X l X l 1 ) I I I l0 Pressurizer spray isolation valve position l Closed /open lX Xl 1 I I I l o Reactor coolant system pressure 1 0 - 2,500 psig ) l X l X 1. ED 9.2.37 addresses meter i l l I l precision i I I Il I o Switches to manually operated valves l Closed /open ) t i X X ll i I I l 1 Il i 11
)
i I i I I I I I I I ) I I I I i ' I I I I l- ) i I I I I I I I I I ~y I I I I i 1. l i I I I ' I I I I I I I i I h l I l e
~
m m- _- w .. _ . _ _ _ . _ _ . _ _ _ . . I Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SINMARY TABLE Page B-23 ) Task No. 20 Tast Designation: Verify Adewate Subcooling hargin I TA/5 FAT: 4.9.3(4), 4.11.1, 4.11.2, 5.6.1, 5.6.2, 6.2.7. 6.21, 6.21.1, 6.21.2, 7.11, 7.11.1, 7.11.2, 7.21, 7.21.1, 7.21.2, 7.32, 7.32.1, 7.32.2, 9.1, 11.11 -) i Range I Availability Sultability I. l l Information ar:d Centrol Reef rements Precision Accuracy 1 Yes l No Yes No ED Number Ceaunents ) l i Digital I i X X i X _li l o Saturation meter ; l I o RCS outlet temperature (T hot) 1 I l ") 1 520 - 620*F X l l X l HED 9.2-4 addresses channel
! .I l selection.
I l I i l i o RCS f alet temperature (T cold) 1 50 - 650*F i
)
1 X l l l X li HED 9.2-4 addresses channel l l l l selection. I i 1 I I o RCS differential temperature l ) 1 0 - 70*F I I l l X o RCS pressure 0 - 2,500 psig X X HED 9.2-37 addresses display l l
)
l l l l 1 reading and precision. I l l ! l l l i o Incore thermocouple temperatures 1 0 - 2,300*F i X 1 ll X l l l ) l e Pressurizer pressure I l I l l 1 - l l l X l l ED 9.2-112 addresses PIR l l l l l 1 pressure l ll i J i I l i I l c Pressurizer temperature 1 0 - 700*F 1 X l l X l l 1 I I I I I I u ) I o Steam tables - 1 I X i i X i i i i i l I l 1 I o Pressure / temperature display i I X l I X l i i ) I I I I I I I I I I I I i l l I I I I I i I
)
I I I I I i i 1 l i I I I I l i 1 1 I i 1 I 1 > I 11 1 I I I I i l I I I I I I I I I I I I ) 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 I > I i l 1 1 I I I I I I I I I ; I I I I I I I I I I I i l I i l i l i I l 1 1: J l I i l i i i I I I I I I I I I i 1 1 1 _, I I I I i 1 1 I I I I I I I I i he
~~* ___ .- -.
)l 1
Toledo Edison Compasy APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-8 esse thit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUN 4ARY TABLE Page B-24 ) Task No. 21 ' Tast Designation: Verify Primary to Secondary Heat Transfer . TA/5FRT: 4.12.1. 4.12.2, 5.8.1, 5.8.2, 5.9.1, 5.9.2, 5.13.1, 5.13.2, 6.0, 6.12.1, 6.12.2, 6.14.2, 6.14.3, 6.14.4, 6.16, 6.16.1, 6.16.2, 6.18.1, 6.18.2, ) 6.19, 9.11, 9.11.2, 9.16, 9.16.1, 9.16.2,10.3,11.6,12.1D I I Range IAvailability i5ultability I l l I Information and Control Reestrements l Precision Accuracy l Yes I no Yes no ED Number Comments l 1 I I I I lo RCS inlet temperature (T cold) 1 50 - 650*F 1 I I I ED 9.2-30 covers disolay arrange- I l I l I ment and locatton. l l ) I I l l I l l Io RCS outlet temperature (T hot) 1 520 - 620*F l I l l l I I ED 9.2-30 covers display are nge- 1 I I I I I I I ment and location. I ) 1 I I I I I I I Io Saturetton meter i Digital l I I I I I I I I i 1 1 1 I I I ) io RCS differeettal temperature 1 0 - 70*F l I I I I l l l 1 I I I I I I I Io RCS pressure 1 0 - 2,500 psig i I l l l I I HED 9.2-37 addresses display l ) l I I I I I I precision. I I I I I i 1 l 1o Incore thennocouple temperatures 1 0 - 2,300*F i I I I I I I ) 1 I I i 1 I io Steam generator press 4sre 1 0 - 1,200 psig i I i l i I ED 9.2-37 addresses display i I I I I I I precision. i ) I I I I I I I Io Steas 9enerator temperature 1 0 - 700*F l I I I I I l l t 1 1 I I I I I J lo Pressere/ temperature display i I I I I I i l I l i i i I I i 1 1 I I I I l i I ) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l I i ) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I i l i i l 1
- 1 )
1 I I I I I I I i 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I i I i > I I I I I I I I I I I I i l I I 1 i I I i i i 1 ) i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i ) i i 1 1 I I I I I i 1 1 I I I I I i i l i i i l I 1 J I I I I I I i ! I I I I I I > I I I I I l l 1 1 I i I I I I I i y I I I I I I I I I I I I i I 1 w'
uw __
)
Toledo Edfson Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Lavis-Besse Unit'No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SG MARY TABLE Page B-25 ).' Test No. 22 Task Designation: Check for Secondary Integrity (Steam Rupture) TA/5FRT: 7.23, 7.23.1, 7.26
)
I l Range IAvailability Sultability i l l Information and Control Requirements Prectsfon Accuracy I l Yes No Yes l No ED haaber Comments I ) I I lo Steam pressure 10 - 1,200 psig l X l X ED 9.2-37 addresses precision
! l l -I required. )
i I I I I I I I I o Steam generator level l 0 - 650* X l l 1X HED 9.2-49 and 42 address display I i l i l l appropriateness. l ) I l l l l l l l lo Pressurizer level 1 0 - 320" l X i i i X l ED 9.2-49 addresses temperature i i i l l l l l compensation. ! ') i I 1 1 1 I l o RC pressure 1 0 - 2,500 psf 3 l X l l X l HED 9.2-37 addresses precision 1 i l i i l required. ) i I I I I I I o Contalanent Building pressure 1 0 - 60 psia l X l l X l i I i l I ) I o Contalament Building temperature l l l X l 1 i No indication of contairement i l I l l l l l temperature. HED 9.2-103 I I I I I I I I I o Condenser hotwell level 10-7' I ) I X l l X l l l t i I I I i 1 1 I o Condensate storage tant 1 0 - 50' l X l 1 X l 1 I J l i I I I I I l l c SFRCS status display l On/off I X X l l I I I I I o RCS temperature 1 50 - 650*F I I I ) l X l X l l l 1 1 I I I I I I o RCS pressure / temperature display I l X l 1 I l X l l 1 ) I I I I I I o Manual actuation for SFRCS l On/off I X l l X 1 HED 9.2-1 addresses control /displayl l l l l l l locations. i I ) I I I I I I I l0 Suitches for SFRCS valves i On/off I X l i I X l ED 9.2.43 and 54 ad(russ control I i l l l l l l locations / arrangements. I J l i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I ) I i i I I I I I I I i 1 1 I I ) l I I I I I I i i I i 1 _) I l I I I I I I I I I I I I i 1 1 I 1 l :l l .I I I I i 1 > l l I I I - w I I i l l I 1 1
o
~
~'"'# __ -. .. .. .. . . . - - . - - . . - . ., :~-~-
Toledo Edison Company ) APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-8 esse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 4ARY TABLE Page 8-26 ) Tast No. 23 Task Designation: Verify Steam Generator Level Control by AFW TA/5FRT:
)
l l Range i Availability Sultability L l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments l ) lo Steam generator level 0 - 650* X X HED 9.2-42 and 49 concern tempera-I. i ture compensation. ) I lo AFW flow 0 - 1.000 gpa X l X HED 9.2-7 addresses display i I accuracy. l ) I I I 1 i io AFW pump status i Off/on I X 1 X l , I I l ll l I I
. .I I )
Io AFV pump speed 1 0 - 5.000 spa X i , .: 1 I I ' I I I l I i i io AFW pump speed controller 1 0 - 1001 1 X l X 1 l l l ) I I 11 1 I I I I I I I ) i I I I I I I )
! I I i l i >
i I I I I I I 1 I I i i
)
l I i i 1 I I I i l i I i l I i i l ' .) I I I I I I I I I I I I ) l I I I i ) l a < l i I I I I I )
'l l
I I l i l I l l l ll l 1 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I l l l l 1 1 1 I I I I I i l 1 I l 'I l
--= _ . - - ._. _ . _ _ _ . - . _ . - - ..-. __- . - -
.- )
Toledo Edf son Campasqy APPENDIX B Davis-tesse Unit No.1 Report llo. 415-1/0 ,
^
Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION Sul0lARY TABLE Page B-27 ')* Test alo. 24 ' Task Designation: Trip Reactor Coolant Pumps TA/SFRT: 5.1, 6.2.7 }
')
l i nange Avat Iantit ty ,suttablitty l Information and Control Requirements l l Precision Accuracy Yes no Yes no IED Ilumber Ccaments l ~) l l o Reactor coolant pop status Off/on i X l. X 1 l l l i I I l l i
)
i o teactor coolant pump amp meters 1 0 - 600 amps I X l X l l l l l l 1 1 I I o Reactor coolant flow i O - 90 mil-1bs l X l X l l l ) I hr l 1 l l 1 1 l0 Reactor coolant pep annunciators I i I I X l ) i i 1 X ,1 1 I o Aeactor coolant pep vibration l 1 X l X l HED 9.2-50 addresses location, I l l l range, and annunciators. ) I I I l l o Aeactor coolant pump eccentrictty l l X l X l l l 1 l I l o neactor coolant pop swttches i l Ca/off I X 1 X l i I l l I I I I I o RCP AC oli lift pop switches l On/off I X l X l l i ) I I I I l l o RCP DC oli 11ft pop sultches l On/off I X l X l l 1 I 1 I I I i > I o RCP backstop oli pump switches l On/off l X l l X l l I I I I I I I I I I I I i i I I 1; I I ) I I I I I I I I I I I I I ) i I I 4 I I I I I I I I I I ) I I I i 1 l 1 1 I I i l i i > l l I h I i l 1 I .) i I I I I I I ll 1 I I I I 1 I ; I I I J l I I I I I I I' I I i i l i I J I i i i i I i I I I I I I I I I I I I l I I ll I l 1 1 l w I
- - ~ ~ ' ' ' "
- _ . . . .
~
- 3
.)
s e-) !' Toledo Edison Comparty APPENDIX 8 Report No. 415-1/0 Revis-Resse Unit no. 1 . Revision 0 's VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SupOUPY TABLE Page 8-28 Task No. 25 7
- Task Designation: Start Reactor Coolant Peps (8mp Pumps) m TA/5FRT: 5.i2, 5.12.1, 5.13.1, 6.13.2, 6.14.1, 6.14.4, 6.17, 6.17.1, 6.17.2, 8.9, 8.9.1, 8.9.2, 8.9.3, 8.18.1, 9.6, 9.12, 9.12.1, 11.6, 11.12, 12.10, 13.7 i i Range i Availability Sultabillty l Information and Control Reefrements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes i No ED Number Conments l 1 o ~ Reactor coolant pump breaker status Open/ closed X X
! I )
Io Reactor coolant pep amp meters 0 - 600 anps I X l X e Reactor coolant pump flow 0 - 90 mil-lbs X X ) l I hr , I I I I I I I I lo Reector coolant pump vibration i i X l l X l ED 9.2-50 discusses location, I ) l l l 1 ,. I alarms, and range. I I I I l ll l 1 lo Reactor coolant pep annunctators l ! X l l X l l l ) i I I I I - 1o RCP seal injection flow I O - 15 sys X i X l l 1 1 I I l ) Io Reactor coolant pop eccentricity I l X Xl l l l 1 I i l i i io CCW flow l 1 1X l X l HED 9.2-31 addresses CCW logic. ( ) I . l I i
- 1. o Reactor coolant pump switches On/off I X X l I )
Io RCP AC oli 11ft pep switches i On/off X X l o RCP DC oil lift pop switches l On/off . X l X ) i I I I I I I o RCP back stop oli pep switches l On/ oft I X l I X l l I I I I I I i 1 ) I o CCW pop switch l On/off I X l l X l l I I I I I I I ! I i I I I I I I I ) 1 1 I l 1 I a l i I I I I l l l ) i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ) I I I I I I I 1 . I I I I I I I I I ) i I I h H I i i l I I I I I I I I I I I I I i l J I I I I I I I I I l h l l I I I i Q* t I i i i i I ( l i I I 3 -. 1 1 I I I I I I I I i I i Gl L____. . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - -__m
1
*~* _ ... . . _ . . .
)
T ledo Edison Company APPEND 1X B Report No. 415-1/0 ' Davis-8 esse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 4ARY TABLE Page B-29 ) T sk Designation: Check for Natural Circulation h TA/SFRT: 7.31.3 ') i Mange .Ava11ab111t3 Sultability l l Infonmation and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Tes No ED Number Comments l ') i I o Reactor coolant system outlet temperature 520 - 620*F X X HED 9.2-30 addresses display l l locations. > l l HED 9.2-4 addresses channel l l selection. 1 I o hector coolant system inlet temperature l
)
i 50 - 650*F X1 X l HED 9.2-30 addresses display l l 1, I locations. I i l l HED 9.2-4 addresses channel ) i I I I selection. 1 I I I I o Reactor coolant system differential temperature 1 0 - 70*F I X l X ll l ) I o Incore thennocouple temperatures 0 - 2,300*F X X
)
o Heat rwmoval from OTSGs X X l 1
- Turbine bypass valve position 1 0 - 100% i X l i X 1 y 1 -
Atmospheric dump valve position 1 0 - 1001 X X l
- Feeduster valve position 1 0 - 1001 X X l i I I )
o Subcooling sargin i Digital ll X l X l l I I I I I I I I ) l I , I l I l I l 1. > l i I I I i i i l i > I I l 11 , I I I I I I I ) i I I I I I I l l ~) 1 I I I ll l ll l I I I I I I I I I I I I I; I I I 1 ll l 11 l
s d.. + ^R"
- . _ . . . . . . .u . ,. .v. .c M, , ' bWm - .. ;]
s -- - l ( ,'" .m p F ^ ("i - N. A .p t T D .'. 2@t"3ff." _ .;.2d$.T g . ,.
;)
a--- s _.m7 L . l . I,. + ,: l.* 5- %$ .. --. _;e.i - - - - , - - i l .. , .. 4 ,
, .:. , :: .% X .
I a fL '3- t- I '~ 1
-}. :g? . . d '. :_' e 5% { ?;G
=
. wH 6 t '% -,
t
,l, k . .t g.3 --o Fk. s. .
.kc. 3 , . . . -_ e - :.$. -
i . a- % W RT . F. M n- % 'O 8 -' a , R. q X k 37 au 354 .. ; - Mu..T . . E.. X ".; ". - -- t;o . . .. . ... - ,
- a. ^. .
i m u 3 3 _ 3 v 333
- 3. . .. _ ,2- "'"< 3 s~'3. --
gsg.g, E E . < *E k* sw Ett -
. ,- E sk- w* 7 ,L : ,ti.tt -
- s :s , i. c. a .
. :s . r , i : .. -
. . m. . . g. e o . ..: -
l a n . ;- "3 nt- m.;g g ! % 4 vt * - 5 'g - 5 5 w '?g T. 33 TT.. T 33 T
~n
~ ~
- T "! ie .
~~~-
...a
. i.. - e. ' s....~.
T . ~. r ~T
.f aI og m-o maag i. a a- a a ww wo www. . .
w a.l .
. w w @..w- .
3R u u u u
....s m
, - u , -
- .cm . .
l 2 - - - - - __ = - - - _ _ - = m.,'"'"
$ u u u u u - >* . ' * ~~- . u u u
; y . .. . .
3 .
.,m.-
," N u u u
& u.
, .g .:- :------~u-
--u- u u l S u u u -u u ,-
, - ; a- .
. n.. .- -->, y
' i . .:.r r - c. 4
=- - ,--__ .
m l
. , ..- w f,%..g %p ... . , . * ..
t .' L '" ' l :. .r:, y;f --*i : m 5 8
- : ~&m .-'-~ . ~ ^~
"k,.;- .=w ,s Y +.:at 7 k.* g?k.::S g. >n
,,e p $ . - ^N 2 k *-&~ lia - ^ in g, ,
E g eo a e .
.k " n c=- .
A* e rv v , t' q - q '
. . :8. " ...:V y.r. ;
- s. ~m 3~3
&.. . .3 a:g ..g- T~yov-o in- . -
y E a - s. m wg . v. si yse a p a 5 E Ek E3 E N E- h, h h: ., d h .$ d [ w:._ h h h c -- 1-------
~
- -w+ --- ---
g i=e .x . ,3, ; 3 y4 3 a s . ^.s - =
- c. .,w, - - -
#tn g.
y '% . Mb(,, . -
,-* p
~-g y -
*~
-e =: -a .. #'
xg,
" [. _ .*M ',".f.
=. m :*w. ._z ;n m, u ..E m w.
.. . r
- n 3= ^' --
***- % 4 % Y3 q - -
- 7 q: .> r .. g -
8 l E a,. - i.- Mc -'
- 1~ -
~ - " .
._ - ' Mj.** h.e.ib b). . b"M
- d.a v2 JE
.>$. E E .
E. L- Z. . '.- ... t [M w
- .. *. O. %.s.1 .* ? .
s to g
.-a
- 3. ,,- 5:n y*,a 7 E: >
c.. e
-- ! a;h',.".' e.
.a . ::;y 1
x a. -n-fr"-i: 5 I
~g D. 8
=
l P
+ p, M.- 3 *. :
E ' ,g n. . . J. 4 g! . ggr h.rd .1i.g 4 ~ 5 ., c . g s -2s l 2. . 1 "s O. 7 a E - ;. ,.
- g ..c,*' a *ww .9~v . - N %. . , , . -; TA . $f .-3)a .3 3 a
. 7.Yd 2* J 4'
- j,c f. r.R.
s.a e o
.n. -.-F.l .- . F;. ;,F< . a.., .
r
..c Er.Im,8
-v. .
.. ag,
- o. o
- k. - k kw - .. ,, ,
- 3. - .v -
1 . sg u.* o
- y. . 9.0%a g . rW= -
t& k uph> p,. E .
* - -.y 4-}.,
1 r --. +- g*
. . . a -~s - as - 'r
-s M' -
I g' . y .3 o 3 ,-
~
g g ~.g ' g - - 6.g' e J. gq F g 7e g-.-g 3
"- u g5 %, 4' . ., 8 ., .
I J'F . h 5 R $m g s.
- 5. 3=I%,.
y g - --
, y - ;>..-
- j n .y . a 2 3* . z .. g.g:.- 3 3 3 u~ - ~. .r.c 3:3 3 8: $ $ ~' W., $?$
;f;EEC gd g gig E
- . ... .s , 3 s sQ g A} }
gg gg;3 o o- o -o o o o o .e o. . .o . . ,_ o 7 o o o
.-q8 +.m.-
.r * -'ag - .4
,e. 5 e
..-..n - ,.
~
--- -war _. . . . _ . . . _ - - . - - - - - - .--. --- - -
7
)
Toledo Edison Campany APPENDIX 8 Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SumARY TABLE Page B-31 1, Task No. 27 (continued) Task Designation: Check for RCS Integrity (LOCA) , ! TA/SFRT: 5.10.1, 5.10.2. 5.11, 6.9.1. 6.9.2 ~) l l Range iAvailability 15uitab111 ty l 1 Information and Control Requirements l Precision Accuracy l Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments l O Io LPI flow ! O - 5.000 gpa X X HED 9.2-8 addresses scale range. I l Io HPI flow 0 - 500 gpa X X ED 9.2-8 addresses scale range. I I I l l I I I I
')
I I I I I I I I I I I I I ') i I I I I I l l l l l l l 1 1 I ! l > l l I I I I I I I i ' 1 1 I ) l I I I , i I i 1 1 > I , i i I i 1 1 , I I I I ) i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i l I i I i ) I i l i l i i i i l i I l l l l 1 I ) l- 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ll l 1 1 I I J l I l I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i 1 1; I I I I i 1 , i 1 1 1 ' l , I I I I l 1 1 I I I I i 1 1i \
*\
l
,e
~-~- --. _ _ _ . - - - - .
.. . ..... . . . . . ... .-... . .. ~ . .
~
)
r '. Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0
')
Davis-8 esse Unit No.1 Revision 0 (' Task No. 28 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SIM4ARY TABLE Page B-32 ') Task Designation: Verify SUFP Availability ( TA/SFRT: 6.3, 6.3.1, 6.3.2, 6.3.3, 6.5.9, 6.6.9 ') I Range Availab111ty Sui tabilIty i l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes ho Yes No ED Iksuber Comments ! ) I Io ..SUFP pump breaker indication Open/ closed X X t I l 4 ) lo SUFP flow path status (valves operability) l Open/ closed I. X l X , ED 9.2-76, addresses l l l l SUFW valve indication. t I i 1 1 -) Io SUFP throttling valve controller availability 1 0 - 1001 1 X l X I l i i 1 1 - 1; I I t' Io DA storage tank level 1 0 - 16' I X l l X l i I ) i I i 1 I I I Io Condensate storage tank level 1 0 - 50' I X 1 X l l i L 1 h i I I i > I I I I I I I I I I ) I 1 1 1 I 1 I I I I I ; I I i
'i 1 I I I . I I I I i l l I I I i 1, I )
i I I I I I I l- 1 I I i 1 1 1 > I I I :l l l l I 1 I l I I > I I I I I I I I I i I I
)
I I I I , J l i I I I I I I I I I
~
I I I I I J l i I I; I I l i I , I I L i 1 1 I I ) I , I i l I I l g
'l I )
I I s . l l I
.. . . . . . - n......
<)
T;1edo Edison Comparty APPENDIX 8 Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-8 esse Unit No.1 Revision 0 Tast No. 29 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUD01ARY TABLE Page B-33 ') . T sk Designation: Start SUFP t TA/SFRT: 6.5.3, 6.5.4, 6.5.5, 6.5.6, 6.5.7, 6.5.8, 6.6.3, 6.6.4, 6.6.5, 6.6.6, 6.6.7, 6.6.8 9 l Range Availability 5pitability I l l . Inforination and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No ED Number Comments ( ) l l o SUFP flow 0 - 5,000 kpph X X HED 9.2-76, addresses l SUFP flow, as does ED 9.2-28. ) l i 1 I 1 l o SUFP discharge pressure 1 0 - 1,500 psig i X li X l 1 I o SUFP amp meter I I i *) 1 0 - 75 asps l I l X l l I I l0 Steam generator pressure 1 0 - 1,200 psig X l X l ED 9.2-37 addresses display ") l I I l precision. I I I I i l o DA storage tank level 1 0 - 16' X X l I ) I 1 - 1 I I i l o Condensate storage tank level l 0 - 50' I X l X l i I I I I I I I I I ) I e Steam generator level 0 - 650" l X X l HED 9.2-42 and 49 address tempera , I l ture compensation. l , 1 J l0 SUFP control swit:h Stop - normal - start I X l I, X l 1 1 I I I o Switches to control system valves l On/off I X 1; ll X 1 1 ( l o SUFP throttling valve controller 0 - 1005 X X ED 9.2-92, addresses l , SUFW SFRCS block status. ) l I l I HED 9.2-43 addresses access to I l l SUFW valve SFRCS block. l I I I I I ) i I I I I I I I i 1 i I I l ) l I I I I I I i I , I I I > l l l ll 11 l 11 1 I l l .) I l I l I l I l ) I I I l l l 1 J l I i l I i i i i i l 1. ) l I I I p i I , l :l 1. , w I I I :l l l l l
n h='-" " s - _.. _.. ~ _ _ _ _ _ . - _ . . . . _ . _ _ _ . _ . . _ . . . . . . , _ . . - _.) Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 r) Davis-Besse thilt No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SupetARY TABLE Page B-34 Task No. 30 ') i Tesk Designation: Check for Inadequate Core Cooling
- TA/SFRT: 5.7. 5.7.1, 5.7.2, 6.2.9, 6.2.9.1, 6.2.9.2 f) l Range IAvailability Sultability I Inforination and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Tes No ED lhamber Comments T o Saturation meter Digital X X o Reactor coolant outlet temperature 1 520 - 620*F X l l X ED 9.2-30 addresses display l l l locations. l l
- l I
l HED 9.2-4 addresses channel I selection. l I
')
I I I Io Incore therisocouple temperature 1 0 - 2,300*F i I I X I X I l ') I I lo Reactor coolant system pressure 10 - 2,500 psig X l l X HED 9.2-37 concerns display i I precision. I I I I I ) i 1 11 lo RCS differential tamperature 0 - 70*F X X I Io Reactor coolant inlet temperature 50 - 650*F
)
1 X X ED 9.2-30 addresses display i I precision. 1 I I ED 9.2-4 addresses channel ) l I selection. 1 . 1 I Io Reactor coolant system flow l O - 90 all-lbs I X X l l l hr I I ) I - 1 lo RC pump motor current l 0 - 600 amps l I l X l I X l ) I Io Steam tables 1 X l l X l i I ,( l i I ) Io Source range nuclear instrumentation i 10-I to 106 cps X X
!o RCs sample X X 3
I I I I I l I 3 I I i 1 I l l i I l l I I I
)
I I I I I I I I l I I I I .) I I I i l 1 1 I l ' I I J I l . l - 1 I 1 I I I I } l I I i i i J $ i 1: l w ll I
_ - ~ . _ _ . _.s . . .. . - - - ~ ~-~
)
I Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 i Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 YERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUte4ARY TABLE Page B-35 ) Test Designation: Transfe. SUFP Suction from DA Storage Tank to CST r, TA/SFRT: 6.8, 6.8.1 , 6.8.2
)
I l Range l Availabili ty l5ultability l Infomation and Control Requirements l l Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Ikamber Comments I ) i Io DA storage tant level 0 - 16' I X l 1
)
Io Condensate storage tank level 0 - 50' X X l i I I lo SUFP flow I O - 5,000 kpph X l l X 1 ED 9.2-76, addresses SUFP ,
)
l l l l , 1 I flow, as does HED 9.2-28. I I I I I I I I lo SUFP amp meter 1 0 - 75 amps l X I I X l l ll } l I li I I I i lo SUFP discharge pressure 10 - 1,500 psig i X l X l l 1 1 I I I I ) 1.o Steam generator pressure 10 - 1,200 psig i X l l X l HED 9.2-37 addresses display l l l l l ll precistor.. l I i l l 1 Io Steam generator level l l ) 0 - 650" X ll X ED 9.2-42 and 49 address display l l l appropriateness. I I I I I ) Io Switches to operate valves l On/off XI I, X HED 9.2-92, addresses I l i SUFW SFRCS block status. l . I I l l l HED 9.2-43 addresses access to > I I l l I I I SUFW valve SFRCS block. I I I I I I Io SUFP control switch l Stop - nomal - start I X l l I X I; ED 9.2-92, addresses I y I l l l l l SUFW SFRCS block status. I I I i l l l HED 9.2-43 addresses access to I l l l I l l l SUFW valve SFRCS block. 1 J l i I l 1 ll l t o SUFP ~1ow control valve controller 0 - 1005 X X , 1 1 I :I I I I I , I I ll I 1 I I I I I I I
~
l > l I H I I I , I I I - l l 1 1 I I I l ) I I I I ! I I I I I I I I I I I I I l I i ) I I I I I I I I I I l i ll .) I I ! I I I I i ' I p I i I l I W H
. _ - _ _ - _ _ - - - - - 3
~rm- -... .-.- _ _- . -... -~- --- ---. . . . ~ . - . .
Toledo Edison Company > APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SU8 MARY TABLE Page B-36 ) , Task Designation: Check for Major LOCA ' TA/5FRT: 5.10.1, 5.10.2, 5.11, 6.9.1, 6.9.2, 10.0
)
I l Range I Ava11ab111ty Suitability l l Infomation and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy ' Yes No l Yes No ED Number Coments l ) l I o Reactor coolant system pressure I i l 0 - 2,500 psig I I ED 9.2-37 addresses display l I practsfon. ) I i 1 1 I I I l o Core flood tank level 1 0 - 14' l I I l I l l 1
- l I I I i 1 I )
I o Core flood tank pressure 1 0 - 700 psig i I i 1 I i l I i I 1 1 I I I I I I o Containment Building pressure 10 - 60 psia l I l l I l l l l ) I I I I I I I l o Containment Building temperature ~ l l I I I I l l HED 9.2-103 addresses cont. temp. I I l I l i I I ) I o Containment Building radiation 10 - 1,000 ar/hr 1 Y l l l I l HED 9.2-17 display scale. 1 l I I i 1 1 I HED 9.2-36 addresses device I I i I 1 1 1 1 I nomenclature. I l l l l l l HED 9.2-12 addresses availability l l l l I l l cf information. l i l l ) I o Core flood tank outlet valves position l Open/ closed l I l l I i l 11 l I I I I I I I i o Core flood tank went valve position l Open/ closed i I I I I l l I l ) i l I I i i l I o Core flood tank N2 supply valve position l l l I l l l HED 9.2-102 addresses CF info. I I I I I I I I I o Containment sump level 1 0 - 2.5' II ) l I l l I l l
) I l l l l l I o Core flood tank fill ifne isolation valve position l Open/ closed 1 I l l I l l I l )
I I I I I I l o Core flood tank sample valve position I i Open/ closed l I l l I l l t i I i l I i 1 1 ) I o Contatsment vessel wide ran9e level i I I I I I I I I I I I I o Switches to operate core flood tank outlet valves i Open/ closed i 1 l I I I l ED 9.2-39 addresses control )
! l l l l l l availability.
l l I l l I i o NpI/LPI flow l O - 500/5.000 gs,a i I l l I l HED 9.2-8 addresses scale range. ! ) 1 I I I I I I 'l l0 Switches to operate 52 supply to the core flood tanks i l l I l l l HED 9.2-102 addresses CF info. 1 I I l l I l l I .J l o Core flood tank fill ifne isolation valve switch i Open/ closed l I l l I l 1 l l 1 l I l l i l o Switches ta operate core flood tank sample valves I i Open/ closed l I l l I I l l l l J I l I l I o Switches to operate core flood went valves Open/ closed I I I I I 1 I i 1 1 I I i 1 1 i I I I i I I i i I I I I I I I I I i w I
--_____=_=_s_ _ _ . -- - . - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
o Toledo Edf see Company ) APPENDII S Report lio. 415-1/0 Davis-8 esse lasit leo.1 VERIFICATI0lt AalD VALICAT!Du SupmARY TABLE Revisin O Pai,e 8-37 ) Task Designetton: Initiate DRl/MPI Cooltag TA/5FII:
- 4.9.3(6),
12.12, 5.2, 13.8 6.2, 6.2.1, 6.13.3, 6.19.5, 8.13.4, 8.17.3, 8.20.2, 8.20.3, 8.20.4, 8.20.6, 9.1,10.6,10.10,11.3,11.14,11.15,11.17,12.f 0, 1 I I Range l avallab t 15 ty I Sultablitty taformation and Control Reef reemts l Precision Accuracy I Yes I 20 Yes i no ED thaber Causents I i f I o MPI flow 1 O - 500 sps l I l 1 1 l 1 I n I 1 I I E D 9.2-8 addresses scala range. I I o WI pump amps l I i l I i i > 10 - 150 amps iI I I I l' l l o susT levei 1 1 I i 1 1 I 1 0 - 50' 1 I I I I I I l i I I i I ) l o WI pep discharge pressere ! 1 1 i I l i I I l l ED 9.2-86 addresses HPI discharge ! I o m system pressere I i l i i i press. I > 1 0 - 3,m o psie i I I I I I I l I I I o s pap asp eeter i G - 100 asps 6 i I i 1 1 1 1 I l i I I I I ) l o DEI system flow i i i i i 1 i l 0 - 160 spo l I l l I ED 9.2-11 addresses scale range, l i I I l l l I i I o susT temperature I I , 1 0 - 250*F I I I I I I I I I I I o contataneet say level I I i l i I I O - 2.5* l I 1 1 I I I i I I 3 I o Armanciator alarws I I I i 1 I I I I 1 1 I I I i I I I I I I l I0 WI recirculatten walve posities ! Closed /open i , t i I l 1 I I I l l o W I systen valve switches i I I I I I I I Closed /open l I l l I i l l 1 1 1-l I o WI pap control settenes I stop - normal - start i I I 1 1 I I I I I I I I i I I l I I i I o WI flow control valve switches I Closed /open i I I I I I I I I I I I o WI massai 1sittattas pesanotton I i 1 1 I
. I off/ actuated i I I I I l l i l l I I i l i i o ses pep castrol switenes I i I stop - normal - start i I I I I 1 l l t i I l
I o 8E! per AC att pop switch I I I I I stop - normal - start 1 I l l l I l ED 9.2-16 addresses MU pump oli l l i I l l l l l supply logic configuration. I I I l i I I i o a ymp DC sti pop switen I stop - normal - start i I I I i I I I I I I I I I l i i l o a ymp AC gear oli pop switch I stop - normal - start i I l i 8 l I I l l I I l i I I I o sei system valve sutteses l Closed /open I 1 i I I I I l l l I I I I I I I o WI rectrculattaa valve control switches l Closed /open I t l I i 1 I I l I i ~ I i 1 1 1 I I l i I I I I 1 1 1 1 I I I I I 1 1 i I I I I i i I I i I I I I I I I i w I
Toledo Edf see Company . APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Devis-Gesse thef t to.1 Revistoa 0
, VERIFICAT104 AND VALIDATIGH Supe 4ARY TABLE page B-38 y Test Designation: Check for Excessive Heat Transfer (Overcooling) A TA/5 FIT: 4.13.1 ,4.13.2, 5.4.1 , 5.4.2, 5.14.1, 5.14.2, 7.0, 7.4, 7.4.1, 7.4.2, 7.5, 7.5.1, 7.5.2, 7.5.3, 7.5.4. 7.6, 7.6.1, 7.6.2, 7.6.3, 7.7, 7.7.1, )
7.7.2, 7.3.1, 7.3.2, 7.8.3, 7.9, 7.15, 7.15.1, 7.15.2, 7.16, 7.16.1, 7.16.2, 7.23, 7.23.1, 7.24.1, 7.24.2, 7.26 I I ._ Eaage I Availability l5eltablitty i I Informattom and Control Requirments I I prectston Accuracy I Yes i No Yes I no I ED Humber Comments l ) l t I I I I I I I o Steen generatar levels 1 0 - 65C" I I l I l l l I I ED 9.2-42 and 49 address display i I I I I I I appropriatenes. I - 1 I o steam 9emeratar pressare I I i 1 I I I 1 0 - 1,200 pstg i I 1 1 I I I ED 9.2-37 addresses prectstoa. I l I l i I i i l ) I o state feekter flow l O - 7,000 typh l I I I I I I ED 9.2-28 addresses accuracy. I I I I I I I I I o Anx111ary feekter flow I I O - 1,000 gym i I l l l I 1 ED 9.2-28 addr.sses accuracy. I l I I I I I I I I o Tertise bypass salve pesttfon 1 0 - 1005 I I I I I I I ED 9.2-81, address AVV position i i i i i l I i fadication. I 1
'l i I I I I i 1 I o ^^ f Tic relief valve position 1 0 - 1005 l I i l l I i ED 9.3-82, address AVV positten I l I
I I I i 1 I indication. I > I I i 1 I I I I o neactar cantant islet temperstare 1 520 - 620*F l I I I I I I ED 9.2-30 discusses display i I I I I I I I locations. I I ) l l l l l l ED 9.2-4 addresses channel l l l l 1 ! I I 1 I o Beactor coolaat ostlet tamperature 1 50 - 650*F l I l l l I I ED "'.2-30 9 discusses display i I I l I l l locattons. I I l l l l l ED 9.2-4 addresses channel l i ) I i i I I I selection. I I I I I I I I I l o pressarizer level I O - 320* i I I I I I I l ED 9.2-42 and 49 address display. l ) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I o EC5 pressure 1 0 - 2,500 psig i I l l l I i ED g.2-37 addresses prectsfoe. I _) 1 I I I I I l 1 I o aC5 pressare/temperstare display i I I I I I I i B l l o Azillary feedseter isolatfoe valves 1 I Cpen/ closed 1 1 1 1 I i > l I I l I I I l l l l l l l l 10 Itais feeemster isolatfoe valves ! Cpee/ closed i I i l I l l l > I i I i l i l 1 I o Tertime bypass salve controller 1 0 - 1005 l I l l I I I i 1 1 I I i I i i I o "- f :.-1c reif ef valve controller 1 0 - 1005 I I I I I I I . I I I I I I I I I I o Itata feedseter flow control valve controller 1 0 - 1005 l I i 1 I i 1 . I I I I I I I I I I o Amatif ary feehter flow control valve controller 1 0 - 100s i I I I I I I . I I / I I I I i l l I I I I i 1 I i I I I I I I i l I i i i i l I I . ter I I I I I I I I
~->w _ ,,, __ . _ . _ . _
TIledo Edison Company APPENDIX B
')
Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. I Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUlttARY TABLE Page B-39 ~) Task Designation: Lineu i TA/SFRT: 8.3.3, 8.7, 8.p .HPI and LPI 1, 8.7.2, C. 7,:0.9,,10.10,for Pigqyheck11. Operation 7, 11.17, 12.7 r) 1 - Range Avaliabli t tyisui tabili ty Information and Cnntro1..Requirments l 1 Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Ikanber Comuments I ) { . I I@ Component cooling water pump status # l Off/on X X l I l i e Compownt cooling water pump amp meter I ) 1 0 - 100 amps X X e Component cooling water valves pasition. 1, Closed /open ' . X I < X
)
l l I i i I e l's Component cooling wate'r temperatum indication 1 0 - 250*F f X X l 1+ l l l li l ') I e HPI pump status ' Off/on
~
l X X
. o HPI pump amp meter l 0 - 150 amps X 1X )
l9 HPI injection talves position Closed /cpen X X l - I t ) l o.'HPI flow '!
'O - 500 gpa X X ED 9.2-29 addresses valve l l posi+1on indication.
1 l ED 3.2-8 concerning display range. I
)
l h I l l l e HPI discharge pressum l l X l No HPI discharge pressure display I l I l l l ll exists. HED 9.2-86. l ) l ll l l e Component cooling water pump discharge pressure X Wo CCW pianps discharge pressure display exists. ED 9.2-111. ) l i l e Component cooling water flow I X No CCW system flow display exists. HED 9.2-70. ) 1 - l e containment vessel wide range level X X l l l l ) 10 LPI pump status lOff/on X X . l l t l e LPI pump amp meter i l 0 - 100 amps X I X l i j l l '1 'l I l e LPI piamp discharge pressure I X l No LPI discharge pressure display i l I 1 l i l l exists. ED 9.2-86, ll ) l e LPI flow I O - 5,000 gpm X X ED 9.2-8 concerns display range. l I e Containment sump levei 1 l 0 - 2.5' I X
.)
X l l I e Cross-connect valve position Closed /open X X l ..) e Switches for cross-connect valves I Closed /open I X X i l s Component cooling water pump controls l Stop - normal - start I X 1, l V l X l l l ll
'l 1 o Switches for CCW valves l Closed /open X X tap l l l l 1 l 1
---- - _ a w ._ _ . . . . . . , . _ _ - - _ - .. . - . _ . .-. . . . . -...-.
)
Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUNtARY TABLE Page B-40 1 Task No. 35 (continued) Task Des 19 nation: Lineup HPI and LPi for Pignback Operation ' TA/SFRT: 8.3.3, 8.7, 8.7.1, 8.7.2, 8.20.9. 10.1, 11.7, 11.17, 12.7
')
l ll Range IAvallability i5uitability I Inforestion and Control Requiraments
. Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No IED thamber Comments I )
Io HPI pump controls Stop/nonmal/ start X l X HED 9.2-47 and 59 address pump l I l l control location. t ) l I I I I I o Switches for HPI tidection valves Closed /open I X X l 1 I I I ) o LPI pump controls l Stop/ normal / start i X l X l HED 9.2-47 and 59 address pump ll l' 1 I control location. I i lo Switches for LPI injection valves l Closed /open X X l
- 1 o Switches for LPI suction valves Closed /open I X i X i )
I I I o Switches for HPI suction valves Closed /open X X , I l I 1 i > l l 1 1 I I I I I - 1 I I I y i I i l l I i 1 I I l - I > I
)
I ) I l l 1 I ( I ) l l . l l l 1 1 i ) l l 1 1 I I - 1 I I I i 1, , , I I I i I i l I I I I I I I I I l , i 1 <
> I I I I I I
I I I I w I
r -~ _ _ - . . - . . . . - . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . - . . . ~ - . - . . i s Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SIN #4ARY TAnLE Page B-41 ) Task No. 36 i Task Designation: Verify Pressurizer Operability 3 TA/SFRT: 4.3.3(4), 4.9.3, 6.2.2, 6.2.3, 6. 0, 6.10.2, 6.10.3, 6.19.1, 8.10, 8.13.1 ~) l- Range , Availability Sultaillity ,1 l l Inforination and Control Requirwents Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No ED Number Comments 1 ') l o Pressurizer level 0 - 320' ' X X ED 9.2-49 addresses temperature l compensation. ) I o Pressurizer pressure X No pressurizer pressure display l exists.KD 9.2-112. I ) i I I I I lo Pressurizer temperature 1 0 - 700*F I X l X . l l l 1 i i I l l 1 ) Io Pres:arizer heater status On/off I X X l l i I I I lo Pressurizer spray isolation valve position Open/ closed I X X l l l ) I l l l l 1 l o Pressurizer spray valve position Open/ closed . l X I X l l I l I l l ) 1o Pressurizer PORV position Open/ closed X ll l X l i l l l l . l lo Pressurizer code relief valve position i X l No indication for pressurizer code l ') i relief valves. HED 9.2-99. 1 I I o Pressurizer quench tank level 0 - 10' I X l X i HED 9:2-44 address scale range. I ) l I I I o Pressurizer quench tank pressure . 0 - 200 psia l X l X l t i l I l I l ) o Pressurizer quench tank temperature I ! X l No quench tank tesgerature display l l l exists. ED 9.2-8I. l l l . I I ) Io Pressurizer quench tank recirculation pissp status Start /stop/ auto I X l l X I; 11 l I I I I o Pressurizer quench tank vent valve po:,f tsan Open/ closed X ll l X l I l ) l 1 I o Pressurizer sample isolation valvas position Open/ closed I X l X l Il i I ) o Pressurizer spray bypass valve positten ! Open/ closed X l l X ll 1 l l lo Pressurizer heater switches i On/off I X l l X l ._) i I I I I
-o Pressurizer spray valve switch Open/ closed l X X l l
' l l I l l .) o Pressurizer block valve switch Open/ closed I X , li X l l l 1 ; I I I 1 lo Pressurizer PORY switch l Open/ closed X l X l l ,,) I 1 l 1 I I I I lo Pressurizer quench tank recirculation pump switch l On/off I X l l X l ll l l l 1 1 1 1; l I o Pressurizer quench tank went valve control Open/ closed I X X g ,o Pressurizer sample isolation valve controls Open/ closed X X g, I l l' I l I l
_ _ . - - . - - = - --....m. .. _ ._ ___,.. _ _ ___ . . . _ _ , , . .. .. . _ . 1 Tileda Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 T:sk No. 37 VERIFICATION AND YALIDATION SupetARY TABLE Page B-42 ') , T sk Designation: Transfer Electrical Loads from Auxiliary Transformers to S/U Transformer TA/5FRT: 8.3.7 =
)
l Range iAvailab111ty .suitablitty i Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Tes No ED hr Comments ) o Auxiliary transformer status 0 - 18 kV AC X X l l 1 1 I I I ) I o Startup transformer status 1 0 - 18 kV AC X i l X l l l l l l 1 I I I s AC electrical buses voltage indicatio9 l Yarlous I X l l X l l
) J I I I i 1 I o AC electrical breaker control position Open/ closed X l X l l 1 I I ~)
I o AC electrical buses ampere indication ' i Various i X l l X 1 I I I I I l o Load transfer breaker controls Open/ closed X X l l ) i I I I I i 1 l I I ) 1 I h l I i l 1 I I I I l ; I I I I ) i 1 I l
.I l i ,I I l l 1 1 1 1 3 l l l 1 i ll I I i l I i i i I )
i I I I I I I I I I I I i ) I I I I I I I L > l l I I I I I I I 11 I I I . I ) I I I I I I I I I l I l H I I l
)
ll 1; I; I I i 1 1 I I I I I I I ) i I I I I I I I I " I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I : l tw l ' I;
r _s _ _ _ . . . _ . - _ _ _ _ _ _. _ _ . . _ _ . . .- _t Toledo Edison Company ) APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-8 esse Unit No.1 Revision 0
'x
, VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION St# NARY TABLE Page B-43 )
Task Designation: Verify Pressurizer and Loop High Point Vent Operability 5.5.5, 5.5.6, 6.2.4, 6.2.5, 6.2.6, 6.19.2, 6.19.3, 6.1g.4, 8.20.7 TA/SFRT:
')
l Range l Availability .5uitability l Information and Control Requirstents l Precision Accuracy i Yes No Yes ED hr Comments
- No
_1
- I o Pressurizer Vent Yalve position Open/ closed I X X l
'I l Il <
o RCS Loop A High Point Vent Valve position Open/ closed X X1 I o RCS Loop B High Point Vent Valve position Open/ closed X X
')
l . L o Reactor Coolant System Pressure 0 - 2500 psig X I X l ED 9.2-37 addresses display 1 l l prectsion ) l 1 l , Io Reactor Coolant System Temperature 1 520 - 620*F , X l l X 1 l h i I I I I ) o RCS Loop A High Point Vent Yalve Controls l Open/ closed X l X l I o RCS Loop B High Point Vent Valve Controls l Open/ closed X X l l I l 1 1 I o Pressurizer Vent Valve Controls Open/ closed l X l X l 1 I . I I I I ) l ll ll 1 I I l l I i i I > l l I I I I . I I . 1. I I ) u l l l 1 , i I I i 1 l I i 1 ) I I I I I l
)
. i l I i , I l > I 3 I 1 g l I 1 J I I I I
, I , ll l l l l 1 I I I I p -l ,
, . I I l l w l ,I L i I I I
-~-~w _ . . . . . . . . -- . ~ . . . .- .-..-.
Toledo Edison Company ) APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-8 esse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SIN #4ARY TABLE Page 8-44 ) Task No. 39 Task Designation: Control Rod Drive System (Manual Reactor Shutdown) . TA/SFRT: 3.2.3 (1), 8.2, 8.2.1, 8.2.2, 8.4 ') l Range . Availabili ty Sultability l Infonmation and Control Requirements Precision Accurecy ED hr Comments Tes No Yes No _I ) o Rdactor Power Indication 0 - 1 20% X X (a) Source Range ') 1 10- to 106 X X 10- I to 10 bpsAnps l (b) Intenmediate Range X X l (c) Power Range O to 120% l l X X ) l , I Io Control Rod position Indication 1 0 to 1001 X X l l l (a) Absolute position l I. O to 1001 ll ') l X l X l l l l (b) Relative position , O to 1001 X l X l l I I I i I ) e Auto Control Status I Off-Activated I X X l l l e Manual Control Status Off-Activated ' X X ; I I l e Control Power Status i X X i l ) e Switches to Transfer Rods from Normal to Aux. Power Suppites I X X l e Manual Control Switch X X l ) i l l e Auto Control Switch X X l I i > l e Manual Command Switch (Insert / Withdraw) l Insert / Withdraw I X ll l X l I l l l e Group Select Switch X X l ) e Rod Speed Switch (Run) X X e Rod Speed Switch (Jog) X X
\ l b
)
1 l l .I I I I > l l
, i 1 I I I I
l l , - 1 I g ) W
, . . . . . ~ _ . . . . .
)
Tiledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 4ARY TABLE Page 8-45 ) , T:sk Designatica: Transfer Makeup Pump Suction to SWST TA/SFRT: 4.3.3(4)3, 4.9.3(5) l
)
l Range IAva11 ability 15uitab11Ity I
.I Inforination and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments i I
e Kakeup tank level 0 - 100" X X l
' l
- ll e BWST level 0 - 50' X X .I l l
1 i e MU pump suction valve from BWST position Open/ closed ')
~
X X I l e MU system flow y l 0 - 160 gpm I /X X HED 9.2-11 addresses display range s MU system pump discharge pressure ) ' 0 - 3000 psig X X I, 1 I e MU pump amp meter 0 - 100 amps X X l l ) I e Makeup pump suction valve switch Open/ closed X X l l l l e Makeup pump suction v31ve from BWST switch Open/ closed X l; X l l I i 1 1 y I I l l l 1 ' I > l I
,I I
I I ) 1 I ll l l I I I ) 1 I I I 3 l ll ll l 1
)
1
)
l l g i I i l .) l I I I l I ,I I I I w I I I I ,,
Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 ('s . VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUlelARY TABLE Page B-46 -) Task Designation: Verify LPI System Operation (- ' TA/SFRT: 4.94(3)
-)
l l Range I Availab111ty Sultability i. (s Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED lumber Cauments I ) o LPI Row 0 - 5000 GPM X X lied 9.2-8 addresses scale range. (s o LPI Pump Status )
! X X
( c LPI Pump Discharge Pressure X No LPI Pump discharge pressure ) 1 I disply. HED 9.2-86.
. \ \
{ o LPI Injection Valve Position , Open/ closed l I X l l X l l ') l l l o BET kwl l0-W , X l X t i I I I ) Io I.PI Suction Valve Status I Open/ closed X X i l I ( lo Containment Sump Levei 0 - 2.5' I X X l ) i I I I lo CCW Row to D.H. Removal Coolers X No CCW R ow display to D.H. ( Removal Coolers exist. ED 9.2-70. I o RCS System Pressurw 0 - 2500 psig X X (' io LPI Pump Amp. Meter l i 0 - 100 Amps X l. X l l l l 1 I ( lo LPI Pump Switches l Stop/ Normal / Start X ll X l l I
)
i n ! Io LPI Row Throttle Valve Control i Open/ closed X X l I <' l l 1 b Io Switches for System Val ms Open/ closed I X ! X l
]
l 1 l < I ) I j l
)
f- ,
- I I
)
I ll l 'l I 1 J r l b i I w
..w. - _ _ _ _ . . . . _ . . _ . . __ . - . - - - - - - - - - - - -
o
)
T;1eds Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Dans-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 1ARY TABLE .Page B 47 ^) T:sk Designation: Verify CCW System in Service TA/SFRT: 4.1.2(7), 4.9.5(3) i _) l Range l Availability Sultability l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy l l Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments l ) l i o CCW Piemps Status (Running) On/off X X l l I I e CCW Pump Flow , X
)
l 1 No CCW Pump Flow Display Exists. ll l I l l l ED 9.2-70. I I ) I o CCW Pump Discharge Pressure , , I. X i No CCW Pisap Discharge Pressure I l Display Exist. ED 9.2-111. I
)
l e CCW System Temperature 0 - 250*F l X ll l 1[ l I e CCW Surge Tank Level 0 - 60" X l X ) l o CCW Surge Tank Pressure L X No CCW surge tank pressure I l display exists. HED 9.2-113. l e CCW Pump Any. Meter l ( 0 - 100 Amps X X l i I e CCW Pump Switches I l Stop/ Normal / Start I X l X , HED 9.2-31 addresses CCW logic I l I (applies to CCW system) l I l e Switches to operate CQi Valves i Open/ closed X l l X h i I I I I l i I I I I i
! l ;
l i i I .) l 1 l I l ,
' I )
I 1
,\
\, \
\
~ l J l i i I J l O . l I l ' l I I ' I I I w ll
m n. ...:.11 m_ . ..- - - - ~ - - - - - - - " " ' ~ ~ ~ ~ '
' 4 . .
T;1edo Edison Caspany APPENDIX B
)
Davis-Besse Unit No I Report No. 415-1/0 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 4ARY TABLE Page B-48 T:sk No. 43 <) . T:sk Designation: Verify Service Water System in Service TA/SFRT: 4.1.2 , i
)
{ i Range ' Availab111 ty Sultability I l l l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No i ED Number Comments l ) e SW Pump Status (Running) On/off X X e SW Pump Discharge Pressure > I I X No SW Pump Discharge Pressure i Display exists. HED 9.2-111. e SW System Flow l I I No SW System Flow Display exist. I ED 9.2-70 e SW Pump Amp Meter 0 - 150 Amps X X
)
l e SW Pump Switches Stop/ Normal / Start l ll X l X HED 9.2-31 addresses SW System ) I I Logic (as a system) 1 I I l s Switches to operate SW Yalves Open/ closed X 1 X 1 I y 11 1 l l . 1\ I I ' ' I I I ' I I i 1;
)
l i I i 1 I ) I , 1 ll l , l I l l l l i , 3 l l , l I
' .I I i 1 1
I l I I i 1 1 l , I l l ll l l l l l ' 1- l l
3 Tiledo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERITICATION AND VALIDATION SUM 4ARY TABLE Page B-49 ~) Task No. 44 , Task Designation: Verify Containment Spray System Operation TA/SFRT: 10.7, 10.11, 12.8 }
)
l l Range iAvailab111ty 15ultab111ty
! Information and Contml Requirements l Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No ED Number Comments l )
e CS Flow 0 - 2000 GPM X X I e CS Pump Status (Running) Stop/ Normal / Start l ,
')
X l X l l l e CS Pump Amp. Meter 0 - 300 Amps X X l ) l l l0 CS Pump Discharge Pressure I X I l l I 'l I i l o BWST Level 1 0 - 50' l X X l ll 1 l e CS Piamp Discharge Valve Position Open/ closed i X X i i e System Valve Status for Changing Suctions Open/ closed X X e Containment Spray Piamp Controls , Stop/ Normal / Start X X o Containment Spray Pump Discharge Valve Switch Open/ closed I X X l i 1 .l0 Switches for System Valves to Change Pump Suctions 1 Open/ closed X X 1
.\
I I I l I ) i I l i l ll :i l l l l l l i ,
.l l l
1 I I i l
/ I 1 I l ll l l
1 1 1 l I I I I II
-'*%r _ . -- - _ __._____ .. . . _ .
)
T11edo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. I Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUM ARY TABLE Page B-50 ') Task Designation: Monitor and Control Containment Conditions TA/SFRT: 11.10, 10.15, 12.5, 13.5 ') i Range I Ava11 ability Suitability l l l Infor1mation and Contml Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments I T e Co'ntainment Pressure 0 - 60 Psia X X
)
e Containment Temperature I X l No containment temperature display I l exists. HED 9.2-103. I ) I e Containment Radiation Level 0 - 1000 mR/hr X X HEDs 9.2-12,17 4 36. - I
^
e Containment H2 Concentration 0 - 10% X X l ') e Containment Water Level 0 - 2.5 ft. X X l e SW Pump Amp Meter ) 0 - 150 Amps I X l I X l 1 l I ll l0 SW Puap Status (Running) On/off X ll X l ) I l I o SW Pump Discharge Pressure I X l No SW Pump Discharge pressure l l display exists. HED 9.2-111. ) e SW Inlet and Outlet Valve Status to the Containment Air Open/ closed I X X l Cooler Units ) 11 e CSS Pump Asp Meter 0 - 300 Amps X X 1 o CSS Flow' O - 2000 GPM X
)
X l I e SW Flow X No SW system flow display exists. I
)
I HED 9.2-70.
, e Containment Air Cooler Fan Status (Running) Slow Speed i Off/ Slow / Fast X X j I,
e SW Cooler Supply and Discharge Temperatures X No SW ccoler su ply and discharge temperature dis lay exists. ) 1; I I l HED 9.2-114 I e 8WST Level 0 - 50' I X X i
)
l I
.1 0 - 250*F X X Ie BWST Temperature .
)
I e Containment Sump Level 0 - 2.5 ft. X X l 0 Diets Valve Status (CSS Supply of Water from BWST to CES) .. Open/ closed X X
.-s l e Containment Spray System Status l l l l l (a) Pumps l Stop/Nomal/ Start I X X l l l l (b) Valves l Open/ closed l X X p e l&drogen Recombiners Status , X .
I I ii 1 il l I I i 1, wl
-- ~ =
- w . - . . .
. . . . . . . . .__- . . , . . . . ..~.e.~..
T;1edo Edison Company 3 APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 T:sk No. 45 (Continued) T'sk Designation: Monitor and Control Containment Conditions TA/SFRT: 11.10, 10.15, 12.5, 13.5
~>
l ,l Range . Availabili ty i5uitab111ty l Information and Control Requirements I l
! Precision Accuracy '
Yes No Yes No IED Number Comments 1 I . I o IVdrogen Recombiner Valves, Heaters, Fan Status X 10 SW Pop Controls l Stop/ Normal / Start l X 1 1 X l
')
l I i i l o Switches for SW Yalves Open/ closed l X l X I ) l l l o Containment Air Cooler Fan Controls ! Off/Slcw/ Fast I X X l i I , i l , 1 ) i o CIR Valve Controls l Open/ closed I X l X , i I I I o Coatainment Spray Nap Controls Stop/ Normal / Start X l X l I
)
- l 1 1 I o Containment Spray Valve Controls i Open/ closed X l l X !
! l l l )
I o BWST Valve i Open/ closed , X i i X l i l o Containment Emergency Sump Valve Open/ closed X X ) l l l l 1 : 11 l I , I I ) l I l l I I l i J l ,l l 1 1 I ) ll 1 1 I I i i l I I -, i l 1, ; 1 l I i , 1 I I I I I l 3 I l l 1 l I l i .I 3 I ll l 'l ll i [1 1 L ; i ! l 1 i l l I 3 I I I ;; I I I I I I I I l
= ' Mr - . -~~ . . ... . .
)
Toledo Edison Comparty ) APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATI0M AND VALIDATION SLM4ARY TABLE Page B-52 ) Task O. 46 Test Designation: Establish Decay Heat Removal System Coollag TA/SFRT: 8.20.9
)
I l Rai:ge l Availability 15uttability l l l Information and Control pequirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No l ED Nimber Comments I ) lo Reactor Coolant System Pressure 0 - 2500 psig X X ED 9.2-37 addresses precision. l
)
o Reactor Coolant System Temperature 1 0 - 650*F l X X l o Containment Sump Level 0 - 2.5 ft. X X l ) l l I i lo Decay ljeat Removal Pump Status ll On/off X , I X i I l 1 . I I I i 1 ) Io Decay Heat Removal Pump Suction Temperature 1 0 - 400*F X l X l l l l l l l I . I llo Decay Heat Removal Pump Discharge Pressure l I l X l 1 l No DH removal pump discharge I ) I l l I l l pressure display exists. 1 I I l l l ll l ED 9.2-86. 1 I I I I I l > lo Decay Heat Removal Cooler Outlet Temperature 1 0 - 400*F X l X i i l I i l o Decay Heat Removal Flow ll 0 - 5000 GPH X l l X ) i I I I o BWST Level 0 - 50 ft. X l l X l i i I ) o BWST Temperature 0 - 250*F X X 0 Decay Heat Removal Valva Status l Open/ closed X l X
)
l l l i l o Component Cooling Water Flow to the Decay Heat Removal l l l X l l No CCW flow display exists. I l Heat Exchangers ll l l l HED 9.2-70. 1 ; l ) 1 1 1 I l0 Service Water Flow to the Component Cooling Water Heat l l X l No SW flow display exists. l l Exchangers ! l I I I ED 9.2-70. 1 J l l I l l l o component Cooling Water Outlet Temperature 1 0 - 250*F ! X l X l l 1 . I i i o Decay Heat Removal Pump Controls l Stop/ Normal / Start l X l l 1 X l ED 9.2-47 4 59 addresses pump I 1 l l control location. I I I I l ; O Decay Heat Removal Valve Controls l Open/ closed X X l o Switches for Component Cooling Water Pianps l Stop/ Normal / Start X X ; I I I I i 1 1 o Switches for Component Cooling Water Valves l Open/ closed ' X X l l I o Switches for Service Water Valves 1
! Open/ closed I li .) .
I X . X l l l l
. i i i l I I L i l
i i l I l l l I w( e
=** w e . . _ _ _ _ . . . . _ _ . _ . . . _ . _........_m.-..-
T;1edo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION Sul#UutY TABLE Page 8-53 Q T::sk No. 47 T7sk Designation: Control Turbine Bypass Valves A TA/SFRT: 7.8.1, 7.8.2, 7.10, 8.5, 8.6, 8.6.1, 8.6.2, 8.14, 8.14.1, 8.14.6, 8.14.7, 8.18, 8.18.2, 8.18.8, 8.20.2, 8.20.3, 11.6, 11.14, 11.15, 13.13 q l Range I Availabili ty Sultability l l l Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes I No Yes No ED Number Comments I' 7 h 0 - 1200 psig X X ED 9.2.37 addresses display I o Steam Generator Pressure precision. ) I ;I o Turbine Bypass Valve Position Indication 0 - 1005 X X ED 9.2-9 concerns scaling. l o lleactor Coolant System Temperature 0 - 650*F 7 1 X l X l l l l 1 o lleactor Coolant System Pressure l l 0 - 2500 psig X l l X ED 9.2.37 addresses display precision. ( I
)
l l l0 Saturation Meter Digital !X l X ! l 7 i ' 1 . o Steam Generator Temperature 1 0 - 700*F X X
~ l _)
I o Stean Generator Level I O - 650* X l X l I I e Incore Thermo Couple Temperatures 0 - 2300*F X X l ) l l 1 I 1 l o Turbine 8ypass Valve Hand / Auto Control Station X . X ED 9.2-9 concerns contrt:1 scaling.1 1 I X HED 9.2-46 addresses possible work 'I overloading. I 1 ,
-1 1 I i '>
l 1 1 , ! I I I i -1 s) I' I I I ll u I J l ') l , ll d I ' l l l 1 I I J l i I I ; I U l
- i u i ,
y
- . -- e =< w w __ . _ . . . . . . _ . .. - - . 2 ~ . ~
')
Tiledo Edison Comparty APPENDIX 8 Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION StD#4ARY T*BLE Page B-54 ~J T'sk Designation: Control Atmospheric Vent Valves 8 TA/SFRT: 6.11, 6.11.1, 6.15, 6.23, 7.5.3, 7.20, 7.20.2, 7.31, 8.14, 8.14.1, 8.14.5, 8.14.6, 8.14.7, 8.18, 8.18.2, 8.18.4, 8.18.6, 8.18.8, 8.20.1, 8.20.2, ') 8.20.3, 9.3.1. 9.3.2. 9.13.2, 11.6. 11.14. 11.15, 13.13 I Range i Aea11abili ty Sul tabll i ty l l Information and Control Regstrements Precision Accuracy Tes No Tes_ ,_ p ED Number Comments l 3 e Steam Generator Pressure . 0 - 1200 psig X X ED 9.2-37 concerns display I prectsion. ) I l i 1 l l l l I e Steam Generator Temperature 0 - 700*F l ', X '. I 1 I l 1 l l l ) I o Steam Generator Level 1: 0 - 650" ll X I 1 l X l EDs 9.2-42 & 49 addresses display l l l l appropriateness. l l l l l _8 e Reactor Coolant System Temperature l 0 - 650*F X X , l l e Reactor Coolant System Pressure 0 - 2300 psig X X KD 9.2-37 concerns display > precision. o Saturation Meter Digital X X e o Atmospheric Vent Valve Position Indication 0 - 1005 X - X ED 9.2-82 addresses AVV i 1 position indication. ) l 1 I ll l le Incore Thermocouple Temperatures 0 - 2300*F X X l l l l 1, 1 I l ) l e Atmospheric Vent Yalve Hand / Auto Control Station l I X l X , ED 9.2-82. i
)
I c i l l ) i l n l . I I I > 1 i l I n 1 I I. l l l- l l j i l 1 I l l , I l l ll
-1 I I I I l l J i a ll l 11 l l *
- " " w _ , _ _ _ _ . - . -
.___-.____..... - - . m ..-. .
k i s Toledo Edison Company O APPENDIX B Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATInN AND YALIDATION SUIMARY TABLE Page 8-55 7 l Task Designation: When the BWST Level decreases to B' Transfer LPI (and CTMT. Sprq if Running) pump suctions to Recirculation from the Ctat ta e. Sump. TA/SFRT: 10.11 ) l Range Availability Suitability l l l Infomation and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED Number Comments I ') I i Io BWST Level 0 - 50" X X l 1 I ) o Containment Emergency Sump Level l Indicating Light I X ll No Containment Emergency Sump l l Level display HED submitted. 1 ) o Contairusent Emergency Sump Valve Status !'Jpen/ closed I X X l l I o BWST Valve Status l Open/clcsed I X X 'l ) l I l l l0 LPI Flow ! O - 5000 GPM X l X l llED 9.2-8 addresses scale range l I '
)
Io LPI Pump Amp. Meter ' O - 100 Amps X X l o Containment Spray Flow l 0 - 2000 GPM , K i ! X y l l l l , Io Containment Spray Peup Amp. Meter l C - 300 Amps , X l X l l l l l l l ) Io Containment Emergency Sump Valve Switches i Open/ closed X X i l l I o BWST Valve Switches Open/clost4 X X l ' i 1 o LPI Pump Controls Stop/ Normal / Start X X. '
)
o Containment Spray Pump Controls Stop/ Normal /S tart X l X l I ) I :l l 1 I I I I I l l l l ) I I I I I I , I l l , I I I . I I I l l l l ) l I i - l l ' 1 l , , l 1 I l 1 g 1 l I I l l l l
p zw _ _ . _ _ - . _ ... . . . . . . - -. - -. - -. -- - < * ~
)
T11edo Edison Company APPENDIX B Report lio. 415-1/0 Davis aesse Unit 110. 1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SupMARY TABLE Page 8-56 )g T'sk Designation: Establish A Bubble in the Pressurizet TA/SFRT: 13.10 g I l Range l Availabili ty . Suitability I; Infomation and Control Regirements Precision Accuracy Yes Eo Yes No ED Nianber Comments ')
@ Pressurizer Heater Indication Local / Remote X X o Pressurizer Temperature )
1 0 - 700*F X l l X ! I l, le lleactor Coolant System Pressum 1 I 0 - 2500 psig X X l l ') 1 I I - ' I e Pressurizer Level 0 - 320" X 1 X ED 9.2-49 addresses temperature l compensation. HED 9.2-41 addresses'
- l l l l range of infomation required, i l I I I I l e Letdown Flow 0 - 160 GPM l X l I X ED 9.2-35 addresses display scale.1 )
I 1 l i I o Letdown Temperature i l 0 - 200*F X X l l 1 ' l o Pressurizer Pressure 1 X l No pmssurizer pressure display l I I exist. ED 9.2-112
)
I o Steam Tables- X X e Pressurizer Heater Controller Auto X X l i i l l l 1 o Pressurizer Heater Controls ! On/nff/ auto X X l l l I e Letdown Flow Controller l C - 1005 l ) X1 1X 1 I I I I I 1 l e Letdown Isolation Valves i Open/ closed I X l X l j l I I I I I ll 1, I i i l I I i i i I ,
)
I 1 i'i i I I l l l I i
)
i I I I I l l l I I I i l I I l l 1 1 I , I l I
. I )
I I I i i i l l l '
- ~ " _._ ~ - . _ _ _ .
s Toledo Edison Company APPENDIX 8 Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-8 esse Unit No.1 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION StM4ARY TABLE Page B-57 > Tast Designation: Initiate RCS Boration TA/SFET: 3.2.3(2),4.6.2
')
I l Range Aval l abili ty i5ultab111ty l Information and Control Requirements l Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No ED haber Comments 1 -) I o RCS Boron Concentration 0 - 55 X X ED 9.2-15 addresses boronometer 1 i ,I ' I accuracy. I ) 1 I I I i 1 1 Io Make Up Tank Boron Concentration l l X l X 1 1 I I I I I I , Io Boric Acid Mix Tank Level 1 0 - 100* I X i l X l l I I I I i l io Make Up Tank Levei I i 0 - 100* I X l l X l l 1 ; i 1: 1 1 1 1 I lo B.A. Flow Totalizer X l X l l l l l l > lo 8.A. Tank Temperature 0 - 200*F i X l l X l I I I I I I
~
lo 8.A. Injection Valve Position 0 - 1005 1 X l X l l 1 , 1 ' I ll 1 l 1 I I Io 8. A. Flow 1 O - 60 GPM I I l X l l l 1 I 1 I I I l > 1o Final Boron Concentrati:n desired in RCS .l l X l X l li i I . 1 I I I 1 lo Total number of gallons necessary for desired concentration l l X 1 X l l j i l I I i l l I Io Boric Acid Piamp Status l Start /Stop/ Auto l X l I X l l i l I I I I I I > I o RCS Letdown Flow I O - 160 GPM ll X l l X l I I I i i i l i I o RCS Makeup Flow I O - 160 GPM l X l l l X l HED 9.2-35 addresses scale i l ) I I I I I I increments. I I I I I I I lo Makeup pump suction valve from BWST Status I l Open/ closed X l l X l l l ) , I I I I I i i I l0 Sample of RCS After Transfer is Complete X l 1X , I l l l l l l ll >
. Io 8WST Level Indication 1 0 - 50' I; 1 l 1 X h l l 1 I I I I I o Boric Acid Piamp Controls Start /Stop/ Auto X l l X l l J l I I I I I i l e 8. A. Tank Heater Controis l On/off X1 1 X I l l l 1 l l l l 10 8.A. Batch Quantity Selector l l X l 1, X 11 l "1
l l l 1 0 8.A. Injection Valves 1 0 - 1001 X l X l J o Letdown 3-way Valve Control 1 X X
! I I I I o Makeup Pump Suction from BWST Yalve Control l Open/ closed I X l X 11 l l l l 1 1 I I 5 l e Makeup Pump Controls l Start / Normal /Stop l X . w X ,
I l I f I I I I I I I
- _ _ . . _- 2 . .w,-
)
Tiledo Edison Company APPENDIX B , Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 T:sk No. 52 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SLM4ARY TABLE Page B-58 ') T sk Designation: Determine if Safety injection can be TerminateJ t TA/3FRT: 4.9.3(6), 5.2, 6.2, 6.2.1, 6.13.3, C.19.5, 8.13,4, S.17.3, 8.20.2, 8.20.3, 8.20.4, 8.20.6, 9.1,10.6,10.10,11.3,11.14,11.15,11.17,12.10, i' 12.12, 13.8 l Range .i Ava11ab111 ty Sultability 1 l l Inforlestion and Control Rewirements Precision Accuracy l Yes No Yes i No ED Number Comments I i i I o LPI Flow 0 - 5000 GPM l X X ED 9.2-8 concerns scale range. I I I I I I I J l0 Start Time of LPI Injection Computer Prir. tout ; X X l l e Time of Day X X l i ) I I I l0 Steam Generator Level 0 - 650" X l X ED 9.2-42 & 49 addresses I il i display appropriateness. I i 1
- 1 I I o Steam Generator Pressuis 0 - 1200 psig X l X l l l )
I e Saturation Meter Digital X X I I e Pressurizer Level 0 - 320' X X ED 9.2-49 addresses temperature l ) I , compensation. I ) I l i I I I I i I l ' l I I I I I l I ) I I I I I I I I l . I 1 ) g u I l I I
)
l } I : l i I I I , i i 1 1 I I l t 1 I, I l I l 1 l l l I I I I l I I I l I l w l
- - N _r--- .. .. .. .... _ __
)
T11edo Edison Company APPENDIX 8 Report No. 415-1/0 Davis-Besse Unit No.1 Revision 0 Tisk No. 53 VERIFICATION AND YALIDATION StM4ARY TABLE Page B-59 ') T:sk Designation: Establish Flow to the Steam Geeerators I TA/5FRT: 6.4, 6.4.1, 6.4.2, 6.5.1, 6.5.7. 6.5.9, 5.6.1, 6.7, 7.18, 7.18.1, 7.18.2, 7.30, 8.12, 8.14.5, 8.16, 8.18.6, 9.2, 9.9.1, 9.13.1, 11.13 ') l Range I Availab111 ty Sultab111ty I . Information and Control Requirements Precision Accuracy Tes No Yes No ED Number Comments ) o Main FW Flow X X HED 9.2-28 discuses accuracy. l 0 - 8 mil.lbs./hr. I o Auxiliary FW Flow ' O - 1000 GPM l X l X l HED9.2-7 discusses accuracy I I I I e SUFP Amp Meter 0 - 75 Amps i X X ) l l lo SUFP Discharge Pressure 10 1500 psig X l X l I l l l 3 i e MJin FW Flow Control Velve Position 1 0 - 1001 1X l X l l l l l 1 i e Steam Generator Level 1 0 - 650" X X :l HEDs 9.2-42 & 49 addresses display l ) I appropriateness. l le Steam Generator Pressure 0 - 1200 psig X X 3 l l ll l e MW Pump Speed 0 - 8000 RPM X X l l I
)
10 MFW Pump Discharge Pressure 0 - 1500 psig X l I X i l i ; I l , I l@ Condenser Hotwell Level 1 0 - 7 ft. . X l X , I l 3 I I I I l l I e Condensate Sto age Tank Level 1 0 - 50 ft. l X l X l i i ! l I I . l o AFW Peup Status l On/off I X X l ll l l 1 l o AFW Pump Discharge Pressure 0 - 1500 psig i X X l ) e D.A. Storage Tank Level 0 - 16 ft. X X l o RCS Cooldown Rate 0 - 650*F X X l I i e AFW Pump Speed 0 - 5000 RPM X X l i I l e AFW Pump Suction Valve Position l Open/ closed X X l l 1 l l 1 ; e AFW Pump Discharge Valve Position Open/ closed X X l I o Switches and Controllers for Valves Open/ closed X X i ) l l 1\ l ll l l e Switches and Controllers for Pumps On/off X X l i I J l l I I I I I I ) I I I ll
r- - -- ----,- - - -
'~
'"%. . . -.,_ _ - . . ~ - . . . - - . -.- - --- - .~- ~ ~ ~~
Toledo Edison Company ..) Davis-gesse Unit No.1 APPENDIX B Report lio. 415-1/0 Revision 0 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION SUfetARY TABLE Page 8-60 ') Task Designation: Use Essential Power Indicators X and/or Y '1 TA/SFRT: 4.3.3, 4.3.4
)
I Range l Availability iSuitabilIty i l Information and Control Pequirements Precision Accuracy Yes No Yes No IED Number Comments l ') o X Side Power Indication Various X X l I ) Io Y Side Power Indication l Various ll X l I X l l 1 l 1 l l l 1 lo Switch position indication for X and Y side power- I X or Y X ll l I ! l l X l l l ) l0 Switches to transfer between X a'd Y side power i X or Y X X 1 I i ) l i I I I I I i
)
l , I I , I I I I I i i i I I . I l , u I I l I > l 1 I
)
I I I 1
)
I I I i .l
')
I I I I I i i ) I i 1 1 I I I I I l' I I I I I J l l l 3 I I I J l i J
~
l i i H o I p I '1 0 l l __ a
9 APPENDIX C FED
SUMMARY
TABLES t l l I 4
P . Ik t ;. 415-1/0 3i V ' !I HED REPORT STATUS RECORD PHED REVIEW REVIEW NUMBER TITLE . REMARKS CATEGORY DATE DISPOSITION P.1.1-1 Viewing of controis and displays from the 1-1A-84 2nd operator and annunc. III operator's desk. system appear to obviate problem.
. P.l.1-2 Storage of reference 1-16-84 Provide more storage - III documents / procedures. Conduct a work space review to assess storage P.1.1-3 Reference documents and procedures ars 1-16 84 Standardize storage of 111 stored in one location. documents !!!
P.1.1-4 Location of shift supervisor's office. 1-16-34 S.S. can get to CR quickly III P.I.1-5 No dedicated communciation link between 1-16-84 Convenience item, will shif t supervisor's office and control room, provide link C-1
s 415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD Mthr@onetrics TITLE RE R N SER mP N REMARMS CATEGORY P.1.2-1 Controls not 3 inches --*=w frnm f ront l 1-17-84 Controls either have III edge of the bench boa . --d* nr will be Test buttons - Jence P.1.2-2 Controls located lowe above the floor. Q *C k 4, for critical 1V&V No problem noted in VAV III { _ g1 -
- P.1.2-3 Controls located aboi - p r . for critical No problem noted in V&V Ill
[g ' q n VAV P.1.2-4 Displays located belc . @ , for critical No problem noted in V&V 111 c .n VA V 4 . P,1.2-5 Displays located abo if. . for critical No problem noted in V&V III
< . in V&V
}
N P.1.2-6' Critical controls loc b &. ; in V&V No problem noted in V&V Delete inches above the fio D@ O No problem noted in V&V P.I.2-7 Critical displays loc . b pt 1 in V&V Delete inches above the fic P.1.2-8 Critical displays loc htP e*2 1 in V&V No problem noted in VAV Delete inches above the fis Q Da
? ?f '
aa c X n F@U C-2
P 0
/
1 . 5 Y 1 R 4 O G E T _ A - C l l I S K R A M E R D R O C E R N
)
S WM EI T n e U e T VISO b - A E P s 3 T S RS hd a - C I D dei T ef R ei t O nn P oe E Nid R D E H W EE IT 4 VA 8 ED 7 R 1 1 4 l o r t. r o c __ e ht E i n g n M i h t l o c e
, v it c
t e _ o . r pm o oo Nr . R DE 1 EB - HM 3, PU 1 N P n i , ; l t ;
415-1/n i Illumination HED REPORT STATUS RECORD
" TITLE REMEW REMN RERWWWCS CATEGORY flMMSER , DATE DISPOSITION P.1.5-1. Noticeable dif forences in the illumimtion 2-6-84 Modify control room 111 levels. lighting - Lighting study Delete ,
P.I.5-2 Area where illumination is mt adequah. 2-6-84 Combine with P.I.5-6 P.I.5-3 kaufficient illumination within the 1 18-84 Repeat, combined with Delete primary operating area. P.I.5-6 P.I.5-4 Shadows that interfore with readings on 2-6-84 Re-evaluate after the III [ recorders. Illumination has been , l upgraded - Lighting s*udy~ - , P.1.5-5 Glare that interforea with reading 2-6-84 Re-evaluate aft-r the Ili , displays, illumination has been ! j upgraded - Lighting study '
- P.1.5-6 Ir1* quote illumination level 1 16-64 Improve uniformity of IIC ;
, 2-6-84 illumination conduct 1 lighting study P.1.5-7 Emergercy Lighting (IX3 1-16-84 Lighting study IIC. I 2-6-84 J
4 i- . t i f . ! C-4 i .
, -- - - , - . ~ .
415-1/0
" I'*
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD N TITLE ANN "N" 80UMSER , DATE DISPOSITKHi REMARKS CATEGORY P.I.6-1 Background noise levels are too bigh in 2-6-84 Re-evaluate. flackground Originally judged to be not the control room, Pending noise is reported nigher a problem - to be re-since outage. Will tske assessed under Noise study new measurements and question operators. P.I.6-2 Auditory signals that interfere with other 2-6-84 Look at making horns signals or voice communciations. IIC adjustLble. Noise study. PJ.6-3 Ramtek computer tone 5s unclear in 2-6-84 Alarm is not part of CR Delete meaning. operations P.I.6-4 Auditory signals that sound similar yet 2-6-84 Computer alarms no Address in Annunc. IIC have contradictory meanings. longer annunciate. Some study , need to be annteciated. Look into using two alarms to distinguish alarms. P.I.6-5 Auditory signals which are too loud. 1-18-84 Repeat - combined with Delete P.3.1-9. P.I.6-6 Signal discriminability. 1-16-84 FCR in place to add ggg annunc. for fire alarm. PNL C5731 C-5
415-1/0~ Maintainability _ HED REPORT STATUS RECORD ME) TITLE REVIEW REVIEW NUGASER DATE DISPOSITION rtEMARKS CATEGORY P.I.7 1 Recorder supplies and fuses are not stored 2-6-84 Review rules for changing IC in the control room. bulbs & etc. with ops. & I&C to make supplies available to operators CR P.1.7-2 Inadequate supply of bulbs. 2-6-84 ComM.e with P.1.7-6 Delete repeat. 4 P.1.7-3 Tools needed to change bulbs that are not 2-6-84 Tool available - not a Delete available in the control room. ' problem P.1.7-4 Not enough storage space in the control 2-6-84 Book shelves covered in Delete room. P.1.1-2. Combine with 1.1-2. P.I.7-5 Bulbs and recorder paper are not clearly 2-6-84 Provide ops with a cross IC marked to indicate type. reference from bulb type to switch type. P.I.7-6 No records kept on status of expendaoles 2-6-84 Verify that an adequate IC or spare parts, supply is available in stores & ops. should establish an Inventory control procedure P.I.7-7 Paper and ink replenishment on recorders 2-6-84 Turn over to ops admin. IC is not quick and easy. assist. 2-6-84 P.I.7-8 Interchanging of annunciator tiles. Error potential low. III standard practice is to change one bulh at a time - Annunciator study C-6
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD "**I" #'U'Y PHED ME REVIEW REVIEW Not08ER DATE DISPOSITION REMARKS CATEGOM P.l.7-9 Operators being shocked while replacing 2-6-84 Turn over to ops. admin. IC bulbs. assist. to train operators. P.I.7 No lamp test,' dual bulbs or dual filament 2-6-84 Display study to be done IA bulbs. to determine equip. that does not have redundant indication and determine if test is needed. P.I.7-Il Pushbuttons or indicator lights that have 2-6-84 Turn over to ops. admin. Proper use of tool should !A shorted out while bulbs were being assist. to train operators obviate this problem. replaced. on procedure for changing bulbs. P.I.7-12 Legend covers or indicator light covers 2-6-84 Historically, is not a Low errer probability. 111 are not keyed to prevent interchanging of problem due to red / green covers. convention. Review admin. procedure to determine if operators are instructed to change one bulb at a time and if instructions refer ops. to panel drawing if ops, is in doubt. C-7 i
415-1/0
**""I "' I "*
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD 100M R , D DISPO TION MAMS CA M N P.2.1-1 No procedure for handling communi- 1-17 84 Procedure in place - Delete cations during an emergency. delete
- P.2.1-2 . Gaitronix cords in traffic paths. 1-17-84 Periodically replace cords III as necessary ii P.2.1-3 Handsets not located to prevent them 1-17-84 Not a problem, no Ill from being knocked out of the cradle. reported occurrences P.2.1-4 The loudness of the ringing is not 1-17-84 Not a oroblem, no action - 111 adjustable at the individual telephones.
P.2.1-5 Walkie-talkies do not penetrate all areas 1-17-84 Not a r roblem, delete Delete in the Aux. Building. , P.2.1-6 Fixed-base thF transceivers are not 1-17-84 Not applicable to Da'vis- Delete audible at the lowest setting. Besse P.2.1-7 Volume adjustment on the Gai-Tronix 1-17-84 Not a problem, under Delete System. control of an administrative procedure
- P.2.1-8 Communicating on phone handsets while 1-17 84 Not a problem, operations Delete wearing protective equipment. verified that you can i communicate.
}. t H l C-8
415-1/0 E l
- *"*"I***I "*
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD f PHED REVIEW REVIEW NUGASER ME DATE REMARKS CATEGORY DISPOSITION , , P.2.1-9 Annunciator alarm is non-directional. 1-17-84 Error assessment low due 111 to size of the control room
. P.2.1-10 , Alarms that are not distinguishable. 1-17-84 Delete - repeat (noise Delete survey), combine with P.I.6-2 P.2.1-11 False alarms in the control room. 1-17-84 Delete - covered in Delete annunc. Interviews, combined w/P.3.1-21 P.2.1-12 Annunciator speaker not directed towards 4
the primary operating area. 1-17-84 Not a problem due to size III , l-l of the control room; no action required t 1 C-9 1 1
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD ^"""" "'Y'*"' PHED REVIEW REVIEW NURSSER TITLE REMARKS CATEGORY
, DATE DISPOSITION P.3,1-1 No first out annunciator panel. 1-18-84 Delete - repeat of Delete P.3.1-30 P.3.1-2 No labels above annunciator tiles. 2-6-84 Amune. boxes are labeled Delete with numbers - not a problem, delete P.3.1-3 Annunciator panel labels not easy to read 2-6-84 Annunc. satisfy from primary operating area. Delete guidelines - not a problem P.3.1-4 No priority coding of the annunciator 1-18-84 Delete - repeat of system. Delete P.3.1-39 P.3.1-5 Annunciator auditory signals not priority 1-18-84 Repeat of P.2.1-9 coded. Delete ,
P.3.1-6 There are not separate auditory signals at 2-6-84 Not a problem due to the each woric station, lit size of the control room P.3.1-7 No annunciator horna for work areas not 2-6-84 NA - No alarms outside Delete at the main control board. work areas P.3.1-8 Auditory alarm signalis not coded. 2-6-84 NA Delete P.3.1-9 Alarm signals that startle or irritate. 2-6-84 Look at making horns IC adjustable and then determine range within the noise study J C-10
- 415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD 'Y'**
PHED RNN RNN NUMBER ' TITLE REMARKS CATEGORY
, DATE DISPOSITION P.3.1-10 Alarm horns that are too loud. 2-6-84 Look at making horns IC adjustable and then determine range within the Noise study P.3.1-ll - No silence control with each set of 2-6-84 Change tone of horn and !!C 4
annunciator response controls, look into adding an amunc. silence requirement - Annunc. study P.3.1-12 No acknowledge control witiv each set of 2-6-84 NA, only one set of annunciator response controls. Delete annunc. response controls P.3.1-13 No reset control for cleared alarms. 2-6-84 Study further '
!!C
- Annunc. study P.3.1-14 The reset control does not silence the 2-6-84 Study further llc auditory signal as well as extinguish the - Annunc. study illumination.
P.3.1-15 Reset control does not operate from more 2-6-84 Study further 111 than one response control area. - Annunc. study P.3.1-16 Defeating annunciator controls. 2-6-84 NA Delete a C-ll 4
415-1/0
^""""*I"S'*
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD Y TITLE . RNN RNN REMARKS BRMSER DATE DISPOSITION CATEGORY P.3.1-17 Annunciator tiles that are always on. 2-6-84 Assess in Annunc. study !!C P.3J-18 No distinctive coding for annunciator tiles 2-6-84 Assess in Annune. study IIC that are on for an extended period. P.3.1 19 Annunciator tiles that are out of service. 2-6-84 Tiles are tagged out - not 111 a problem P.3J-:S No indication of annunciator alarm 2-6-84 Study further - Annunc. Determine failure mode of Pending flasher that is out of service. study flasher card. P.3.1-21 Annunciator alarme that are considered 2-6-84 Assess in Annunc. study IIC nuisance alarme. P.3.1-22 Alarme that do not give adequate time to 2-6-84 Not a problem Delete respond. P.3.1 23 Controls & displays needed to respond to 2-6-84 Assess in Annunc. study llc annunciator alarms that .are not easily located. P.3.1-24 Alarme that require additional 2-6-84 Assess local Annunc. liC information from sources outside the study control room. C-12
1 415-1/0 1 HED REPORT STATUS RECOND ' # * ** pHED REVIEW REVIEW DIUMBER TITLE REGAARKS CATEGORY
, DATE DISPOSITION P.3.1-25 Alarms that require more details from # 2-6-84 Assess in Annunc. study !!C other annunciator panels located outside the control room.
P.3.1-26 Annunciator tiles that contain dual 2-6-84 Assess in Annunc. study messages.
!!C P.3.1-27 No reflash capability on multi-input 2-6-84 Assess in Annunc. study llc alarrns.
PJ.1-28 Multi-input alarms not provided with an 2 6-84 Assess in Annunc. study alarm printout. llc P.3,1-29 Alarm typer loses or skips information. 2-6-84 Being addressed in llc Computer Alarm . Reduction Program P.3.1-30 No first out panel for Rx trip. 1-17-84 Review in Annunc. study llc P.3.1-31 Turbine-generator system first out 1-17-84 Panel is accessible if annunciator penet is not located above lit operators need to get to turbine peneL it , C-13
- . . - -. . - .. . . - .. . ~. 415-1/0
^""" " ' #' *
- HED REPORT STATUS RECORD MD TITLE REVIEW REVIEW I 98UMSER , DATE DISPOSITION REMARKS CATEGORY
' P.3.1-32 Stroke width not consistent on a!! l-17-84 Address in Annunc. study III annunciator tiles.
P.3.1 Annunciatorlight boxes that contain more 1-17-84 Look at reducing the III than 50 tiles. number of tiles in Annune. stixty P.3.1-34 Annunciator tile coordinate designators 1-17-84 Not a problem, viewable III are located at the bottom of the ALDs from the bottom - assess instead of the top, in Annunc. study P.301-35 ALB coordinate designators are not 1-l7-84 Relable one coordinate to III labeled with alpha characters. alpha characters P.3.1-36 Annunciator response procedures are not 1-17 84 Change response' IIC indexed by panel I.D. and tile coordinates, procedures using new alphanumeric coordinate designators P.3.1-37 Annunciators with inputs from more than 1-16-84 Annunciator study will be !!A one parameter is not avoided. put into place to review problem C-14
.~ ._. -. _ . - - . . . . ~ -
415-1/0 i . I" ' UY'* *
- HED REPORT STATUS RECORD ,
PHED REVIEW REVIEW NUISSER TITLE REMARKS CATEGORY DATE DISPOWTION P.3.1-38 Annunciator tiles not grouped by system 1-16-84 Will be reviewed under IIC d or subsystem. Annunc. study
. P.3.1-39 No prioritization of the annunciator 1-16-84 Will be reviewed under !!C system. Annunc. study P.3.1-40 Ambiguous annunciator tiles. 1 17-84 Address in Annunc. study llc P.3.1-41 No auditory signal for cleared alarms. 6-20-84 Annunc. study IIC b
4 I a S l C-15
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD Controls MD Rmm Rmm Nut 0GER T!TLE REMARKS CATEGORY DATE DISPOSITION P.4.1-1 Controls that aativate c,'tical funct% 2-7-84 Provide guards for trip !!C that de oc havs gu. rds. buttoru., and all others except for RX coolant pump switches P.4.1-2 Guards that interfere, with the operation 2-7-84 Cover has been removed of controls. P.4.,1-3 Pushbuttone that should be rotary controls 2-7-84 Not a problem Delete because of the possibility of accidental activation. P.4.1-4 Controls positioned toa close together 2-7-84 Controls are not closer IA that adjacent controls wom sccidentally together than ott.ers. activated. MU-3971 should be relabeled from open/close to the BWST & Makeup tank - Labelling study. 2-7-84 Problem is with the P.4.1-5 Dif ficulty activating si control becaus6 an design of the controller 111 adjacent control was in the way. and the way the toggle has to be operated. C-16
415-1/0
" ' I*
HED REPORT STATUS RFCORD
" TITLE REVIEW REVIEW REMARKS CATEGORY IGURAGER . DATE DISPOSITION PC.1-6 Controls that interlock unnecessarily. 2-7-84 Investigate for real llc purpose of interlock and assess ops. training of this - Controls study IIC P.4.1-7 Controls with strict equential activation 2-7 84 Harvile in training .
are not provided wit!. some type of P.4.1 8 ldbarnsteion in a sequentially operated 2-7-84 Not s problem, no Delete switch, examples in the CR P.431-9 Unused controis on control panels. 2-7-84 Combined with 9.2-15 Delete P.4.1-10 Controls on control panel that are 2-7-84 Dur!! cation is required Delete duplicated unnecessarily. P.4.1-Il Control not recognizable in terms of its 2-7-84 Determine the convention til function such as handle type or color. and document places where convention cannot be applied due to switch requirements - Controls 4 study M 4 C-17
.- - _ - ~. .
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD Controls TITLE ANN AU" IIUMSER DATE DISPOSITION REASARKS CATEGOftY P.4.1-12 Controls that are broken or loose on their 2-7-84 Not a problem Delete shafts. P.4.1-13 Controls that move too easily. 2-7-84 Increase resistance on all llc pot. controls on Bailey controllers - Controls study P.4.1-14 Rotary Selector Control not used for a 2-7-84 Review this problem in !!C thre: pewtion switch, conjuretion with FCR to determine if new switch type is needed - Controls study P.4.1-15 Selector switches that can be positioned 2-7-84 Review consequence of !!C between detented positions. placing switch in a mid-position and review the switches for excessive wear - Controls study P.4.1-16 Spring-loeded selector switches that are 2-7-84 Re-evaluate, ask Pending not large enough to be held against spring operators - Controls torque, study P.4.1-17 Controls that allow a wider range than 2-7-84 Not a problem, switch not Delete needed. used for precise control 1 C-18 l
- - ._ .. = . - . _ _ . .- , .
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD * *I' pMED TITLE m REWEW REASARKS CATEGORY DATE DISPOSITION P A l-18 Insppropriate range on controllers. 2-7-84 Combine with 9.2-9 Delete pal-19 Controls that are difficult to adjust to the 2-7-84 Review to determine IIC precision level needed. solidians. Evaluate each case for specific problems - Controls study. P A l-20 Lack of immediate feceack on 2-7-84 Controls study 10 pushbuttons. PAI-21 Stepped thunhowels that do not have 2-7-84 NA, no detented Delete detents at each position. thun6 wheels in CR PAI-22 Continuous adjustment thun6 wheels with 2-7-84 NA, no off position Delete no detent in the off position. PA1-23 Topple switches do not snep into position. 2-7-84 Delete Toggles are momentary Delete contact and should not
" snap"into position PAI-24 Toggles that do not provide some source 2-7-84 Controls study of feeeeck. IIC C-1.9 t
I
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD
" TITLE N M , DATE DISPOSITION Rems CATEGORY pal-25 Controle that are s4)ect to inadvertent 1-17-84 Do a detailed review to IIC actuotion and are not provided with flued determine if others are protective structures. reeded and apply guards where needed - Controls study pal-26 Mnemoges en legend Epits/pusNmttone are 1 17-84 Controls study
_f,,g m., DC i pal-27 Resistance for pusmuttone is not between 1-17-84 Controls study HI 10 to 40 or. i P.a 1-28 Open position is not located to the right 1-17-84 Controls study IIC on all switches. pal-29 Stop position not located to the left on all 1-17-84 Controls study III switches. pal-30 CLOSE position is not located to the left 1-17-84 Controls study Cat IIC on all switches. pal-31 Pistol grip handles that are s4 ject to 1-16-84 Controls study IIC inedvertent activation. l 1 ! 5 C-20 4
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD UI'PI "Y' TITLE """ "" REMARKS CATEGORY NUMSER , DATE DISPOSITION P.5.1-1 Indicator lights that are too dim. 2-7-84 Evaluate to determine if !!C brighter bulbs are available or if a different lens is available. Display
, study.
P.5.1-2 Indicator lights that indicate 2-7-84 Display study !!A system / equipment status when light is - Not all listed would be off. y considered IIA. P&l 'I Indicator lights that are used for alarm 2-7-84 All listed have annunc. or llc signals. computer alarms as backup, defer to annunc. study P.5.1-4 Meter scales that do not span the 2 7-84 Assess each scale and I!C expected range of operational determine need for parameters. making changes - Display study , P.L1-5 Scale ranges that are too wide for the 2-7-84 Review of scales indicate Delete maximum displayed values. that scales are not too wide, not a problem P.5.1-6 Scales where the maximum values are too 2-7-84 Display study (some items IIA large for the scale, already changed) C-21
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD *PI'Y' MD TITLE RNEW RNEW NUtstER REMARKS CATEGORY
, DATE DISPOSITION P.5.1-7 Pointers on meters do not fall off scale. 2-7-84 Display study 11 3 P.S.1-d Logarithmic scale that should be linear. 2-7-84 Not a problem Delete P.5.1-9 Multiscale meters that are confusing to 2-7-84 Display study llA read. Not all displays on FED are IIA P.501-10 Poor contrast between pointers and scale 2-7-84 Display study IIC background.
Po5.1-11 Displays have pointers that are too small. 2-7-84 Combine with P.S.1-33, Delete repeat P.5.1-12 Recorders located outside the primary 2-7-84 Delete All primary recorders are Delete work area. located within 114 primary work area P.5.1-13 Recorders used for purposes other than to 2-7-84 Only turbine vibration 111 record trend information and material for recorder is used as later referes e. primary indication - not a problem. P.5.1-14 No paper speed adjustment on recorders. 2-7-84 Assessed for critical time 111 indications in V&V - not a problem C-22
_ .~, _ _ _ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ . _. _. . . _ . _ . . . . _ . .. 415-1/0
- HED REPORT STATUS RECORD Displays
" TITLE Rmm Rmm BRMISER DATE DISPOSITION REMARKS CATEGORY P.5.1-15 Inconvenient to annotate recording paper 2-7-84 It is not convenient but III or recorders, annotations can be made, low error assessment
- P.5J-16 Visibility of data on recorders. 2-7-84 Consider removing the IIC existing doors on recorder and replace with nonglare plastic with no beze! -
Display study P.5.1-17 Recorder pens that clog and smudge the 2-7-84 IAC regularly maintains Delete paper. recorders - not a problem P.5.1-18 Recorders without takeup spool 2-7-84 Recorder is not within the Delete primary operating area P.5.1-19 Recorder paper that cymot be easily torn 2-7-84 Not a problem, paper is Delete off. not torn of f - roll runs out P 5.1-20 Recorders that mechanically or 2-7-84 IAC regularly maintains III electrically hang up, recorder. Not a problem. P.5.1-21 Indicator lights rut labeled. 1-17-84 Address in Labelling study III P.S.1-22 Legends that are not legible under 1-17-84 Address in labeling study III ambient illumination with indicator lights o ff. C-23
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD Displays PHED TITLE ANN A N RERAARKS CATEGORY pagesOER DATE DISPOSITION PJ.1-23 Poor contrast of legend lettering. 1-17 84 Paint legend lettering IIC white - Labelling study
' P.5.1-24 Scale multipliers not clearly indicated. 1-17-84 Display study 111 P.5.1-25 Heights of graduation marks.
1-17-84 Display study til P.5.1-26 thnecessary information on display faces. 1-17-84 Remove unnecessary llc information on display faces - Display study P.5.1-27 There are more non nine graduations 1-17-84 Display study llc between numere s on scales. P.5J-28 Scale graduations do not progress by 1,2, 1-17-84 Display study 5, or los. IIC P.5.1-29 Meters with pointers that have parallau l-17-84 Replace meters - Display problems. llA study P.5.1-30 Zone merkings not distinctive on some 1-17-84 Investigate uses for zone IIC meters and most meters do not contain markings - Display study zorm merkings. 4 C-24
415-1/0 Displays HED REPORT STATUS RECORD TITLE N "N" REMARKS CATEGORY NUMSER , DATE DISPOSITION P.5.1-31 Colors on meter face interfere with 1-17-84 Display study III reading of the display. P.5.1-32 Viewing of a recorder at inconvenient 1 17-84 Very low priority usage - III angles. no action required P.5.1-33 Pointers too narrow. 1-17-84 Investigateed for critical AII on electrical III meters during VAV walk- distr.oution panel throughs - no problem observed P.5.1-34 Colors of legend licAts not easily 1-17-84 Colors have no particular III distanguishable. meaning - not a problem P.5.1-35 Inconsistent type styles within meters. 1-17-84 Display study III P.5.1-36 Character heights on labels within meters 1-17-84 Display study III are too smell P.5.1-37 Display labels are not used within 1-17-84 Address in Labeling study III procedures. P.5.1-38 Standard abbreviations are not used on 1-17 84 Addrew in L ling study III legend lights. C-25
415-1/0 Di, lays HED REPORT STATUS RECORD TffLE g REMARKS CATEGORY P.S.1-39 Non-standard abbreviations are used on 1-17-84 Labeling study III labels within meters. P.5.1-40 No parameteFlabels an PAM displays. 1-17-84 Labeling study llc
=
I 4 C-26
415-1/0 Labels and Location Aids
" TITLE N REIAARKS nounsmse DATE DISPOSITION CATEGORY P.L1-1 Controls / Displays that are not 2-8-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. I!C appropriately or clearly labeled. study P.01-2 Periodic cleaning of labels. 2-8-84 Turn over to ops. Cat. III ~ P.01-3 Labels that do not describe the ,,rimary 2-8-84 Relabel PORVs on PAM Cat. IIC functiers panel - Labeling study P.L1-4 Labels that do not egrees enactly what 2-8-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. IIC actaan is intended. study P.01-5 Words that de not have a commortly 2-8-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat.111 accepted meenmg. study
, P.LI.4 Symboes that are not a commonly 2-8-84 No t..ces.-. symbols on Delete accepted configuration. panel P.01-7 Too many terryorary labels on the control 1-16-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. III board. study P.01-8 Tagging.eut a control dose not prevent 2-8-84 Not a problem, tag-out Delete actuation of the control procedure prevents operating control P.01-9 Mimec Enos are difficult to distinguish 2-8-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. IIC quickly. study P.L1-10 No haerarchscal labeling scheme. 1-16-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. IIC study P.01-Il Saimordanete labels are not consistently 1-16-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. !!C used to identify siesystems or functional study grow s. C-27
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD
*I' # ' ***I " #3d*
TITLE [ RER$ ARKS CATEGORY pal-12 Labela that are not placed above the 1 16-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. IIA panel elements ti ey describe. study P.01-13 Inconsistent placement of labels. 1-16-84 Delete, combine with Delete pal-12 pal-14 Labels that are located above eye letel 1-16-84 Delete, combine with Delete and are not easily visible. P.6.1-12 P.Al-15 Temporary labels and magnetic labels and 1-16-84 Establish procedure for Cat. IIA information tags chacure the placement of components / labels. tags / temporary labels - Operations study pal-16 Labels abecured by pistol grip handles. 1-16-84 Where practicable move Cat. III labels within labeling study P.01-17 Standard abbreviations and consistent 1 16-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. III wording is not used across all labels. study pal-18 All labels are not dark characters on a 1-16-84 Address label color in Cat.111 light background. CRDR labeling study P.6.1-19 Readability of temporary labels. 1-16-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat.111 study P A l-20 No color coding of mimic lines. 1-16-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. III study P.01-21 Differentialline widths of mimic lines. 1-16-84 Delete Delete . C-28
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD
" * '"" ^'
- TITLE #NN "NN HUMBER , DATE DISPOSITION REMARKS CATEGORY P.6.1-22 Flow directions not indicated for all 1-16-84 Delete - NA for Elect.
mimic lines. Delete Dist. Panel. ESF Panel has arrows P.6.1-23 All mimic origin points and terminal 1 16-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat.111 points are not labeled. study P.6.1-24 No functional labels on some conponents 1-16-84 Address in CRDR labeling on mimic lines / panel Cat. IIC study P.6.1-25 No demarcation used in the control room 1-17-84 Consider demarcation in eucapt on PAM panel Cat. IIC CRDR labeling study P.6.1-26 Nomenclature on labels is not consistent 1-17-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat, llc with label used in procedures. study P.6.1-27 Component labels are net consistent. 1-17-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat.111 study P.6.1-28 Functional labels are not 25% larger than 1-17-84 Address in CRDR labeling Cat. Ill w.@-iA labels. study P.6.1-29 Character height is too small for most 1-17-84 Address in CIkDR labeling labels. Cat. !!! study P.6.1-30 Stroke width-to-character height ratio is 1-17 Address in CRDR labeling not between 1:6 and 1:8. Cat.111 study P.6.1-31 Space between characters is not one 1 17-84 Address in CRDR labeling stroke width. Cat.111 study 4 C-29
I ! d' l A
- 0 "
/
1 I' . 5 C Y 1 " R 4 I O d G
" E
" T 8 A 38 C
1 1 t a C S K R A M E R D R g O i n C l e E b
. R N
) l a
S WM EI T R U IS D T VO R 0
. A E P C 3 T
S RS n - I D i s C T s R e ry O dd P du E Ats R D E H W EE IT 4 VA 8 _ ED 7 R 1 1 r f o d i e f i t n e _ d i E t o L n - T - I T e r _ a - _ s n s. ioe 4
, ithc st oi pw l s o
rss tnp a o y _ Cb _ g . Ds 2 3 Em - Haa 1 Psn 6 a P 4 l
. I4 , 4 I l:
e 415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD TITLE A R , T REtsARKS CATEGORY P.7.1-1 Titles on displays do not give a clear 2-8-84 Review labeling and III irufication of display contents. change titles where needed - Computer study P.7.1-2 Cherecters are a Sw7 dot-metrix instead 2-8-84 Not a problem, characters III of a 7x9. are legible P.7.1-3 Error messeges do not contain corrective 2-8-84 Turn over to computer III action statements. grom for consideration in system upgrades - Cormuter study P.7.1-4 Colors used on CRTs not consistent with 2 8-84 Turn over to computer III other CR color coding. group for consideration in system upgrades - ' Cormuter study P.7.1-5 Colors used on CRT displays have 2-8-84 Incorporate CRT colors III multiple meanings. into color coding conventions - Computer study P.7J.6 Computer procedures are outdeted. 2-8-84 Lhdate procedures III P.7.1-7 Character separation on CRTs. 2-8-84 Turn over to computer III group for consideration in system wgrades - Computer study C-31
415-1/0
# $ Y '*
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD N
, ma REISAMS CATEGORY P.7.1-8 Symbols on CRTs do not metend a visual 2-8-84 Turn over to computer III aryle of 20 minutes of arc. grote for consideration in system ipgrades -
Computer study P.7.1-9 More then two blir* rates on CRTs. 2-8-84 Turn over to computer HI group for consideration in system wgrades - Computer study P.7.1 10 Blir* rates are not 2 to 3 blinks per 2-8-84 Turn ove- to computer IU , second. grote for consideration in system upgrades - Computer study , P.7.1-11 Flicker on CRTs. 2-8-64 Tt:rn o.er to computer , HI grote for consideration in system ipgrades - Computer Rudy P.7.l.12 CRT dieptws not cross-Inde=ed. 6-23-84 Computer study HI P.7.1-13 Data grotes not labels. 6-20-84 Computar study III P.7.1-14 Labels on displays are not highlighted. 6-20-84 Cormuter study III P.7.1-15 Table columns are not separated into 6-23-84 Computer study IH grotes by spaces between grotps of five. P.7.1-16 Parameter labels are not displayed for all 6-20-84 Computer study HI values. C-32
.I e
1 6 E E E E E E l l IIIIi i ll it it it ing i, m if ig 11 g i = .s
- a I
!I !!!!!!
a j i a I 1 i i
- l 1a 1 1 a
1 a 1 v(f j i .I i i jll{ lil . l I ilJ ; 1 4 7 1 e 1 g! ! 3 3 3 3
- 3. i
o . 415-1/0
~ *' '
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD N 5R TI M REMARKS CATEGORY DISP TON 9.2 SFRCS Display Ar mement does not 5-7-84 SFRCS study Cat. IIA support op taskt. . 9,2-2 Related controls not colocated. 5-4-84 Controls study Cat. IIC 9.2-3 Instrument design & arrangement do not 5-4-84 Low error potential Cat. III support op. tasks. comparison / balancing ) task - cover in training
/
- 9.2-4 Related controls & displays not 5-4-84 Operations review under Cat. IIB collocated. display study 9.2-5 Misleading Panet Arrangements (ICS). 5-7-84 Demarcate & label - Cat. IIB Labeling study 9.2-6 Violation of operator expectancy (control 5-7-84 Consider guarding - look Cat. !!A type). at under control study 9.2-7 Insuf ficient display accuracy (AFW) - 5-8-84 Increase PM to improve Cat. !!A reliability. reliability 9.2-8 Inadequate display range (LPI & HPI 5-8-84 Upgrade display as Cat. !!C flow). specified by engineering study 9.2-9 5-7-84 Review under Labeling Cat. IIC Unnecessary) hdr. pressure display conversion (turbine study C-34
415-1/0
~
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD
'NUMS R N REMARKS CATEGORY T ON 9.2 10 Inadequate display precision (secondary 5-7-84 Not a problem - other Cat. !!!
rad recorder), indication available in CR 9.2-11 Insufficient display range (makeup flow). 5-7-84 Engineering study Cat. IIC
'9.2-12 Lack of mode selection indication 5-7-B4 Admin control of mode Cat. IIC (Victoreen Rad Monitor). selection 9.2-13 Inadequate C/D capability (dilution pump 5-4-84 Not a problem - local Cat.111 speed control / display). control available 9.2-14 Block control blocks multiple signals 5-8-84 Not a problem - block Ill (SFAS). signal indications are adequate 9.2-15 Unused witrois & displays. 5-4-84 Remove unused controls Cat. Ill
& displays - review under Controls and Displays studies
, 9.2-16 . Confusing status logic (MU pump oil 5-7-84 Low error consequence - Cat. IIC supply), occurs only 1,f op falls to follow procedure - Displays study 9.2-17 Display does not sipport task require- 5-7-84 Consider alternative Cat. !!C ments (containment rad monitor). scales, procedures, train-ing - Displays study i 4 C-35
415-1/0
~ * '
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD 1 PHED REVIEW REVIEW NUMBER TITLE REMARKS CATEGORY DATE DISPOSITION 9.2-18 Availability / consistency of information- 5-7-84 SFRCS study Cat. IIA (SFRCS). 9.2 19 Poor display scale readabilky (essential 5-7-84 Accuracy not required Cat. IIC Bus volts & amps). > 150 volts 9J-20 Incident isolation groups are not 5-8-84 Review under Displays Cat. IIA 1 consistent (SFAS). study 9,2-21 Inadequate display of system status 5-8-84 Deleted - Misinformation Deleted , (SFAS). 9.2-22 Indicator light coding violates convention 5-4-84 Add label - Labeling Cat. !!C (fire pumps). study 4 9 2 -23 Scale label contrary to convention (% 5-4-84 Change under label study Cat.111 neutron error). I 9.2-24 Displays unreliable due to static electrl- 5-7-84 Low error assessment - Cat. III city (EHC panel). Display study 9.2 " Group-in-limit" lights herd to distinguish 5-7-84 Consider removing Cat. IIC when illuminated. colored lenses to increase j brightness - Display study i 9.2-26 SFAC actuation verification difficult & 5-7-84 Combine with 9.2-20 Delete confusing. , . 9.2-27 Brightness discrimination difficult to 5-7-84 Combine with 9.2-20 Delete i make. , 9.2-28 Misleading FW flow indication. 5-7-84 Remove SU FW, input to !!B ICS - Engineering study 9.2-29 Misleeding valve status indication. 5-8-84 Consolidate 1.7-10 & Delete consider lamp test C-% i
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD
' * * "9h PHED REVIEW REVIEW NURIBER TITLE REMARKS CATEGORY DATE DISPOSITION 9.2 Critical displays not visible from bench- 5-8 84 Additional P/T screens on IIA board (TH& TC). SPOS will resolve 9.2-31 Unexpected system response (CCW&SW). 5-8-84 Refer to engineering - IIC system problem f.2-32 Expected system response not obtained 5-8-84 Engineering study Will result in low-level llc (SFRCS). SFRCS initiation 9.2-33 Lack of mimics (AFW). 5-4-84 Labeling study IIA 9.2-34 ICS logic can be affected by loss of NNI 5-7-84 Not a problem - part of power. Deleted plant design basis 9.2-35 Improper display graduations (letdown 5-7-84 Put in display study '
llc flow). 9 2-36 Display label contrary to convention 5-10-84 Label study IIC (cntmt rad). 9.2-37 Displays not readable to required 5-10-84 Revise procedure to allow accuracy. hC for instrument error. 9.2-38 Unnecessary display conversion require- 5-10-84 Defer to display study to ments - various, IIC apply operating range bands 9.2-39 Controls not available in CR (core flood 5-10-84 Controls study llc tank isolation valves). 9.2-40 Improper display location (ECS sump 5-10-84 Low error assessment - pump status lights) III Display study C-37 I
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD VAV - Walk-Through MD TITLE REVIEW REVIEW NUMBER DATE DISPOSITION REMARKS CATEGORY 9.2-41 Insufficient display range (pressurizer). 5-10-84 Procedure based on RCS 111 press not przr level when going solid 9.2-42 Logic system SG level control inputs & 5-10-84 SFRCS study IIA indications have difforent compensations (ICS, SFRCS) 9.2-43 Control not evallable in CR (startup valve
- SFRCS block) 5-10-84 SFRCS study llA
- 9.2-44 Insufficient scale range (quench tank 5-10-84 Not a problem III level) .
92-45 Display units do not support task 5-10-84 Task performance requirements, Delete verified during VAV 9.2-46 Excessive operator workload 5-10-84 Task performance III (simultaneous tasks) verified during walk-i through of procedures 9.2-47 Unclear mimic re!itionships (decay heat 5-10-84 Handle under pmp/HPI pmp) IIA labeling / mimic study 9.2-48 Delete , Inadequate display design (T av recorder) 5-10-84 Available on SPDS 9.2-49 Inconsistent display of information (SG 5-10-84 Recorder (przer) is level /przr Iv!) III compensated but Indicators are not - label two indicators (przr level SG op. range level) that are temp comp - Labeling study 3 C-38
415-1/0
~ " '
HED flEPORT STATUS RECORD N MS R N T DISPO T70N REMARKS CATEGORY Inadequate information (RCP vibration) 5-10-84 Not a problem - adequate Delete 9.2-50 Lewfication available Missing displays / controls. 4-11-84 Consolidated with Delete 9.2 -51/52 addendum to HED 9.2 86, 9.2-98 f 5-1-84 Low error consequence - IIC 9.2-53 Simultaneous controls not located together. Controls study l Controle not located / arranged to support 5-1-84 SFRCS Study llA l 9.2-54 i emergency task sequence. t I Controls not properly located (by 5-1-84 Low error assessment - III l 9.2-55 ' functional group /MUPS). Controls study 5-1-84 Location is appropriate Delete 9.2-56 Operationally related controls not located for vibration reset together
- vibration monitor reset
- annunciator reset.
Lack of immediately available diesel 5-1-84 Deleted based on review Oelete 9.2-57 generator output information. of l&C documentation Elec distribution mimic not complete. 5-1-84 Labeling study IIC 9.2-58 ESF panel mirnic is misleading & 5-1-84 Labeling study !!C 9.2-59 confusing due to info density. 5-1-84 Ops review revealed com- Delete 9.2-60 Controls not properly grouped by ponents are properly sequence, operation or function located /grotped 9.2-61 Lack of demarcat'lon or highlighting of Labeling study IIC incident level actuation,(containment isolation) on panel C5717 C-39
415-1/0 HED REPORT STATUS RECORD V&V - Welk-Through PHED REVIEW REVIEW
. NUMBER TITLE REMARKS CATEGORY DATE DISPOSITION 9.242 Completeness of informtion (przr press). 4-11-84 RCS press adequate Delete indication 9.243 Word selection - clarity. 4-11-84 Delete - follows DONPS Delete convention 9.244 Lack of guarding of critical controls. 5-1-84 Delete Consolidate with HED #4.1-1
~ 9.245 Inedequate info (main turbine). 5-2-84 Display study . IIB 9s2-66 Lack of effective mimic (MUPS). 5-29-84 Leheling study llc 9.247 Inadequate info (house power). 5-2-84 Annunciator study. til 9.248 Inadequate info - SFRCS-steem-to-feed 5-2-84 SFRCS study IIC j #* 9.249 Inadequate info - MUPS 5-2-84 Combine with 1.7-10 Delete MU-l A&B. 91-70 Inedequete info - CCW&SW-flow 5-2-84 Display study IIC indication. 9.2-71 Inedequate info - DG-VAR meter. 5-2-84 Operation not performed Delete from CR 9.2-72 Inadequate info - DG- 5-2-84 Annunciator study IIC
- speed / voltage annunciator
- oil pressure annuncistor.
9.2-73 Inedequate info - 5-2-84 Display study (SFRCS) IIC
- - SU FW volve position.
1 i C-40
.. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ ___ .~ _ _ _ ._. _ _ , __
o 415-1/0
~
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD TITLE RE E REMARKS CATEGORY j gang g E W ON j 9.2-74 Inedequate info - Przr 5-2-84 Display study IIC
-sprey flow.
, 9.2 Inadequate info - SG 5-2-84 SFRCS study IIC
- tube-to shell dT.
i 4 9J-76 , Inadequete info - SUFW 5-2-84 Display study llc
- flow.
9.2-77 Inndequate to - RCS press 5-2-84 Not needed for ops Delete <
- wide range (post transient snelysis).
i' 9.2-78 Inadequate info - 24 hr clock. 5-2-84 Low error assessment - III provide clock , i 9.2-79 . Inedequate info - RCS 5-2-84 Display study IIC < - cooldown rete meter
, 9.2-80 Inedequate info - R x 5-2-84 Display study - consider IIC
- digital incore TC, upgrading existing equip-ment 4
9.2-81 Inadequate info - Turbine 5-2-84 Display stud' IIC
- TBV position t
9.2-82 Inadequate info - AV Velves 5-2-84 Display study llc
- AVV position 9.2-83 Inadequate info - ICS '5-2-84 Annunciator study 11 8 j
- Track mode i - 9.2-84 Inadequate info - Demerator 5-2-84 Display study llB
- Leven control volve position i
a C-41
~ l 415-1/0
~
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD PHED REVIEW REVIEW REMARKS CATEGORY TITLE DATE DISPOSITION NUMBER Inadequate' info - Decay heat 5-2-84 Display study !!C 9.2-85 *
- flow control valve position IIC
~
9.2-86 Inadequate info - FFI/LPI 5-2-84 Display study
- discharge pressure Inadequate info - Quench tank 5-2-84 Display study - info on Delete 9.2-97
- temperature computer Inadequate info - Timers 5-2-84 Provide timers IIC 9.2-88 9.2-89 Inadepate info - ICS/NNI 5-2-84 Annunciator study llc
- Annunciator .
Inadequate info - Contmt spray 5-2-84 Display study IIC 9.2-90
- discharge press 9.2-91 Inadequate info - 5-2-84 Annunciator study IIC
- SFAS & SFRCS (Annunciators)
Inadequate info - SUFW 5-2-84 SFRCS study IIC 9.2-92
- SFRCS block status 9.2-93 Inadequate info - Rx 5-2-84 Available on SPDS Delete
-incore TC trend recorder Inadequate info - 5-2-04 Display study IIC 9.2-94
- Synchrocheck relay status Consider converting to IIC 9.2-95 Inadequate control capability 5-2-84
- MU211 - bypass valve MOV with local control -
Engineering study C-42
, 415-1/0
~ ** I '*
HED REPORT STATUS RECORD MED REVIEW REVIEW NutsBER TITLE REMARKS CATEGORY DATE DISPOSITION 9.2-% Inadnquete control capebility 5-2-84 SFRCS study llc
- Sul W volve SFRCS block 91-97 Inadequate control cepobility 5-2-84 Control study llc
- synchroecope relay test switch
, 9c2-98 Inadequate control cepobility 5-2-84 Not required for ops Delete
* - emerg. DG auto /menuel select switch 9.2 99 Inedequate info 5-29-84 Alternate indications Delete
- code safeties exist 9J-100 Inedepte info 5-29-84 Display available Delete - misinformation
- sump level 9.2 101 Inedequate info 5-29-84 Altern. ate indications Delete
- RCS depressurization exist 9.2-102 Inedequate info 5-29-84 Alternate indications Delete
-core flood tanks '
exist 9.2-103 Inedequete info 5-29-84 Available on SPDS Delete
- containment bid temp 9.2-104 Inedequate info 5-29 84 Controlled by Admin Delete
- containment access Procedure 9.2-105 Inedequate info 5-29-84 Indication available Delete
-Instrument air 9.2-106 Inadequate info 5-29-84 Indication available Delete
- feed pump turbine r
a i C-43 i J
t k 415-1/0 J V&V - Walk-Through HED REPORT STATUS RECORD i-TITLE RE RE W REBAARKS - CATEGORY 'i g pgp I 9.2-107 Inedequate Info 5-29-84 Display study IIC
- emerg, diesel generator 9.2-108 Inadequate info 5-29-84 Alternate Indication Delete
- Rx trip breakers available
- . 9.2-109 Inadequate info 5-29-84 Available on computer Delete
- domineralizer press 9.2-110 Inedequate info 5-z9-84 Alternate indication Delete
. - mein steem relief velves evallable i 9.2-111 Inadequate info 5-29-84 Display study IIC
- CCW pump discharge press .
9.2-112 Inedequate into 5-29-84 RCS pressure available Delete
- prar press 9.2-113 Inedequate info 5-29-84 CCW level available Delete
- CCW surge tank press 9.2-114 Inadequate info 5-29-84 Alternate indication Delete
- SW cooler inlet / outlet temp available 4
T.2-115 Inedequate info ~ 5-29-84 Local control no Deiste , - hydrogen recombiners instrumentation required i in CR 4 i e I .l . C-44 4 l
415-1/0 Verification of Task Performance HED REPORT STATUS RECORD (Operator Interviews) PHED REVIEW REVIEW Nggg5ER TITLE REMARKS CATEGORY
, DATE OlSPOSITION P.9.8 1 Operational sequences that require 2-7-84 Not a problem, always 2 III operators to leave the primary operating or 3 operators in the CR erees.
I
- P.7.8-2 ,
Operator task were not snelyzed to 2-7-84 DCRDR Task Analysis Delete determine operator information performed requirements.
/
P.T.8-3 Visuel displays in the control room do not 2-7-84 Assessed in V&V See HEDs under V&V provide all information ner Ad to meet task requirements. P.9.8-4 Unnecessary visual displays in the control 2-7-84 Combine with HED 9.2-15 Delete room. , a P.9 8-5 Equipment that is not labeled to indicate 2-8-84 Labeling study III eetuel or demand status. I P.9.8-6 Instruments that should indicate actual 2-8-84 Redundant indication is Delete status, available, not a problem i 1 = i i C-45 9
i 415-1/0 Verification of Task Performenee HED REPORT STATUS RECORD (operator Interviews) PHED REWEW REWEW BMNAGER TITLE REAAARKS CATEGORY
, DATE DISPOSITION 4
P.9.8-7 Displays that do not provide the precision 2-8-84 Displays study or occuracy required. IIC. IIA for PAM panel displays P.9.8-8 Montel conversicn needed to use displays. 2-8-84 Displays study IIC P.9_8-9 Displays Indicated by a percentage. 2-8-84 Not a problem, scales
- Delete more meaningful in percentage P.9s8-10 Dispiey seeles that are not adequete in 2-8-84 Assessed under V&V terms of the range they span. Delete - specific l-EDs in Section 9.2 P.9.8-11 Displays which are compared that do not 2-8-84 Display study. IIC have compatible scales.
P.9_8-12 thnocessary multiscele indicator in the 2-8-84 Combine w/9.2-15 Delete control room. P.9.8-13 Ch selectable displays, nonselected 2-8-84 NA - none in CR displays read off scale. Delete P.9.8-14 Controls that are not easy to control the 2-8-84 Combine with 4.1 effected parameter. repeat Delete P.9.8-15 Instruments that are either overly precise 2-8-84 Combine with 5.1 or not precise enough. repeat Delete C-46
. _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - _ _ - _ _ _ _ _ _}}